Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutAgreements_General_08/05/2010 (6) PROJECT MANUAL FOR VILLAGE OF TEQUESTA WATER TREATMENT PLANT 3.6 MGD EXPANSION r APRIL, 2010 ARCADIS US 2081 Vista Parkway West Palm Beach, FL 33411 Ph. 561 - 697 -7000 Fax 561- 697 -7193 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page Number INVITATION TO BID INV -1 only INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS IB -1 thru I13-8 BID PROPOSAL & BID BOND B -1 thru B -5, 1 & 2 CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT 1 thru 6 INSURANCE CERTIFICATE 1 only PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS 1 thru 4 GENERAL CONDITIONS 1 thru 42 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS SGC -1 thru SGC -12 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 — General Requirements Section 01019 General Requirements 01019 -1 thru 01019 -8 Section 01150 Measurement & Payment 01150 -1 thru 01150 -2 Section 01300 Submittals 01300 -1 thru 01300 -5 Section 01400 General Quality Control 01400 -1 thru 01400 -2 Section 01650 Starting of Systems 01650 -1 thru 01650 -3 Section 01720 Record Drawings 01720 -1 thru 01720 -3 i DIVISION 2 — Site Work Section 02220 Excavation and Fill - 02220 -1 thru 02220 -5 Section 02260 Finish Grading 02260 -1 only A Section 02485 Grassing 02485 -1 only Section 02610 Pipe and Fittings 02610 -1 thru 02610 -14 Section 02640 Valves, Gauges and Miscellaneous 02640 -1 thru 02640 -8 Division 3 - Concrete Section 03000 Cast -in -Place Concrete 03000 -1 thru 03000 -7 Section 03100 Concrete Formwork 03100 -1 thru 03100 -3 Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement 03200 -1 thru 03200 -3 Division 5 - Metals Section 05140 Aluminum Fabrications, Walkways and Grating 05140 -1 thru 05140 -3 i Section 05145 Structural Aluminum 05145 -1 thru 05145 -3 Section 05500 Metal Fabrications 05500 -1 thru 05500 -3 Division 6 — Wood and Plastics I Section 06600 i Fabricated Fiberglass and Fiberglass Grating and Handrails 06600 -1 thru 06600 -3 ii Section 06620 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Ductwork 06620 -1 thru 006620 -6 Division 7 — Thermal and Moisture Protection Section 07190 Vapor Barrier 07190 -1 only Section 07900 Joint Seals 07900 -1 thru 07900 -4 Division 9 - Finishes Section 09800 Coatings 09800 -1 thru 09800 -10 Division 10 - Specialties Section 10400 Piping/Valving /Equipment Identification System 10400 -1 thru 10400 -2 Division 11 - Equipment Section 11211 Horizontal Well Pumps 11211 -1 thru 11211 -3 Section 11214 Vertical Turbine R.O. High Pressure Pump 11214 -1 thru 11214 -4 Section 11235 Degasifiers and Scrubbers 11235 -1 thru 11235 -10 Section 11245 Cartridge Filters 11245 -1 thru 11245 -2 Section 11250 Reverse Osmosis System 11250 -1 thru 11250 -8 Section 11301 Chlorination System 11301 -1 thru 11301 -2 iii i Division 13 — Special Conditions Section 13080 Vibration and Alignment 13080 -1 thru 13080 -2 Division 15 — Mechanical Section 15100 Mechanical Equipment — General 15100 -1 thru 15100 -3 Division 16 - Electrical i Section 16000 Electrical 16000 -1 thru 16000 -17 i Section 16040 600VAC Class Switchgear Addition to MD200, Starter & Breaker Additions to MCC200 and New Motor Control Center MCC300 16040 -1 thru 16040 -11 Section 16050 Electric Motors 16050 -1 thru 16050 -4 Section 16110 Lightning Protection Systems 16110 -1 thru 16110 -5 Section 16900 Instrumentation and Control 16900 -1 thru 16900 -7 Section 16920 Programmable Logic Controllers and Operator Interface Terminals 16920 -1 thru 16920 -14 Section 16950 Custom Power and Control Panels 16950 -1 thru 16950 -9 APPENDIX A - PBCHD Permit 6 pages ADDENDUM NO. 1 1 page iv INVITATION TO BID VILLAGE OF TEQUESTA WATER TREATMENT PLANT 3.6 MGD EXPANSION Sealed bids will be received by the undersigned at Village of Tequesta, Public Works Facility, 136 Bridge Road, Tequesta, FL 33469 until 2:00 p.m. on June 15, 2010, at which time and place they will be publicly opened and read aloud. Receipt of a bid in any other Village office does not satisfy this requirement. The work for which this bid is to be submitted includes the construction of the third reverse osmosis train (1.2 MGD) in the existing 3.6 MGD (ultimate) R.O. Plant, equipping one of the new Floridan Aquifer wells, the addition or modification of various chemical feed systems, the addition of one degasifier and one two -stage scrubber system. All work performed shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents pertaining thereto, which may be examined at the office of Arcadis G & M, Inc., 2801 Vista Parkway, West Palm Beach, Florida 33411. One copy of the Contract Documents, including blank bid forms, may be obtained at the office of Arcadis G & M, Inc., upon payment of $250.00, which amount will not be refunded. A mandatory pre -bid conference will be held at the project site on June 2, 2010 at 9:30 AM. All prospective bidders are required to attend. A certified or cashier's check on a national or state bank or a bid bond in a sum not less than five percent (5 %) of the amount of the base lump sum bid amount, made payable to the Village of Tequesta, Florida, shall accompany each bid as a guarantee that the bidder will not withdraw from the competition after the opening of bids. In the event that the contract is awarded to the bidder, he will enter into the contract and furnish and pay for the required performance and payment bonds. Failure to do so may result in the Owner retaining the bid deposit for liquidated damages. Bids shall be prepared, addressed and submitted in compliance with detailed instructions as set forth in the Instructions to Bidders. The performance and payment bonds in the full amount of the Contract price shall be written by a surety company, acceptable to the Owner, licensed to do business in the State of Florida listed in the Department of Treasury Federal Register. All bonds (bid, performance, payment) shall be countersigned by a Florida resident agent and otherwise satisfy the requirements of Paragraph 5.01 of the General Conditions. Surety shall have a rating of "A +" or "A" by Best's Rating Guide The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids with or without cause, to waive technical errors and informalities, or to accept the bid which in his judgment best serves the Owner. Owner: Village of Tequesta Published On: May 2, 2010 INV -1 WF109000 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1.01 SEALED BIDS: Sealed bid will be received at the time and place designated and then publicly opened and read aloud for furnishing all transportation, labor, materials, tools, supplies, plant equipment and machinery necessary, and performing all operations required for the completion of the Work specified and as shown on the drawings. The bid date and time shall be scrupulously observed. Under no circumstances shall bids received after the date and time specified be considered. Such bids will be returned to the bidder unopened. 1.02 DELIVERY OF PROPOSALS: All proposals, whether mailed or delivered in person, shall be submitted in sealed envelopes bearing on the outside the words 'BID ENCLOSED" and, the name of the bidder and his address and clearly marked: "Bid for the Village of Tequesta Water Treatment Plant 3.6 MGD Expansion" and addressed to: Village of Tequesta Public Works Facility 136 Bridge Road Tequesta, FL 33469 1.03 BID FORMS: Submit bid in triplicate on the forms, or an exact copy of the forms, furnished herewith. The blank spaces shall be filled in correctly for each item and every item for which a bid is tendered. State the price, typewritten or written in black ink and insert numerals for which he proposes to do each item of the Work; in case of conflict, words will take precedence. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. Failure to complete all indicated blanks in the designated manner may result in the bid being declared non - responsive. Qualifications for bidders deemed non - responsive will be rejected without further analysis. Declaration of the non - responsiveness of a bidder shall be at the sole discretion of the Owner. 1.04 SIGNATURE ON BID: Sign bid correctly. If the bid is made by an individual, his name and post office address shall be shown. If made by a firm or partnership, the name and post office address of each member of the firm or partnership shall be shown. If made by a corporation, the person signing the bid shall show the name of the state under the laws of which the corporation was chartered, also the names and business addresses of its President, Secretary, and Treasurer. The proposal shall bear the seal of the corporation attested by the Secretary. Anyone signing the bid as agent shall file with the bid, legal evidence of his authority to do so. Signing and submitting a bid for this work will constitute an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that Bidder has complied with every requirement of these Documents, that without exception the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contact Documents and that such means, methods, techniques, sequences, procedures of construction and all other information as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. 1.05 MANDATORY PRE -BID CONFERENCE: A mandatory pre -bid conference will be held at the project site, 901 Old Dixie Highway, Tequesta, FL 33469 on June 2, 2010 at 9:30 AM. Prospective bidders and their subcontractors are invited to attend. Bids will not be accepted from Contractors who are not in attendance or represented at the pre -bid conference. 1.06 FAMILIARITY WITH LAWS: The bidder is assumed to be familiar with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations that may in any manner affect the Work. The failure to be familiar with applicable laws will in no way relieve him from responsibility. IB -1 WF109000 1.07 EXAMINATION OF SITE AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: The bidder is required, before submitting their proposal, to visit the site of the proposed Work and familiarize themselves with the nature and extent of the Work and any local conditions including, but not limited to, surface and sub - surface conditions, that may in any manner affect the cost, progress or performance of the Work to be done, including the equipment, materials and labor required. Upon receipt by the Engineer of request in advance, Owner will provide each bidder access to the site to conduct such explorations and tests as each bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes, clean up, and otherwise restore the site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations. The Bidder is required to examine carefully the Contract Documents and form of performance and payment bonds and to be informed thoroughly regarding any and all conditions and requirements that may in any manner affect the Work to be performed under this contract. Failure on the part of the bidder to fully understand the existing site conditions, or contract documents, shall not relieve him of the obligations and responsibilities of the Agreement, and will not be cause for additional compensation or extension of time. 1.08 CONFIDENTIAL FINANCIAL STATEMENT: If requested by the Owner, a bidder under consideration for award shall furnish a confidential certified financial statement, current within the past year, which must be a complete report of the financial resources and liabilities, equipment available for this project, past performance record, personnel and organization experience. At the Owner's discretion a different time period for the confidential financial statement may be considered. 1.09 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDER: The contract will be awarded only to a responsible contractor qualified by experience to do the Work specified. The bidder shall submit, prior to award of contract, satisfactory evidence of his experience in like Work and that he is fully prepared with the necessary organization, capital, equipment and machinery to complete the Work to the satisfaction of the Owner within the time limit stated. In addition to the above, the Contractor shall satisfy the following criteria at the time the Bid is submitted. 1. Have been in the General Contracting business under the present name of the organization for a minimum of the previous ten (10) years. 2. Be properly licensed to perform work as a General Contractor in the State of Florida, Palm Beach County, and the Village of Tequesta. 3. Have been awarded and performed as a General Contractor on a minimum of five (5) similar projects during the past ten (10) years. For purposes of this discussion, a "similar" project shall be considered to include installation or construction of water or wastewater treatment equipment and mechanical piping systems. "Similar" projects shall have a minimum value of $1,000,000. 4. During the lifetime of the organization, as presently named, the Contractor shall not have defaulted to a bonding company for the completion of all or any projects referenced under item 3, above. 5. The electrical subcontractor shall have direct experience with municipal or industrial water or wastewater treatment facilities, including, but not limited to, at least ten (10) separate projects of minimum electrical value of $500,000 each within the past ten (10) years. Each of the projects shall have been completed, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, effectively, properly and completely. The electrical subcontractor shall be properly licensed and have been in the business of providing electrical contracting services to water or wastewater treatment 1B -2 WF109000 facilities under its current name, or that of a predecessor organization, for at least the past five (5) years. Confirmatory information shall be submitted and accepted prior to award of the project. 6. The instrumentation subcontractor shall have direct experience with municipal or industrial water or wastewater treatment facilities, including, but not limited to, at least five (5) separate projects of minimum instrumentation value of $150,000 each within the past 10 years. Each of the projects shall have been completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer effectively, properly and completely. At least three (3) of the named projects shall incorporate system integration and software development that includes Ethernet networks and also automatic report generation with interactive operator screens. The instrumentation subcontractor shall be properly licensed and been in the business of providing instrumentation contracting services to water and wastewater treatment facilities under its current name, or that of a predecessor organization, for at least the past five (5) years. The instrumentation subcontractor's main office and primary fabrication shop shall be located in the State of Florida. Confirmatory information shall be submitted and accepted prior to award of the project. 7. For purposes of determining satisfaction of the General Contractor or electrical and /or instrumentation subcontractor experience requirement, the specified "separate" or "similar' projects shall have been effectively and completely performed by the subcontractor under the present name of the organization, or the name of a wholly owned predecessor organization. The intent is that the experience be accredited to the incorporated entity. Experience of current employees of the organization will also be accorded weight but may not be substituted or used in lieu of corporate experience for satisfaction of the experience requirement(s). 8. If the Contractor elects to use the services of a subcontractor specializing in the provision and installation of reverse osmosis systems, the qualifications of this subcontractor shall be submitted prior to award for consideration. If used, the location, background, personnel, equipment and experience in like work shall be considered. Failure to satisfy any of the above criteria shall be grounds for rejection of the bid, at the Owner's discretion. At the Owner's sole discretion, portions, or all, of the above criteria may be waived. However, bidders are advised that it is the general intent of the Owner to adhere to the stipulated criteria. The Owner will consider all known qualifications of the Contractor and subcontractors, particularly for electrical and instrumentation systems and reverse osmosis systems, if any, in awarding the bid. At their discretion, the Owner may elect to consider the percentage of work the Bidder proposes to perform with personnel in their direct employ as opposed to subcontractor. More weight and value will be generally given to Contractor performing work with their own personnel. Bidders are advised that the Owner reserves the sole right to award the project to the bidder which, in the Owner's sole opinion, best serves the interest of the Owner. By submitting a bid, the Contractor and Owner acknowledge that this evaluation process is to some degree subjective. The Contractor further acknowledges that the Owner may apply substantial weight to qualifications and the anticipated ability to perform in a timely fashion in the selection process. 1.10 SUBCONTRACTORS: For the Owner to be assured that only competent and qualified subcontractors will be employed on this project, each Bidder shall submit in the bid (or show on the bid form) a list of the subcontractors performing work on this project. This subcontractors list shall include each firm's name, address, telephone number, contact person and work to be I13-3 WF109000 performed. Subcontractors shall be properly registered or licensed with the State of Florida, Palm Beach County and the Village of Tequesta. Subcontractors shall, in the Owner's opinion, be qualified both technically and financially to perform the work. The Owner reserves the right to reject any subcontractor who is deemed by the Owner to be unacceptable technically or financially, or has previously performed work which the Owner believes to be unsatisfactory. No change may be made to this list of subcontractors by the Contractor, before or after contract award, without the express written consent of the Owner. If, prior to award, the Owner rejects any subcontractor, the Contractor shall be afforded the opportunity to submit qualifications for an alternate subcontractor with no attendant increase in the base lump sum bid amount, adjustment of contract time or alteration of the bid documents. Such qualifications will be due within ten (10) days of receipt of notification of subcontractor rejection. Failure to submit an acceptable alternate subcontractor may result in rejection of the bid. In this event, the bid bond shall be returned to Contractor without claim by the Owner and with forfeiture of all claim rights by the Contractor. 1.11 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER: The submittal of more than one bid from an individual, firm, partnership, corporation or association under the same or different names will not be considered and will be cause for rejection of all bids submitted by a bidder. 1.12 AWARD OF CONTRACT: The award of the contract, if it is awarded, will be to the lowest and most responsible bidder whose qualifications indicate the award will be to the best interest of the Owner and whose bid shall comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Also, the Owner reserves the right to reject the Bid of any bidder if the Owner believes that it would not be in the best interest of the Owner to make and award to the bidder. The determination of lowest responsible bidder will be based on the base lump sum bid amount inclusive, or exclusive, of additive or deductive items, if any, as the Owner chooses. In evaluating bids, the Owner will consider the qualifications of the bidders, whether or not the bids comply with the prescribed requirements, and other data, as may be requested in the bid or prior to the Notice of Award. Time is of the essence for this project and the perceived ability of the bidder to complete the project within the prescribed time frame will be accorded weight by the Owner in the determination of the best bid. The Owner may consider the qualifications and experience of subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed for those portions of the Work. The Owner also may consider operating costs, maintenance requirements, performance data, and guarantees of major items of materials and equipment proposed for incorporation in the Work. The Owner may conduct such investigations as the Owner deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any bid and to establish responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of bidders, proposed subcontractors, suppliers, and other persons and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents to the Owner's satisfaction. In no case will the award be made until all necessary investigations have been made into the responsibility of the low bidders and subcontractors and the Owner is satisfied that the bidders and subcontractors are qualified to do the Work and have the necessary organization, capital, experience and equipment to carry out the provisions of the contract to the satisfaction of the Owner within the time specified. The Owner reserves the right, at the Owner's discretion, to reject any or all bids with or without cause, to waive technical errors and informalities, to negotiate contract terms with the successful bidder, to disregard all non - conforming, non - responsive, unbalanced or conditional bids and to accept the bid which in his judgment best serves the Owner. 1.13 RETURN OF BID GUARANTY: As soon as the bids have been compared, the Owner may, at his discretion, return the guaranty deposit accompanying such bids as in his judgment would not likely be considered in making the award. All other bid guaranties will be held until the 1B -4 WF109000 contract and bonds have been executed, after which they will be returned to the respective bidders whose bids they accompany. 1.14 FAILURE TO EXECUTE THE CONTRACT: Failure on the part of the successful bidder to execute the contract as required will be just cause for the amount of guaranty deposited with the bid, either in the form of a certified or cashier's check or a bid bond, to be retained or be paid upon demand by the Owner, not as a forfeiture, but rather will be for liquidated damages, it being agreed to by each bidder in advance that the Owner will sustain certain damages by reason of the failure of the bidder to sign the contract and that such damages equal the amount of the bid security, or exceed the same, and in no event shall the bidder thereafter be permitted to contest to the contrary and does waive such right upon submitting a bid. 1.15 INTERPRETATIONS AND CLARIFICATIONS OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: All questions about the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents shall be submitted to Engineer in writing. Replies will be issued by Addenda if the reply alters the documents to all parties recorded by the Engineer as having received the Bidding Documents. Questions received less than ten days prior to the date for opening of Bids will not be answered. Only questions answered by formal written Addenda will be binding. Receipt of all addenda must be acknowledged in the space provided on the bid form. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect. 1.16 TIME OF AWARD AND AGREEMENT EXECUTION: The Owner reserves the right to hold all proposals and bid guaranties for a period not to exceed ninety (90) days after the date of bid opening stated in the Invitation to Bid. If project is to be awarded, the Owner will issue a Notice of Award within 90 days of the bid date, unless said time is extended at the request of the Owner and with the concurrence of the bidder. The Owner shall, in a timely manner subsequent to the issuance of the Notice of Award prepare and deliver to the bidder a suitable number of unsigned Agreements and other Contract Documents. Within 15 days thereafter, the Contractor shall execute and deliver all provided copies of the Agreement and Contract Documents to Owner or Engineer with the required Bonds and other relevant items. 1.17 BID MODIFICATIONS AND WITHDRAWAL: Modifications or bid withdrawal requests will be received from bidders prior to opening of first bid. Modifications or bid withdrawal requests may be telegraphic or in other written or printed form, but shall be sealed and dated with time stamp before delivery to the Owner. If, within twenty-four hours after bids are opened, any bidder files a duly signed, written notice with Owner and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable satisfaction of Owner that there was a material and substantial mistake in the preparation of its bid, that bidder may withdraw its bid and the bid security will be returned. Thereafter, that bidder will be disqualified from further bidding on the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents. 1.18 MANUFACTURERS: The Contractor shall use only the named manufacturers, except as noted in the General Requirements, Section 01019. 1.19 CONTRACT SECURITY: Sections 5.01 and 5.02 of the General Conditions set forth the Owner's requirements with regard to performance and payment bonds. Properly executed performance and payment bonds shall be delivered to the Owner with the executed agreement. All performance and payment bonds for this project shall be in an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Price. The bonds must be executed on the forms provided in these documents and be countersigned by a Florida resident agent. Bonds must accompany the Agreement when delivered to the Owner for execution. 1.20 EXISTING PLANS: Copies of available Owner's records of existing facilities which may impact the proposed construction are available for review at the offices of Arcadis G & M, Inc. I13-5 WF109000 and the Village of Tequesta Water Treatment Facility. No guaranty as to the completeness or accuracy of this information is made, or implied, by the Owner or the Engineer. 1.21 PUBLIC ENTITY CRIMES: A person or affiliate who has been placed on the convicted vendor list following a conviction for a public entity crime may not submit a Bid on a Contract to provide any goods or services to a public entity, may not submit a Bid on a Contract with a public entity for the construction or repair of a public building or public work, may not submit Bids on leases of real property to a public entity, may not be awarded to perform Work as a Contractor, supplier, subcontractor, or consultant under a Contract with any public entity, and may not transact business with any public entity in excess of the threshold amount provided in Section 287.017, for CATEGORY TWO for a period of 36 months from the date of being placed on the convicted vendor list. Vendors doing business with the Village are prohibited from discriminating against any employee, applicant, or client because of race, creed, color, national origin, sex, or age with regard to but not limited to the following: employment practices, rates of pay or other compensation methods, and training selection. Lack of knowledge by the Bidder shall in no way be a cause for relief from responsibility, or constitute a cognizable defense against the legal effect thereof. 1.22 SITE USAGE AND SECURITY: Security at the construction site(s) is given a very high priority by the Owner. The Contractor shall recognize that this project is sensitive in nature as a result of homeland security concerns and the security criteria stipulated herein constitutes a material inducement of the Owner to enter into this contract with the Contractor. It is acknowledged that the project will require construction activities at multiple locations on the project site. However, in recognition of the Owner's security focus and the fact that this is an active and functioning facility, the Contractor shall take reasonable scheduling steps to minimize the degree to which the entire facility is simultaneously impacted by this construction project. The Owner reserves the right to require timing adjustment of certain activities where the impact is judged to have a comparatively minor, or no, effect on efficiency. The Contractor shall restrict all parking, office placement and equipment trailers, stored material storage, lay -down areas, pre- fabrication work areas and other related items strictly to the Contractor staging area shown on the drawings. The existing WTP site and Well R -4 site are fully secured. The integrity of the perimeter fence must be maintained at all times. It is further noted that the Owner has implemented site security measures which restrict and control entrance to and exit from the site. The Contractor shall anticipate and work within the requirements of the Owner's security measures. The Owner reserves the right to require the Contractor to perform a background check on all agents, licensees, invitees, employees, subcontractors, material -men, workers and suppliers entering the site and supply the results to the Owner. Should this occur, the Contractor shall secure appropriate releases and authorizations from the affected parties prior to performing the background checks. All background checks shall be performed prior to allowing the workers on to the project site. The Owner reserves the right but not the obligation to disallow entrance to the work site of any persons or entities as a result of the background check or other relevant information, regardless of the result of such background check or other relevant information. Background checks shall be in such form and fashion as is acceptable to the Owner but at a minimum shall be performed through the Palm Beach County Sheriff's Department and the Florida Department of Law Enforcement or such other entity, firm or individual acceptable to the Owner, in its' sole discretion. The Contractor shall allow for the time to perform the necessary background checks within the project schedule. 113-6 W F109000 Nothing herein shall confer liability upon the Owner as a result of the security steps and provisions set forth in this contract. Each party who has had a background check performed shall be required to carry photo identification and a clearance tag. Such identification and clearance tag shall be required to enter the site and shall be maintained with the person at all times while on site. Regardless of whether the Owner elects to require the Contractor to perform or take other security measures, the Contractor shall provide to the Owner a complete roster of all parties to enter the work site pursuant to this construction and to keep said roster updated and current on at least a monthly basis. 1.23 PERMITS: The Contractor shall be responsible for securing building permits and licenses from applicable entities, including the Village of Tequesta for this project. The Owner shall make no separate payment to the Contractor for expenses associated with securing the required licenses, permits or related approvals. The Contractor shall notify the Owner of any fees due to the Village of Tequesta for such licenses and permits. The Owner shall make direct payment to the appropriate Department of all such fees due to the issuing Department. The Contractor will be responsible for securing all occupational licenses, or other licenses as set forth elsewhere in this specification, as necessary to perform work in Palm Beach County and the Village of Tequesta. The Contractor shall be responsible for complying with the terms and conditions of all permits issued pursuant to the construction of this project. A copy of the Palm Beach County Health Department Permit is contained in Appendix A. This shall include, but not be limited to, completion of all forms, maintenance of all records and data, preparation of summary and /or periodic reports to agencies, etc. 1.24 OSHA COMPLIANCE: By submitting a bid, bidders agree that the products furnished and construction methods used will comply with the Williams- Steger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 and /or the Florida Division of Safety, whichever is applicable. 1.25 MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS: The selected bidder shall provide a copy to the Owner through the Engineer of the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all chemicals used in the execution of their work in compliance with Chapter 442, Florida Statutes. 1.26 TIE BIDS: Tie bids may be awarded to one of the bidders based on the following: 1. Availability or completion period. 2. Service availability or facility. 3. Previous vendor record. 4. Drug -Free Workplace (as evidenced by completion of a suitable confirmatory form supplied by the Village). 5. Closeness to the delivery point. Where tie bids are between bidders one of which is a business whose principal place of business is located in Palm Beach County and the other bidder is not, the recommended award shall be to the local bidder. If all conditions are equal, the award shall be determined by drawing lots or flip of a coin. 1.27 DISPUTES: Any actual or prospective Bidder who disputes the reasonableness, necessity or competitiveness of the terms and conditions of the Invitation to Bid, bid selection or contract award recommendation shall file such protest in form of a petition in compliance with Rule 13A -1.006 Florida Administrative Code. Failure to file a protest within the time prescribed IB -7 WF109000 i in Section 120.53(5), Florida Statutes shall constitute a waiver of proceedings under Chapter 120, Florida Statutes 1.28 AVAILABILITY OF FUNDS: The obligations of the Village to make a Bid award and sign an agreement under the terms of this Invitation to Bid" are contingent upon funds lawfully appropriated for this purpose. Should funds not be appropriated for this purpose, the Village, at its sole discretion, shall have the right to reject all bids. 1.29 FLORIDA TRENCH SAFETY ACT: By submitting a bid, the Contractor acknowledges full compliance with the Florida Trench Safety Act including, but not limited to, the submittal of information related to the cost of compliance. 1.30 BIDDING DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATION CROSS - REFERENCING: Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing bids; neither Owner nor Engineer assumes any responsibility for errors or misrepresentations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. The Contractor is advised that the specification is not fully cross referenced. Any section may have information relevant to each trade or equipment requirement. 1.31 WORK AREAS: The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights -of -way and easements for access thereto and other lands designated for use by Contractor in performing the Work are identified in the Contract Documents or otherwise assumed to be within public rights -of -way or on the work site owned by the Village. The Contractor shall, as directed by the Engineer, minimize the disruptive impact of his activities on the normal day - today operational needs of the Owner. 1.32 DRAWING SCALES: The Contractor is cautioned that scales indicated on the drawings are based on full size (24" X 36 ") plans. Reduce size plans do not have the indicated scales adjusted to reflect the actual plan size. 1.33 ADDENDA: The Owner reserves the right to revise or amend the Contract Documents prior to the bid receipt. Any addenda issued prior to bid receipt shall be binding as if originally written into the Contract Documents. Receipt of all addenda must be acknowledged on the bid form. 1.34 DEDUCTIVE ALTERNATE: The bid provides for the inclusion of a deductive alternate for the use of a membrane manufacturer (Hydranautics) different than the one named for inclusion in the base bid (Koch). A Bidder may elect to show a deduct for the alternate manufacturer, or not. I 1B -8 WF109000 BID VILLAGE OF TEQUESTA WATER TREATMENT PLANT 3.6 MGD EXPANSION Bid of (Name) b (Addre s) to furnish all materials, equipment and labor and to perform all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the Village of Tequesta Water Treatment Plant 3.6 MGD Expansion. To: Village of Tequesta 39`2, Tequesta Drive t Tequesta, FL 33469 Gentlemen: The undersigned bidder has carefully examined the Contract Documents and the site of the proposed Work and is familiar with the nature and extent of the Work and any local conditions that may in any manner affect the Work to be done. The undersigned agrees to do all the Work and furnish all materials called for by the Contract Documents, in the manner prescribed therein and to the standards of quality and performance established by the Engineer for the lump sum listed in the spaces herein provided, for each of the items or combination of items stipulated. The undersigned accepts all of the terms and conditions of the advertisement and /or Invitation to Bid and Instructions to Bidders, including, but not limited to, those dealing with disposition of bid security. The undersigned represents that this bid is genuine and not made in the interest of, or on behalf of, any undisclosed person, firm or corporation; bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other bidder to submit a false or sham bid; bidder has not requested, required or encouraged any person firm or corporation to refrain from bidding; bidder has not sought by collusion to obtain for itself any advantage over other bidder or over Owner. The undersign covenants that it is qualified to do business in the State of Florida and has attached evidence of bidders qualification to do business in the State of Florida, or if not attached, bidder covenants to obtain and deliver such evidence within five days of request by Owner to produce such evidence. B -1 WF109000 BASE LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT The base lump sum bid amount for the Village of Tequesta Water Treatment Plant 3.6 MGD Expansion including all work specified in these documents is: G 1614 AI(il!•tpop - 1"u/ALTy dollars and do cents. ($ DEDUCTIVE ALTERNATE (for use of Hydranautics Membranes) ($ TZ -I� LL) ) . Note, the bidder shall include a $50,000 bidding allowance in the Base Lump Sum Bid Amount. This amount shall be to cover additional work on this project, not otherwise identified by these documents and is subject to separate written approval by". the Engineer. Accompanying this bid is a certified or cashier's check or a bid bond in the amount of $ zltz,�d S"Ao (not less than 5% of the bid) made payable to the Village of Tequesta which is to be forfeited as liquidated damages if, in the event this bid is accepted, the undersigned fails to execute the agreement and furnish and pay for satisfactory performance and payment bonds under the conditions and within the time specified in the bid; otherwise said certified or cashier's check or bid bond is to be returned to the undersigned. Additional requirements for the bid bond are set forth in the Invitation to Bid and Instructions to Bidders. The undersigned agrees within fifteen (15) days from the date of acceptance of this bid, to execute the agreement and furnish and pay for satisfactory performance and payment bonds, in. the amount of 100% of the Contract price, guaranteeing the faithful performance of the work and payment of bills. Said bonds shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 255.05, Florida Statutes and satisfy all criteria set forth in this document. The undersigned also agrees to substantially complete the entire project the work within two hundred forty (240) days after the date when the Contract Time commences to run and to be completed and ready for final payment within three hundred (300) days after the Contract Time commences to run. The undersigned further agrees to reimburse the Owner, for each calendar day elapsing i between the date herein specked as the date of substantial completion and the actual date of such substantial completion of the contract Work in the amount of $750 per calendar day as liquidated damages. The undersigned further agrees to reimburse the Owner, for each calendar day elapsing between the date herein specified as the date of final completion and the actual date of such final completion of the Contract Work in the amount of $500 per calendar day as liquidated damages. The Contractor acknowledges existence of, and guarantees full compliance with the Florida Trench Safety Act. The Bidder acknowledges the receipt of Addenda No's. NE� B -2 WF109000 The following is, a__complete list of the subcontractors to -be used if the undersigned . is awarded the Contract for this project. Failure to list all subcontractors will give the Owner the right to require a change in subcontractors without any change in the contract time or cost, or rejection of the bid. Subcontractors performing more than $50,000 in work (equipment and labor) on the project must be named below. List subcontractors other than for the indicated disciplines to the extent necessary to satisfy this criteria. Subcontractors named below may not be changed by the Contractor. The Owner may request a change under the terms of applicable sections of the General Conditions. If a work type category listed below is to be performed by the General Contractor, write the words Not by Subcontractor" on the applicable line. Type of Work Name, address, and telephone number of Subcontractor Loveland Electric Electrical 1368 N Killian Dr Lake Park 33403, 561 - 882 -0401 Instrumentation ban. - 7 eW Coatings Alv4tlVf�y �(,� '333 �4 ° 2-YIP -4b R.O. OEM Southland Painting auerae 33311, 954- 748 -2770 Biwater, 136 E. Lemon Ave, MonrcLa, CA 91016,, 6?6-359- 7707 B -3 WF109000 The Contractor shall circle the name of the manufacturer for the following equipment items that will be used and was used in the computation of the Base Lump Sum Bid Amount Circle only one of the named manufacturers for each item. Failure to circle one of the named manufacturers in each category may result in rejection of the entire bid. ITEM MANUFACTURER Membranes K Well Pump Goulds, eerles R.O. High Pressure Pump Afton Cartridge Filters m Aerex Chemical Feed Pumps allace and T" nan Degasifier /Scrubber Duall- pro Scrubber Recirculation Pumps Goulds Peerl Magnatex B -4 WF109000 i This bid is submitted by: Name (print) %WOA?A -5 . Gl.�,eIG.G= who is an Officer of the above firm duly authorized to sign bids and enter into contracts. I certify that this bid is made without prior understanding, agreement, or connection with any corporation, firm, or person submitting a bid for the same materials, supplies, or equipment, and is in all respects fair and without collusion or fraud. I understand collusive bidding is a violation of State and Federal law and can result in fines, prison sentences, and civil damage awards. I agree to abide by all conditions of this bid. Dated this /.S day of , 2010 (month) Contractor: 4y,','t2 Address: J.Z'PX illGc[# -�C 1►.,� By: Title: f �1J�C T' If this bid is rendered by a corporation, the corporate seal attested by the secretary shall be affixed below. Any agent signing this bid shall attach to this form evidence of legal authority. 4A) Esr -bT7 s�cFr•4r�� B -5 WR 09000 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS AIA Document A310 Bid Band KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we Florida Design Contractors, Inc. as Principal, hereinafter called the Principal, and Great American Insurance Company a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Ohio as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto Village of Tequesta as Obligee, hereinafter called the Obligee, in the sum of FIVE PERCENT OF AMOUNT BID-------------------- - - - - -- Dollars ($ ---- 5% ----- ), for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, the said Principal and the said Surety, bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has submitted a bid for WATER TREATMENT PLANT 3.6 MGD EXPANSION NOW, THEREFORE, if the Obligee shall accept the bid of the Principal and the Principal shall enter into a Contract with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of such bid, and give such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding or Contract Documents with good and sufficient surety for the faithful performance of such Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and .material furnished in the prosecution thereof, or in the event of the failure of the Principal to enter such Contract and give such bond or bonds, if the Principal shall pay to the Obligee the difference not to exceed the penalty hereof between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Obligee may in good faith contract with another party to perform the Work covered by said bid, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. Signed and sealed this 11th day of June 2010 ' t (Princi (Seal) ess) (Title T o as H. Clarke, President Great American Insurance Com an (Surety (Seat) (Witness) D. Michael Stevens Attorney -in -Fact AIA DOCUMENT A310 BID BOND • -AIA B • FEBRUARY 1970 ED • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 N.Y. AVE., N.W., WASHINGTON, D. C. 20W6 1 GREAT AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY Administrative Office: 580 WALNUT STREET - CINCINNATI, OHIO 45202 - 513 - 369 -5000 - FAX 513 - 723 -2740 The number of persons authorized by THREE this power of attorney is not more than No. 0 18857 POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That the GREAT AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY, a corporation organized and existing under and by virtue of the laws of the State of Ohio, does hereby nominate, constitute and appoint the person or persons named below, each individually if more than one is named, its true and lawful attorney -in -fact, for it and in its name, place and stead to execute on behalf of the said Company, as surety, any and all bonds, undertakings and contracts of suretyship, or other written obligations in the nature thereof; for all obligees including any and all consents required by the Department of Transportation, State of Florida, incident to the release of retained percentages and /or final estimates; provided that the liability of the said Company on any such bond, undertaking or contract of suretyship executed under this authority shall not exceed the limit stated below. Name Address Limit of Power DON A. LAMBERT, JR. ALL OF ALL D. MICHAEL STEVENS JUPITER, FLORIDA $75,000,000 LYNN C. LAMBERT ( This Power of Attorney revokes all previous powers issued on behalf of the attorney(s) -in -fact named above. IN WITNESS WHEREOF the GREAT AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY has caused these presents to be signed and attested by its appropriate officers and its corporate seal hereunto affixed this 20TH day of APRIL , 2009 Attest GREAT AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY DAVID C. KITCHIN (513- 412 -4602) STATE OF OHIO, COUNTY OF HAMILTON - ss: On this 20TH day of APRIL 2009 before me personally appeared DAVID C. KITCHIN, to me known, being duly sworn, deposes and says that he resides in Cincinnati, Ohio, that he is a Divisional Senior Vice President of the Bond Division of Great American Insurance Company, the Company described in and which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seal of the said Company; that the seal affixed to the said instrument is such corporate seal; that it was so affixed by authority of his office under the By -Laws of said Company, and that he signed his name thereto by like authority. the following resolutions adopted b This Power of Attorney is granted by authority of e g P Y the Board of Directors of Great American Insurance Company by unanimous written consent dated June 9, 2008. RESOLVED: That the Divisional President, the several Divisional Senior Vice Presidents, Divisional Vice Presidents and Divisional Assistant Vice Presidents, or any one of them, be and hereby is authorized, from time to time, to appoint one or more Attorneys -in -Fact to execute on behalf of the Company, as surety, any and all bonds, undertakings and contracts of suretyship, or other written obligations in the nature thereof; to prescribe their respective duties and the respective limits of their authority; and to revoke any such appointment at any time. RESOLVED FURTHER: That the Company seal and the signature of any of the aforesaid officers and any Secretary or Assistant Secretary of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any power of attorney or certificate of either given for the execution of any bond, undertaking, contract of suretyship, or other written obligation in the nature thereof, such signature and seal when so used being hereby adopted by the Company as the original signature of such officer and the original seal of the Company, to be valid and binding upon the Company with the same force and effect as though manually affixed. CERTIFICATION I, STEPHEN C. BERAHA, Assistant Secretary of Great American Insurance Company, do hereby certify that the foregoing Power of Attorney and the Resolutions of the Board of Directors of June 9, 2008 have not been revoked and are now in full force and effect. Signed and sealed this day of 11th June � 2010 I S1 S SM (W/08) AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR ON THE BASIS OF A STIPULATED PRICE THIS AGREEMENT is dated as of the - day of l y y in the ear 2010 b and between the Village of Tequesta (hereinafter called OWNER- and Florida Design Contractors, Inc. (hereinafter - called CONTRACTOR). OWNER and CONTRACTOR, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, agree as follows: Article 1. WORK CONTRACTOR shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as follows: The Village of Tequesta Water Treatment Plant 3.6 MGD Expansion. The Project, for which the Work under the Contract Documents may be the whole or only a part, is generally described as follows: The Village of Tequesta Water Treatment Plant 3.6 MGD Expansion. Article 2. ENGINEER. The Project has been designed by: ARCADIS, Inc. 2801 Vista Parkway West Palm Beach, FL 33411 (561)697 -7000 who is hereinafter called ENGINEER and who is to act as OWNER's representative, assume all duties and responsibilities and have the rights and authority assigned to ENGINEER in the Contract Documents in connection with completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Article 3. CONTRACT TIME. 3.1. The Work will be substantially completed within two hundred forty (240) days from the date when the Contract Time commences to run as provided in paragraph 2.03 of the General Conditions, and completed and ready for final payment in accordance with paragraph 14.07 of the General Conditions within three hundred (300) days from the date when the Contract Time commences to run. 3.2. Liquidated Damages. OWNER and CONTRACTOR recognize that time is of the essence of this Agreement and that OWNER will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in paragraph 3.1 above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 12 of the General Conditions. They also recognize the delays, expense and difficulties involved in proving, in a legal or arbitration proceeding, the actual loss suffered by OWNER if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring such proof, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty) CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER Seven Hundred Fifty Dollars ($750.00) for each day that expires after the time specified in paragraph 3.1 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. After Substantial Completion if CONTRACTOR shall neglect, refuse, or fail to complete the remaining Work within the Contract Time or any proper extension thereof granted by OWNER, CONTRACTOR 1 WF109000 shall pay OWNER Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) for each day that expires after the time specified in paragraph 3.1 for completion and readiness for final payment. The Contractor further agrees to reimburse the Owner, as liquidated damages, for each hour elapsing between the contract times allocated for total or partial plant shutdown and actual shutdown periods the amount of $250 per full hour. Article 4. CONTRACT PRICE. 4.1. OWNER shall pay CONTRACTOR for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents in current funds for the lump sum amount of: two million, three hundred thousand, six hundred fourteen dollars and zero cents ($2,300,614.00). Said price includes the ($50,000) bidding contingency which may be utilized only per the terms set forth in the contract documents. Said price also incorporates acceptance of the Deductive Alternate as set forth on the bid form. Article 5. PAYMENT PROCEDURES. CONTRACTOR shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 14 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by ENGINEER as provided in the General Conditions. 5.1. Progress Payments. OWNER shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Price on the basis of CONTRACTOR's Applications for Payment as recommended by ENGINEER, on or about the 20th day of each month during construction as provided below. All progress payments will be on the basis of the progress of the Work measured by the schedule of values established in paragraph 2.07 of the General Conditions or, in the event there is no schedule of values, as provided in the General Requirements. 5.1.1. Prior to Substantial Completion, progress payments will be made in an amount equal to the percentage indicated below, but, in each case, less the aggregate of payments previously made and less such amounts as ENGINEER shall determine, or OWNER may withhold, in accordance with paragraph 14.02 of the General Conditions. 90% of work completed and 90% of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work (but delivered, suitably stored and accompanied by documentation satisfactory to OWNER as provided in paragraph 14.02 of the General Conditions), 14.02 of the General Conditions, except as modified by paragraph 5.3 of this Agreement. 5.1.2. Upon Substantial Completion, in an amount sufficient to increase total payments to CONTRACTOR to 95% of the Contract Price, less such amounts as ENGINEER shall determine, or OWNER may withhold, in accordance with paragraph 14.02 of the General Conditions. 5.2. Final Payment. Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work in accordance with paragraph 14.07 of the General Conditions, and settlement of all claims, OWNER shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by ENGINEER as provided in said paragraph 14.07. 5.3 Retainage Reduction: In accordance with Florida Statues 255.078, when the construction reaches 50% completion, the Contractor may apply for a reduction in retainage. For purposes of this determination, "completion" shall exclude stored material and general "job costs" such as mobilization, bond and insurance, field office cost, etc. Additionally, for purposes of this determination each major discipline (electrical, instrumentation, structural, mechanical) shall, independently, each achieve 50% project completion in order for the entire project to be considered 2 WF109000 50% complete. Regardless of the foregoing, nothing herein shall require the Owner to reduce retainage to the Contractor if the Owner has determined that the Contractor is in default, or if the Owner or any of its consultants reasonably believes that the retainage and /or future payments to the Contractor will not be enough for the Owner to complete the project or cover its damages as a result of Contractor breach or default or for any other reason, or there is a good faith dispute by the by the Owner against its bonding company. The Owner shall have the right, but not the obligation, to withhold from payment, at a minimum, the Owner's or Engineer's estimated cost of completion for the list of items prepared pursuant to Article14.02 A. of the General Conditions. Article 6. INTEREST (NOT APPLICABLE) Article 7. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS In order to induce OWNER to enter into this Agreement CONTRACTOR makes the following representations: 7.1. CONTRACTOR has familiarized itself with the nature and extent of the Contract Documents, Work, site, locality, and all local conditions and Laws and Regulations that in any manner may affect cost, progress, performance, or furnishing of the Work. 7.2. CONTRACTOR has studied carefully all reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions, if any, which are identified in the Supplementary Conditions as provided in paragraph 4.02 of the General Conditions, and accepts the determination set forth in paragraph SGC -4.02 of the Supplementary Conditions of the extent of the technical data contained in such reports and drawings upon which CONTRACTOR is entitled to rely, if any. 7.3. CONTRACTOR has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for obtaining and carefully studying) all such examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports and studies (in addition to or to supplement those referred to in paragraph 7.2 above) which pertain to the subsurface or physical conditions at or contiguous to the site or otherwise may affect the cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work as CONTRACTOR considers necessary for the performance or furnishing of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including specifically the provisions of paragraph 4.02 of the General Conditions; and no additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, studies or similar information or data are or will be required by CONTRACTOR for such purposes. 7.4. CONTRACTOR has reviewed and checked all information and data shown, indicated or referenced on the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site and assumes responsibility for the accurate location of said Underground Facilities. No additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, studies or similar information or data in respect of said Underground Facilities are or will be required by CONTRACTOR in order to perform and furnish the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including specifically the provisions of paragraph 4.04 of the General Conditions. 7.5. CONTRACTOR has correlated the results of all such observations, examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, and studies with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 7.6. CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors, or discrepancies that he has discovered in the Contract Documents and the written resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to CONTRACTOR. 3 WF109000 Article 8. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The Contract Documents, which comprise the entire agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR concerning the Work, consist of the following: 8.1. Instructions to Bidders (pages IB -1 to I13-8) 8.2. This Agreement (pages 1 to 6, inclusive). 8.3. Performance and Payment Bonds, Cover Sheet and Power of Attorney, consisting of 6 pages. 8.4. Notice of Award. 8.5. General Conditions (pages 1 to 42, inclusive). 8.6. Supplementary Conditions (pages SGC -1 to SGC -12, inclusive). 8.7. Specifications bearing the title Village of Tequesta Water Treatment Plant 3.6 MGD Expansion and consisting of 12 technical divisions, as listed in table of contents thereof. 8.8. Appendix A to this Agreement. _ 8.9.Drawings, consisting of a cover sheet and sheets numbered 1 through 89, inclusive, with each ` sheet bearing the following general title: Village of Tequesta Water Treatment Plant 3.6 MGD Expansion. 8.10. Addendum number 1. 8.11. CONTRACTOR's Bid (pages B -1 to B -5, inclusive, and attached Bid Bond). 8.12. The following, which may be delivered or issued after the Effective Date of the Agreement and are, not attached hereto: All Written Amendments and other documents amending, modifying, or supplementing the Contract Documents pursuant to paragraph 3.04 of the General Conditions. 8.13. The documents listed in paragraphs 8.2 and following, above, are attached to the Agreement (except as expressly noted otherwise above). There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in paragraph 3.04 of the General Conditions. Article 9. MISCELLANEOUS. 9.1. Terms used in this Agreement, which are defined in Article 1 of the General Conditions, will have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions. 9.2. No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract Documents will be binding on another party hereto without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and specifically but without limitation monies that may become due and monies that are due may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility underthe Contract Documents. 4 WF109000 9.3. OWNER and CONTRACTOR each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives in respect of all covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Article 10. INDEMNIFICATION. 10.1 The parties agree that 1 % of the total compensation paid to the Contractor for performance of this Agreement shall represent the specific consideration for the Contractor's indemnification of the Owner and the Engineer as is set forth in Paragraphs 6.20 of the General Conditions. 10.2 It is the specific intent of the parties hereto that the foregoing indemnification complies with Florida Statute 725.06 (Chapter 725). It is further the specific intent and agreement of the parties that all of the Contract documents on this Project are hereby amended to include the foregoing indemnification and the "Specific Consideration" therefore. 10.3 Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Village, its officers and employees, from liabilities, damages, losses and costs, including, but not limited to, reasonable attorney's fees, to the extent caused by the negligence, recklessness, or intentional wrongful misconduct of the Contractor and persons employed or utilized by the Contractor in the performance of this construction contract. 5 WF109000 I IN WITNESS WHEREOF, OWNER and CONTRACTOR have signed this Agreement in triplicate. One counterpart each has been delivered to OWNER, CONTRACTOR, and ENGINEER. All portions of the Contract Documents have been signed or identified by OWNER and CONTRACTOR or by ENGINEER on their behalf. This Agreement will be effective on , 2010. OWNER: CONTRACTO Village of Tequesta Florida Defsg ontr By: y: ow' ATTEST: ATTEST: 1 U -a rk_ °GE• .....rF4jr:, [CORPORATE SEAL] Address for giving notice"' ' SEAL �'��� Address for giving notices: :v� Village Hall INCORPORATED . = 1326 Killian Drive 345 Tequesta Drive Lake Park, FL 33403 Tequesta, FL 33469 <•,'9T ... 4, License No. CGC 040304 ° ° °°6jht�pp a� @'gee Agent for service of process: 13a � So J* '�ii `l;G [J U— LCLke �a=,k FL �� (If Contractor is a corporation, attach evidence of authority to sign.) 6 WF109000 ACC>REP ® DATE (MIAIDWYYYY) k.-- CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE F 8/11/2010 PRODUCER (561)776-900:L FAX: (561) 427 -6730 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION Collinsworth, Alter, Lambert, Inc ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR 23 Eganfuskee Street ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. Suite 102 Jupi — FL 33477 _ INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # _ INSURED INSURER A Insurance CO 19488 Florida Design Contractors, Inc. INSURERS-,North River Insurance Company 1326 South Killian Drive West INSURER c: Travelers Prop &Cas of America ; INSURER D: Lake Pazk FL 33403 I NSURER E: COVERAGES THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. AGGRE LIMI SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR DD' POLICY EFFECTIVE P O LICY EXPIRATION LIMBS WYYYYII LTR I POLICY NUMBER GENERAL LIABILITY - EACH OCCURRENCE $ 11 000,00 0 X COMMERCIAL GINIERAL LIABILITY RE NTED PR EMISES Ea n pg} S _ 50 A _ CLAIMS MADE ®OCCUR L2052274 3/1/2010 3/1/2011 MED EXP (Any one person) $ ^- 5,000 f PERSONA & ADV INJURY _ S 1 0 0 0, 0 0 0 I — -- GENERAL AGGREGATE is 2, 00 0, 0 0 0 GENT AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: PRODUCTS - COMPIOP A 1 , s 2,000,000 POLICY FX PRO- LOC AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT X ANY AUTO (Eaacdden0 $ 1 A ALL OWNED AUTOS CA2052303 3/1/2010 3/1/2011 I BODILY INJURY —+ _ �.. SCHEDULED AUTOS I (Per person) X HIRED AUTOS BODILY INJURY X NON -OWNED AUTOS (Per accident) S PROPERTY DAMAGE $ I JPeraccident) � LIABILITY AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT $ NY AUTO OTHER THAN EA ACC 3 AUTO ONLY: AGG $ EXCESS 1 UMBRELLA LIABILITY i EACH OCCURRENCE $ 4,000 ,000 � X OCCUR CLAIMS MADE ' I I AGGREGATE $ _ 4,000, 000 DEDUCTIBLE 553 093165 - 8 3/1/2010 3/1/2011 $ RETENTION $ 0 1 $ A WORKERS COMPENSATION WC STATIJ OTH- AND EMPLOYERS' L - IABILITY YIN X - — ANYPROPRIETORIPARTNERIEXECUTIVE I E.L. EACH ACCIDENT _ $ 1 OFFICERMEMBER EXCLUDED? - (Mandatory InNH) F1 KC2052272 !3/1/2010 3/1/2011 E.LDISEASE - EA EMPLOY .$ _ 1,000 H yes, describe under — SPECIAL PROVISIONS below E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT I $ 1,000 C OTHER Marine I QT6607132PS26- TIL -1D 3/1/2010 3/1/2011 Rented /Leased Equip. $250,000 Installation Floater $2,000,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS ! VEHICLES I EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT I SPECIAL PROVISIONS RE: WTP 3.6 MGD Expansion Village of Tequeata and Arcadia, Inc. and their employees - 2801 Vista Parkway, Went Palm Beach, FL 33411 are listed as an Additional Insured with respect to General Liability as per written contract. I CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OFTHE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION Village Of Teques to DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 3 0 DAYS WRITTEN 345 Teques to Dr i ve NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO DO SO SHALL Tequesta, FL 33469 IMPOSE NO OBLIGA O� OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE INSURER, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENT q AUTHORIZED. EPR IVE ACORD 25 (2009101) ®1988 -2009 AC CORP RATION. All rights reserved. INS025 (200901) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD I O��I3 ALTS 23 EGANFUSKEE STREET SUITE 102 a t7 JUPITER, FLORIDA 33477 & IN TELEPHONE (561) 776 -9001 y FACSIMILE (561) 427 -6730 Building Relationships www.calinc.com Contract No.: Surety Bond No.: 4075093 Contractor Name: Florida Design Contractors Inc Surety Company: Great American Insurance Company Address: 1326 South Killan Drive Address: 580 Walnut Street Lake Park, FL 33403 Cincinnati, OH 45202 Phone Number: 561 - 845 -1233 Phone Number: 866 - 768 -5959 Owner Name: Village of Tequesta Project Name: Village of Teguesta WTP 3.6 MGD Expansion Address: P.O. Box 3273 Project Location: 901 North Old Dixie Hwy Tequesta, FL 33469 Teguesta, FL 33469 Phone Number: 561 - 768 -0490 Contract Amount: Two Million Three Hundred Thousand Six Hundred Four and 00/100—($2,300,604.00) Description of Work: Water Treatment Plant 3.6 MGD Expansion Legal Description of Project: N/A This bond is given to comply with section 255.05 Florida Statutes and any action instituted by a claimant under this bond for payment must be in accordance with the notice and time limitation provisions in Section 255.05(2), Florida Statutes. Any provision of this bond which conflicts with or purports to grant broader or more expanded coverage in excess of the minimum requirements of the applicable statute shall be deemed deleted herefrom. This bond is a statutory bond, not a common law bond. This is the front page of the performance /payment bond(s) regardless of preprinted numbers on other pages issued in compliance with Florida Statute 255.05. Performance Bond. Any sine reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable. Bond No. 4075093 CONTRACTOR (Name and Address): SURETY (Name and Address of Principal Place Florida Design Contractors, Inc. of Business):Great American Insurance Company 1326 S. Killian Dr. Lake Park, FL 33403 580 Walnut Street OWNER (Nam and Address): Cincinnati, OH 45202 VILLAGE. OF TEQUESTA 345 Tequesta Drive Tequesta, FL 33469 CONTRACT Date: August 5, 2010 Ataotud: $2,300,604.00 Description (Name and Location)!The Village of Tequesta Water Treatment Plant 3.6 MGD Expansion 901 North Old Dixie Hwy. Tequesta, FL 33469 BOND Date (Not earlier than Contract Date): August 11, 2010 Amount: $2,300,604.00 Modifications to this Bond Form: N/A Surety and Contractor, intendin be legally bound hereby,'subject to the terms printed on the reverse side hereof, do each cause this Paymeut Bond to be duly.exe on its behalf by its autho ' d officer, agent, or representative. CONTRAC'T'OR AS P AL SURETY Company. . Company: \, 1 (Corp. Seal) Florida Des'` r Great Amer' �t Inst once Sigaattrre: Signatures �� 1' 1 C (t Name, aa itle• omas H. ,Cla e dent NameandTitte: D, Michael Stevens, Attorney in Fact (Attach Power of Attorney) (Space is provided below for signatures of additional parties, if required.) CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: (Corp. Seal) Company: (Corp. Seal) Signature: Signature: Name and Title: Name and Title: This Bond is a Florida Statutes 255.05 Bond in accordance with the Contract Documents. EJCDC No. 1910-28-A (1996 Edition) Originally prepared through the joint efforts of the Surety Association of America, Engineers Joint Documents Committee, the Associated General Contractors of America, the American Institute of Architects, the American Subcontractors Association, and the Associated Specialty Contractors. 1. Tire CONTRACTOR and the Surety, jointly and severalty, bind themselves, CONTRACTOR have no obligation under this Bond, except to participate ba thsirhei s, executors, administatom successors and assigns to the Owner for the conferences as provided in paragraph 3. 1. performance or the contract, which is incorporatod herein by reference. 3. Ef them is no OWNER Default, the Surety's obligation under this Bond shall 2 tf the CONTRACTOR performs the Contract, the Surety and the arise after. 3.1 The OWNER has notified the CONTRACTOR and the Surety at the arrange a conference with the CONTRACTOR and the Surety to be held not addresses described in paragraph 10 below, that the owNER is oousidering later than fifteen days after receipt of suet, notice to discuss methods of declaring a CONTRACTOR Default and has requested and attempted to performing the Contract if the owner, the CONTRACTOR and the Surety 00610-1 agew, die CONTRACI' ORAAbeallowedit reasonable tiueetoperfaratthe obligated without duplication for Cmiract, but such an agreement sbialt not waive the OWNEit's delft, if any, subsequently to declam a CONTRACTOR Default; and 6.1 The responsibilities of the CONTRACTOR for correction of defective Work and completion of the Contract; 3.2 The owner has declarod a CONTRACTOR Ddliult and formaliytaminated dweDNTItA.CTOR sdghttocompleteftConUvA SuchCONCRACTOR 6.2 Additiaopd loge[, design professional and delay costs resulting foom, the f Delimit shall not be declared earlier than twenty days alter to CONTRACTOR's Defliult, and resulting from the actions or failure to act of CONIRA=RanddwSttntybaverer vedwdeesspmvidedhtpa h the Surety under paragraph 4; and 3.1; aced 6.3 Liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages arespeoitiod In the Contract, 3.3 The owner has agreed to pay the Bahmoo of the Conract Price to; serval damages caused by dolayed performance or aon-peribrom a of the I CONTRACTOR 33.1. The Surety in accordance with the terms of the Coattaot; 7. The Surety shall not be liable to the OWNER or others for obligations of the 3.3.2. Another eontmeW selected pursuent to paragraph 4.3 to perform the CONTRACTOR that we unrelated to the Contract, ad the Datum of dwContractPrice i Conmaot eba llnotbety lu* WorsedoffonacootintofanysuehuntWedobligadons. Nor'tghtof action shall accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than the OWNER or its 4. When the owner has satisfied the conditions of paragraph 3. the Smety sba11 heirs. executors, admirJstrators, or successors. promptly and at the Steraly's a tpertse take one of the followinE actions orders a 4.1 Attar for the CONTRACTOR, with consent of the OWNER, to C on a Sun oy hereby Contract waives thence any oran rc h ge, d other changes of t . ime, to the ge perfom Ctr t abated snbconhacta, purcase and other obligations. and eomplotothe Contract; or 9. Any proceeding, legal or egtdt W under this .Bond may be imtineted in anyoouct Of 4.2 t)ndertaloa to perform and complete GteContract itself, through ha agoeus or oompeteut jerriadictian in the location in which the Work or part oftan Work Is located through independentCOrttratxoS; or andshaUbe iusttttrtetdwithin two years after CONTRAC TORI)t lbarttorwiQuattaroyea s aft the CONTRACTOR ceased worldngortl ift two years, aft the Surdyrethsesor 4.3 Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualUllod contractors acceptable to hils to perform its obligations underthis Bond, whichever occurs rust If theprovisions tho OWNER foracont act& rrperfamance andcomp leticttoftheCostract, of this paragraph are void or prohibited by taw, the minimum period of Imitation arrange lbr a contract to be prepared fhr axaxttion by the OWNER and the available to aunties as a defense in Vxe jt;risdiction of the suit shall be applioabta contractor selected with the OWNER's oouau vnee, to be seared with performance and payment bonds exmtW bya qualiflodsurety equivalent to 10. Notice to the Surety, the OWNER or the CONTRACTOR shall be mailed or the Bolds issued on th6 Contract; and pay to the OWNER the amount of delivered to the addresses shown of the signature paga l ,damages asd inpneagvh6in excess ofdisSataaoeoftheContract PriceinarrredbyftOWNEkrwWtWgfinmdwOONTRACTORDellr*or 11. Whey this Bond has been Auulshed to comply with a stahary or other legal regt:uetneat in the tocatioa where the Contract was to be perfonmgd, eery provision in 4.4 Waive its d&.to perform and complete, armp forcompletkin, or obtain a tins Bond coriflioting, wtW saiQ statutory or toga! roquiremeat sbaU.be deemed delotett new contractor and with reasonable promptness under the circumstances, herefrom and pebvislonst iming to such stalutoryozothei legalxequirlteientsbiJlbt deemed inoorloorated heroin. The intent is, that this Bond shall be consauedu a statgtary t 4.4.1. Aft investigations, detetmiste the amount for whioh it may be liable Bond and not as a common law bond to tiro OWNER and, as soon as practicable after the amount Is determined, tender payment therefor to the OWNBR; or 12. DLFIN['f1ONS 4.4.2. Dwylhaftinwboleorinpmtaadno *theOWN6Retfingrcasoos 12.1 Balance oftho Contract Pd= The totatamount .payabkbytheOWNERWthe thercofor. CONTRACTOR under the Contract attar all proper axUnsimet#a have bean made. inoludirgatlowaaee to do CONTRACTORofimyamounts received or S. If the Surety does not proceed as provided in paragraph 4 with reasonable to be received by the OWNER in settlement of insurance or other Claims for promptness, the Suretyslrall be deemed to be iu deftuit on this Bonin fifteen days abhor dames to which the CONTRACTOR is entitled, reduced by ail valid and receipt of en additional written notion from the OWNER to the Surety demanding that proper payments made to or on behalf of the CONTRACTOR' ender this the Suretypeformitsob ptions under this Brnd , and lheOWNSRsbaitbe entitled to Contract enforce any remedy available to the OWNER If rite Surety proceeds as provided in Paragraph 4.4, and the OWNER refbses the psymant tendered or the Surety has 12.2 Contract The agreement between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR deniedpllaldlity,inwhole or! apart. withotttitrthernoticetlreOWNERAAbeentit led identifieui en& a signature pap, luc luOng all Conhis Document; and doups to enforce any remedy available 1u the OWNER. thereto. 6. After the OWNER has terminated the CONTRACTOR's rigbt to complete the 12.3 CONTRACTOR Debutt: Failuro of the OONTRACTOR. which has nether Contract. emdiftheStmtyedeatstoeotunderpa ragraph4.1,4.2,or43Mmo6thenthe been two" not waived. topeailotmcrotherv6oto comply with the tamsof responsibilities of the Surety to the OWNER stall not be greater than those of the tho Contract CONTRACTOR under die Confiner, and the responsibifnties of the'OWKER to the Surety shat! aotbe Vcmrthan those of rho OWNER under the Contraux. To a limit of 12.4 OWNBR Defkuit: Failure of the OWNER, whkhttas neiduer been remedied die amountof ffib Bond, butsubjecttocommitmestbythoOWNERoftha8alanceof nor waived, to pay the CONTRACTOR as rquired by the Contract or to The Cotehact Price to mitigation of costs and danagn on the Contract, the Surety is perform and complete or comply with the other tram thereof. 1 1 00610 -2 Payment .Bond Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable: Bond No. 4075093 CONTRACTOR (Name and Address): SURM (Name and Address of Principal Place Florida Design Contractors, Inc. of Business): Great American Insurance Company 1326 S. Killian Dr. Lake FL 33403 580 Walnut' Street OWNER (Haute and Address): Cincinnati, OH 45202 Village of Tequesta 345 Tequesta Drive Tequesta, FL 33469 CONTRACT, Date: August 5, 2010 Amount: $2,300,604.00 Description (Name and Location): The Village of Tequesta Water Treatment Plant 3.6 MGD Expansion 901 North Old Dixie Hwy. Tequesta, FL 33469 BOND Date (Not earlier than Contract Date): August 11 , 2 010 Amount, $2,300 604.00 Modifications to thisBolc?Forin' This bond is given to comply with section 255.05 Florida Statutes and any action instituted by a claimant under this bond for payment must be in accordance with the notice and time limitation provisions Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms printed on the reverse side hereof, do each cause this 'payment Bond to be duly execu -tin its behalf by its - authorized officer, agent, or representative, in section 255 .0 5 (2) , CONTRACTOR. ASP StRMTY Florida Statutues. Company: ; ` Co Company. (Corp. Seal) Florida Great American Insu�nce Signa tur Signature Ci Ci --- '0 l and T' homas H. C ke dent NameandTitle: D. Michael Stevens, (Attach Power of Attorney) Attorney in Fact (Space is provided below for signatures of additional parties, if required,) CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: ' (Corp: Seal) Company: {Corp. Seal} Signature: Signature: Name and Title: Name and Title: This Bond is a Florida Statutes 255.05 Bond in accordance with the Contract Documents. EJCDC No. 1910 -28 -B (1996 Edition) Originally prepared through the joint efforts of the Surety Association of America, Engineers Joint Documents Cotnmit#ee, the Associated General Contractors of America, the American Institute of Architects, the American Subcontractors Association, and the Associated Specialty Contractors. 1. The CONTRACfORand the Surety, jointly andseverally, bind themselves, 2. With respect to the Ow=, this obligation shall be aull and void if the their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns to the Owner to CONTRACTOR pay for labor, materials and equipment furtished for use in the performance of 2.1. Promptly makes payment, directly or indirectly, for an sums due the Contract, cvhich is incorporated herein by reference. Claimants, and 2.2. Defends, ind=1,ifics and holds banal ss the OWNER from art claims, demands, bens or suits and tendered defense of such claims, demands, demands, lints or suits by any person or entity who furnished labor, liens orsuits to the CONTRACTORand theSurety, and provided them materials or equipment for use in the performance of the Contract, is no OWNER. Default provided the OWNER has promptlynotified the CONTRACTOR and the Surety (at the addresses described in paragraph 12) of any claims, I With respect to Claimants, this obligation shall be null and void if the 00620 -1 CONTRACTOR pmmptIY malam payments, directly or indirectly, for aU suns due liable der Payment of any costa er exper>sas of any Claimaatrtader this Bond, and shall have under this Bond no oUptions to make payer to, gi notices on 4. The Surety shag have no obligation to ClalmanN under this Bond until• b&Cof, or otherwise, have obligations to Claimants under this Bold 4.1 Claimants who are. empldyed Wor have a direct contract with the 10. The Suretybmby waives noticeofany4baoga, including changes oftime, to CONTRACTOR have given notice to the Surety (at the addresses the Ca*actor to related Subcontracts, purchase orders and other obligations. described in paragraph 12) and amt a copy. or notice thereof; to the OWNER, stating that a claim is being made underthit: Bond end, with 11. NosukoraedonshaUbeeommmeedbyaClaimantuaderWaSondotbadw substantial accuracy, the amount of die rialto. inacotxtefoompetajmisdictionlathe dminwhicktheWorkor Work is boated or after the expiration of ono year from the date(1) on which the 4.2 Caimsnts who do not have direct oomtaot with the CONTACTOR: Claimant gave the notice required by paragraph 4.1 or pares 4.2.3, or (2) on 1. Have AwikbedwrWmnoticetDOwCONTRACrORandrmta equ p o helasttabo hodbya p�tbeCoons or the tt or notioa thereof; to the OWNER, within 90 �or(2)f ! pafonnod b bwortatt fiut Mod materi&U or equipmmt imiaded the law the minimum . i f o provisions va i able to are void as a defense In the claim stating, wit h substantial acc pi Ad b rim oon plicab available to surdtdes as a defense In the teary, ripe anwtmt of the claim and the $utisdictlon of rho sail strati be applicable. namoofthopareytowhom themataidswereflunishedarsaMtfalorfbr wham the labor was done or parlbemod; and 12. Notice to the Surety, the OWNER or the CONTRACTOR stati be mailed or 2. Have tithe received cdvod a rejection in whole or is 1� from the debivendtothowWr +esseashowoouthesiguumpap. AcnralrocelptofnWoeby CONTRACTOR, a re ectiona30 Surety, the OWNER or the CONTRACTOR, however accomplished. shalt be days of furnishing the above sufficient ooanplianee as of the date received at the address shown on the si&&Wm notice any communication fmm the CONTRACTOR by which the page. CONTRACTOR bad indicated tba claim will be paid dicoo or { indireody; and 13. When th Band has been furnished to comply with a stantotyr or other legal mgWraaedintheloAUenwheretheConbactwastobapafornned, anyprovislot 3. Not having beta paid within the above 30 days, have so& a written in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or Ind requirement shag be deemed notice to the Surety and sat a copy. of notice thereof. to the OWNER, dektEd hereftm and provisions conforming to such statutory or odtet legal l I stating din a claim is being made under this Bond and enclosing acopy mqukementshailbodoewdinoorpaatedhaetn. Thelatomis,thatthlsBandstuil df the previous writomn notice funrished to the CONTRACTOR. be construed as a statutory Bond and not as a common law toad. S. If a notice required by paragraph 4 is given by the OWNER to the 14. Upon regnestoftetypmmorentityappenkgtobeapoteWdbenof icinyiof CONTRACTOR or to the Surely, that is sufficiontcomplIamm this Bond, tho CONTRACTOR shag promptly f unlah ecopyof this Bandorshalt 1 6. When the Cteimaat has satisfied the co4dAiona of 4 the S permit a copy to be made. paragrapl trot, shall promptly and at the Sandy's arpmae take the folioadog actions: 15. DEFINITIONS 6.1 Send an answer to the CWmant; with a copyto the OWNL% within* 1511 Claimant: An individual at entity having a direct Gerhart with die days after receipt of ft claim, staff the amounts that are undisputed CONTRACTOR or with a Suboontmetbr of the CONTRACTOR to and the basis for challenging any amounts that are disputed. Annish tabu , tnateriato or ui ment for use In the eq P pafotmanceof the Contract. The intern ofthis Bond shall be'to loclude wtflout oWtadou is 6.2 Pay of wxanga for payment of any undisputed amounts. the trams "labor. materials or equipmear that put of water. gas; pbwer, ` 7. The StuWs total obligation ab aU not exceed the amount of this Bond, and dte hglrt, heat, oil, gasolhre, telephone setviceor trurtaloqui� rat used in fire amount of this Bond shalt be credited for rots made in , c ork o pit and mgureerings a rmquired forpafomoanca+ any paym ents faith by the of the Work of the CONTRACTOR and rho CON'Tltt��gR's I Surety. Subcaatractors, and all other items for which a mecl inic'nrilen at>ty be l asserted im dta juxisdtction wham rho labor. mahsiats a oquipmmt wan 8. Amountsowedby the OWNBRto the CONTRACTORunderthoContractsbau fwnishod. . be used for the perform m of the Cammectand to sari* claims, if array, under any Pmformanca Band. BydtoCONTRACTORfumiabing and dic 15.2 Cbnnact; Ike agotementbetween ,WOWNERmddwCONTkACTOR this Bond, they agree that all fiords earned by the CONTRACTOR in the identified an the signature page, including all Contract Documents and perftxmame • of the Contract are dedicated to satisfy obligations of the changes th auto. CONTBACTORandthaSuretyuaderdris Bond, siMectiotheOWNEWs ptioityto ' use the funds for tho oompketton of the wait 1 S.3 OWNER Dethultt More of the OWN1Sit, which has wolthgr b>o" remedied nor waived, to pay the CONTRACTOR as required by the 9. TheStretysbalt not be gable toftOWNER , Claimants orodtets for obligations Contract or to perform and oompbxe or comply with the odter term oftheCONTRACrORthatarerm relatedtotlwContraat. TheOWNBRshallaotbe thereof. { l 00620 -2 .. ^ GREAT AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY Administra Office: 58O WALNUT STREET ° CINCINNAT OHIO 452O2 ° 513-369-5000 ° FAX 513-723'2740 The number o{ persons authorized by this power of attorney io not more THREE than No. 0 18857 POWER gFATTORNEY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That the GREAT AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY, a corporation organized and existing under and by virtue of the laws nfthe State ofOhio, does hereby nominoue, oonudmtn and appoint the person or persons named below, each individually if more than one is nameg, its true and |a*/u| attorney-in-fact, for itand in its name, place and stead m execute on behalf of the said Company, ao surety, any and all bonds, undertakings and contracts of suretyship other written obligations in the nature thereof; for all obligees including any and all consents required by the Department of Transportation, State of Florida, incident to the release of retained percentages and/or final estimates; provided that the liability u the said Company on any such bond, undertaking or contract of suretyship executed under this authority shall not exceed the limit stated below. Name Address Limit uYPower DON A. LAMBERT, JR. ALL OF ALL D. MICHAEL STEVENS JuP/rsn. FLORIDA $75,000,000. LYNN C. LAMBERT This Power of Attorney revokes all previous powers issued on behalf of the attorney(s)-in-fact named above. IN WITNESS WHEREOF the GREAT AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY has caused these presents to be signed and attested by its appropriate officers and its corporate seal hereunto affixed this 20TH day of APRIL . 2009 Attest GREAT AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY /^.'`',".'/`'`''.'`'.'/''`"'''"' DAVID n.mTCmm(o13-410-4onz) STATE DFOHIO, COUNTY OFHAMILTON 'ou: On this 20TH day of APRIL 2009 . before mopersonally appeared DAVID C.K|TCH|N'mmeknown, being duly sworn deposes and says that he resides in Cincinnati, Ohio, that he is a Divisional Senior Vice President of the Bond Division of Great American Insurance Company, the Company described m and which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seal uf the said Company: that the seal affixed to the said instrument is such corporate seal; that it was so affixed by authority of his office underthe B of said Company, and that hesigned his name thereto by like authority. KAREN L. GROSHEIM 140TARY PUBLIC, STATE OF OHIO MY COMMISSION EXPIRES O2'2 This Power of Attorney is granted by authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Board of Directors of Great American Insurance Company by unanimous written consent dated June 9.000& RESOLVED: That the Divisional President, the several Divisional Senior Vice Presidents, Divisional Vice Presidents and Divisional Assistant Vice Presidents, or any one of them, be and hereby is authorized, from time to time, to appoint one or more Attorneys-in-Fact to execute on behalf of the Company, as surety, any and all bonds, undertakings and contracts of suretyship, or other written obligations in the nature thereof; to prescribe their respective duties and the respective limits of their authority; and to revoke any such appointment at any time. RESOLVED FURTHER: That the Company seal and the signature of any of the aforesaid officers and any Secretary Assistant Secret o f the Company may be #| U by facsimile to any power of attorney certificate of either given for the execution of any bond, undertaking, contract o sure obligation in the nature thereof. such signature and seal when so used being hereby adopted by the Compen as the original signature c* such officer and the original seal of the Company, to be valid and binding upon the Company with the same force and effec ao though manually affixed. CEnnqC4nOm /. STEPHEN C.BERAHA Assistant Secretary of Great American Insurance Company, do hereby certify that the foregoing Power � of Attorney and the Resolutions of the Board of Directors of June 9, 2008 have not been revoked and are now in full force and effec � Signed and sealed this lltb day of August . 2010 � m/sm(10/08) This document has important legal consequences; consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its use or modification. This document should be adapted to the particular circumstances of the contemplated Project and the Controlling Law. STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Prepared by ENGINEERS JOINT CONTRACT DOCUMENTS CONDUTTEE and Issued and Published Jointly By PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS TN PRIVATE PRACTICE a practice division of the NATIONAL SOCIETY OF PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS AMERICAN CONSULTING ENGINEERS COUNCIL AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America Construction Specifications Institute These General Conditions have been prepared for use with the Owner- Contractor Agreements (No. 1910 -8-A -1 or 1910-8 - A-2) (1996 Editions). Their provisions are interrelated and a change in one may necessitate a change in the other. Comments concerning their usage are contained in the EJCDC User's Guide (No. 1910 -50). For guidance in the preparation of Supplementary Conditions, see Guide to the Preparation of Supplementary Conditions (No. 1910 -17) (1996 Edition). EJCDC No. 1910 -8 (1996 Edition) -1- i Copyright ®1996 National Society of Professional Engineers 1420 King Street, Alexandria, VA 22314 American Consulting Engineers Council 1015 15th Street N.W., Washington, DC 20005 American Society of Civil Engineers 345 East 47th Street, New York, NY 10017 -2- TABLE OF CONTENTS P� ARTICLE I - DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY .................................................................................. ..............................6 1.01 Defined Terms ..................................................................................................................... ..............................6 1.02 Terminol ogy ..... ........................................................................................ ............................... ......8 ..................... ARTICLE2 - PRELIjW. NARY MATTERS .................................................................................................... ..............................9 2.01 Delivery of Bonds ................................................................................................................ ..............................9 2.02 Copies of Documents ........................................................................................................... ..............................9 2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed ..................................................... ..............................9 2.04 Starting the Work ................................................................................................................ ..............................9 2.05 Before Starting Construction .............................................................................................. ..............................9 2.06 Preconstruction Conference ............... ................................................................................. .............................10 2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules ........................................................................................... .............................10 ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE ............................................ .............................10 3.01 Intent ................................................................................................................................... ............................... 10 3.02 Reference Standards ............................................................................................................. .............................10 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies ............................................................................. ..............................1 I 3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents ........................................................... .............................11 3 .05 Reuse of Documents ............................................................................................................. .............................11 ARTICLE 4 - AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS..................... .................................................................................................................. ..............................1 t 4 .01 Availability of Lands .................................. ............................... ........................................... .............................11 4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions ................................................................................... .............................12 4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions ...................................................................... .............................12 4.04 Underground Facilities ........................................................................................................ .............................13 4.05 Reference Points ................................................................................................................... .............................14 4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site ....................................................................... .............................14 ARTICLE5 - BONDS AND INSURANCE ..................................................................................................... .............................15 5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds ........................................................................... .............................15 5.02 Licensed Sureties and Insurers ............................................................................................ .............................15 5.03 Certificates of Insurance ...................................................................................................... .............................15 5.04 CONTR4CTOR's Liability Insurance ................................................................................. .............................15 5.05 OWNER's Liability Insurance ........................................................... ................................ 16 5.06 Property Insurance ............................................................................................................... .............................16 5.07 Waiver of Rights ................................................................................................................... .............................17 5.08 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds ................................................................. .............................18 5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Repl ace .................................................... .............................18 5.10 Partial Utilization. Acknowledgment of Property Insurer .................................................. .............................18 ARTICLE 6 - CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES ................................................................................. .............................t8 6.01 Supervision and Superintendence ........................................................................................ .............................18 6.02 Labor; Working Hours ........... : ...... .......................... -.- ........ ............................................................................. 19 6.03 Services. Materials, and Equipment .................................................................................... .............................19 6.04 Progress Schedule ................................................................................................................ .............................19 6.05 Substitutes and "Or- Equals .. ..................................................<,........._,................................ .............................19 6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties ............... -3- 6.08 Permits .................................................................................................................................. ............................. 6.09 Laws and Regulations .......................................................................................................... ............................. 6.10 Taxes ..................................................................................................................................... ............................. 6 .11 Use of Site and Other Areas ................................................................................................. .............................22 6.13 Safety and Protection ........................................................................................................... .............................23 6 .14 .Safety Representatives ........................................................................................................... ............................. 6.15 Hazard Communication Programs ...................................................................................... .............................23 6 .16 Emergencies ......................................................................................................................... ............................. 6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples ..................... » ..................................................................................................... 24 6.18 Continuing the Work ............................................................................................................ ............................. 6.I9 CONMCTOR's General Warranty and Guarantee ......................................................... .............................25 6 .20Indemnification ............. ....................................................»............................................. ............................. ARTICLE7 - OTHER WORK .......................................................................................................................... .............................2 7 .01 Related Work at Site ............................................................................................................. ............................. 7 .02 Coordination ........................................................................................................................ ............................. ARTICLE8 - OWNER'S RESPONSMIL IT IES .................... _ .............................................. .. ..................................................... 27 8.01 Communicadons ter Contractor ........................................................................................... .............................27 8 .02 Replacement of ENGINEER ..............................................................................»............... .............................2 8 .03 Furnish Data ......................................................................................................_............... ............................. 8.04 Pay Prvmpdy When Due ......................................................... ... ............................... ....... .......................... ... 7 8.05 Lands and Easements, Reports and Tests .........................................................»............... .............................27 8 .06 Insurance ............................................................................................................................. ........... »................. 8.07 Change Orders ..................................................................................................................... ............................. 8 .08 Inspections, Tests. and Aproval s ............... ........................ ......... ..................... ......................................... 7 8 .09 Limitations an OWIVBR's Responsibilities .. ............... ....................................................... .............................27 8 .10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition ...... ....................... ......................»..... .............................27 8.11 Evidence of financial Arrangements .................................................................................. .............................2 ARTICLE 9 - ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION ........................................................... .............................27 i 9 .01 OWNER'S Representative .................................................................................................... ............................. 9 .02 Visits to Site .......................................................................................................................... ............................. 9.03 Project Representative ......................................................................................................... ............................. 9.04 Clarifications and Interpretations ....................................................................................... ............................. 9.05 Authorized Variations in Work ........................ 9.06 Rejecting Defective Work ................................................................................................. ............................... 28 9.07 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments ................................................................. .............................28 9.09 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work .............. .............................29 9.10 Limitations on ENGINEERS Authority and Responsibilities ............................................. .............................29 ARTICLE 10 - CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS ................... ............................... .................. ..............................2 9 10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work ....................................................................................... ............................. 1,0.02 Unauthorized ized Chongaa in the Work ................................................................................... .............................2 10.03 Execution of Change Orders .............................................................................................. ............................. 10.04 Notification to Swety ........................................................................................................ ..... »....................... 10.05 Claims and Disputes ....................................................................................................... ............................... ARTICLE I 1 - COST OF THE WORK; CASH ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK ...................... .............................30 11.01 Cost of the Work ................................................................................................................. ............................. 11.02 Cash Allowances ................................................................................................................ ............................. 11 .03 Unit Price Work ................................................................................................................. ............................. -4- ARTICLE 12 - CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES .......................... .............................33 12.01 Change of Contract Price ......... ... ....... ....... ................... ................................................. ... _ .......... ......... ......... 33 12.02 Change of Contract Times ................................................................................................. .............................34 12.03 Delays Beyond CONT'RACTOR's Control ........................................................................ .............................34 12.04 Delays Within CONTRACTOR's Control ......................................................................... .............................34 12.06 Delay Damages ........ .......................................................................................................... .............................34 ARTICLE 13 - TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK.......................................................................................................................................... .............................34 13.01 Notice of Defects ................................................................................................................ .............................34 13.02 Access to Work ................................................................................................................... .............................3 13.03 Tests and Inspections ......................................................................................................... .............................34 13.04 Uncovering Work ............................................................................................................... .............................35 13.05 OWNER h1ay.Stop the Work .............................................................................................. .............................35 13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work ........................................................................ .............................35 13.07 Correction Period .............................................................................................................. .............................36 13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work ........................................................................................... .............................36 13.09 OWNER May Correct Defective Work .............................................................................. .............................36 ARTICLE 14 - PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION ..................................................... .............................37 14.01 Schedule of Values ............................................................................................................. ............................. 14.02 Progress Payments ............................................................................................................. ............................. 14.03 CONTR4CTOR's Warranty of Titl e .................................................................................. .............................38 14.04 Substantial Completion ...................................................................................................... ............................. 14.05 Partial Utilization .............................................................................................................. ............................. 14.06 Final Inspection .................................................................................................................. ............................. 14.07 Final Payment ................................................................................................................... ............................. 14.09 Waiver of Claims ................................................................................................................ ............................. ARTICLE 15 - SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERT INATION ............................................................... ............................. 15.01 OWNER May Suspend Work ............................................................................................ ............................. 15.02 OWNER May Terminate for Cause ................................................................................... ............................. 15.03 OWNER May Terminate For Convenience ...................................................................... .............................Al 15.04 CONTRACTOR May Stop Work or Terminate ................................................................. .............................42 ARTICLE16 - DISPUTE RESOLUTION ........................................................................................................ ............................. 16.01 Methods and Procedures ................................................................................................... ............................. ARTICLE - MISCELLANEOUS ................................................................................................................. ............................. 17.01 Giving Notice ...................................................................................................................... ............................. 17.02 Computation of Times ........................................................................................................ ............................. 17 .03 Cumulative Remedies ......................................................................................................... ............................. 17.04 Survival of Obligations ...................................................................................................... ............................. 17.05 Controlling Law ................................................................................................................. ............................. -5- I GENERAL CONDITIONS ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 10. Claim - -A demand or assertion by OWNER or CONTRACTOR seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, or other relief with respect to the 1.01 Defined Terms terms of the Contract. A demand for money or services by a third party is not a Clairn. A. Wherever used in the Contract Documents and printed with initial or all capital letters, the terms listed below 11. Contract - -The entire and integrated written will have the meanings indicated which are applicable to both agreement between the OWNER and CONTRACTOR the singular and plural thereof concerning the Work. The Contract supersedes prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, whether written 1. Addenda —Written or graphic instruments issued or oral. prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct, or change the Bidding Requirements or the Contract Documents. 12. Contract Documents —The Contract Documents establish the rights and obligations of the parties and include 2. Agreement - -The written instrument which is the Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract evidence of the agreement between OWNER and Documents), CONTRACTOR's Bid (including documenta- CONTRACTOR covering the Work. tion accompanying the Bid and any post Bid documentation submitted prior to the Notice of Award) when attached as an 3. Application for Payment —The form acceptable exhibit to the Agreement, the Notice to Proceed, the Bonds, to ENGINEER which is to be used by CONTRACTOR these General Conditions, the Supplementary Conditions, the during the course of the Work in requesting progress or final' Specifications and the Drawings as the same are more payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting specifically identified in the Agreement, together with all documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. Written Amendments, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, and ENGINEER's written 4. Asbestos —Any material that contains more than interpretations and clarifications issued on or after the one percent asbestos and is friable or is releasing asbestos Effective Date of the Agreement. Approved Shop Drawings fibers into the air above current action levels established by and the reports and drawings of subsurface and physical the United States Occupational Safety and Health conditions are not Contract Documents. Only printed or hard Administration. copies of the items listed in this paragraph are Contract Documents. Files in electronic media format of text, data, 5. Bid - -The offer or proposal of a bidder submitted graphics, and the like that may be fiunished by OWNER to on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the Work to CONTRACTOR are not Contract Documents. be performed. I 13. Contract Price —The moneys payable by OWN - 6. Bidding Documents —The Bidding ER to CONTRACTOR for completion of the Work in Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents (includ- accordance with the Contract Documents as stated in the ing all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids). Agreement (subject to the provisions of paragraph 11.03 in the case of Unit Price Work). 7. Bidding Requirements —The Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, Bid security form, if 14. Contract Times —The number of days or the any, and the Bid form with any supplements. dates stated in the Agreement to: (i) achieve Substantial Completion; and (ii) complete the Work so that it is ready for 8. Bonds— Performance and payment bonds and final payment as evidenced by ENGINEER's written a other instruments of security recommendation of fin al payment. 9. Change Order - -A document recommended by 15. CONTRACTOR —The individual or entity with ENGINEER which is signed by CONTRACTOR and OWN- whom OWNER has entered into the Agreement. ER and authorizes an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract 16. Cost of the Work —See paragraph 11.O1.A for Times, issued on or after the Effective Date of the definition. Agreement. -6- 17. Drawings - -That part of the Contract Documents 28. Notice of Award - -The written notice by OWN - prepared or approved by ENGINEER which graphically ER to the apparent successful bidder stating that upon timely shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work to be compliance by the apparent successful bidder with the performed by CONTRACTOR. Shop Drawings and other conditions precedent listed therein, OWNER will sign and CONTRACTOR submittals are not Drawings as so defined. deliver the Agreement. 18. Effective Date of the Agreement- -The date 29. Notice to Proceed - -A written notice given by indicated in the Agreement on which it becomes effective, but OWNER to CONTRACTOR fixing the date on which the if no such date is indicated, it means the date on which the Contract Times will commence to run and on which Agreement is signed and delivered by the last of the two CONTRACTOR shall start to perform the Work under the parties to sign and deliver. Contract Documents. 19. ENGINEER - -The individual or entity named as 30. OWNER —The individual, entity, public body, or such in the Agreement. authority with whom CONTRACTOR has entered into the Agreement and for whom the Work is to be performed. 20. ENGINEER's Consultant —An individual or entity having a contract with ENGINEER to furnish services 31. Partial Utilization —Use by OWNER of a as ENGINEER's independent professional associate or substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for consultant with respect to the Project and who is identified as which it is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Substantial such in the Supplementary Conditions. Completion of all the Work. 21. Field Order —A written order issued by ENGI- 32. PCBs -- Polychlorinated biphenyls. NEER which requires minor changes in the Work but which does not involve a change in the Contract Price or the 33. Petroleum -- Petroleum, including crude oil or Contract Times. any fraction thereof which is liquid at standard conditions of temperature and pressure (60 degrees Fahrenheit and 14.7 22. General Requirements-- Sections of Division 1 pounds per square inch absolute), such as oil, petroleum, fuel of the Specifications. The General Requirements pertain to oil, oil sludge, oil refuse, gasoline, kerosene, and oil mixed all sections of the Specifications. with other non - Hazardous Waste and crude oils. 23. Hazardous Environmental Condition —The 34. Project - -The total construction of which the presence at the Site of Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum, Hazardous Work to be performed under the Contract Documents may be Waste, or Radioactive Material in such quantities or the whole, or a part as may be indicated elsewhere in the circumstances that may present a substantial danger to Contract Documents. persons or property exposed thereto in connection with the Work. 35. Project Manual —The bound documentary information prepared for bidding and constructing the Work. 24. Hazardous Waste —The term Hazardous Waste A listing of the contents of the Project Manual, which may be shalt have the meaning provided in Section 1004 of the Solid bound in one or more volumes, is contained in the table(s) of Waste Disposal Act (42 USC Section 6903) as amended from contents. time to time. 36. Radioactive Material— Source, special nuclear, 25. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations— or byproduct material as defined by the Atomic Energy Act of Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, 1954 (42 USC Section 2011 et seq.) as amended from time to codes, and orders of any and all governmental bodies, time. agencies, authorities, and courts having jurisdiction. 37. Resident Project Representative —The autho- 26. Liens — Charges, security interests, or rized representative of ENGINEER who may be assigned to encumbrances upon Project funds, real property, or personal the Site or any part thereof property. 38. Samples -- Physical examples of materials, 27. Milestone —A principal event specified in the equipment, or workmanship that are representative of some Contract Documents relating to an intermediate completion portion of the Work and which establish the standards by date or time prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. which such portion of the Work will be judged. -7- 39. Shop Drawings - -All drawings, diagrams, 48. Work - -The entire completed construction or the illustrations, schedules, and other data or information which various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be are specifically prepared or assembled by or for CON- provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes and TRACTOR and submitted by CONTRACTOR to illustrate is the result of performing or providing all labor, services, and some portion of the Work. documentation necessary to produce such construction, and furnishing, installing, and incorporating all materials and 40. Site - - Lands or areas indicated in the Contract equipment into such construction, all as required by the Documents as being furnished by OWNER upon which the Contract Documents. Work is to be performed, including rights -of -way and easements for access thereto, and such other lands furnished 49. Work Change Directive --A written statement to by OWNER which are designated for the use of CONTRACTOR issued on or after the Effective Date of the CONTRACTOR. Agreement and signed by OWNER and recommended by ENGINEER ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the 41. Specifications —That part of the Contract Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen subsurface or Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed materials, equipment, systems, standards, and workmanship or to emergencies. A Work Change Directive will not change as applied to the Work and certain administrative details the Contract Price or the Contract Times . but is evidence that applicable thereto. the parties expect that the change ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subse- 42. Subcontractor —An individual or entity having a quently issued Change Order following negotiations by the direct contract with CONTRACTOR or with any other parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the Contract Times. Site. 50. Written Amendment —A written statement 43. Substantial Completion - -The time at which the modifying the Contract Documents, signed by OWNER and Work (or a specified part thereof) has progressed to the point CONTRACTOR on or after the Effective Date of the where, in the opinion of ENGINEER, the Work (or a Agreement and normally dealing with the nonengineering or specified part thereof) is sufficiently complete, in accordance nontechnical rather than strictly construction - related aspects with the Contract Documents, so that the Work (or a specified of the Contract Documents. part thereof) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended. The terms "substantially complete" and 1.02 Terminology "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof A. Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives 44. Supplementary Conditions —That part of the 1. Whenever in the Contract Documents the terms Contract Documents which amends or supplements these "as allowed," "as approved," or terms of like effect or General Conditions. import are used, or the adjectives "reasonable," "suitable," "acceptable," "proper," "satisfactory," or adjectives of 45. Supplier - -A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, like effect or import are used to describe an action or distributor, materialman, or vendor having a direct contract determination of ENGINEER as to the Work, it is with CONTRACTOR or with any Subcontractor to famish intended that such action or determination will be solely materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by to evaluate, in general, the completed Work for CONTRACTOR or any Subcontractor. compliance with the requirements of and information in the Contract Documents and conformance with the design 46. Underground Facilities —All underground concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents (unless tanks, tunnels, -or other such facilities or attachments, and any there is a specific statement indicating otherwise). The encasements containing such facilities, including those that use of any such term or adjective shall not be effective to convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, assign to ENGINEER any duty or authority to supervise telephone or other communications, cable television, water, or direct the performance of the Work or any duty or wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the or other control systems. provisions of paragraph 9.10 or any other provision of the Contract Documents. 47. Unit Price Work —Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. B. Day -8- 1. The word "day" shall constitute a calendar ARTICLE 2 - PRELIMINARY MATTERS day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. 2.01 Delivery of Bonds C. Defective A. When CONTRACTOR delivers the executed 1. The word "defective," when modifying the Agreements to OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall also deliver word "Work," refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, to OWNER such Bonds as CONTRACTOR may be required faulty, or deficient in that it does not conform to the to furnish. Contract Documents or does not meet the require- ments of any inspection, reference standard, test, or 2.02 Copies of Documents approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to ENGINEER's recom- A. OWNER shall furnish to CONTRACTOR up to ten mendation of final payment (unless responsibility for copies of the Contract Documents. Additional copies will be the protection thereof has been assumed by OWNER furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction. at Substantial Completion in accordance with paragraph 14.04 or 14.05). 2.03 Commencement of Contract Times: Notice to Proceed D. Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide A. The Contract Times will commence to run on the 1. The word "fumish," when used in connec- thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement or, if a tion with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean Notice to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in the Notice to supply and deliver said services, materials, or to Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given at any time equipment to the Site (or some other specified within 30 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement. In location) ready for use or installation and in usable or no event will the Contract Times commence to run later than operable condition, the sixtieth day after the day of Bid opening or the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement, whichever date 2. The word "install," when used in connec- is earlier. tion with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to put into use or place in final position said services, 2.04 Starting the Work materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. A. CONTRACTOR shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Times commence to nut. No 3. The words "perform" or "provide," when Work shall be done at the Site prior to the date on which the used in connection with services, materials, or Contract Times commence to run. equipment, shall mean to furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready 2.05 Before Starting Construction for intended use. A. CONTRACTOR's Review of Contract Documents: 4. When "furnish," "install," "perform," or "pro- Before undertaking each part of the Work, CONTRACTOR vide" is not used in connection with services, materials, or shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents equipment in a context clearly requiring an obligation of and check and verify pertinent figures therein and all CONTRACTOR, "provide" is implied. applicable field measurements. CONTRACTOR shall promptly report- in writing to ENGINEER any conflict, error, E. Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, ambiguity, or discrepancy which CONTRACTOR may words or phrases which have a well -known technical or discover and shall obtain a written interpretation or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the clarification from ENGINEER before proceeding with any Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized Work affected thereby; however, CONTRACTOR shall not meaning. be liable to OWNER or ENGINEER for failure to report any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless CONTRACTOR knew or reasonably should have known thereof. B. Preliminary Schedules: Within ten days after the Effective Date of the Agreement (unless otherwise specified -9- in the General Requirements), CONTRACTOR shall submit 1. The progress schedule will be acceptable to to ENGINEER for its timely review: ENGINEER if it provides an orderly progression of the Work to completion within any specified Mile - 1. a preliminary progress schedule indicating stones and the Contract Times. Such acceptance will the times (numbers of days or dates) for starting and not impose on ENGINEER responsibility for the completing the various stages of the Work, including progress schedule, for sequencing, scheduling, or any Milestones specified in the Contract Documents; progress of the Work nor interfere with or relieve CONTRACTOR from CONTRACTOR's full respon- 2. a preliminary schedule of Shop Drawing sibility therefor. and Sample submittals which will list each required submittal and the times for submitting, reviewing, and 2. CONTRACTOR's schedule of Shop processing such submittal; and Drawing and Sample submittals will be acceptable to ENGINEER if it provides a workable arrangement for 3. a preliminary schedule of values for all of reviewing and processing the required submittals. the Work which includes quantities and prices of items which when added together equal the Contract 3. CONTRACTOR'S schedule of values will Price and subdivides the Work into component parts be acceptable to ENGINEER as to form and substance in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress if it provides a reasonable allocation of the Contract payments during performance of the Work. Such Price to component parts of the Work. prices will include an appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work. ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, C. Evidence oflnsurance: Before any Work at the Site AMENDING, REUSE is started, CONTRACTOR and OWNER shall each deliver to the other, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and 3.01 Intent other evidence of insurance which either of them or any additional insured may reasonably request) which A. The Contract Documents are complementary; what CONTRACTOR and OWNER respectively are required to is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. purchase and maintain in accordance with Article 5. B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe 2.06 Preconstruction Conference a functionally complete Project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any A. Within 20 days after the Contract Times start to run, labor, documentation, services, materials, or equipment that but before any Work at the Site is started, a conference may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or attended by CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER, and others as from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to appropriate will be held to establish a working understanding produce the intended result will be provided whether or not among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedules specifically called for at no additional cost to OWNER- referred to in paragraph 2.053, procedures for handling Shop Drawings and other submittals, processing Applications for C. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Payment, and maintaining required records. Documents shall be issued by ENGINEER as provided in Article 9. 2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules 3.02 Reference Standards A. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Docu- ments, at least ten days before submission of the first A. Standards, Specifications, Codes, Laws, and Application for Payment a conference attended by CON- Regulations TRACTOR, ENGINEER, and others as appropriate will be held to review for acceptability to ENGINEER as provided 1. Reference to standards, specifications, below the schedules submitted in accordance with paragraph manuals, or codes of any technical society, organiza- 2.05.B. CONTRACTOR shall have an additional ten days to tion, or association, or to Laws or Regulations, make corrections and adjustments and to complete and whether such reference be specific or by implication, resubmit the schedules. No progress payment shall be made shall mean the standard, specification, manual, code, to CONTRACTOR until acceptable schedules are submitted or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening to ENGINEER. of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the Agreement if -10- there were no Bids), except as may be otherwise b. the provisions of any Laws or Regulations specifically stated in the Contract Documents. applicable to the performance of the Work (unless interpretation provisions of the of the such an rP p 2. No provision of any such standard, Contract Documents would result in violation of specification, manual or code, or any instruction of a such Law or Regulation). Supplier shall be effective to change the duties or responsibilities of OWNER, CONTRACTOR, or 3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents ENGINEER, or any of their subcontractors, consul- tants, agents, or employees from those set forth in the A. The Contract Documents may be amended to Contract Documents, nor shall any such provision or provide for additions, deletions, and revisions in the Work or instruction be effective to assign to OWNER, to modify the terms and conditions thereof in one or more of ENGINEER, or any of ENGINEER's Consultants, the following ways: (i) a Written Amendment; (ii) a Change agents, or employees any duty or authority to Order; or (iii) a Work Change Directive. supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility B. The requirements of the Contract Documents may inconsistent with the provisions of the Contract be supplemented, and minor variations and deviations in the Documents. Work may be authorized, by one or more of the following ways: (i) a Field Order, (ii) ENGINEER's approval of a Shop 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies Drawing or Sample; or (iii) ENGINEER's written interpreta- tion or clarification. A. Reporting Discrepancies 3.05 Reuse of Documents 1. If, during the performance of the Work, CONTRACTOR discovers any conflict, error, ambi -- A. CONTRACTOR and any Subcontractor or Supplier r entity performing or fitmishin an of or discrepancy ty p g g Y gu►ty, eP Y within the Contract Documents or other individual o or between the Contract Documents and any provision the Work under a direct or indirect contract with OWNER (i) of any Law or Regulation applicable to the perfor- shall not have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in manc:e of the Work or of any standard, specification, any of the Drawings, Specifications, or other documents (or manual or code, or of any instruction of any Supplier, copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of CONTRACTOR shall report it to- ENGINEER in ENGINEER or ENGINEER's Consultant, including e. CONTRACTOR shall not proceed electronic media editions; and (ii) shall not reuse any of such writing at one p g thereof is or copies th other documents, t in an Drawings, Specifications, � P the Work affected thereby (except with y ( ep g emergency as required by paragraph 6.16A) until an on extensions of the Project or any other project without amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents written consent of OWNER and ENGINEER and specific has been issued by one of the methods indicated in written verification or adoption by ENGINEER. This paragraph 3.04; provided, however, that prohibition will survive final payment, completion, and CONTRACTOR shall not be liable to OWNER or acceptance of the Work, or termination or completion of the ENGINEER for failure to report any such conflict, Contract. Nothing herein shall preclude CONTRACTOR error, ambiguity, or discrepancy unless CON - from retaining copies of the Contract Documents for record TRACTOR knew or reasonably should have known purposes. thereof. B. Resolving Discrepancies ARTICLE 4 - AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; 1. Except as may be otherwise specifically REFERENCE POINTS stated in the Contract Documents, the provisions of the Contract Documents shall take precedence in resolving any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepan- 4.01 Availability of Lands cy between the provisions of the Contract Documents and: A. OWNER shall fiunish the Site. OWNER shall notify CONTRACTOR of any encumbrances or restrictions a. the provisions of any standard, not of general application but specifically related to use of the specification, manual, code, or instruction Site with which CONTRACTOR must comply in performing (whether or not specifically incorporated by the Work. OWNER will obtain in a timely manner and pay reference in the Contract Documents); or for easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities. If CONTRACTOR and OWNER are -11- unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent. 3. any CONTRACTOR interpretation of or if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract conclusion drawn from any "technical data" or any Tinter, or both, as a result of any delay in OWNER's such other data, interpretations, opinions, or infor- fianishing the Site, CONTRACTOR may make a Claim mation. therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. 4.03 LhIering Subsudbee or Physical Conditions B. Upon reasonable writes request, OWNER shall furnish CONTRACTOR with a current- statement of record A. Notice: If CONTRACTOR believes that any legal title and legal description of the lards upon which the subsurface or physical condition at or contiguous to the Site Work is to be performed and OWNER's interest therein as that is uncovered or revealed either: necessary for giving notice of or filing a menchanies or construction lien against such lands in accordance with 1. is of such a natwo as to establish that any applicable haws and Regulations. " technical data" an which CONTRACTOR is entitled to rely as provided in paragraph 4.02 is materially C. CONTRACTOR shall provide for all additional inaccurate; or lands and access thwato that may be required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and cqLiipnwut. 2. is of such a nature as to require a change in the Contract Ddicumentr, or 4.02 Subsurface and Physical Osmd dow 3. differs rr embilly Trani that shown or A. Reports and Dnsw nv. The Supplementary indite m the Contrast Docurnentr. or Conditions identify: 4. is of an ups =W nature, and differs materially Sbm 1. those reperts of explorations and tests- of - conditions ordinarily encountered ntered and generally recognized as subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site that figment in work of the character provided for in the Contract ENGINEER has used in preparing the Contract Docu- Documents; menu; and then CONTRACTOR shall, prompdy after becoming aware 2. those drawings of physical conftm in thereof and before ftrthm distinting the subsurface or or relating to existing surfaea or subsurface structures physical cmnditiens or peifostning any Work in cwt► at or contiguous to the Site (except Underground therewith (except in an emergency as required by paragraph Facilities) that ENGINEER has used in preparing the 6.16.A), godly OWNER and ENMIRER in writing about Coinraiet Documents. such condition. CONTRACTOR sfiaU not further disturb such condition or pa*wm any Work M connection therewith B. Lineited Adia+nce by CONTRACTOR on Technical (except as aforesaid) until receipt of wdtmn order to do so. Data Authorised CONTRACTOR may rely upon the general accuracy of the data" contained in such B. RNGIlYLt'ER's Reviews After reseipt of written reports and dmwings. but such reports and drawings are not notice as required by paragraph 4.03.A, ENGDEM will Contract Documents. Such "technical date" is idled in Ply review the pertinent condition, determine the the Supplementary Conditions. Except for such relimice on necessity of OWNWVs obtaining additional wgdatadon or such " technical data," CONTRACTOR may not rely upon or tests with respect thaveN and advise OWNER in writing make any Clsirn against OWNER, ENGINEER, or any of (with a copy to CONTRACTOR) of ENGINEER's findings ENGINEER's Consultants with rem to: and conclusions. 1. the completeness of rich reports and C. Pmibk Price and ?Trees A4 ssnrreentr drawings for CONTRACTOR's purposes, including, but nor limited to, any aspects of the means, mods, 1. The Contract Price or the Contract Tunes, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction or both, will be equitably adjusted to the extent that to be employers by CONTRACTOR, and safety the atisttrice of such differing subsurface or physical precautions and programs incident thereto; or condition causes an increase or decrease in CONTRACTOR's cost of, or time required for, 2. other data, in opinions, and performance of the Work; subject, however, to the information contained in such reports or shown or follower indicated in such drawings; or I' I -12- a. such condition must meet any one or more of the categories described in paragraph 4.03.A; 1. OWNER and ENGINEER shall not be and responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and b. with respect to Work that is paid for on a Unit Price Basis, any adjuustment in Contract Price 2. the cost of all of the following will be will be subject to the provisions of paragraphs 9.08 included in the Contract Price, and CONTRACTOR and 11.03. shall have full responsibility for. 2. CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to a. reviewing and checking all such infanria- any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract lion and data, Times if: b. locating all Underground Facilities shown a. CONTRACTOR knew of the existence of or indicated in the Contract Documents, such conditions at the tinge CONTRACTOR made a final commitment to OWNER in respect of c. coordination of the Work with the owners Contract Price and Contract Times by the submis- of such Underground Facilities, including a at- OWNER, during store of a Hid or becoming bound under li construction, and ad contract; or d. the safety and protection of all such Under - b. the wdsterce of such condition could ground Facilities and repairing any dame reasonably have been discovered or revealed as a thereto resulting €ran the Work. result of any exambatirm, investigation. explo- ration, test, or study of the Site and contiguous- B. Not Show" or Indicated accts required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents to be conducted by or for 1. If an Underground Facibty is tunxwvered or CONTRACTOR prior to CONTRACTOWs revealed at or contiguous to the Site which was not making such final c ommitatent; or s h ow n or indieoed, or riot shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents, c. CONTRACTOR failed to give the written CONTRACTOR shalt, promptly after becoming notice within the time and as required by pars- aware thereof and before further disturbing conditions graph 4.03.A. affected thereby or perftumog any Work m connection thh mwith (except in an emergency as 3. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR are required by paragraph 6.16.A), identify the owner of unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or such Undetgm and Facility and give written notice to argent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price that owner and s© OWNER and ENGINEER. ENGi- or Contract Tunes, or both, a Claim may be made NEER will prennpdy review the UnderWourd Facility therefor as provided in paragraph 10.03. Hswrever, and detoeemine the extent, if ley, to which a change is OWNER, ENGINEER, and ENGINEER's required in the Contract Documents to reflect and Conauhtants shall not be liable to CONTRACTOR for document the consequences of the existence or any claims costs, losses, or darns (including but location of the Underground Facility. During such not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, time. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all safety and protection of such Underground Facility. court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by CONTRACTOR on or in connection 2. If ENOLNEER. concludes that a change in with any other pnNect or anticipated project. the Contract Documents is required, a Work C6anW Directive or a Change Order will be issued to ruffed 4.04 underground Facilities and document such consopmon. An equitable adjustment shall be made in the Contract Price of A. Stmwen or Indicated: The i hrmation and data Contract Times, or both, to the extent that they are shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to attributable to the of dstence or location of any existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the Site is Underground Facility that was not shown or indicated based on information and data furnished to OWNER our or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy in ENGIIYEER by the owners of such Underground Facilities, the Contract Documents and that CONTRACTOR did including OWNER. or by others. Unless it is otherwise not know of and could not reasonably have been expressly provided in the Supplementary Conditions: expected to be aware of on to have anticipated. If -13- OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to agree on such other data, interpretations, opinions or entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of information. any such adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, OWNER or CON'T'RACTOR may make a C. CONTRACTOR shall not be responsible for any Claim therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site which was not shown or indicated in Drawings or 4.05 Reference Points Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the work. CONTRACTOR shall be A. OWNER shall provide engineering surveys to responsible for a Hazardous Environmental Condition created establish reference points for construction which in with any materials brought to the Site by CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER's judgment are necessary to enable CON - Subcontractors, Suppliers, or anyone else for whom CON- TRACTOR to proceed with the Work. CONTRACTOR shall TRACTOR is responsible. be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and property D. If CONTRACTOR encounters a Hazardous monuments, and shall make no changes or relocations Environmental Condition or if CONTRACTOR or anyone for without the prior written approval of OWNER. whom CONTRACTOR is responsible creates a hazardous CONTRACTOR shell report to ENGINEER whenever any Environmental Conditiam, CONTRACTOR shall imm"d reference point or property nuxrument is lost or destroyed or ately: (i) secure or otherwise isolate such condition; (ii) stop requires relocation because of necessary changes in grasses or all Work in connection with such condition and in any area locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate affected thereby (except in an emergency as .required by replacement or relocation of such reference points or property paragraph 6.16); and (its) notify OWNER and ENGINEER mots by hrokssiomMy qualified personnel. (and ply thereafter confirm such notice m writing OWNER shall promptly consult with ENGINEER concerning 4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site the necessity for OWNER to ruin a qualified expert to evaluate such condition or take corrective action, if any. A. Reports and Drawings: Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions for the identification of those E. CONTRACTOR shall not be required to resume reports and drawings relating to a Hazardous Envirohmnental Work in connection with such condition or in any affected Condition identified at to Site, if any, that have been utilized area until after OWNER has obtained any required permits by the ENGINEER in the preparation of the Contract related thereto and delivered to CONTRACTOR written Documents. not=: (1) s that such condition and any affected area is or has been tendered safe for the resumption of Wo l t; B. Limited Reliance by CONTRACTOR on Technical or (u) specifying say special conditions under which such Data Authorized: CONTRACTOR may rely upon the Work may be remned safely. If OWNER and general accuracy of the "technical data" contained in such CONTRACTOR cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not amt or extom% if any, of any adpatment in Contract Price Contract Documents. Such "technical data" is identified in or Contract Timm or both, as a result of such World stoppage the Supplementary Conditions. Except for such reliance on or such special conditions under which Work is agreed to be such "technical data," CONTRACTOR may not rely upon or rMimed by CONTRACTOR, ostdmw party way make a Claim make any Claim against OWNER, - or any of therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. ENGINEER's Consultants with respect to F. If after receipt of such written notice 1. the completeness of such reports and CONTRACTOR does not agree to resume such World based drawings for CONTRACTOR's purposes, including, on a reasonable belief it is unsafe, or does not agree to resume but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, such Work under such special condition, then OWNER may techniques, sequences and procedures of construction order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by to be employed by CONTRACTOR and safety such condition to be deleted frown the Wont. If OWNER and precautions and programs incident thereto; or CONTRACTOR cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amoun or extent, if any, of an adjustment in Contract Price or 2. other data, interpretations, opinions and Contract Times as a reult of Meting such portion of the information contained in such reports or shown or Work, then either party may make a Clain therefor w indicated in such drawings; or provided in paragraph 10.03. OWNER may have such deleted portion of the Work perforrned by OWNER 's own 3. any CONTRACTOR interpretation of or forces or others in accordance with Article 7. conclusion drawn from any " technical data" or any -14- G. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, OWNER shall indemnify and hold harmless B. All Bonds shall be in the form, prescribed by the CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, ENGINEER, Contract Documents except as provided otherwise by Laws ENGIN`EER's Consultants and the officers, directors, or Regulations, and shall be executed by such sureties as are partners, employees, agents, other consultants, and named in the current list of "Companies Holding Certificates subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and 570 (amended) by the Financial Management Service, Surety other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. All Bonds resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy Environmental Condition, provided that such Hazardous of such agent's authority to act. Environmental Condition: (i) was not shown or indicated in the Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract C. If the surety on any Bond furnished by CON - Documents to be included within the scope of the Work, and TRACTOR is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its (ii) was not created by CONTRACTOR or by anyone for right to do business is terminated in any state where any part whom CONTRACTOR is responsible. Nothing in this para- of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements graph 4.06.E shall obligate OWNER to indemnify any of paragraph 5.013, CONTRACTOR shall within 20 days individual or entity from and against the consequences of that thereafter substitute another Bond and surety, both of which individual's or entity's own negligence. shall comply with the requirements of paragraphs 5.0 LB and 5.02. H. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold 5.02 Licensed Sureties and Insurers harmless OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, other- A. All Bonds and insurance required by the Contract consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from Documents to be purchased and maintained by OWNER or and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including CONTRACTOR shall be obtained from surety or insurance but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitratior jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue Bonds or or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a insurance policies for the limits and coverages so required. Hazardous Environmental Condition created by Such surety and insurance companies shall also meet such CONTRACTOR or by anyone for whom CONTRACTOR is additional requirements and qualifications as may be provided responsible. Nothing in this paragraph 4.061 shall obligate in the Supplementary Conditions. CONTRACTOR to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual's or entity's 5.03 Certificates of Insurance own negligence. A. CONTRACTOR shall deliver to OWNER, with I. The provisions of paragraphs 4.02, 4.03, and 4.04 copies to each additional insured identified in the Supple- are not intended to apply to a Hazardous Environmental mentary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site. evidence of insurance requested by OWNER or any other additional insured) which CONTRACTOR is required to purchase an d maintain OWNER shall deliver to ARTICLE 5 - BONDS AND INSURANCE CONTRACTOR, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by 5.01 Performance, Payment. and Other Bonds CONTRACTOR or any other additional insured) which OWNER is required to purchase and maintain. A. CONTRACTOR shall furnish performance and payment Bonds, each in an amount at least equal to the 5.04 CONTRACTOR's Liability Insurance Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all CONTRACTOR's obligations tinder the A. CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain such Contract Documents. These Bonds shall remain in effect at liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the Work least until one year after the date when final payment being performed and as will provide protection from claims becomes due, except as provided otherwise by Laws or set forth below which may arise out of or result from Regulations or by the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work and shall also furnish such other Bonds as are required by the CONTRACTOR's other obligations under the Contract Contract Documents. D ocumen t s , whether it is to be performed by -15- I CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to 3. include completed operations insurance; perform any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: 4. include contractual liability insurance covering CONTRACTOWs indemaity obligations 1. clams under wad=' compensation, under paragraphs 6.07, 6.11, and 6.20; disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit 5. contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially 2. claims for damages because of bodily changed or renewal refused until at least thirty days injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of prior written notice has been given to OWNER and CONTRACTOR's employees; CONTRACTOR and to each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a 3. claims for damages because of bodily certificate of insurance has been issued (and the injury, sie:lusess or disease, or death of any parson certificates of insurance famished by the CONTRAC- other than CONTRACTOWs employees; TOR pursuant to paragraph 5.03 will so provide); 4. claims for damages insured by reasonably 6. vernan in effect at least until final payment available personal injury liability coverage which are and at all titian therwifter when CONTRACTOR may as a vault of air offense be coos+ acting, removing, or replacing defective Work h) by any person directly or indirectly related to the employment of in accordance with pwagmph 13.07; and such person by CONTRACTOR, or (ii) by any other person for any otter reason; 7. with respect to completed operstim insur- ance and an y insurance coverage written an a claims - 5. claims for damages, other than to the Work made basis, remain in effect for at least two yeas after itself; been= of injury to or destruction of tangible final payment (and CONTRACTOR shall fix=* property wherever located, including loss of use OWNER and each other additional mraW i dentified resulting and in the Supplementary Conditions, to who® a ceatificate of insurance has been issued, evidence 6. claims for damages because of bodily satisfactory to OWNER and any such additional injury or death of any person or poparty damage irhuuted of continuation of such insurance at final arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of payer and one you diereaftef). any motor vehicle. 5.05 odlrxEc s I.iabrry insurance B. The policies of insurance so required by this paragraph 5.04 to be purchased and maintsieW shall; A. In addition to the insuranca required to be provided by CONTRACTOR under parserapit 5.04, OWNER, at 1. with respect to insurance required by pare- OWNER's option, may purchase and mabasin at OWNER 's graphs 5.04.A.3 through 5.04A6 inclusive, include as mrpmse OWNER's own liability insurance as will protect additional insureds (subject to any customary euchu- OWNER against claims which may arise firm operations son in raapect of professional liability) OWNER under the Contract DocthmMUL ENGMEER, ENGINEEWs Coamrltartts, and any other individuals or entites identified in the Suppde- 5.06 Property Insurance montary Conditions, all of when shall be listed as additional insureds, and include coverage for the A. Unless otherwise provided is the Suppleme ntKy f!'icers directors pa employees. respective o Conditions, OWNER shall purchase and maintain property d of the full ea agents, h � any other off all ash additional the replacement Work at the Site in die am t cost thereof (subject to such deductible amounts insurance afforded to these additional insureds shall as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions or provide primary coverage for all claims covered required by haws and Regulations). This insurance shell: thereby; 1. include the interests of OWNER, CON - 2. include at least the specific coverages and TRACTOR, Subcontractor, ENGINEER, be written for not leas than the limits of liability ENGINEER's Consultants, and any other individuals provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required or entities es identified in the Supplementary Conditions, by Laws or Regulations, whichever is greater, and the officers, directors, partners, employees. l -16- agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at each and any of them, each of whom is deemed to least 30 days prior written notice has been given to OWNER have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an and CONTRACTOR and to each other additional insured to additional insured; whom a certificate of insurance has been issued and will contain waiver provisions in accordance with paragraph 5.07. 2. be written on a Builder's Risk "all- risk" or open peril or special causes of loss policy form that D. OWNER shall not be responsible for purchasing and shall at least include insurance . for physical loss or maintaining any property insurance specified in this damage to the Work, temporary buildings, false work, paragraph 5.06 to protect the interests of CONTRACTOR, and materials and equipment in transit, and shall Subcontractors, or others in the Work to the extent of any insure against at least the following perils or causes of deductible amounts that are identified in the Supplementary loss: fire, lightning, extended coverage, theft, vandal- Conditions. The risk of loss within such identified deductible ism and malicious mischief, earthquake, collapse, amount will be bome by CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, or debris removal, demolition occasioned by en- others suffering any such loss, and if any of them wishes forcement of Laws and Regulations, water damage, property insurance coverage within the limits of such and such other perils or causes of loss as may be amounts, each may purchase and maintain it at the specifically required by the Supplementary purchaser's own expense. Conditions; E. If CONTRACTOR requests in writing that other 3. include expenses incurred in the repair or special insurance be included in the property insurance replacement of any insured property (including but not policies provided under paragraph 5.06, OWNER shall, if limited to fees and charges of engineers and archi- possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof will be tects); charged to CONTRACTOR by appropriate Change Order or Written Amendment. Prior to commencement of the Work at 4. cover materials and equipment stored at the the Site, OWNER shall in writing advise CONTRACTOR Site or at another location that was agreed to in whether or not such other insuran has been procured by writing by OWNER prior to being incorporated in the OWNER. Work, provided that such materials and equipment have been included in an - Application for Payment 5.07 Waiver of Rights recommended by ENGINEER; A. OWNER and CONTRACTOR intend that all 5. allow for partial utilization of the Work by policies purchased in accordance with paragraph 5.06 will OWNER; protect OWNER, CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants, and all other 6. include testing and startup; and individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Condi- tions to be listed as insureds or additional insureds (and the 7. be maintained in effect until final payment officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other is made unless otherwise agreed to in writing by consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them) in OWNER, CONTRACTOR, and ENGINEER with 30 such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses days written notice to each other additional insured to an d damages caused by the perils or causes of loss covered whom a certificate of insurance has been issued. thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the B. OWNER shall purchase and maintain such boiler insurers will have no rights of recovery against any of the and machinery insurance or additional property insurance as insureds or additional insureds thereunder. OWNER and may be required by the Supplementary Conditions or Laws CONTRACTOR waive all rights against each other and their and Regulations which will include the interests of OWNER, respective officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, ENGINEER, other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them ENGINEER's Consultants, and any other individuals or for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, each of resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be such policies and any other property insurance applicable to listed as an insured or additional insured. the Work, and, in addition, waive all such rights against Subcontractors, ENGINEER, ENGINEEWs Consultants, and C. All the policies of insurance (and the certificates or all other individuals or entities identified in the Supplemen- other evidence thereof) required to be purchased and tary Conditions to be listed as insureds or additional insureds maintained in accordance with paragraph 5.06 will contain a (and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them) -17- i under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None such objection be made, OWNER as fiduciary shall crake of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party settlement with the insurers in accordance with such making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no such held by OWNER as trustee or otherwise payable under any agreement among the parties in interest is reached, OWNER policy so issued. as fiduciary shall adjust and settle the loss with the insurers and, if required in writing by any party in interest, OWNER B. OWNER waives all rights against CONTRACTOR, as fiduciary shall give bornd for the proper performance of Subcontractors, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants, and etch duties. the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them for: 5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Imurance; Option to Replace 1. loss due to business interruption, loss of use, or other consequential loss extending beyond A. If either OWNER or CONTRACTOR has any direct physical loss or damage to OWNER's property objection to the coverage afforded by or other provisions of or the Work caused by, arising out of, or resulting the Bonds or insurance required to be purchased and from fire or other peril whether or not insured by maintained by the other party in accordance with Article 5 on OWNER; and the basis of non-c with the Contract Docurne nts, the objecting ply shall so nobly the other party in writing 2. loss or damage to the completed Project or within 10 days alter receipt of the certificates (or other part thereof caused by, arising out of, or resulting from evidence requested) required by panWaph 2.05.C. OWNER fire or otter insured peril at cause of loss covered by and CONTRACTOR shall each provide to the other such any property insurance maintained on the comosted additional infi rtnation in respect of insurance provided as the Project or part thereof by OWNER during pares other may reasonably rte. If either party clogs not utilization pursuant to paragraph 14.05, after Substan- purchase or maintain all of the Bonds and instxmtce required tial Completion pursuant to paragraph 14.04, or alter of such party by the Contract Docernents, such party shall final payment purruaM to paragraph 14.07. notify the other party in writing of such fidlure to purchase prior to the smut of the W add, or of such lhiWm to maintain C. Any insurance polar maintained by OWNER prior to any chaaga in the raged coverage. Widrovs covering any loss, daasage or consequential loss referred to in prejudice to any other right or rnedy, the other party may paragraph 5.072 shall contain provisions to the effect that in elect to obtain equivalent Bonds or usi mice to protect nick the event of payment of any such loss, damage, or other party's utterests at the eotpense of the party who was consequential toots, the maurrars will have no rights of required to provide such coverage, and a Change Order shall recovery against CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, be issued to adjust the C4,ntrntet Price accordingly. ENGINEER, or 1fNGINEER's Consultants and the officers, directors, partners, ernployees, agents, and other consultants 5.10 partial Mimadn, Acbwwleo*neent ofPropart}' and subcontractors of each and any of them. Insurer 5.08 Receipt and Application vflnswarce Proceardr A. If OWNER finds it necessary to occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial A. Any insured loss under the policies of ' Completion of all the Work as provided in paragraph 14.05, required by paragraph 5.06 will be adjusted with OWNER no such use or occupancy shall commence before the insurers and made payable to OWNER as fiducia ty for the insureds, providing the property insurance pursuant to paragraph 5.06 as their ink may appear, subject to the requirements of have acknowledged notice thereof and in writing effected any any applicable mortgage clause and of paragraph 5.08.B. changes in coverage necessitated thereby. The insurers OWNER shall deposit in a separate account any money so providing the property insurance shall consent by endorse- received and shall distribute it in accordance with such so=- ment on the policy or policies, but the property insurance mutt as the parties in interest may reach. If no other special shall not be canceled or permitted to lapse on account of any agreement is reached, the darmagad Worst shall be repaired or such partial use or occupancy. replaced, the moneys so received applied an account therem & and tote Worst and the cost thereof covered by an appropriate Change Order or Written Amudme:nL ARTICLE 6 - CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES B. OWNER as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and i settle any loss with the insurers unless one of the parties in 6.01 Supervision and Superintendence interest shall object in writes within 15 days after the occurrence of loss to OWNER's exercise of this power. If - ig- A. CONTRACTOR shall supervise, inspect, and direct B. All materials and equipment incorporated into the the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention Work shall be as specified or, if specified, shall be of thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. All warranties and guarantees Specifications shall expressl Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall be solely specifically called for by the S pec p y responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, run to the benefit of OWNER If required by ENGINEER, and procedures of construction, but CONTRACTOR shall not CONTRACTOR shall furnish satisfactory evidence be responsible for the negligence of OWNER or ENGINEER (including reports of required tests) as to the source, kind, and in the design or specification of a specific means, method, quality of materials and equipment. All materials and technique, sequence, or procedure of construction which is equipment shall be stored, applied, installed, connected, d, and conditioned in shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract erected p rotected, used, cleaned, Documents. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to see that accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract except as otherwise may be provided in the Contract Docu- Documents. ments. B. At all times during the progress of the Work, 6.04 Progress Schedule CONTRACTOR shall assign a competent resident superin- tendent thereto who shall not be replaced without written A. CONTRACTOR shall adhere to the progress notice to OWNER and ENGINEER except under schedule established in accordance with paragraph 2.07 as it extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be may be adjusted from time to time as provided below. CONTRACTOR's representative at the Site and shall have authority to act on behalf of CONTRACTOR. All 1. CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGI- communications given to or received from the superintendent NEER for acceptance (to the extent indicated in shall be binding on CONTRACTOR. paragraph 2.07) proposed adjustments in the progress schedule that will not result in changing the Contract 6.02 Labor; Working (fours Times (or Milestones). Such adjustments will conform generally to the progress schedule then in A. CONTRACTOR shall provide competent, suitably effect and additionally will comply with any provi- qualified personnel to survey, lay out, and construct the Work sions of the General Requirements applicable thereto. as required by the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at the 2. Proposed adjustments in the progress Site. schedule that will change the Contract Times (or Milestones) shall be submitted in accordance with the B. Except as otherwise required for the safety or requirements of Article 12. Such adjustments may protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or only be made by a Change Order or Written Amend - adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise stated in the ment in accordance with Article 12. Contract Documents, all Work at the Site shall be performed during regular working hours, and CONTRACTOR will not 6.05 Substitutes and "Or- Equals" permit overtime work or the performance of Work on Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without OWNER's A. Whenever an item of material or equipment is written consent (which will not be unreasonably withheld) specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the given after prior written notice to ENGINEER name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function, appearance, and quality required. 6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no tike, equivalent, or "or-equal" item A. Unless otherwise specified in the General Re- or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or quirements, CONTRACTOR shall provide and assume full equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor, be submitted to ENGINEER for review under the circum- achin tools , stances described below. construction equipment and m transportation, �Y� appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and 1. "Or- Equal" Items: If in ENGEVEER's sole incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start-up, discretion an item of material or equipment proposed and completion of the Work. by CONTRACTOR is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by 19- ENGINEER as an "or- equal" item, in which case The application will state the extent, if any, to review and approval of the proposed item may, in which the use of the proposed substitute item will ENGINEER's sole discretion, be accomplished prejudice CONTRACTOR's achievement of without compliance with some or all of the require- Substantial Completion on time, whether or not menu for approval of proposed substitute items. For use of the proposed substitute item in the Work the purposes of this paragraph 6.05.A.1, a proposed will require a change in any of the Contract Docu- item of material or equipment will be considered means (or in the provisions of any other direct functionally equal to an item so named if contract with OWNER for work on the Project) to adapt the design to the proposed substitute item a. in the exercise of reasonable judgment and whether or not incorporation or use of the ENGINEER determines that: (i) it is at least equal proposed substitute item in connection with the in quality, durability, appearance, strength, and Work is subject to payment of any license fee or design characteristics; (ii) it will reliably perform royalty. All variations of the proposed substitute at least equally well the function imposed by the item from that specified will be identified in the design concept of the completed Project as a application, and available engineering, sales, functioning whole, and; maintenance, repair, and replacement services will be indicated. The application will also contain an b. CONTRACTOR certifies that: (i) there is itemized estimate of all costs or credits that will no increase in cost to the OWNER; and (ii) it will result directly or indirectly from use of such conform substantially, even with deviations, to the substitute item, including costs of redesign and detailed requirements of the item named in the claims of other contractors affected by any Contract Documents. resulting change, all of which will be considered by ENGINEER in evaluating the proposed 2. Substitute Items substitute item. ENGINEER may require CON- TRACTOR to furnish additional data about the a. If in ENGINEER's sole discretion an item proposed substitute item. of material or equipment proposed by CON- TRACTOR does not qualify as an "or-equal" item B. Substitute Construction Methods or procedures: If under paragraph 6.05.A.1, it will be considered a a specific means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure proposed substitute item. of construction is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR may b. CONTRACTOR shall submit sufficient famish or utilize a substitute means, method, tecbnique, information as provided below to allow ENGI- sequence, or procedure of construction approved by ENGI- NEER to determine that the item of material or NEER. CONTRACTOR shall submit sufficient information equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to to allow ENGINEER, in ENGINEEWs sole discretion, to that named and an acceptable substitute therefor. determine that the substitute proposed is equivalent to that Requests for review of proposed substitute items expressly called for by the Contract Documents. The proce- of material or equipment will not be accepted by dure for review by ENGINEER will be similar to that ENGINEER from anyone other than CON- provided in subparagraph 6.05.A -2. TRACTOR C. Engineer's Evaluation: ENGINEER will be c. The procedure for review by ENGINEER allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate each will be as set forth in paragraph 6.05.A.2.d, as proposal or submittal made pursuant to paragraphs 6.05.A supplemented in the General Requirements and as and 6.05.B. ENGINEER will be the sole judge of accept - ENGINEER may decide is appropriate under the ability. No "or-equal" or substitute will be ordered, installed circumstances. or utilized until ENGINEER's review is complete, which will be evidenced by either a Change Order for a substitute or an d. CONTRACTOR shall fast make written approved Shop Drawing for an "or equal." ENGINEER will application to ENGINEER for review of a advise CONTRACTOR in writing of any negative proposed substitute item of material or equipment determination. that CONTRACTOR seeks to fiimish or use. The application shall certify that the proposed substi- D. Special Guarantee: OWNER may require CON - tute item will perform adequately the functions TRACTOR to fiimish at CONTRACTOR's expense a special and achieve the results called for by the general performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any design, be similar in substance to that specified, substitute. and be suited to the same use as that specified. r -20- E. ENGINEER's Cost Reimbursement: ENGINEER create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or will record time required by ENGINEER and ENGINM's other uulividual or entity any contractual relationship between Consultants in evaluating substitute proposed or submitted by OWNER or ENGINEER and any such Subcontractor, CONTRACTOR purstuint to paragraphs 6.05.A.2 and 6.05.B Supplier or other individual or entity, nor shall it treats any and in making changes in the Contract Documents (or in the obligation on the put of OWNER or ENGINEER to pay or to provisions of any other direct contract with OWNER for see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcon- work on the Prged) occasioned thereby. Whether or not tractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity accept as may ENGME)I:R approves a substitute item so proposed or otherwise be required by Laws and Regulations. submitted by CONTRACTOR, CONTRACTOR shall reimburse OWNER for the charges of ENGINEER and D. CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for ENGINEER's Consultants for evaluating each such proposed scheduling and coordinating the Work of Subcontractors, substitute. Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract F. CONI'7E,4CTOR's Expense: CONTRACTOR shall with CONTRACTOR. provide all data in support of any proposed substitute or "or- equal" at CONTRACTOR's expense. E. CONTRACTOR shall regUirs all Sectors, Suppliers, and such other individuals or entities performing or 6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others furnishing any of the Work to communicate with ENGI- NEER through CONTRACTOR. A. CONTRACTOR shall not employ any Subcon- tractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity (including those F. The divisions soul sections of the S and acceptable to OWNER as indicated in paragraph 6.06.B), the identifications of any Drawings shall aot control whether initially or as a replacement, against whom OWNER CONTRACTOR in dividing the Work among Sabconhacsors may have reasonable objection. CONTRACTOR shall not be- o r Supplies or delineating the Work to be perfarmned by any required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other specific trade. individual or entity to famish or perform any of the Work against whom CONTRACTOR has reasonable objection. G. All Work performed for CONTRACTOR by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an appropriate B. If the Supplementary Conditions require due identity aVveaent between CONTRACTOR and the Subcontractor of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or or Supplier which specifically binds the Subcontractor or entities to be submitted to OWNER in advance for acceptance Supplier to the applicable teams and conditions of the by OWNER by a spwAW date prior to the E$active Dena of Contract Documents for the bdredt of OWNER and the Agroenent, and if CONTRACTOR has a list ENGINEER Wlseneva any such ageaen>eut is with a theeof in accordance with the Su pplernentaey Conditions. S u b con t rac t or or Supplier who is listed as an additional OWNER's acceptance (either in writing or by failing to make intarsd on the p+opety insurance provided in paragraph 5.06, written objection thereto by due data indicated for acceptance the agreement between the CONTRACTOR and the or objection in the Bidding Documents or the Contrast Subcontractor or Supplier will contain povnsicns wheeby Documents) of any such Subcontractor. Supplier, or other the Subcontractor or Supplier waives all rights against irdividhual or entity so identified may be revoked on the basis OWNER CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER. ENGINEER's of reasonable obpchm after due investigation. CON- Coesultamts, and a ll other imdivieivas or entities idetified in TRACTOR shall n omit an acceptable replacement for the the Stpplernentuy Conditions to be listed as insureds or rejected SubeOntraetor. Supplier, or other individual sus easily. additional unsus!eds (arid the o flccas. directors, patties, and the Contract Pete will be adjusted by the diffmace in crrployees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors the cost occasioned by such replacement, and an date of each and any of them) for all 1008411 and damages caused Change Order will be issued at Written Amendment signed. by, arising out of, relating to, at resetting fiun any of the No acceptance by OWNER of any such Subcontractor, perils or causes of bas covered by such policies and any other Supplier, or om ydss individual at entity, whether initially or as a property ma urat" applicable to the Work. If the insures on replacement, shall constitute a waiver of any right of any such policies requve separate waiver forms to be signed OWNER or ENGINEER to reject defective Work by any Subcontractor or Supplier, CONTRACTOR will obtain the sane. C. CONTRACTOR shah be fully responsible to OWNER and ENGINEER for all acts and omissions of the 6.07 Patent Fos and Royalties Subcontractors, Supplies, and other individuals or mthies performing or fling any of the Work just as A. CONTRACTOR shall pay all license fees and CONTRACTOR is responsible for CONTRACTOR's awn royalties an d assume all costs incident to the use in the acts and omissions, Nothing in the Contract Documents shall performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of -21- any invention, design, process, product, or device which is the responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. if a Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but particular invention, design, process, product, or device is this shall not relieve CONTRACTOR of CONTRACTOR's specified in the Contract Documents for use in the obligations under paragraph 3.03. performance of the Work and if to the actual knowledge of OWNER or ENGINEER its use is subject to patent rights or C. Changes in Laws or Regulations not known at the copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or time of opening of Bids (or, on the Effective Date of the royalty to others, the existence of such rights shalt be Agreement if there were no Bids) having an effect on the cost disclosed by OWNER in the Contract Documents. To the or time of performance of the Work may be the subject of an fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times. If OWNER CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless and CONTRACTOR are unable to agree on entitlement to or OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants, and the on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment, a officers, directors, partners, employees or agents, and other Claim may be made therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, fosses, and damages (including but not limited 6.10 Taxes to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute A. CONTRACTOR shall pay all sales, consumer, use, resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement and other similar taxes required to be paid by CONTRAC- of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the TOR in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation place of the Project which are applicable during the in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or performance of the Work. device not specified in the Contract Documents. 6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas 6.08 Permits A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for all 1. CONTRACTOR shall confine construction construction permits and licenses. OWNER shall assist equipment, the storage of materials and equipment, CONTRACTOR, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and the operations of workers to the Site and other and licenses. CONTRACTOR shall pay all governmental areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, and shall charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of not unreasonably encumber the Site and other areas the Work which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids, with construction equipment or other materials or or, if there are no Bids, on the Effective Date of the equipment. CONTRACTOR shall assume full Agreement. CONTRACTOR shall pay all charges of utility responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, owners for connections to the Work, and OWNER shall pay or to the owner or occupant thereof, or of any adjacent all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related land or areas resulting from the performance of the thereto, such as plant investment fees. Work. 6.09 Laws and Regulations 2. Should any claim be trade by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the A. CONTRACTOR shall give all notices and comply Work, CONTRACTOR shall promptly settle with with all Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance such other party by negotiation or otherwise resolve of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution applicable Laws and Regulations, neither OWNER nor proceeding or at law. ENGINEER shall be responsible for monitoring CONTRACTOR's compliance with any Laws or 3. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations. Regulations, CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's B. If CONTRACTOR performs any Work knowing or Consultant, and the officers, directors, partners, having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or employees, agents, and other consultants of each and Regulations, CONTRACTOR shall bear "all claims, costs, any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and and damages (including but not Iimited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute professionals and all court or arbitration or other resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such Work; dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to however, it shall not be CONTRACTOR's primary any claim or action, Iegal or equitable, brought by any -22- such owner or occupant against OWNER, ENGINEER, or any other party indemnified 3. other property at the Site or adjacent hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pave - CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work. ments, roadways, structures, utilities, and Under- ground Facilities not designated for removal, reloca- B. Removal of Debris During Performance of the tion, or replacement in the course of construction. Work: During the progress of the Work CONTRACTOR shall keep the Site and other areas free from accumulations of B. CONTRACTOR shall comply with all applicable waste materials, rubbish, and other debris. Removal and Laws and Regulations relating to the safety of persons or disposal of such waste materials, rubbish, and other debris property, or to the protection of persons or property from shall conform to applicable Laws and Regulations. damage, injury, or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. C. Cleaning: Prior to Substantial Completion of the CONTRACTOR shall notify owners of adjacent property and R shall clean the Site and make it read of Under Work CONTRACTOR y ground Facilities and other utility owners when for utilization by OWNER At the completion of the Work prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate CONTRACTOR shall remove from the Site all tools, with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and appliances, construction equipment and machinery, and replacement of their property. All damage, injury, or loss to surplus materials and shall restore to original condition all any property referred to in paragraph 6.13.A.2 or 6.13.A.3 property not designated for alteration by the Contract caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by CON - Documents. TRACTOR, any Subcontractor, Supplier, or any other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of D. Loading Structures: - CONTRACTOR shall not load them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in any any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall- CONTRACTOR (except damage or loss attributable to the CONTRACTOR subject any part of the Work or adjacent fault of Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions property to stresses or pressures that will endanger it. of OWNER or ENGINEER or ENGINEEWs Consultant, or anyone employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts 6.12 Record Documents any of them may be liable, and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, to the fault or negligence of or other CONTRACTOR or an Subcontractor, Supplier, A. CONTRACTOR shall maintain in a safe place at the Y Site one record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of Addenda, Written Amendments, Change Orders, Work them). CONTRACTOR's duties and responsibilities for Change Directives, Field Orders, and written interpretations safety and for protection of the Work shall continue until such and clarifications in good order and annotated to show time as all the Work is completed and ENGINEER has issued changes made during construction. These record documents a notice to OWNER and CONTRACTOR in accordance with together with all approved Samples and a counterpart of all paragraph 14.07.13 that the Work is acceptable (except as otherwise expressly '1 be available to ENGINEER for provided in connection with Substantial approved Shop Drawings will reference. Upon completion of the Work, these record Completion). documents, Samples, and Shop Drawings will be delivered to ENGINEER for OWNER. 6.14 Safety Representative 6.13 Safety and Protection A. CONTRACTOR shall designate a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties and hall be the prevention of accidents and the III CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible p A. C Y onsibte for responsibilities s P initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions maintaining and supervising of safety precautions and and programs in connection with the Work. CONTRACTOR programs. shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or 6.15 Hazard Communication Programs loss to: A. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for coordi- 1. all persons on the Site or who may be nating any exchange of material safety data sheets or other affected by the Work; hazard communication information required to be made available to or exchanged between or among employers at the 2. all the Work and materials and equipment Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations. to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the Site; and -23- 6.16 Emergencies a. all field measurements, quantities, dimen- sions, specified performance criteria, installation A. In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent similar information with respect thereto; thereto, CONTRACTOR is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss. CONTRACTOR shall b. all materials with respect to intended use, give ENGINEER prompt written notice if CONTRACTOR fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, believes that any significant changes in the Work or and installation pertaining to the performance of variations from the Contract Documents have been caused the Work; thereby or are required as a result thereof: If ENGINEER determines that a change in the Contract Documents is c. all information relative to means, methods, required because of the action taken by CONTRACTOR in techniques, sequences, and procedures of construc- response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or lion and safety precautions and programs incident Change Order will be issued. thereto; and 6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples d. CONTRACTOR shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample A. CONTRACTOR shall submit Shop Drawings to with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with ENGINEER for review and approval in accordance with the the requirements of the Work and the Contract acceptable schedule of Shop Drawings and Sample Documents. submittals. All submittals will be identified as ENGINEER may require and in the number of copies specified in the 2. Each submittal shall bear a stamp or specif- General Requirements. The data shown on the Shop is written indication that CONTRACTOR has satis- Drawings will be complete with refit to quantities, dimen fied CONTRACTOR's obligations under the Contract sions, specified performance surd design allwi , materials, Documents with respect to CONTRACTOR's review and sirtilar data to show ENGINEER the services, materials, and approval of that submittal. and equipment CONTRACTOR pry to provide and to enable ENGINEER to review the information for the limited 3. At the time of each submittal. CONTRAC- purposes required by paragraph 6.17.E. TOR shall give ENGINEER sperm written notice of such variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or B. CONTRACTOR shall also submit Samples to Sample submitted may have Dorn the requirements of ENGINEER for review and approval in ac;OM&ACC with the the Contract Doctuneerts, such notice to be in a written actable schedule of Shop Drawings said Sample separate fiemn the submittal; and, is submittals. Each Sample will be idsintified clearly as to addition, shall carne a specific seat= to be ma do on material, Supplier, pertinent data such as catabg numbers, each Shop Drawing and Sample submifed to ENGI and the use for which intended and otherwise as ENGINEER NUR for review and approval of each such variation. may require to enable ENGINEER to review the submittal for the limited purposes required by paragraph 6.17.E. The E. LNGINBER'sReview numbers of each Sample to be submitted will be as specified in the Specifications. 1. ENGINEER will timely review and approve Shop Drawings and Sarriptes in accordance C. Where a Shop Drawing or She is required by the with the schedule of Shop Drawings and Sampk Contract Documents or the schedule of Shop Drawings and strbmittah acceptable to ENGINEER. ENGINEER's Sample submittals acceptable to ENGINEER as required by review and approval will be only to determine if the paragraph 2.07, any related Work performed prior to items covered by the submittals will, after installatian ENGINEER's review and approval of the pertinent submittal a incorporation in the Work, conform to the will be at the sole- expanse and responsibility of inf mattion given in the Contract Docrneavis and be CONTRACTOR compatible with the design apt of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the D. Submittal Procedure Contract Documents. 1. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or 2. ENGINEER's review and approval will not Sample, CONTRACTOR shall have determined and extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or verified: procedures of construction (except where a particular means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction is specifically and expressly called for by -24- the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval B. CONTRACTOR's obligation to perform and of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of complete the Work in accordance with the Contract the assembly in which the item functions. Documents shall bd absolute. Nerve of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance 3. ENGINEER's review and approval of with the Contract Documents or a release of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve CON- CONTRACTOR's obligation to perform the Work in TRACTOR from responsibility for any variation from accordance with the Contract Documents: the requirements of the C stract Documents unless CONTRACTOR has in writing called ENGINEER's 1. observations by ENGINEER; attention to each such variation at the time of each submittal as requited by parch 6.17.D.3 and 2. recommendation by ENGINEER or pay- ENGINEER has gives written approval of each such ment by OWNER of any progress or final payment; variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated d in or accompanying the Stop Drawing or 3. the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Sample approval; nor will any approval by Completion by ENGINEER or any payment related ENGINEER relieve CONTRACTOR firm thereto by OWNER; responsibility for complying with the requirements of paragraph 6.17.D.1. 4. use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by OWNER; F. Resubrnittal Procedures 5. any acceptance by OWNER or any failure 1. CONTRACTOR shall make corrections to do so; required by ENGINEER and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and 6. any review and approval of a Shop Draw - submit as required new Samples for review and ing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of approval. CONTRACTOR shall direct specific acceptability by ENGINEER; attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by ENGINEER on previous 7. any inspection, test, or approval by others; submittals. or 6.18 Continuing the Work S. any correction of defective Work by OWN- ER A. CONTRACTOR shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or disagreements 6.20 Indemnification with OWNER No Work shall be delayed or postponed extent tied Laws and Reguls- T thus fuillest by A. T r disagreements, ex P� pending resolution of any disputes o d sagree , cep t as permitted by paragraph 15.04 or as OWNER and tienss, CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless CONTRACTOR may otherwise agree in writing. OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGIIVEER's Coussultana. and the oflitcors, directors, parwa s, employEes, agents, and other 6.19 CONTRACTOR's General Warranty and Guaran- cons:ltams and subeceut s of each and any of theft fiexn tee and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages ( but not limited to all fens and chargers of a n&eas, architects, A. CONTRACTOR wr+arran is and guarantees to amenesys, and other professiornsh and all court or armtrubw OWNER, ENGINEER, and ENGINEER's Consultants that or other dispute rasotut M costs) arising out of or relating to all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents the I>srfinensnce of the Work, peavided that my such claim, and will not be defective. CONTRACTOR's warranty and coat, loss, or dump: guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by _ 1. is attributable to bodily injury. sickrness. L abuse, rnodificaticnu, or improper main- disease, or death, or to in to or desstruct3oet of tenan pr t or operation by parsons other than CON - tangible property ( than the Work itself), inchxt TRACTOR, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or any other ing the loss of use resulting the rchom; and individual or entity for whom CONTRACTOR is responsible; or 2. is caused in whole or in part by any n%H- gem act or omission of CONTRACTOR, any Sub - 2. normal wear and tear under normal usage. contractor, any Supplier. or any individual or amity -25- directly or indirectly employed by any of them to 2. if OWNER and CONTRACTOR are perform any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price caused in part by any negligence or omission of an or Contract Times that should be allowed as a result of individual or entity indemnified hereunder or whether such other work, a Claim may be made therefor as liability is imposed upon such indemnified party by provided in paragraph 10.05. Laws and Regulations regardless of the negligence of any such individual or entity. B. CONTRACTOR shall afford each other contractor who is a party to such a'direct contract and each utility owner B. In any and all claims against OWNER or ENGI- (and OWNER, if OWNER is performing the other work with lv'EER or any of their respective consultants, agents, officers, OWNER's employees) proper and safe access to the Site and directors, partners, or employees by any employee (or the a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of survivor or personal representative of such employee) of materials and equipment and the execution of such other CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any work and shall properly coordinate the Work with theirs. individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, CON - them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts TRACTOR shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation Work that may be required to properly connect or otherwise under paragraph 6.20.A shall not be limited in any way by make its several parts come together and properly integrate any limitation on the amount or type of damages, with such other work. CONTRACTOR shall not endanger compensation, or benefits payable by or for CONTRACTOR any work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise or any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or altering their work and will only cut or alter their work with entity under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit the written consent of ENGINEER and the others whose acts, or other employee benefit acts. work will be affected. The duties and responsibilities of CONTRACTOR under this paragraph are for the benefit of C. The indemnification obligations of CONTRACTOR such utility owners and other contractors to the extent that under paragraph 6.20.A shall not extend to the liability of there are comparable provisions for the benefit of ENGINEER and ENGINEER's Consultants or to the officers, CONTRACTOR in said direct contracts between OWNER directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and such utility owners and other contractors. and subcontractors of each and any of them arising out of C. If the proper execution or results of any part of 1. the preparation or approval of, or the CONTRACTOR'S Work depends upon work performed by failure to prepare or approve, maps, Drawings, others under this Article 7, CONTRACTOR shall inspect opinions, reports, surveys, Change Orders, designs, or such other work and promptly report to ENGINEER in Specifications; or writing any delays, defects, or deficiencies in such other work that render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper 2. giving directions or instructions, or failing execution and results of CONTRACTOR's Work. to give them, if that is the primary cause of the injury CONTRACTOR's failure to so report will constitute an or damage. acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for integration with CONTRACTOR's Work except for latent defects and deficiencies in such other work. ARTICLE 7 - OTHER WORK 7.02 Coordination 7.01 Related Work at Site A. If OWNER intends to contract with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the Site, the A. OWNER may perform other work related to the following will be set forth in Supplementary Conditions: Project at the Site by OWNER's employees, or let other direct contracts therefor, or have other work performed by utility 1. the individual or entity who will have owners. If such other work is not noted_ in the Contract authority and responsibility for coordination of the Documents, then: activities among the various contractors will be identified; 1. written notice thereof will be given to CONTRACTOR prior to starting any such other 2. the specific matters to be covered by such - work; and authority and responsibility will be itemized; and 26 3. the extent of such authority and responsi- A. OWNER is obligated to execute Change Orders as bilities will be provided. indicated in paragraph 10.03. B. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary 8,08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals Conditions, OWNER shall have sole authority and respon- sibility for such coordination. A. OWNER's responsibility in respect to certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in paragraph 13.03.B. ARTICLE 8 - OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES 8.09 Limitations on 0WNER's Responsibilities 8.01 Communications to Contractor A. The OWNER shall not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, A. Except as otherwise provided in these General CONTRACTOR's means, methods, techniques, sequences, Conditions, OWNER shall issue all communications to or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and CONTRACTOR through ENGINEER. programs incident thereto, or for any failure of CON- TRACTOR to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable 8.02 Replacement of ENGINEER to the performance of the Work OWNER will not be responsible for CONTRACTOR's failure to perform the A. In case of termination of the employment of ENGI- Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. NEER, OWNER shall appoint an engineer to whom CONTRACTOR makes no reasonable objection, whose 8.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former ENGINEER. A. OWNER's responsibility in respect to an undis- closed Hazardous Environmental Condition is set forth in 8.03 Furnish Data paragraph 4.06. A. OWNER shall m ' h the data required of 8.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements promptly fr. nrs q OWNER under the Contract Documents. A. If and to the extent OWNER has agreed to furnish 8.04 Pay Promptly When Due CONTRACTOR reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to satisfy OWNER's A. OWNER shall make payments to CONTRACTOR obligations under the Contract Documents, OWNER's in paragraphs responsibility in promptly when they are due as provided p grap respect thereof will be as set forth in the P I4.02.0 and 14.07.C. Supplementary Conditions. 8.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests ARTICLE 9 - ENGIIVEER'S STATUS DURING A. OWNER's duties in respect of providing lands and CONSTRUCTION easements and providing engineering surveys to establish reference points are set forth in paragraphs 4.01 and 4.05. Paragraph 4.02 refers to OWNER's identifying and making 9.01 OWNER'S Representative available to CONTRACTOR copies of reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical A. ENGINEER will be OWNER's representative conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface during the construction period. The duties and un responsi- ' authority structures at or contiguous to the Site that have been utilized bilities and the limitations of tY of ENGINEER as by ENGINEER in preparing the Contract Documents. OWNER's representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and will not be changed without 8.06 Insurance written consent of OWNER and ENGINEER. A. OWNER's responsibilities, if any, in respect to pur- 9.02 Visits to Site chasin g g and maintaining liability and property insurance are set forth in Article 5. A. ENGINEER will make visits to the Site at intervals appropriate to th various stages of construction as 8.07 Change Orders ENGINEER deems necessary in order to observe as an experienced and qualified design professional the progress -27- i that has been made and the quality of tfhe various aspects of result of a written clarification or interpretation, a Claim may CONTRACTOR's executed Work. Based on information be made therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. obtained during such visits and observations, ENGINEER, for the benefit of OWNER, will determine, in general, if the 9.05 Authorized variations in Work Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. ENGINEER will not be required to make A. ENGINEER may authorize minor variations in the exhaustive or continuous inspections on the Site to check the Work from the requirements of the Contract Documents quality or quantity of the Work. ENGINEER's efforts will be which do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or directed toward providing for OWNER a greater degree of the Contract Times and are compatible with the design confidence that the completed Work will conform generally concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as to the Contract Documents. On the basis of such visits and indicated by the 'Contract Documents. These may be observations, ENGINEER will keep OWNER informed of accomplished by a Field Order and will be binding on the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard OWNER OWNER and also on CONTRACTOR, who shall perform the against defective Work. Work involved promptly. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or B. ENGINEER's visits and observations are subject to extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or all the limitations on ENGINEER's authority and Contract Times, or both, as a result of a Field Order, a Claim responsibility set forth in paragraph 9. 10, and particularly, but may be made therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. without limitation, during or as a result of ENGINEER's visits or observations of CONTRACTOR's Work 9.06 Rejecting Defective Work ENGINEER will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for CONTRACTOR's A. ENGINEER will have authority to disapprove or means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of reject Work which ENGINEER believes to be defective, or construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident - that ENGINEER believes will not produce a completed thereto, or for any failure of CONTRACTOR to comply with Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that will Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Work Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. ENGINEER will also have authority to require 9.03 Project Representative special inspection or testing of the Work as provided in paragraph 13.04, whether or not the Work is fabricated, A. If OWNER and ENGINEER agree, ENGINEER installed, or completed. will furnish a Resident Project Representative to assist ENGINEER in providing more extensive observation of the 9.07 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments Work. The responsibilities and authority and limitations thereon of any such Resident Project Representative and A. In connection with ENGINEER's authority as to assistants will be as provided in paragraph 9.10 and in the Shop Drawings and Samples, see paragraph 6.17. Supplementary Conditions. If OWNER designates another representative or agent to represent OWNER at the Site who B. In connection with ENGINEER's authority as to is not ENGENEER's Consultant, agent or employee, the Change Orders, see Articles 10, 11, and 12. responsibilities and authority and limitations thereon of such other individual or entity will be as provided in the Supple- C. In connection with ENGINEER's authority as to mentary Conditions. Applications for Payment, see Article 14. 9.04 Clarifications and Interpretations 9.08 Determinations for Unit Price Work A. ENGINEER will issue with reasonable promptness A. ENGINEER will determine the actual quantities and such written clarifications or interpretations of the require- classifications of Unit Price Work performed by ments of the Contract Documents as ENGINEER may deter- CONTRACTOR. ENGINEER will review with CON - mine necessary, which shall be consistent with the intent of TRACTOR the ENGINEER's preliminary determinations on and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents. Such such matters before rendering a written decision thereon (by written clarifications and interpretations will be binding on recommendation of 'an Application for Payment or j OWNER and CONTRACTOR. If OWNER and CON- otherwise). ENGINEER's written decision thereon will be TRACTOR are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the final and binding (except as modified by ENGINEER to amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract reflect changed factual conditions or more accurate data) Price or Contract Times, or both, that should be allowed as a upon OWNER and CONTRACTOR, subject to the provisions of paragraph 10.05. -28- I Supplier, or of any other individual or entity performing any 9.09 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents of the Work. and Acceptability of Work D. ENGINEER's review of the final Application for A. ENGINEER will be the initial interpreter of the Payment and accompanying documentation and all mainte- requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the nance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, acceptability of the Work thereunder. Claims, disputes and Bonds, certificates of inspection, tests and approvals, and other matters relating to the acceptability of the Work, the other documentation required to be delivered by paragraph quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work, the 14.07.A will only be to determine generally that their content interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents complies with the requirements of, and in the case of pertaining to the performance of the Work, and Claims certificates of inspections, tests, and approvals that the results I seeking changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times will certified indicate compliance with, the Contract Documents. be referred initially to ENGINEER in writing, in accordance with the provisions of paragraph 10.05, with a request for a E. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set formal decision. forth in this paragraph 9.10 shall also apply to ENGINEER's Consultants, Resident Project Representative, and assistants. B. When functioning as interpreter and judge under this paragraph 9.09, ENGINEER will not show partiality to ARTICLE 10 - CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS OWNER or CONTRACTOR and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capacity. The rendering of a decision by 10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work ENGINEER pursuant to this paragraph 9.09 with respect to any such Claim, dispute, or other matter (except any which A. Without invalidating the Agreement and without have been waived by the making or acceptance of final- notice to any surety, OWNER may, at any time or from time payment as provided in paragraph 14.07) will be a condition to time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work by precedent to any exercise by OWNER or CONTRACTOR of a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work Change such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect CONTRACTOR shall promptly proceed with the Work of any such Claim, dispute, or other matter. involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as otherwise 9.10 Limitations on ENGMEER's Authority and specifically provided). Responsibilities B. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to A. Neither ENGINEER's authority or responsibility agree on entitlement to, or on the amount or extent, if any, of under this Article 9 or under any other provision of the an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or Contract Documents nor any decision made by ENGINEER both, that should be allowed as a result of a Work Change in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority Directive, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise, or performance paragraph 10.05. of any authority or responsibility by ENGINEER shall create, impose, or give rise to any duty in contract, tort, or otherwise 10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work owed by ENGMER to CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or to any surety A. CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to an increase for or employee or agent of any of them. in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to any work performed that is not required by the B. ENGINEER will not supervise, direct, control, or Contract Documents as amended, modified, or supplemented have authority over or be responsible for CONTRACTOR's as provided in paragraph 3.04, except in the case of an emer- means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of gency as provided in paragraph 6.16 or in the case of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident uncovering Work as provided in paragraph 13.04.8. thereto, or for any failure of CONTRACTOR to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the 10.03 Execution of Change Orders Work. ENGI WEER will not be responsible for CONTRACTOR's failure to perform the Work in accordance A. OWNER and CONTRACTOR shall execute with the Contract Documents. appropriate Change Orders recommended by ENGINEER (or Written Amendments) covering: C. ENGINEER will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of CONTRACTOR or of any Subcontractor, any -29- i 1. changes in the Work which are: (i) ordered claimant within 30 days after receipt of the claimant's last by OWNER pursuant to paragraph 10.0l.A, (ii) re- submittal (unless ENGINEER allows additional time). quired because of acceptance of defective Work under paragraph 13.08.A or OWNER's correction of B. ENGINEER's Decision: ENGINEER will render a defective Work under paragraph 13.09, or (iii) agreed formal decision in writing within 30 days after receipt of the to by the parties; last submittal of the claimant or the last submittal of the opposing party, if "any. ENGINEER's written decision on 2. changes in the Contract Price or Contract such Claim, dispute, or other matter will be final and binding Times which are agreed to by the parties, including upon OWNER and CONTRACTOR unless: any undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a Work Change 1. an appeal from ENGINEER's decision is Directive; and taken within the time limits and in accordance with the dispute resolution procedures set forth in Article 16; 3. changes in the Contract Price or Contract or Times which embody the substance of any written decision rendered by ENGINEER pursuant to para- 2. if no such dispute resolution procedures graph 10.05; provided that, in lieu of executing any have been set forth in Article 16, a written notice of such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any intention to appeal from ENGINEER's written such decision in accordance with the provisions of the decision is delivered by OWNER or CONTRACTOR Contract Documents and applicable Laws and Regula- to the other and to ENGINEER within 30 days after lions, but during any such appeal, CONTRACTOR the date of such decision, and a formal proceeding is shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress instituted by the appealing party in a forum of schedule as provided in paragraph 6.18.A, competent jurisdiction within 60 days after the date of such decision or within 60 days after Substantial 10.04 Notification to Surety Completion, whichever is later (unless otherwise agreed in writing by OWNER and CONTRACTOR), A. If notice of any change affecting the general scope to exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents party may have with respect to such Claim, dispute, or (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract other matter in accordance with applicable Laws and Times) is required by the provisions of any Bond to be given Regulations. to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be CONTRACTOR's responsibility. The amount of each C. If ENGINEER does not render a formal decision in applicable Bond will be adjusted to reflect the effect of any writing within the time stated in paragraph 10.053, a such change. decision denying the Claim in its entirety shall be deemed to have been issued 31 days after receipt of the last submittal of 10.05 Claims and Disputes the claimant or the last submittal of the opposing party, if any. A. Notice: Written notice stating the general nature of D. No Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price or each Claim, dispute, or other matter shall be delivered by the Contract Times (or Milestones) will be valid if not submitted claimant to ENGINEER and the other party to the Contract in accordance with this paragraph 10.05. promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after the start of the event giving rise thereto. Notice of the amount or extent of the Claim, dispute, or other matter with supporting data ARTICLE 1 I - COST OF THE WORK; CASH shall be delivered to the ENGINEER and the other party to ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK the Contract within 60 days after the start of such event (unless ENGINEER allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of such 11.01 Cast of the Work Claim, dispute, or other matter). A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price shall be prepared in accordance with the A. Costs Included: The term Cost of the Work means provisions of paragraph 12.013. A Claim for an adjustment the sum of all costs necessarily incurred and paid by CON - in Contract Time shall be prepared in accordance with the TRACTOR in the proper performance of the Work When provisions of paragraph 12.02.B. Each Claim shall be accom- the value of any Work covered by a Change Order or when a paned by claimant's written statement that the adjustment Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price is determined on claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant the basis of Cost of the Work, the costs to be reimbursed to believes it is entitled as a result of said event. The opposing CONTRACTOR will be only those additional or incremental party shall submit any response to ENGINEER and the costs required because of the change in the Work or because -30- of the event giving rise to the Claim. Except as otherwise ries, surveyors, attorneys, and accountants) employed may be agreed to in writing by OWNER, such costs shall be for services specifically related to the Work. in amounts no higher than those prevailing in the locality of the Project, shall include only the following items, and shall 5. Supplemental costs including the not include any of the costs itemized in paragraph 11.01.B. following: 1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct a.The proportion of necessary transportation, employ of CONTRACTOR in the performance of the travel, and subsistence expenses of CONTRACTOR's Work under schedules of job classifications agreed employees incurred in discharge of duties connected upon by OWNER and CONTRACTOR. Such with the Work. employees shall include without limitation superinten- dents, foremen, and other personnel employed full b. Cost, including transportation and mainte- time at the Site. Payroll costs for employees not nance, of all materials, supplies, equipment, employed full time on the Work shall be apportioned machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities on the basis of their time spent on the Work. Payroll at the Site, and hand tools not owned by the workers, costs shall include, but not be limited to, salaries and which are consumed in the performance of the Work, wages plus the cost of fringe benefits, which shall and cost, less market value, of such items used but not include social security contributions, unemployment, consumed which remain the property of CON - excise, and payroll taxes, workers' compensation, TRACTOR health and retirement benefits, bonuses, sick leave, vacation and holiday pay applicable thereto. The C. Rentals of all construction equipment and expenses of performing Work outside of regular machinery, and the parts thereof whether rented from working hours, on Saturday, Sunday, or legal CONTRACTOR or others in accordance with rental holidays, shall be included in the above to the extent agreements approved by OWNER with the advice of authorized by OWNER. ENGINEER, and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, assembly, dismantling, and removal there- 2. Cost of all materials and equipment fur- of. All such costs shall be in accordance with the nished and incorporated in the Work, including costs terms of said rental agreements. The rental of any of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers' such equipment, machinery, or parts shall cease when field services required in connection therewith. All the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work. cash discounts shall accrue to CONTRACTOR unless OWNER deposits funds with CONTRACTOR with d. Sales, consumer, use, and other similar which to make payments, in which case the cash taxes related to the Work, and for which CONTRAC- discounts shall accrue to OWNER. All trade dis- TOR is liable, imposed by Laws and Regulations. counts, rebates and refunds and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment shall accrue to e . Deposits lost for causes other than negli- OWNER, and CONTRACTOR shall make provisions gene of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, or so that they may be obtained. anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, and 3. Payments made by CONTRACTOR to royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses. Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. If required by OWNER, CONTRAC- f Losses and damages (and related expenses) TOR shall obtain competitive bids from subcontrac- caused by damage to the Work, not compensated by tors acceptable to OWNER and CONTRACTOR and insurance or otherwise, sustained by CONTRACTOR shall deliver such bids to OWNER, who will then in connection with the performance of the Work determine, with the advice of ENGINEER, which (except losses and damages within the deductible bids, if any, will be acceptable. If any subcontract amounts of property insurance established in provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the accordance with paragraph 5.06.1)), provided such basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee, the losses and damages have resulted from causes other Subcontractor's Cost of the Work and fee shall be than the negligence of CONTRACTOR, any determined in the same manner as CONTRACTOR'S Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this paragraph employed by any of them or for whose acts any of 11.01, them may be liable. Such losses shall include settlements made with the written consent and 4. Costs of special consultants (including but approval of OWNER No such losses, damages, and not limited to engineers, architects, testing laborato- -31- I i expenses shall be included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining CONTRACTOR's fee. 5. Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the costs of any item not specifically and g. The cost of utilities, fuel, and sanitary expressly included in paragraphs I LOLA and facilities at the Site. I LOI.B. h. Minor expenses such as telegrams, long C. CONTRACTOR's Fee: When all the Work is distance telephone calls, telephone service at the Site, performed on the basis of cost -plus, CONTRACTOR's fee expressage, and similar petty cash items in connection shall be determined as set forth in the Agreement. When the with the Work. value of any Work covered by a Change Order or when a Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price is determined on i. When the Cost of the Work is used to the basis of Cost of the Work, CONTRACTOR's fee shall be determine the value of a Change Order or of a Claim, determined as set forth in paragraph 12.01.C. the cost of premiums for additional Bonds and insurance required because of the changes in the Work D. Documentation: Whenever the Cost of the Work for or caused by the event giving rise to the Claim. any purpose is to be determined pursuant to paragraphs 11.01.A and 11.013, CONTRACTOR will establish and j. When all the Work is performed on the basis of maintain records thereof in accordance with generally cost-plus, the costs of premiums for all Bonds and accepted accounting practices and submit in a form insurance CONTRACTOR is required by the Contract acceptable to ENGINEER an itemized cost breakdown Documents to purchase and maintain. together with supporting data. B. Costs Excluded. • The term Cost of the Work shall 11.02 Cash Allowances not include any of the following items_ A. It is understood that CONTRACTOR has included 1. Payroll costs and other compensation of in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract CONTRACTOR's officers, executives, principals (of Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be partnerships and sole proprietorships), general manag- performed for such sums as may be acceptable to OWNER ers, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, audi- and ENGINEER CONTRACTOR agrees that: tors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, timekeepers, clerks, and other personnel 1. the allowances include the cost to CON - employed by CONTRACTOR, whether at the Site or TRACTOR (less any applicable trade discounts) of in CONTRACTOR's principal or branch office for materials and equipment required by the allowances to general administration of the Work and not specifical- be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and ly included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in paragraph 11.0I.A.I or 2. CONTRACTOR's costs for unloading and specifically covered by paragraph 11.01A.4, all of handling on the Site, labor, installation costs, over - which are to be considered administrative costs head, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the covered by the CONTRACTOR's fee. allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances, and no demand for addi- 2. Expenses of CONTRACTOR's principal tional payment on account of any of the foregoing will and branch offices other than CONTRACTOR's be valid. office at the Site. B. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order 3. Any part of CONTRACTOR's capital will be issued as recommended by ENGINEER to reflect expenses, including interest on CONTRACTOR's actual amounts due CONTRACTOR on account of Work capital - employed for the Work and charges against covered by allowances, and the Contract Price shall be CONTRACTOR for delinquent payments. correspondingly adjusted. 4. Costs due to the negligence of CONTRAC- 11.03 Unit Price Work TOR, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indi- rectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any A. Where the Contract Documents provide that all or of them may be liable, including but not limited to, the part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the correction of defective Work, disposal of materials or Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price equipment wrongly supplied, and making good any Work an amount equal to the sum of the unit price for each damage to property. separately identified item of Unit Price Work times the -32- estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agree- ment. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work 2. where the Work involved is not covered by are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of allowance for overhead and profit not necessarily in Unit Price Work performed by CONTRACTOR will be made accordance with paragraph 12.01.C.2); or by ENGINEER subject to the provisions of paragraph 9.08. 3. where the Work involved is not covered by B. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and considered by CONTRACTOR to be adequate to cover agreement to a lump sum is not reached under para- CONTRACTOR's overhead and profit for each separately graph 12.013.2, on the basis of the Cost of the Work identified item. (determined as provided in paragraph 11.01) plus a CONTRACTOR's fee for overhead and profit (deter- C. OWNER or CONTRACTOR may make a Claim for mined as provided in paragraph 12.01.C). an adjustment in the Contract Price in accordance with paragraph 10.05 if C. CONTRACTOR's Fee: The CONTRACTOR'S fee - for overhead and profit shall be determined as follows: I. the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work mutually acceptable fixed fee; or I . a mu ep TRACTOR differs materially Y performed b CON y and P Y significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement; and 2. if a fixed fee is not agreed upon, then a fee based on the following percentages of the various 2. there is no corresponding adjustment with portions of the Cost of the Work: respect any other item of Work; and a. for costs incurred under paragraphs 3. if CONTRACTOR believes that 11.01.A.I and 11.01.A.2, the CONTRACTOR's CONTRACTOR is entitled to an increase in Contract fee shall be 15 percent; Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or OWNER believes that OWNER is entitled to a b. for costs incurred under paragraph 3 the CONTRACTOR's fee shall be five Price and the artier are unable to 11.O1.A , decrease m Contract p agree as to the amount of any such increase or percent; decrease. c. where one or more tiers of subcontracts are on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee and ARTICLE 12 - CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; no fixed fee is agreed upon, the intent of paragraph CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES 12.01.C.2.a is that the Subcontractor who actually performs the Work, at whatever tier, will be paid a fee of 15 P ercent of the costs incurred by such 12.0I Change o f Contract Price Subcontractor under paragraphs 11.0I.A.1 and 11.01.A.2 and that any higher tier Subcontractor A. The Contract Price may only be changed by a and CONTRACTOR will each be paid a fee of Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any Claim for five percent of the amount paid to the next lower an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on written tier Subcontractor; notice submitted by the party snaking the Claim to the ENGINEER and the other party to the Contract in accordance d. no fee shall be payable the basis with the provisions of paragraph 10.05. costs itemized under paragraphs 11.01.A.4, 11.01.A.5, and 11.0 13; B. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will e. the amount of credit to be allowed by be determined as follows: CONTRACTOR to OWNER for any change which results in a net decrease in cost will be the 1. where the Work involved is covered by amount of the actual net decrease in cost plus a unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by deduction in CONTRACTOR's fee by an amount application of such unit prices to the quantities of the equal to five percent of such net decrease; and items involved (subject to the provisions of paragraph 11.03 ); or -33- f. when both additions and credits are in- 12.06 Delay Damages volved in any one change, the adjustment in CONTRACTOR's fee shall be computed on the A. -In no event shall OWNER or ENGINEER be liable basis of the net change in accordance with para- to CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any graphs 12.0I.C.2.a through 12.0l.C.2.e, inclusive. other person or organization, or to any surety for or employee f or agent of any of them, for damages arising out of or 12.02 Change of Contract Times resulting from: A. The Contract Times (or Milestones) may only be I. delays caused by or within the control of changed by a Change Order or by a Written Amendment. CONTRACTOR; or Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times (or Milestones) shall be based on written notice submitted by the 2. delays beyond the control of both OWNER party making the claim to the ENGINEER and the other party and CONTRACTOR including but not limited to to the Contract in accordance with the provisions of fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, paragraph 10.05. acts of God, or acts or neglect by utility owners or other contractors performing other work as ` B. Any adjustment of the Contract Times (or contemplated by Article 7. l Milestones) covered by a Change Order or of any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times (or Milestones) will be B. Nothing in this paragraph 12.06 bars a change in determined in accordance with the provisions of this Contract Price pursuant to this Article 12 to compensate Article 12. CONTRACTOR due to delay, interference, or disruption directly attributable to actions or inactions of OWNER or 12.03 Delays Beyond CONTRACTOR's Control anyone for whom OWNER is responsible. A_ Where CONTRACTOR is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times ARTICLE 13 - TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF CONTRACTOR, the Contract Times (or Milestones) will be DEFECTIVE WORK extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a Claim is made therefor as provided in paragraph I2.02.A. Delays beyond the control of CONTRACTOR shall 13.01 Notice of Defects include, but not be limited to, acts or neglect by OWNER, acts or neglect of utility owners or other contractors perform- A. Prompt notice of all defective Work of which ing other work as contemplated by Article 7, fires, floods, OWNER or ENGINEER has actual knowledge will be given epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, or acts of God. to CONTRACTOR. All defective Work may be rejected, corrected, or accepted as provided in this Article 13. 12.04 Delays Within CONTRACTOR's Control 13.02 Access to Work A. The Contract Times (or Milestones) will not be extended due to delays within the control of CONTRACTOR. A. OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants, Delays attributable to and within the control of a other representatives and personnel of OWNER, independent Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within testing laboratories, and governmental agencies with the control of CONTRACTOR. jurisdictional interests will have access to the Site and the Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspecting, 12.05 Delays Beyond OGf'NER's and CONTRACTOR's and testing. CONTRACTOR shall provide them proper and Control safe conditions for such access and advise them of CONTR,,ACTOR's Site safety procedures and programs so A. Where CONTRACTOR is prevented from complet- that they may comply therewith as applicable. ing any part of the Work within the Contract Times (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both OWNER 13.03 Tests and Inspections and CONTRACTOR, an extension of the Contract Times (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such A. CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER timely delay shall be CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, for such delay. tests, or approvals and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests. -34- B. OWNER shall employ and pay for the services of an B. If ENGINEER considers it necessary or advisable independent testing laboratory to perform all inspections, that covered Work be observed by ENGINEER or inspected tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents or tested by others, CONTRACTOR, at ENGINEER's except: request, shall uncover, expose, or otherwise make available for observation, inspection, or testing as ENGINEER may 1. for inspections, tests, or approvals covered require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all by paragraphs 13.03.0 and 13.03.13 below; necessary labor, material, and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective, CONTRACTOR shall pay ail 2. that costs incurred in connection ests Claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited e ctio n wit h or inspections conducted pursuant to paragraph to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and 13.04.13 shall be paid as provided in said paragraph other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute 13.043, and resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, and testing, and of 3. as otherwise specifically provided in the satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not Contract Documents. limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and OWNER shall be entitled to an appropriate C. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having decrease in the Contract Price. If the parties are unable to jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to agree as to the amount thereof, OWNER may make a Claim be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. If, however, such representative of such public body, CONTRACTOR shall Work is not found to be defective, CONTRACTOR shall be assume fu1l responsibility for arranging and obtaining such allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of inspections, tests, or approvals, pay all costs in connection the Contract Times (or Milestones), or both, directly attribut- x therewith and furnish ENGINEER the required certificates of able to such uncovering, exposure, po sure , observation , inspection, inspection v testing, replacement, and reconstruction. If the parties are or approval. g i P unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, D. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for arranging CONTRACTOR may make a Claim therefor as provided in and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any paragraph 10.05. inspections, tests, or approvals required for OWNER's and ENGINEER's acceptance of materials or equipment to be 13.05 Of WER ,Vfay Stop the Work incorporated in the Work; or acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to A. If the Work is defective, or CONTRACTOR fails to CONTRACTOR's purchase thereof for incorporation in the supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or Work. Such inspections, tests, or approvals shall be equipment, or fads to perform the Work in such a way that performed by organizations acceptable to OWNER and the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, ENGINEER. OWNER may order CONTRACTOR to stop the Work, or any porti6h thereof, until the cause for such order has been E. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be eliminated; however, this right of OWNER to stop the Work inspected, tested, or approved is covered by CONTRACTOR shall not give rise to any duty on the part of OWNER to without written concurrence of ENGINEER, it must, if exercise this right for the benefit of CONTRACTOR, any requested by ENGINEER, be uncovered for observation. Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or any surety for, or employee or agent of any of them. F. Uncovering Work as provided in paragraph 13.03.E shall be at CONTRACTOR's expense unless CON- 13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work TRACTOR has given ENGINEER timely notice of CONTRACTOR's intention to cover the same and ENGI- A. CONTRACTOR shall correct all defective Work, NEER has not acted with reasonable promptness in response whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed, or, if the to such notice. Work has been rejected by ENGINEER, remove it from the p Project and replace it with Work that is not defective. 13.04 Uncovering Work CONTRACTOR shall pay all Claims, costs, tosses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of ' A. If any Work is covered contrary to the written engineers, architects, attorneys, and other P rofessionals and request of ENGINEER, it must, if requested by ENGINEER, all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) be uncovered for ENGINEER's observation and replaced at arising out of or relating to such correction or removal CONTRACTOR's expense. (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). 35- 13.07 Correction Period ENGINEER's recommendation of final payment, ENGINEER) prefers to accept it, OWNER may do so. A. If within one year after the date of Substantial CONTRACTOR shall pay all Claims, costs, losses, and Completion or such longer period of time as may be damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and applicable special guarantee required by the Contract all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract attributable to OWNER's evaluation of and deterrnination to Documents, any Work is found to be defective, or if the repair accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by of any damages to the land or areas made available for ENGINEER as to reasonableness) and the duniaMW value CONTRACTOR's use by OWNER or permitted by Laws and of the Work to the extent not otherwise paid by Regulations as contemplated in paragraph 6,1 LA is found to CONTRACTOR pursuant to this sentence. If any such be defective, CONTRACTOR shall promptly, without cost to acceptance occurs prior to ENGINEER's recommendation of OWNER and in accordance with OWNER's written final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating instructions: (i) repair such defective land or areas, or (ii) the necessary revisions in the Contact Documents with correct such defective Work or, if the defective Work has respect to the Work, and OWNER shall be entitled to an been rejected by OWNER, remove it from the Project and appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, reflecting the replace it with Work that is not defective, and (iii) satisfac- dimini;hW value of Work so accepted. I€ the parties are torily correct or repair or remove and replace any damage to unable to agree as to the amount then OWNER may make other Work, to the work of others or other land or areas a Claire therefor as provided in panqMh M05. If the rem therabom. If CONTRACTOR does not promptly acceptance occurs after such recorrumadadon, an date comply with the terms of such inactions, or in an aaount will be paid by CONTRACTOR to OWNER_ emergency whoa delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, OWNER may have the defective Work corrected or 13.09 OWNER May Correct Defective Weak repaired or may have the rejected Work removed -and replaced, and all Claims, costs, losses, and damages A. If CONTRACTOR fails within a reasonable time (including but not limited to all few and charges of engineers, after written notice from ENGINIER to correct defective architects, attorneys, and other Wofassionals and all court or Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by admiration or other dispute resol tioa costs) arising out of or ENGINEER in accordance with paragrapki 13.06.A, or if relating to such correction or repair or such removal and CONTRACTOR faits to perform the Work in accordance replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or with the Contract Documents, or if CONTRACTOR fails to replacer se t of work of others) will be paid by comply with any other provision of the Contract Dock, CONTRACTOR. OWNER may after seven days written notice to CONTRACTOR, correct and mneEdy any such deficiancy- B. In special circurrstameas where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Substantial B. In exercising the rights and MnOdiu under this Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that paragraph, OWNER shall proceed expeditiously. In item may start to run from an earlier date if so provided in the connection with such corrective and remedial action, Specifications or by Written Amendcmea L OWNER may exclude CONTRACTOR fitomi all cc pmt of the Site, take possession of all or pot of the Work and C. Wheys defective Work (and damage to other Wok suspend CONTRACTOR's services related dweto, take resulting therefrom) has been corrected or removed and possession of CONTRACTOR's tools, appliances, con- replaced under this paragraph 13.07, the correction period skuction equipment and machinery at the Site, and incorpo- hereunder with respect to such Weak will be extended for an rate in the Wok all materials and equipment stored at the Site additional period of one year after such correction or removal or for which OWNER has paid CONTRACTOR but which and replacement has been satisfactorily completed are stored elsewhere, CONTRACTOR shall allow OWNER. OWNER's representatives, agents and employees, OWNER's D. CONTRACTOR's obligations under this paragraph other contractors, and ENGINEER and ENGINEER's 13.07 are in addition to any other obligation or warranty. The Consultants access to the Site to amble OWNER to exercise provision of this paragraph 13.07 shall not be construed as a the rights and remedies under this psragrapk substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute of limitation or repose. C. All Claims, courts, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all feels and charges of assincem architects, 13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolutm coats) incurred or sustained by A. If, instead of requiting correction or removal and OWNER in exercising the rights and remedies Wider this replacement of defective Work, OWNER (and, prior to paragraph 13.09 will be charged against CONTRACTOR, -36- ! and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the of CONTRACTOR stating that all previous progress necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to payments received on account of the Work have been the Work; and OWNER shall be entitled to an appropriate applied on account to discharge CONTRACTOR's decrease in the Contract Price. If the parties are unable to legitimate obligations associated with prior agree as to the amount of the adjustment, OWNER may make Applications for Payment. gre J Y a Claim therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be 3. The amount of retainage with respect to limited to all costs of repair, or replacement of work of others progress payments will be as stipulated in the destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement Agreement. of CONTRACTOR's defective Work. B. Review of Applications D. CONTRACTOR shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Times (or Milestones) because of any delay in 1. ENGINEER will, within 10 days after the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by receipt of each Application for Payment, either OWNER of OWNER's rights and remedies under this indicate in writing a recommendation of payment and paragraph 13.09. present the Application to OWNER or return the Application to CONTRACTOR indicating in writing ARTICLE 14 - PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND ENGINEER's reasons for refusing to recommend COMPLETION payment. In the latter case, CONTRACTOR may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. 14.01 Schedule of Values 2. ENGINEER'S recommendation of any A. The schedule of values established as provided in payment requested in an Application for Payment will paragraph 2.07.A will serve as the basis for progress constitute a representation by ENGINEER to OWN - payments and will be incorporated into a form of Application ER, based on ENGINEER's observations on the Site for Payment acceptable to ENGINEER. Progress payments of the executed Work as an experienced and qualified on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number design professional and on ENGINEER's review of Pp of units completed. the Application for Payment and the accompanying data and schedules that to the best of ENGINEER RIs 14.02 Progress Payments knowledge information and belief: A. Applications for Payments a the Work has progressed to the point indicated; 1. At least 20 days before the date established for each progress payment (but not more often than b. the quality of the Work is generally in once a month), CONTRACTOR shall submit to accordance with the Contract Documents (subject ENGINEER for review an Application for Payment to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning filled out and signed by CONTRACTOR covering the whole prior to or upon Substantial Completion, to Work completed as of the date of the Application and the results of any subsequent tests called for in the accompanied by such supporting documentation as is Contract Documents, to a final determination of required by the Contract Documents. If payment is quantities and classifications for Unit Price Work requested on the basis of materials and equipment not under paragraph 9.08, and to any other incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably qualifications stated in the recommendation); and stored at the Site or at another location agreed to in writing, the Application for Payment shall also be c. the conditions precedent to accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice, or other docu- CONTRACTOR's being entitled to such payment mentation warranting that OWNER has received the appear to have been fulfilled in so far as it is materials and equipment free and clear of all Liens ENGINEER's responsibility to observe the Work. and evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance or other 3. By recommending any such payment arrangements to protect OWNER's interest therein, all ENGINEER will 'not thereby be deemed to have of which must be satisfactory to OWNER. represented that: (i) inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been 2. Beginning with the second Application for performed have been exhaustive, extended to every Payment, each Application shall include an affidavit aspect of the Work in progress, or involved detailed -37- inspections of the Work beyond the responsibilities 1. Ten days after presentation of the Applica- specifically assigned to ENGINEER in the Contract tion for Payment to OWNER with ENGINEER's Documents; or (ii) that there may not be other matters recommendation, the amount recommended will or issues between the parties that might entitle CON- (subject to the provisions of paragraph 14.02.D) TRACTOR to be paid additionally by OVi'NER or become due, and when due will be paid by OWNER entitle OWNER to withhold payment to CONTRAC- to CONTRACTOR. TOR. D. Reduction in Payment 4. Neither ENGINEER's review of CONTRACTOR's Work for the purposes of recom- 1. OWNER may refuse to make payment of mending payments nor ENGINEER's recommenda- the full amount recommended by ENGINEER tion of any payment, including final payment, will because: impose responsibility on ENGINEER to supervise, direct, or control the Work or for the means, methods, a. claims have been made against OWNER techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, on account of CONTRACTOR's performance or or the safety precautions and programs incident furnishing of the Work; thereto, or for CONTRACTOR's failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to b. Liens have been filed in connection with CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work. the Work, except where CONTRACTOR has Additionally, said review or recommendation will not delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to OWIN'ER impose responsibility on ENGINEER to make any to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such examination to ascertain how or for what purposes Liens; CONTRACTOR has used the moneys paid on account of the Contract Price, or to determine that title to any c, there are other items entitling OWNER to a of the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to set -off against the amount recommended; or OWNER free and clear of any Liens. d. OWNER has actual knowledge of the 5. ENGINEER may refuse to recommend the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in whole or any part of any payment if, in ENGINEER's paragraphs 14.02.B.5.a through 14.02.B.5.c or opinion, it would be incorrect to make the representa- paragraph 15.02.A. tions to OWNER referred to in paragraph 14.02.B.2. ENGINEER may also refuse to recommend any such 2. If OWNER refuses to make payment of the payment or, because of subsequently discovered full amount recommended by ENGINEER, OWNER evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or must give CONTRACTOR immediate written notice tests, revise or revoke any such payment (with a copy to ENGINEER) stating the 'reasons for recommendation previously made, to such extent as such action and promptly pay CONTRACTOR any may be necessary in ENGINEER's opinion to protect amount remaining after deduction of the amount so OWNER from loss because: withheld. OWNER shall promptly pay CONTRACTOR the amount so withheld, or any a. the Work is defective, or completed Work adjustment thereto agreed to by OWNER and has been damaged, requiring correction or replace- CONTRACTOR, when CONTRACTOR corrects to ment; OWNER's satisfaction the reasons for such action. b. the Contract Price has been reduced by 3. if it is subsequently determined that Written Amendment or Change Orders: OWNER's refusal of payment was not justified, the amount wrongfully withheld shall be treated as an c. OWNER has been required to correct amount due as determined by paragraph 14.02.C.1. defective Work or complete Work in accordance with paragraph 13.09; or 14.03 CONTRACTOR 's Warranty of Title d. ENGINEER has actual knowledge of the A. CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees that title occurrence of any of the events enumerated in to all Work, materials, and equipment covered by any paragraph 15.02.A. Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to OWNER no later than the time of payment C. Payment Becomes Due free and clear of all Liens. -38- 14.04 Substantial Completion 14.05 Partial Utilization A. When CONTRACTOR considers the entire Work A. Use by OWNER at OWNER's option of any ready for its intended use CONTRACTOR shall notify substantially completed part of the Work which has OWNER and ENGINEER in writing that the entire Work is specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or substantially complete (except for items specifically listed by which OWNER, ENGINEER, and CONTRACTOR agree CONTRACTOR as incomplete) and request that ENGINEER constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the issue a certificate of Substantial Completion. Promptly Work that can be used by OWNER for its intended purpose thereafter, OWNER, CONTRACTOR, and ENGINEER shall without significant interference with CONTRACTOR's make an inspection of the Work to determine the status of performance of the remainder of the Work, may be completion. If ENGINEER does not consider the Work accomplished prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work substantially complete, ENGINEER will notify subject to the following conditions. CONTRACTOR in writing giving the reasons therefor. If ENGINEER considers the Work substantially complete, 1. OWNER at any time may request CON- ENGINEER will prepare and deliver to OWNER a tentative TRACTOR in writing to permit OWNER to use any certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date such part of the Work which OWNER believes to be of Substantial Completion. There shall be attached to the ready for its intended use and substantially complete. certificate a tentative list of items to be completed or If CONTRACTOR agrees that such part of the Work corrected before final payment. OWNER shall have seven is substantially complete, CONTRACTOR will certify days after receipt of the tentative certificate during which to to OWNER and ENGINEER that such part of the make written objection to ENGINEER as to any provisions of Work is substantially complete and request ENGI- the certificate or attached list. If, after considering such NEER to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion objections, ENGINEER concludes that the Work is not for that part of the Work. CONTRACTOR at any substantially complete, ENGINEER will within 14 days after time may notify OWNER and ENGINEER in writing submission of the tentative certificate to OWNER notify that CONTRACTOR considers any such part of the CONTRACTOR in writing, stating the reasons therefor. If, Work ready for its intended use and substantially after consideration of OWNER's objections, ENGINEER complete and request ENGINEER to issue a certifi- considers the Work substantially complete, ENGINEER will cate of Substantial Completion for that part of the within said l4 days execute and deliver to OWNER and Work. Within a reasonable time after either such CONTRACTOR a definitive certificate of Substantial request, OWNER, CONTRACTOR, and ENGINEER Completion (with a revised tentative list of items to be shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to completed or corrected) reflecting such changes from the determine its status of completion. If ENGINEER tentative certificate as ENGINEER believes justified after does not consider that part of the Work to be substan- consideration of any objections from OWNER. At the time tially complete, ENGINEER will notify OWNER and of delivery of the tentative certificate of Substantial Comple- CONTRACTOR in writing giving the reasons there - tion ENGINEER will deliver to OWNER and CONTRAC- for. If ENGINEER considers that part of the Work to TOR a written recommendation as to division of responsibili- be substantially complete, the provisions of paragraph ties pending final payment between OWNER and 14.04 will apply with respect to certification of CONTRACTOR with respect to security, operation, safety, Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and and protection of the Work, maintenance, heat, utilities, the division of responsibility in respect thereof and insurance, and warranties and guarantees. Unless OWNER access thereto. and CONTRACTOR agree otherwise in writing and so inform ENGINEER in writing prior to ENGINEER's issuing 2. No occupancy or separate operation of part the definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, of the Work may occur prior to compliance with the ENGINEER's aforesaid recommendation will be binding on requirements of paragraph 5.10 regarding property OWNER and CONTRACTOR until final payment. insurance. B. OWNER shall have the right to exclude 14.06 Final Inspection CONTRACTOR from the Site after the date of Substantial Completion, but OWNER shall allow CONTRACTOR A. Upon written notice from CONTRACTOR that the reasonable access to complete or correct items on the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, tentative list. ENGINEER will promptly make a final inspection with OWNER and CONTRACTOR and will notify CON- TRACTOR in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. CONTRACTOR shall immediately take such measures as are -39- necessary to complete such Work or remedy such for Payment, indicate in writing ENGINEER's deficiencies. recommendation of payment and present the Applica- tion for Payment to OWNER for payment. At the 14.07 Final Payment same time ENGINEER will also give written notice to OWNER and CONTRACTOR that the Work is A. Application for Payment acceptable subject to the provisions of paragraph 14.09. Otherwise, ENGINEER will return the 1. After CONTRACTOR has, in the opinion Application for Payment to CONTRACTOR, indicat- of ENGINEER, satisfactorily completed all ing in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend corrections identified during the final inspection and final payment, in which case CONTRACTOR shall has delivered, in accordance with the Contract Docu- make the necessary corrections and resubmit the ments, all maintenance and operating instructions, Application for Payment. schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance certificates of inspection, C. Payment Becomes Due marked -up record documents (as provided in paragraph 6.12), and other documents, CONTRAC- I. Thirty days after the presentation to OWN - TOR may make application for final payment follow- ER of the Application for Payment and accompanying ing the procedure for progress payments. documentation, the amount recommended by ENGI- NEER will become due and, when due, will be paid 2. The final Application for Payment shall be by OWNER to CONTRACTOR. accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: (i) all documentation called for in the Contract Docu- 14.08 Final Compledom Delayed ments, including but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by subparagraph 5.04.B.7; (ii) con - A. If, through no fault of CONTRACTOR, final sent of the surety, if any, to final payment; and (iii) completion of the Work is significantly delayed, and if complete and legally effective releases or waivers ENGINEER so confirms, OWNER shall, upon receipt of (satisfactory to OWNER) of all Lien rights arising out CONTRACTOR's final Application for Payment and of or Liens filed in connection with the Work. recommendation of ENGINEER, and without terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion 3. In lieu of the releases or waivers of Liens of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining specified in paragraph 14.07.A.2 and as approved by balance to be held by OWNER for Work not fully completed OWNER, CONTRACTOR may furnish receipts or or corrected is less than the reudnage stipulated in the releases in full and an affidavit of CONTRACTOR Agreement, and if Bonds have been furnished as required in that: (i) the releases and receipts include all labor, paragraph 5.01, the written consent of the surety to the services, material, and equipment for which a Lien payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully could be filed; and (ii) all payrolls, material and completed and accepted shall be submitted by CON - equipment bills, and other indebtedness connected TRACTOR to ENGINEER with the Application for such with the Work for which OWNER or OWNER's payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and property might in any way be responsible have been conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not paid or otherwise satisfied If any Subcontractor or constitute a waiver of Claims. Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, CONTRACTOR may famish a Bond or other 14.09 Waiver of Claims collateral satisfactory to OWNER to indemnify OWNER against any Lien. A. The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: B. Review of Application and Acceptance 1. a waiver of all Claims by OWNER against I. I& on the basis of ENGINEER's observa- CONTRACTOR, except Claims arising from lion of the Welt during construction and final inspec- unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after tion, and ENGMEER's review of the final Applic a- final inspection pursuant to paragraph 14.06, from lion for Payment aed accmn waying documentation as failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the required by the Contract Documents. ENGINEER is terms of any special guarantees specified therein, or satisfied that the Work has been completed and from CONTRACTOR's continuing obligations under CONTRACTOR's other obligations under the Con- the Contract Documents; and tract Documents have been Rdfilled, ENGINEER will, within ten days after receipt of the final Application -40- 2. a waiver of all Claims by CONTRACTOR stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as OWNER may deem against OWNER other than those previously made in expedient. In such case, CONTRACTOR shall not be writing which are still unsettled, entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not ARTICLE 15 - SUSPENSION OF WORK AND limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, TERMINATION attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by OWNER arising out of or relating to completing the Work, such excess 15.01 OWNER May Suspend Work will be paid to CONTRACTOR. If such claims, costs, losses, and damages exceed such unpaid balance, CONTRACTOR A. At any time and without cause, OWNER may shall pay the difference to OWNER. Such claims, costs, suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not losses, and damages incurred by OWNER will be reviewed more than 90 consecutive days by notice in writing to CON- by ENGINEER as to their reasonableness and, when so TRACTOR and ENGINEER which will fix the date on which approved by ENGINEER, incorporated in a Change Order. Work will be resumed. CONTRACTOR shall resume the When exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph Work on the date so fixed CONTRACTOR shall be allowed OWNER shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the the Work performed. Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if CONTRACTOR makes a Claim therefor as C. Where CONTRACTOR's services have been so provided in paragraph 10.05. terminated by OWNER, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of OWNER against CONTRACTOR then 15.02 OWNER May Terminate for Cause existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due CONTRACTOR by OWNER will A. The occurrence of any one or more of the following not release CONTRACTOR from liability. events will justify termination for cause: 15.03 OWNER May Terminate For Convenience 1. CONTRACTGR's persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract A. Upon seven days written notice to CONTRACTOR Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to and ENGINEER, OWNER may, without cause and without supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials prejudice to any other right or remedy of OWNER, elect to or equipment or failure to adhere to the progress terminate the Contract. In such case, CONTRACTOR shall schedule established under paragraph 2.07 as adjusted be paid (without duplication of any items): from time to time pursuant to paragraph 6.04); 1. for completed and acceptable Work execut- 2. CONTRACTOR's disregard of Laws or ed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such 3. CONTRACTOR's disregard of the author- Work; ity of ENGINEER; or 2. for expenses sustained prior to the effective 4. CONTRACTOR's violation in any date of termination in performing services and fur substantial way of any provisions of - the Contract nishing labor, materials, or equipment as required by Documents. the Contract Documents in connection with uncom- pleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for B. If one or more of the events identified in paragraph overhead and profit on such expenses; 15.02.A occur, OWNER may, after giving CONTRACTOR (and the surety, if any) seven days written notice, terminate 3. for all claims, costs, losses, and damages the services of CONTRACTOR, exclude. CONTRACTOR (including but not limited to all fees and charges of from the Site, and take possession of the Work and of all engineers, architects, attorneys, and other CONTRACTOR's tools, appliances, construction equipment, professionals and all court or arbitration or other and machinery at the Site, and use the same to the full extent dispute resolution costs) incurred in settlement of they could be used by CONTRACTOR (without liability to terminated contracts with Subcontractors, Suppliers, CONTRACTOR for trespass or conversion), incorporate in and others; and the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which OWNER has paid CONTRACTOR but which are -41- i 4, for reasonable expenses directly ARTICLE 17 - MISCELLANEOUS attributable to termination. B. CONTRACTOR shall not be paid on account of loss 17.01 Giving Notice of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. A. Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, it will be deemed to have 15.04 CONTRACTOR May Stop Work or Terminate been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for A. If, through no act or fault of CONTRACTOR, the whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or Work is suspended for more than 90 consecutive days by certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address OWNER or under an order of court or other public authority, known to the giver of the notice. or ENGINEER fails to act on any Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or OWNER fails for 30 17.02 Computation of Times days to pay CONTRACTOR any sum finally determined to be due, then CONTRACTOR may, upon seven days written A. When any period of time is referred to in the notice to OWNER and ENGINEER, and provided OWNER Contract Documents by days, it will be computed to exclude or ENGINEER do not remedy such suspension or failure the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day within that time, terminate the Contract and recover from of any such period falls on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day OWNER payment on the same terms as provided in made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable jurisdiction, paragraph 15.03. In lieu of terminating the Contract and such day will be omitted from the computation. without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if ENGINEER has failed to act on an Application for Payment within 30 17.03 Cumulative Remedies days after it is submitted, or OWNER has failed for 30 days to pay CONTRACTOR any sum finally determined to be A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General due, CONTRACTOR may, seven days after written notice to Conditions and the rights and remedies available hereunder to OWNER and ENGINEER, stop the Work until payment is the parties hereto are in addition to, and are not to be made of all such amounts due CONTRACTOR, including construed in any way as a limitation of, any rights and interest thereon. The provisions of this paragraph 15.04 are remedies available to any or all of them which are otherwise not intended to preclude CONTRACTOR from making a imposed or available by Laws or. Regulations, by special Claim under paragraph 10.05 for an adjustment in Contract warranty or guarantee, or by other provisions of the Contract Price or Contract Times or otherwise for expenses or damage Documents, and the provisions of this paragraph will be as directly attributable to CONTRACTOR's stopping the Work effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract as permitted by this paragraph. Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right, and remedy to which they apply. ARTICLE 16 - DISPUTE RESOLUTION 17.04 Survival of Obligations A. All representations, indemnifications, warranties, 16.01 Methods and Procedures and guarantees made in, required by, or given in accordance with the Contract Documents, as well as all continuing A. Dispute resolution methods and procedures, if any, obligations indicated in the Contract Documents, will survive shall be as set forth in the Supplementary Conditions. If no final payment, completion, and acceptance of the Work or method and procedure has been set forth, and subject to the termination or completion of the Agreement. provisions of paragraphs 9.09 and 10.05, OWNER and CON- TRACTOR may exercise such rights or remedies as either 17.05 Controlling Law may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute. A. This Contract is to be governed by the law of the state in which the Project is located. i -42- SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS The following supplements modify, change from, or add to the Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract ", EJCDC 1910 -8, (1996 edition). All unaltered provisions of the General Conditions shall remain in effect. The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions which are defined in the Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract (EJCDC No. 1910 -8, 1996 edition) have the meanings assigned to them in the General Conditions. ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 1.01 A.28. NOTICE OF AWARD AND 1.01 A.29 NOTICE TO PROCEED - Add the following to each definition: If requested by the OWNER, both the Notice of Award and Notice to Proceed will be issued by the ENGINEER. 1.01 A.43. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION - Add the following to its definition: Substantial Completion of work shall be evidenced by the ability to place and keep into service the new facilities including the attainment of release for service from all agencies having jurisdiction. The CONTRACTOR shall take this requirement into proper account when developing a proposed project schedule. In general, substantial completion is defined by the ability of the OWNER to use all features of the new facilities for their intended purpose, as defined by the ENGINEER. 1.01 A.51. Add the following: BIDDER - Any individual, partnership, corporation, or joint venture submitting a Bid for the Work to be performed. 1.01 A.52. Add the following: RESIDENT PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE - The Resident Project Representative (RPR) may be assigned to the site or any part thereof on a full time basis or a part time basis. This will be determined by Engineer's Agreement with Owner. ARTICLE 2 - PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.02 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS: Delete in its entirety and substitute the following: All copies of documents necessary for the execution of the Work, including but not limited to permitting will be furnished to the CONTRACTOR at the Engineer's normal rate for reproduction. The CONTRACTOR shall bear all costs for the documents requested. Only full sets of plans and specifications will be issued. Documents will not be made available to the Contractor electronically. SGC -1 WF109000 2.03 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIMES; NOTICE TO PROCEED: Delete in its entirety and substitute the following: The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in a Notice to Proceed. If there is no Notice to Proceed, it shall be the date of the OWNER - CONTRACTOR Agreement or such other date as may be established therein. 2.05 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION: Add the following to Section 2.05 A.: Failure to report a conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy shall be deemed as evidence that the CONTRACTOR has elected to proceed in the more expensive manner and shall expose the CONTRACTOR for all costs associated with, or caused by, the conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy. Add the following to Section 2.05: D. The CONTRACTOR shall perform no portion of the Work at any time without Contract Documents or, where required, approved shop drawings or Product Data for such portion of the Work. E. By executing the Contract, the CONTRACTOR represents that he has visited the site, reviewed available plans of existing facilities, familiarized himself with the local conditions under which the Work is to be performed, and correlated his observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Add the following to Section 2.05 B.3.: The schedule of values shall be broken down in sufficient detail, and by appropriate categories, to allow the proper distribution of project costs and is subject to acceptance by the ENGINEER. The format and presentation method used for the schedule of values shall be as required by the Engineer and is subject to the Engineer's approval. An extremely detailed schedule will be required. ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE Add the following to Section 3.01: D. Failure to report a conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy shall be deemed as evidence that the CONTRACTOR has elected to proceed in the more expensive manner. If, during the performance of the Work, the CONTRACTOR finds an error or discrepancy between the specifications and the drawings, the specifications shall govern over the drawings. If the drawings disagree in themselves, figures shall govern over scaled measurements, large scale drawings shall govern over small scale drawings, the greater quantity of work or materials shall be furnished or performed; descriptive writings shall govern over legends indicating material or conditions and the Agreement takes precedence over all other contract documents. SGC -2 WF109000 i ARTICLE 4 - AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCED POINTS: Section 4.02 A.1. Delete in its entirety and replace with: The CONTRACTOR shall have full responsibility with respect to determining subsurface conditions at the site. Add the following to Section 4.02 B.: 4.02 B.4., any data that could be reasonably suspected not to be accurate unless it has not been confirmed in writing by the OWNER or ENGINEER to be a reasonable representation of accurate and authentic record information. Delete Section 4.04 B. and insert the following: Existing utilities and structures are shown on the drawings in accordance with Section 01019, General Requirements, Paragraph 1.01. Add the following to Section 4.05.: All locations shown on the drawings are established from a baseline, the bearing and starting point of which are identified on the drawings. All construction staking shall be provided by the Contractor's Professional Surveyor. Grades shown are finished grades. Written dimensions have preference over scaled dimensions. All elevations are based on the National Geodetic Vertical Datum (N.G.V.D.), unless otherwise noted. ARTICLE 5 - BONDS AND INSURANCE 5.01 A. PERFORMANCE, PAYMENT AND OTHER BONDS: Delete the first sentence and substitute the following: CONTRACTOR shall furnish performance and payment bonds, each in an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all CONTRACTOR's obligations under the Contract documents. The bonds shall comply with the i requirements of Florida Statutes Section 255.05. All bonds shall be supplied on the forms P documents. provided in the bid d cumen . 5.01 B. Add the following: The CONTRACTOR shall record all performance and payment bonds in the County where the work is to be performed and provide evidence of such recording to the ENGINEER. No work shall be performed until this requirement is satisfied. SGC -3 WF109000 5.04 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE: Add the following: C. The limits of liability for the insurance required by Paragraph 5.04 shall provide coverage for not less than the following amounts. 1. Workers' Compensation: a. State Statutory b. Applicable Federal (e.g.) Longshoreman's Statutory C. Employer's Liability $500,000 2. Commercial General Liability: (Including Premises & Operations: All Risk Owners & Contractor's Protective; Broad Form Property Damage) a. Bodily Injury & Property Damage: Each Occurrence $1,000,000 Aggregate $2,000,000 Product's & Completed Operations Aggregate $2,000,000 b. Personal Injury: $2,000,000 C. CU coverage, remove exclusion (yes) d. Contractual (yes) 3. Comprehensive Automobile Liability: (owner - leased- non -owned & hired) a. Bodily Injury & Property Damage: Each Occurrence $1,000,000 (or) b. Bodily Injury: Each Person $1,000,000 Each Occurrence $1,000,000 Property Damage: Each Occurrence $1,000,000 SGC -4 WF109000 D. Additional liability coverage for OWNER and ENGINEER shall be provided by endorsement as additional insured on CONTRACTOR's General Liability Policy. Add the following names: i OWNER - Village of Tequesta 345 Tequesta Drive Tequesta, FL 33469 ENGINEER - Arcadis, Inc. and their employees 2801 Vista Parkway West Palm Beach, Florida 33411 The additional liability coverage for the ENGINEER is not to be construed as to requiring, in any way, that either the OWNER or CONTRACTOR be obligated to supply insurance protecting the ENGINEER for its liability emanating from professional errors or omissions. E. In conformance with the requirements of Section 725.06, Florida Statutes, the specific considerations for the CONTRACTOR's promises are: 1. One dollar ($1.00) in hand paid by the OWNER, the ENGINEER, and the ENGINEER's employees to the CONTRACTOR, receipt whereof is hereby acknowledged and the adequacy of which the CONTRACTOR accepts as completely fulfilling the obligations of the OWNER, the ENGINEER, and the ENGINEER's employees under the requirements of Section 725.06, Florida Statutes, and; 2. The entry of the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR into the construction contract because but for the CONTRACTOR's P romises as contained in the General Conditions the OWNER would not have entered into the construction contract with the CONTRACTOR. 5.06 PROPERTY INSURANCE: Delete 5.06 A in its entirety and insert the following: A. Unless otherwise provided in these Supplementary General Conditions, the Contractor shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the Work and stored material on the site at the full insurable value thereof (subject to such deductible amounts as may be provided in these Supplementary General Conditions or as required by law). This insurance shall include the interests of the Owner, Contractor and Subcontractors in the Work, shall insure against the perils and extended coverage, shall include "all risk" insurance for physical loss and damage including heft damage and malicious mischief, collapse and water damage, and such other 9 � 9 P 9 perils as may be provided in these Supplementary General Conditions, and shall include damages, losses and expenses arising out of, or resulting from, any insured loss or any loss incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property (including fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals). If not covered under the "all risk" insurance or otherwise provided in these Supplementary General Conditions, the Contractor shall purchase and maintain similar property insurance on portions of the Work stored on and off the site or in transit when such portions of the Work are to be included in an Application for Payment. The policies of insurance required to be purchased and maintained by the Contractor in accordance with paragraphs 5.06 A and 5.06 B shall contain a provision that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed until at least thirty day's prior written notice has been given to the Owner. SGC -5 WF109000 ARTICLE 6 - CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES _ Add the following to Section 6.01 A.: The Contract Documents are intended to communicate the nature of the design, concept and scope of the Work. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the construction and coordination of the parts and all systems shall be complete, compatible and fully functional without additional cost, to the standard of the industry, as defined by the ENGINEER, or better, as may be set forth in these documents. In the event that an agent or other representative of the OWNER approves the installation or erection of any item of material and the CONTRACTOR concludes the same is not fabricated in a good, workman -like manner, the CONTRACTOR shall forthwith advise the OWNER and ENGINEER thereof in writing. Delete the last sentence prior to subheading "A" in Section 6.05 A.1. and replace with the following: For purposes of this paragraph 6.05 A.1, a proposed item of material or equipment may be considered functionally equal to an item if: Add the following to Section 6.05 A.1.: In general, "or equal" items will not be considered unless the drawings or specifications specifically state, "or equal" in the description of the particular item of equipment or material. Add the following to Section 6.05 A.2.c.: Any requests for the use of substitute items shall be made within 30 days of the effective date of the Agreement. The substitution procedure shall be as set forth in Section 01019, General - Requirements. Section 01019, General Requirements may also further limit the items for which substitutions will be considered. For any provisions of Section 01019, General Requirements, related to substitutions which are in conflict with Section 6.05 A.2.d., the criteria set forth in Section 01019 General Requirements, shall take precedence. Delete Section 6.05 B. in its entirety. Add the following to Section 6.06 B.: Subcontractors named on the proposal form shall not be changed by the CONTRACTOR unless specifically requested per the above by the OWNER or ENGINEER. Any subcontractor change prior to award shall follow the procedure set forth in the Instructions to Bidders. Add the following to Section 6.06.C.: Owner or Engineer may furnish to any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization, to the extent practicable, evidence of amounts paid to Contractor in accordance with Contractor's Applications for Payment. Add the following to Section 6.08: The CONTRACTOR shall be required to secure all necessary permits from Palm Beach County and the Village of Tequesta. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for acquiring all necessary construction permits related to this project. The Contractor shall pay all permit fees except those due to the Village of Tequesta. Permit fees due to the Village of Tequesta shall be paid by the Owner directly to the Village. SGC -6 WF109000 Section 6.12.: Delete the last sentence and substitute the following: These shall be available to the ENGINEER for examination and shall be delivered to ENGINEER for OWNER prior to, and as a partial condition of, Substantial Completion of the Work. 6.21 Add the following: The CONTRACTOR shall reimburse the OWNER for the total cost of all services rendered by the ENGINEER when made necessary by any, or all, of the following: A. Acceleration of the work schedule. B. Work not within normal working hours as established pursuant to the requirements of these documents and the award of the project. For purposes of this determination the Contractor shall assume the Engineer or his representative shall be on site at all times the Contractor is on site. C. Default by the CONTRACTOR or any subcontractor. D. Failure to complete the project, either substantial completion or final completion, or both, within the time frames stipulated by these documents, plus any ENGINEER approved time extensions. Note that any such costs are in addition to any liquidated damages for which the CONTRACTOR may be exposed. E. Work damaged by fire or other causes during construction. ARTICLE 9 - ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 9.01 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE: Delete the first sentence and substitute the following: If the OWNER and ENGINEER agree, ENGINEER will be OWNER's representative during the construction period. The Engineer and Resident Project Representative's (RPR's) duties, responsibilities and authorities shall be as agreed by the Owner and Engineer and as set forth at h r - resent the t e pre -construction conference. If the Owner designates another agent to re P 9 P 9 Owner at the site who is not Engineer's agent or employee, the duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of such other agent will be presented at the pre- construction conference. ARTICLE 11 - COST OF WORK; CASH ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK: Add the following to Section 11.02.: It is further understood that the bidding allowance, if identified on the bid form, shall be authorized and utilized solely in accordance with the terms and conditions set forth in Section 01150 of the project specifications. Delete section 11.03.C. in its entirety and substitute the following in its place: Contractor may not make claim for additional expenses incurred as a result of a difference between final quantity of any item(s) of Unit Price Work and the estimated quantity of such item(s) in the Contract Documents, unless specifically allowed in the Bid Form. Any adjustments specifically allowed shall be made in accordance with directions in the Bid Form. SGC -7 WF109000 ARTICLE 12 - CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES: Add the following to Section 12.01 B.: 4. In the event that the CONTRACTOR encounters field conditions which create a need to alter the plans or specifications and induce a need for a Change Order (as agreed to by the OWNER and ENGINEER and in satisfaction of other applicable criteria set forth herein related to acceptance and approval of Change Orders) the OWNER reserves the right to not approve the Change Order. In this event the OWNER will correct the field condition giving rise to the need for a Change Order, or otherwise eliminate the need, with their own or other forces. Should this occur, the CONTRACTOR shall coordinate their field activities with the OWNER to accommodate this work. Add the following to Section 12.04 A.: All equipment lier performance ie. efficiency, subcontractor or su , and /or material delivery and su P ( Y rY PP etc.) shall be considered to be within the control of the CONTRACTOR. No time extension shall be granted for delays due to equipment and /or material manufacturing, delivery, or failure to perform according to the contract. No time extension shall be granted unless the N CONTRACTOR can demonstrate with the agreement of the ENGINEER that the original critical path requires or would have required, modification. Delete Section 12.06 A. and replace with the following: No claim for damages o r any n claim other than for an extension of time shall be made or � asserted against Village by reason of any delays. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Sum or payment or compensation of any kind from Owner for direct, indirect, consequential, impact or other costs, expenses, or damages, including, but not limited to, costs cause of delay, dis interference of acceleration or inefficiency, arising be y, p , or hindrance from any cause whatsoever, whether such delay, disruption, interference or hindrance be reasonable or unreasonable, foreseeable, or avoidable or unavoidable. Contractor shall be entitled only to extensions of the contract time as the sole and exclusive remedy for such resulting delays, in accordance with and to the extent specifically provided herein. ARTICLE 13 - TEST AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK Delete ara rah 13.03 and insert the following: P 9 P 9 The cost of all inspections, tests, re- tests, certifications and approvals required by the Contract Documents shall be paid by the CONTRACTOR. All such tests and inspections shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory. The laboratory shall be subject to the acceptance of the ENGINEER. All re- testing requested by the ENGINEER shall be paid for by the CONTRACTOR. ARTICLE 14 - PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION 14.02 A.1. APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS: Delete the first three words of the first sentence and insert the following: At least 30 ..... SGC -8 WF109000 Delete from the second sentence "by a bill of sale, invoice or other documentation ". Insert "by documentation in accordance with Section 01150, Measurement and Payment ". Add the following: The Contractor shall use and complete the cover sheet provided by the Engineer for each progress payment. Additional requirements as set forth in Sections 01150 shall be followed. When the Contractor receives payment from the Owner for labor, services or materials furnished by subcontractors and /or suppliers hired by the Contractor, the Contractor shall remit payment due those parties within ten (10) days after receipt of payment, or earlier, unless otherwise provided by Florida Law. Add the following to Section 14.04 A.: Regardless of the foregoing nothing herein shall alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete the construction services, materials and items herein by the Owner. 14.02.C.: Delete the first two words and replace with following: "Unless stipulated to the " ... contra in Section 01150, Measurement and Payment, twenty-five"... contrary Y � tY - Add the following to Section 14.07 A.: 4. Before final payment, the CONTRACTOR shall submit executed copies of the release forms (page SGC -11 & SGC -12) releasing the OWNER and the ENGINEER of the obligations as described on the form. The CONTRACTOR shall also provide an executed and notarized affidavit with the final pay request which stipulates that all vendors, suppliers and subcontractors have been paid in full. Before final payment, the CONTRACTOR shall supply final releases of lien as set forth herein. 14.07 A.3. FINAL PAYMENT: Add the following: 9 The affidavit of Contractor as referenced herein shall be provided on the form supplied in the Supplementary General Conditions, fully executed. ARTICLE 15 - SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATIONS Delete paragraph 15.03. in its entirety and insert the following in its place: The Owner may terminate this contract for convenience upon providing Contractor fourteen (14) days written notice of the same. If the Contractor is terminated as provided herein, the Contractor shall be paid for all work executed and expenses incurred prior to the date of termination. Payment shall include services actually performed in full prior to termination date, but shall excluded all lost profits, indirect, special, or other damages for the remainder of the project. If a Court of competent jurisdiction finds that the Village wrongfully terminated this Contract, then in such event, this Contract shall be deemed terminated for convenience as provided for in Section 15.03 of the Supplemental Conditions and the Contractor shall not be entitled to damages or loss of profits, but shall include all items provided for in Section 15.03 above. SGC -9 WF109000 ARTICLE 16 - DISPUTE RESOLUTION Add the following to Section 16.01 B. This agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of Florida as now and hereinafter in force. The parties to this agreement stipulate venue and jurisdiction for any litigation arising out of this agreement to be in the Circuit Court in and for Palm Beach County, Florida. SGC -10 WF109000 RELEASE hereinafter referred to as "the CONTRACTOR" hereby unconditionally releases and forever discharges Arcadis, Inc. its officers, directors, employees and agents, hereinafter collectively referred to as "ENGINEER" from any and all legal or equitable causes of action, suits, damages, claims and demands whatsoever, which CONTRACTOR ever had or now has against ENGINEER directly or indirectly, whether known or unknown, for, upon or by reason of any matter, cause or thing whatsoever, whether known or unknown, including, but not limited to: All claims arising out of, or in any way related to, the design, negotiation, supervision, or performance of a project known as the Village of Tequesta Water Treatment Plant 3.6 MGD Expansion in accordance with a contract dated between the CONTRACTOR and the Village of Tequesta and Drawings and Specifications prepared by ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR: By: Title: STATE OF FLORIDA ) ) SS. COUNTY OF I HEREBY CERTIFY that on this day, before me, an officer duly authorized in the state aforesaid and in the county aforesaid to take acknowledgments, personally appeared , to me known to be the person described in and who executed the foregoing instrument and has acknowledged before me that he executed the same. WITNESS my hand and official seal in the county and state aforesaid this day of 20_ NOTARY PUBLIC, 1 State of Florida at Large (NOTARY SEAL) My commission expires: I WF109000 SGC -11 i RELEASE hereinafter referred to as "the CONTRACTOR" hereby unconditionally releases and forever discharges the Village of Tequesta, its officers, directors, employees and agents, hereinafter collectively referred to as "OWNER" from any and all legal or equitable causes of action, suits, damages, claims and demands whatsoever, which CONTRACTOR ever had or now has against OWNER directly or indirectly, whether known or unknown, for, upon or by reason of any matter, cause or thing whatsoever, whether known or unknown, including, but not limited to: All claims arising out of, or in any way related to, the design, negotiation, supervision, or performance of a project known as the Village of Tequesta Water Treatment Plant 3.6 MGD Expansion in accordance with a contract dated between the CONTRACTOR and the Village of Tequesta. CONTRACTOR By: Title: STATE OF FLORIDA ) ) SS. COUNTY OF I HEREBY CERTIFY that on this day, before me, an officer duly authorized in the state aforesaid and in the county personally appeared aforesaid to take acknowledgments, tY P y , to me known to be the person described in and who executed the foregoing instrument and has acknowledged before me that he executed the same. WITNESS my hand and official seal in the county and state aforesaid this day of 20_• NOTARY PUBLIC, State of Florida at Large (NOTARY SEAL) My commission expires: SGC -12 WF109000 SECTION 01019 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01 EXISTING UTILITIES AND STRUCTURES: The existing utilities and facilities shown on the drawings were located from the Owner's and other records. Guaranty is not made that all existing facilities are shown or that those shown are entirely accurate. The Contractor shall assure himself of any utilities, structures or facilities prior to performing any Work. Prior to the start of Work, the Contractor shall request each utility agency to advise him of the location of their facilities in the vicinity. The Owner and the Engineer will assume no liability for damages sustained or costs incurred because of the Contractor's operations in the vicinity of existing utilities or structures. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of any deviation between existing conditions and the drawings. When structures and utilities have been properly shown or marked and are disturbed or damaged in the execution of the Work, they must be repaired immediately in conformance with best standard practice and the approval of the Owner of the damaged utility or structure. In the case of structures and utilities which have not been properly shown or located as outlined above and are disturbed or damaged in the prosecution of the Work, take whatever steps are necessary for safety and notify the affected utility Owner and avoid any actions which might cause further damage to the structure or utility. Should the Work require repairs, changes, or modifications of the Owner's utilities as well as other utilities, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to provide for the maintenance of continuous water, sewage, electric, telephone and other utility services to all present customers of such utilities, unless approval in writing is secured from the applicable utility company or Owner for interpretation of such service. 1.02 PRESERVING WATER QUALITY: The Contractor shall exercise extreme care to minimize degradation of water quality at the site. All necessary provisions shall be taken to insure compliance with the water quality standards of the State of Florida. Attention is called to Chapter 17 -3, Florida Administrative Code, and in particular, the requirements that turbidity shall not exceed 29 Nephelometric Turbidity Units above background level. The waters of the project area are classified Class III. Adequate silt containment procedures and equipment shall be used to control turbidity at all times at no additional expense to the Owner. Adequate silt containment procedures and equipment shall be used at all times to control turbidity in accordance with the requirements of South Florida Water Management District (SFWMD), the Florida Department of Environmental Protection (FDEP) and the Village of Tequesta at no additional expense to the Owner. 1.03 SALVAGED MATERIAL: Unless otherwise stated or noted on the drawings, all materials salvaged under this contract shall become the property of the Owner. Salvaged materials may not be reused in the Work except upon written approval of the Engineer. All salvaged materials not reused or desired by the Owner shall be removed from the site of the Work or otherwise disposed of by the Contractor in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. 1.04 LIST OF DRAWINGS: The Work shall conform to the following drawings in the plan set entitled "Village of Tequesta, Palm Beach County, Florida, Water Treatment Plant 3.6 MGD Expansion" and dated April, 2010 which form a part of the Contract Documents. Sheet No. Title 1 Title Sheet 2 Index of Sheets 3 Water Treatment Plant Existing Site Plan 01019 -1 WF109000 I 4 Water Treatment Yard Piping 5 R.O. Well #4 Site Plan _ 6 R.O. Building Mechanical Floor Plan 7 R.O. Building Equipment Piping Plan, Section and Details 8 R.O. Building HPP /Micron Filters 9 R.O. Building R.O. Train Plan, Sections and Detail 10 R.O. Building R.O. Train Plan, Sections and Detail 4 11 R.O. Building R.O. Train Elevations and Details 12 R.O. Building Sample Stand and Details 13 Degasifier /Scrubber Plan 14 Degasifier /Scrubber Sections 15 Degasifier Details 16 Scrubber Details 17 Scrubbers and Chemical Feed Details 18 Chemical Feed Details 19 Existing Scrubber Pump Replacement Details 20 Existing Scrubber Pump Replacement Details 21 R.O. Well #4 Equipment Plan, Section and Details 22 Details 23 Erosion Control Details 24 (E -01) Existing /Modified MCC200 Electrical Single Line Diagram Sheet 1/2 25 (E -02) Existing /Modified MCC200 Electrical Single Line Diagram Sheet 2/2 26 (E -03) MCC300 Electrical Single Line Diagram 27 (E -04) Existing /Modified Electrical ATS200, MD20, MCC200 and New MCC300 Layout 28 (E -05) Existing /Modified R.O. Room Electrical Power and Control Plan 29 (E -06) Exist. /Modified Scrubbers No. 1 and No. 2 Electrical Power and Control Plan 30 (E -07) Existing /Modified MCC Room Electrical Power and Control Plan 31 (E -08) Existing /Modified Motor Operated Valves Control Panel MOVPC Layout and Details 32 (E -09) Existing Plant R.O. Building Chemical Feed Room Power and Control Plan 33 (E -10) Electrical Reduced Voltage Starter Typical Schematic Diagram 34 (E -11) Motor Starter Typical Schematic Diagram 35 (E -12) Reduced Voltage Starter Typical Schematic Diagram 36 (E -13) R.O. Plant Motor Operated Valves Typical Schematic Diagram 37 (E -14) Existing /Modified LP200 Lighting Panel Schematic 38 (E -15) Electrical Miscellaneous Details 39 (E -16) R.O. Well No. 4 Pump Station Electrical Site Plan 40 (E -17) Existing /Modified R.O. Well No. 4 and HSP Building Electrical Power, Control and Grounding Plan 41 (E -18) R.O. Well No. 4 Power and Control Panel PCP2040 Elevation and Details 42 (E -19) Well No. 4 Pump R4 Power and Control Panel PCP2040 Layout and Details 43 (E -20) Well No. 4 Pump Power and Control Panel PCP2040 Layout Terminal Block Layout and Bill of Materials 44 (E -21) Well No. 4 Pump Power and Control Panel PCP2040 Schematic Diagram 1/3 Schematic Diagram 2/3 - m Power and Control Panel PCP2040 45 (E 22) Well No. 4 Pump o 9 46 (E -23) Well No. 4 Pump Power and Control Panel PCP2040 Schematic Diagram 3/3 47 (E -24) H2SO4 Sulfuric Acid Feed Point Electrical Site Plan and Details 48 (E -25) Recirculation Pumps Low Flow Switches, Flow Control Valves and Details 49 (E -26) Existing /Modified R.O. Room Electrical Power and Control Plan 50 (E -27) Existing /Modified Hypochlorite Feed Pumps Power and Control Panel PCP2801 Layout and Details 01019 -2 WF109000 i 51 (E -28) Existing /Modified Hypochlorite Feed Pumps PCP2801 Bill of Material and Nameplate Schedule 52 (E -29) Existing /Modified Hypochlorite Feed Pumps Typical Schematic Diagram 53 (E- 30) - - - -- Electrical Conduit and Wire Schedule Sheet 1/2 54 (E -31) Electrical Conduit and Wire Schedule Sheet 2/2 55(1-01) Instrumentation P &I Diagram Legend Sheet 56(1-02) Existing /Modified Instrumentation P &I Diagram Sheet 1/3 57(1-03) Existing /Modified Instrumentation P &I Diagram Sheet 2/3 58(1-04) Existing /Modified Instrumentation P &I Diagram Sheet 3/3 59(1-05) Instr. Existing /Modified Main Control Panel MCP Layout and Details 60(1-06) Existing /Modified Main Control Panel MCP Terminal Block Layout Sheet 1/2 61 (1 -07) Existing /Modified Main Control Panel MCP Terminal Block Layout Sheet 2/2 62(1-08) Instr. Exist. /Modified Main Control Panel MCP PLC Output Schematic Diagram 63(1-09) Instr. Exist. /Modified Main Control Panel MCP PLC 1/0 Schematic Diagram 64(1-10) Instr. Exist. /Modified Main Control Panel MCP PLC 1/0 Schematic Diagram 65(1-11) Instrumentation MCP2 PLC Panel Layout and Details 66(1-12) MCP2 PLC Panel Bill of Material and Nameplate Schedule 67(1-13) Instrumentation Main Control Panel MCP2 Terminal Block Layout Sheet 1/3 68(1-14) Instrumentation Main Control Panel MCP2 Terminal Block Layout Sheet 2/3 69(1-15) Instrumentation Main Control Panel MCP2 Terminal Block Layout Sheet 3/3 70(1-16) Instrumentation Main Control Panel MCP2 PLC 1/0 Diagram Sheet 1/7 71 (1 -17) Instrumentation Main Control Panel MCP2 PLC 1/0 Diagram Sheet 2/7 72(1-18) Instrumentation Main Control Panel MCP2 PLC 1/0 Diagram Sheet 3/7 73(1-19) Instrumentation Main Control Panel MCP2 PLC 1/0 Diagram Sheet 4/7 74(1-20) Instrumentation Main Control Panel MCP2 PLC 1/0 Diagram Sheet 5/7 75(1-21) Instrumentation Main Control Panel MCP2 PLC 1/0 Diagram Sheet 6/7 76(1-22) Instrumentation Main Control Panel MCP2 PLC 1/0 Diagram Sheet 7/7 77(1-23) Instr. Existing /Modified Hypochlorite Panel PLC2800 Layout and Details 78(1-24) Instr. Existing /Modified Hypochlorite Panel PLC2800 Terminal Block Layouts 79(1-25) Instr. Existing /Modified Hypochlorite Panel PLC2800 PLC 1/0 Diagrams 80(1-26) Existing /Modified Well Field No. 1 HSP Station PLC Radio Modem Panel PLC -WF1 Layout and Details 81 (1 -27) Existing /Modified Well Field No. 1 HSP Station Radio Modem Panel PLC -WF1 Terminal Block Layouts 82(1-28) Existing /Modified Well Field No. 1 HSP Station Radio Modem Panel PLC -WF1 PLC 1/0 Schematic Sheet 1/3 83(1-29) Existing /Modified Well Field No. 1 HSP Station Radio Modem Panel PLC -WF1 PLC 1/0 Schematic Sheet 2/3 84(1-30) Existing /Modified Well Field No. 1 HSP Station Radio Modem Panel PLC -WF1 PLC 1/0 Schematic Sheet 3/3 85(1-31) Instr. Well Field No. 1 HSP Station R.O. Well R4 Loop Diagrams 2041 & 2042 86(1-32) Instrumentation Loop Diagrams 2301, 2302, 2306 & 2313 87(1-33) Instrumentation Loop Diagrams 2307, 2308, 2309 & 2310 88(1-34) Instrumentation Loop Diagrams 2311, 2312, 2608 & 2609 89(1-35) Instrumentation Loop Diagrams 2010, 2614 & 2619 1.05 SUBSTITUTIONS: A. Substitutions will not be permitted on any items specified herein or identified on the drawings where two or more manufacturers have been named unless they are followed by the words "or equal'. Substitutions will also not be considered on any specified items whenever they are followed by the words "no substitutions ". All substitution requests must be made in writing to the Engineer within thirty days of the Contract Date. 01019 -3 WF109000 B. Submit five copies of request for substitution. Include in request: 1. Complete Data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. 2. For Products: a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address. b. Manufacturer's literature: (1) Product description. (2) Performance and test data. (3) Reference standards. a. Samples. b. Name and address of similar projects on which product was used, and date of installation. 3. For construction methods: a. Detailed description of proposed method. b. Drawings illustrating methods. 4. Itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product or method specified. 5. Data relating to changes in construction schedule. 6. Relation to separate contracts. 7. Accurate cost data on proposed substitution in comparison with product or method specified. This shall include initial capital and O &M cost comparison. 8. Parts commonality. The Engineer will consider parts commonality and demonstrable performance of the specified unit and the proposed substitution as part of the evaluation. 1.06 WATER: The Contractor shall provide and maintain, at his own expense, an adequate supply of water for his use for construction and domestic consumption, and to install and maintain necessary connections and piping for same, but only at such locations and in such manner as may be approved by the Engineer. All water connection points to the Owner's system shall be equipped with a reduced pressure principle type backflow preventer and meter. The meter shall be obtained from the Owner and all associated fees paid by the Contractor. Both devices shall be installed according to Village Standards. Prior to final acceptance, temporary connections and piping installed by the Contractor shall be removed in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. Potable water required for any testing shall be at the Contractor's expense. 1.07 ELECTRICITY: All electrical current required by the Contractor shall be furnished at his own expense. All temporary connections for electricity shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. All temporary lines shall be furnished, installed, connected and maintained by the Contractor in accordance with all applicable codes and shall be completely removed by the contractor prior to substantial completion. All power consumed for start-up, testing and system use prior to substantial completion shall be paid by the Contractor. 1.08 SANITARY FACILITIES: The Contractor shall provide temporary restroom facilities for field crews. Holding tanks will not be allowed unless specifically approved by the Engineer. 01019 -4 WF109000 1.09 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS: The Contractor is specifically cautioned that various dangerous chemicals and compounds and high voltage electrical power will be in routine use at this facility. The chemicals include, but are not limited to sodium hypochlorite, gaseous ammonia, diesel fuel, sodium hydroxide, sulfuric acid and antiscalents. Portions of the work required under this contract will be in the immediate vicinity of the items named above. The Contractor shall educate all field and supervisory personnel regarding standard safety practices and first aid procedures for accidental exposure to any, and all, compounds in use at the site. Any such facilities provided by the Contractor for their own use shall be suitably stored and used in compliance with all applicable regulations and with awareness of nearby wells. 1.10 OWNER FACILITIES: The Contractor shall provide temporary restroom, kitchen and convenience facilities for field crews and restrict the existing facilities at the plant from any use by the Contractor. 1.11 WORKING HOURS: All work on this contract shall be conducted during normal working hours (7 A.M. to 4 P.M.) on weekdays. No work will be permitted on weekends and Owner observed holidays. 1.12 ASSEMBLIES OR UNITS: Where the Contractor is required to furnish and install an assembly or unit, the Contractor shall furnish all component parts as required by the manufacturer of the unit. 1.13 ACCESS TO THE WORK SITE: The Contractor may use only the access designated by the Owner for access to the work locations. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining, protecting and restoring the routes to the satisfaction of the Owner and Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining any permits necessary to use the access. 1.14 SECURITY: The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the safety and security of the work and site. Any temporary measures required to maintain the security of the area shall be the Contractor's responsibility. This shall include but not be limited to temporary fencing, security guards, etc. The Contractor shall restrict all activities to the immediate construction area, as approved by the Engineer. It is noted that the Owner has implemented site security measures which restrict and control entrance to and exit from the site. The Contractor shall anticipate and work within the requirements of the system. In addition, the Owner reserves the right to require the Contractor to perform a background check on all workers entering the site and supply the results to the Owner. The Owner reserves the right to disallow entrance of any worker based on the results of the background check or other relevant information. The background check shall be performed through Palm Beach County and the Florida Department of Law Enforcement. 1.15 FAMILIARITY WITH LAWS: The Contractor is assumed to be in compliance with and familiar with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules, codes and regulations that may in any manner affect the work. Failure to familiarize themselves with applicable laws, etc., shall in no way relieve the Contractor from responsibility. 1.16 PROGRESS MEETINGS: The Contractor shall be required to prepare a monthly update of the project schedule prepared pursuant to Article 2.05 B.1. of the General Conditions and submit four (4) copies to the Engineer. The updated schedule shall be submitted to the Engineer with each pay request. Each schedule shall independently identify the originally approved schedule, actual progress, adjustments and new completion time projections for every item. The schedule shall show the project critical path and time and float for every item. Pay requests received without the updated schedule will not be processed. The Contractor shall also be required to attend a meeting two (2) times per month scheduled by the Engineer, to discuss project progress and shall be able to discuss 01019 -5 WF109000 existing and projected problems, and overall job status. All such meetings shall be held at the job site. At the Engineer's discretion, the frequency of the progress meetings may be increased to one per week during various periods of the project. The Contractor's project manager, superintendent and appropriate subcontractors shall attend all progress meetings. 1.17 STANDARDS: All work performed on this project shall be in accordance with the Village of Tequesta and other applicable standards. All conditions, as set forth in all the permits shall be satisfied and adhered to by the Contractor. 1.18 STAGING AREA: All construction trailers and equipment storage shall occur only within the staging area designated on the plans. All Contractor parking shall be within the staging area and not along the roadway which fronts the construction site. The Contractor shall take note that some improvements to the staging area may be required to facilitate its use. Specifically, the access may need to be stabilized to facilitate vehicular access. No vehicles may be stopped on existing pavement or walkways for parking or unloading. 1.19 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS: A. Noise: The Contractor is advised that the construction site is in close proximity to a residential area. All engines used during construction shall be equipped with critical grade mufflers. B. Village /County Standards: All work on this project shall be in accordance with Village /County Standards. Where the Standards conflict, Village Standards shall control. C. Project Inspection: The Engineer will be inspecting the work on a non -full time basis The Contractor shall provide appropriate notice of need for inspections and allow time for scheduling. No work shall be covered up, nor test results accepted unless witnessed by the Engineer. Inspections by the Engineer shall not be performed in lieu of other inspections required by Village, County, State or Federal requirements. D. Existing Facilities: The construction drawings do not show all existing piping, valving, electric conduit, instrument conduit, telephone lines which may interfere with this construction. Considerable hand digging will be required. The size, location and material of existing facilities which are being connected to in this project shall be field confirmed prior to submitting shop drawings or ordering materials. 1.20 RESTORATION OF DAMAGED SURFACES, STRUCTURES AND PROPERTY: A. Where pavement, trees, shrubbery, fences or other property or surface structures not designated as pay items, have been damaged, removed or disturbed by the Contractor, whether deliberately or through failure to carry out the requirements of the Contract Documents, State laws, municipal ordinances or the specific direction of the Engineer, or through failure to employ usual and reasonable safeguards, such property and surface structures shall be replaced or repaired at the expense of the Contractor to a condition equal to that before Work began within a time frame approved by the Engineer. B. Any damage caused by the Contractor to grass in the staging area shall be repaired by the Contractor by suitable preparation and sodding. Any new sod shall be rolled. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintenance of any such sod until, in the Engineer's opinion, a good stand of grass had developed. 1.21 VIDEOTAPING: The Contractor, in the presence, and to the satisfaction, of the Engineer, 01019 -6 WF109000 shall video tape all areas of construction, staging, etc. The video shall be provided to the Engineer in VHS format, prior to any site mobilization. 1.22 SHUTDOWNS: A. General Shutdowns: In general, field system shutdowns are not anticipated a part of this project. The Contractor shall take any and all action necessary to maintain all facilities in operating condition during the course of the construction. B. In general the Contractor shall be required to take all steps necessary to minimize the duration of a shutdown, if it becomes necessary. In no case shall any shutdowns exceed two (2) hours. This shall include, but not be limited to, work after hours or on weekends. All costs associated with material or labor necessary to minimize shutdowns shall be included in the contract price. C. The Contractor shall submit all written requests for shutdowns to the Engineer a minimum of four (4) working days prior to any shutdown period. D. Every reasonable effort will be made by the Owner to accommodate a shutdown request. However, any deferral of a requested shutdown shall not constitute sufficient cause for a time extension to the contract. E. R.O. system shutdowns for various tie -ins will need to occur during the course of the project. Such shutdowns will have varying impact on the existing R.O. facilities upon restart. The Contractor shall coordinate with and assist the Owner with all such restarts and associated adjustments to minimize impact. F. Software Modifications: Shutdowns related to software modifications shall not exceed 2 hour duration, shall not be scheduled sequentially and shall be minimized to the maximum extent possible and to the satisfaction of the Engineer by off -line testing prior to system uploading. G. Hurricane Preparedness: The Contractor shall take all necessary and appropriate precautions to protect his work and the plant in general in the event of the issuance of a hurricane watch or hurricane warning. Such measures shall be to the satisfaction of the Owner and shall include, but not be limited to, rescheduling of activities that may jeopardize the ability of the existing facilities to function during extended power outages and due and proper securing of all materials, structures, equipment and facilities to prevent damage. Neither the Owner nor the Engineer assumes any liability for the completeness of Contractor hurricane preparedness measures. H. Damages: The Contractor agrees to pay to the Owner as liquidated damages the amount of $250 for each full hour that any shutdown exceeds the 2 hour limit set forth under Paragraphs B and F above, unless an extension is agreed to in writing beforehand by the Engineer. These damages will be assessed under the same criteria and definitions discussed elsewhere in the document related to liquidated damages, but still considered as additional damages and not included in any amounts computed for other delays or reasons. 1.23 MATERIALS: All materials used on the project which are in contact with potable water directly or indirectly, (including raw piping, chemicals, piping or tanks, etc.) Shall be NSF 60/61 approved for contact with potable water and acceptable to agencies with jurisdiction. It shall be the Contractor's sole responsibility to ensure and confirm that all materials used on this project comply with this requirement. 1.24 DISPOSAL OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS AND DEBRIS: All excess excavated material and debris not required for backfill (unless otherwise noted), broken pipe, sidewalks, curbs and 01019 -7 WF109000 other concrete items, together with all roots, boards and other debris shall be disposed of by the Contractor at an appropriate legal site. 1.25 PROTECTION AND RESTORATION OF SURVEY MONUMENTS: The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting and restoring all land and property corners, such as section corners, 1/4 section corners, property corners or block control points, and for maintaining all horizontal and vertical control points. All surveying work shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be performed under the supervision of a Florida Registered Land Surveyor. Survey points that will be destroyed during construction shall be properly referenced and replaced at the Contractor's expense with permanent monuments approved by the Engineer. 1.26 EQUIPMENT: All construction equipment necessary and required for the proper construction of this project shall be on the construction site, in first -class working condition, and shall have been approved by the Engineer before construction is permitted to start. The Contractor shall provide such tamping tools and equipment as necessary for the proper compaction of the backfill. 1.27 CONSTRUCTION TRAILER: The Contractor shall provide an on -site office with telephone and electric service as required for his use. 1.28 FIELD OFFICE: The Contractor shall provide a suitable weatherproof field office for use by the Engineer. The office shall be located in a position which in the opinion of the Engineer is adequate for the work, including at least one full -size window facing the construction site. The field office shall be supplied with local and long distance telephone service. The Contractor shall maintain the office in good repair, including bi- weekly cleaning and re- stocking of consumables. The office shall be a trailer type, minimum 8 ft X 12 ft, with a standard size desk, copy machine, chair, lockable doors, fluorescent lights and air conditioner. 1.29 CROSSREFERENCING: The Contractor is advised that the specification is not fully cross referenced. Any section may have information relevant to each trade or equipment requirement. 1.30 REGULATORY PERMITS: The Contractor shall be responsible for reviewing the permits and ensuring that all construction activities are in full compliance with the requirements of all such permits. 1.31 STORED MATERIALS: The Contractor is advised that certain items, in particular, the reverse osmosis membranes will require controlled environment storage upon receipt and prior to installation. The space in the existing facility is extremely limited for such storage. The Contractor shall make suitable arrangements for proper storage to the satisfaction of the Engineer. � 01019 -8 WF109000 SECTION 01150 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL: Measurement and payment will be based upon Work completed and accepted in accordance with the Contract Documents. No separate payment will be made for excavation, trenching, backfilling, leakage tests, surveying, bacteriological tests, density tests or other incidental items of Work not shown in the Agreement. 1.02 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS IN STORAGE: Partial payment for materials and equipment in proper storage at the site of the Work will be made for those items for which the Contractor has submitted the following: A. Invoice for each item in storage. The invoice shall not exceed the value of the item stored as determined by the amount paid to the manufacturer (subcontractor fabrication costs excluded for subcontractor fabricated or manufactured assemblies). B. List of items in storage. C. With following pay estimate, release of liens for 90% of each item listed as stored materials for the previous pay estimate. Any item for which a 90% release of lien is not supplied shall be considered as having been removed from the site. No payment for any offsite storage of material will be made. Any payment for stored material shall not include labor or profit by the Contractor or any sub - contractor. The Contractor is specifically advised that this procedure may require full payment for some stored materials or shop work significantly ahead of the time when payment is issued by the Owner. 1.03 MEASUREMENT: The Contractor will be paid for work performed under this contract according to Engineer approved percentage completion for each item on the schedule of values and /or identified unit prices, all as further described and set forth in other sections of this document. 1.04 PAYMENT: Payment will be made at the lump sum price for each applicable item shown in the Agreement or unit price, as identified and applicable for specific items, stored and /or installed and accepted, which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials and performing all Work in connection therewith and incidental thereto. The following schedule shall be adhered to: A. 15th of the Month - Cut off date B. 18th of the Month - Pay estimate to the Inspector C. 20th of the Month - Pay estimate to the Engineer D. 25th of the Month - Pay estimate to the Owner. E. 20th the following Month - Payment by the Owner When the cut off date occurs on a holiday or weekend, the date shall be the last work day preceding the 15th. 01150 -1 WF109000 i 1.05 PAY ESTIMATE FORMS: The Engineer will supply a pay estimate form for the Contractor to use for submittal. The Contractor shall make copies to be used for submittal of the following pay estimates. Failure of the Contractor to sign the pay estimate or attach appropriate documentation shall be grounds for returning the pay estimate with no action by the Owner or Engineer. 1.06 BIDDING ALLOWANCE/ADDITIONAL WORK ACCOUNTS: The Contractor shall include in the base lump sum bid price a $50,000 bid allowance. The allowance shall be used to cover additional pipe fittings, concrete, steel, equipment, equipment modifications, labor or material required by the Owner. Any usage of the allowance shall require advance written approval by the Engineer. i i 01150 -2 W F 109000 SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS: The types of submittals controlled by these general requirements include shop drawings, operation and maintenance manuals, instruction manuals, samples, and miscellaneous work- related submittals. The individual submittal requirements are specified herein and in applicable sections for each unit of work. Other submittals as specified in other sections shall follow the requirements of those sections. 1.02 GENERAL SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS: Coordination and Sequencing: The Contractor shall coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of the work so that the work will not be delayed by submittals. The Contractor shall allow for adequate review time by the Engineer for the submittals. The Contractor shall coordinate and sequence different categories of submittals for the same work, and for interfacing units of work, so that one will not be delayed for coordination with another. No extension of time will be allowed because of failure to properly coordinate and sequence submittals. Preparation of Submittals: Provide permanent marking on each submittal to identify project, date, Contractor, subcontractor, submittal name and similar information to distinguish it from other submittals. The marking system used shall be as required by the Engineer. Each submittal shall clearly state where the item is to be installed. Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Submittals which are received from sources other than through Contractors office will be returned without action. All results of testing by independent labs or agencies shall be submitted to the Engineer. This shall include both passing and failing tests. 1.03 SPECIFIC CATEGORY SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS: General: Except as otherwise indicated in individual work sections, comply with general requirements specified herein for each indicated category of submittal. 1.04 GENERAL SHOP DRAWING REQUIREMENTS: As soon as practicable and within sixty (60) days after the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor, in conformance with the conditions of the contract, shall submit to the Engineer for approval, four (4) copies (in addition to those copies necessary for his own requirements to a maximum of three (3) copies) of all required shop drawings. The Contractor shall submit newly prepared information: do not reproduce contract documents or copy standard printed information as basis of shop drawings. Prepare on reproducible sheets, not less than 8 -1/2 in. x 11 in. and not larger than 24 in. x 36 in., except for actual pattern or template type drawings. Prepare shop drawings to accurate scale, except where other form is indicated as acceptable. Show dimensions and note which are based on field measurements, identify materials and products in the work shown. Indicate name of firm which has prepared each shop drawing, and provide appropriate project identification. Shop drawings submitted to the Engineer for his approval shall first be checked and approved by the Contractor, as indicated by a stamp marked "Checked and Approved" on each copy of the shop drawing. Shop drawings received without the Contractor's "Checked and Approved" stamp will be returned without further action. The Contractor will receive only one marked up return copy of any drawings stamped "Not Approved" or "Revise and Resubmit". 01300 -1 WF109000 Shop drawings shall be submitted for the following: 1. Concrete Mix Designs 2. Reinforcing Steel 3. Roofing System 4. High Pressure Pump and Motor 5. Blower Pump and Motor 6. Motor Operators for Valves 7. Chemical Feed Pump 8. Scrubber Recirculation Pumps 9. Cartridge Filters 10. Valves (all types and materials) 11. Piping (all types and materials) 12. All Electrical and Instrumentation Equipment Items including Primary Elements 13. Conduit 14. Cable 15. Lighting Fixtures 16. Control Panels 17. Pressure Gauges 18. Chemical Injection Quill 19. Degasifier 20. Scrubbers (First and Second Stage) 21. Cross Trench Supports 22. Fabricated Pipe Supports 23. Precast Concrete 24. Vault Covers 25. Pipe Saddles, Fittings, Adapters (all sizes and materials) 26. Tubing and Connectors 27. Air Release Valves 28. Fabrications (all) 29. Grounding System 30. Unistrut (all materials) 31. Valve Boxes 32. Electric Hand Holes and Pull Boxes 33. Membranes with Performance Projection 34. Plumbing Fixtures 35. Meters 36. R.O. Pressure Vessels 37. Control Valves 38. R.O. Vessel Support Trees 39. Pipe Restraint System(s) 40. All Structural Items 41. Miscellaneous Metal and Non -metal Fabrication 42. All Coatings 43. Well Pump and Motor 44. Victaulics 45. Motor Control Centers and Components 46. Meters 47. Static Mixers 48. Straightening Vanes 49. Any other Items Requested by the Engineer 01300 -2 WF109000 Product Data: Collect required data into one submittal for each unit of work or system; and mark each copy to show which choices and options are applicable to the project. Include manufacturer's standard printed recommendations for application and use, compliance with standards, application of labels and seals, notation of field measurements which have been checked, and special coordination requirements. Maintain one set of product data for each submittal at the project site, available for reference by the Engineer. For purposes of this submittal, manufacturer's fabrication drawings shall be synonymous with shop drawings. The Contractor shall not submit product data or allow its use on the project, until compliance with requirements of the contract documents has been confirmed. Submittal is for information and record, unless otherwise indicated. 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE/INSTRUCTION MANUALS: Three copies of the operation and maintenance manuals for each component of the project shall be provided to the Engineer for transmittal to the Owner. The manuals shall be bound in a three ring binder with a suitable label identifying the project, date and location. All material included shall be reproduced on paper having mylar reinforced edging. A table of contents and indexing tabs shall be provided for each equipment item. A separate table shall identify specifically where each item listed in the table of contents is installed. One copy of O &M Manual in electronic format (pdf file) shall be provided. A standard printed list of manufacturer's recommended spare parts for each new component of the project equipment shall be included in the manual. This list shall be as provided in the manufacturer's printed manual, or supplied on the manufacturer's letterhead and signed by direct employees of the manufacturer. The manuals shall also include a complete list of parts suppliers with addresses and telephone numbers for each system component. The manuals shall include a complete set of preventive maintenance requirements as a function of running and chronological time for the following components, as a minimum. High Pressure Pump and Motor High Service Pump and Motor Well Pump and Motor Blower and Motor Chemical Feed Pumps Scrubber Recirculation Pumps and Motors All material included in the manuals shall refer only to the actual installed equipment. Extraneous material shall be marked out or labeled as "not applicable ". All manuals shall be furnished to the Engineer a minimum of four weeks prior to the request for substantial completion or fourweeks prior to the equipment being placed in operation, whichever is earlier. 1.06 DOCUMENTS: Maintain at the job -site one copy of all drawings, specifications; addenda; approved shop drawings; change orders; field orders; other contract modifications; and other approved documents submitted by the Contractor in compliance with various sections of the specifications. Each of these Project Record Documents shall be clearly marked "Project Record Copy" and maintained in good condition; available at all times for review by the Engineer and not used for construction purposes. 1.07 STARTUP REPORTS: On completion of the work, but at least two weeks prior to substantial completion, the manufacturer's representative shall submit, through the Contractor, four copies to the Engineer of a complete signed report of the result of his inspection, operation, adjustments, and tests. The manufacturer shall utilize the report form provided by the Engineer and fully complete all items on the form. Start up reports are required for the following: 01300 -3 WF109000 i 1. High Pressure Pump and Motor 2. High Service Pump and Motor 3. Well Pump and Motor 4. Blower and Motor 5. Motor Operated Valves 6. Control Valves 7. Level Sensors 8. Pressure Transmitters 9. Scrubber Recirculation Pumps 10. PLC 11. Conductivity Meters 12. Flow Meters 13. Cartridge Filters 14. R.O. System (Membranes) 15. All Instrumentation Items 16. VFD's 17. Degasifier System 18. Chemical Feed Pump 19. Panels 20. SCADA System The manufacturer's representative for each of the systems components named above shall all be present during testing and start up. The Contractor, electrical and instrumentation subcontractors and other appropriate subcontractors shall also be present at the start up of each system. The report shall include detailed descriptions of the points inspected, tests and adjustments made, quantitative results obtained of such are specified and the suggestions for precautions to be taken to ensure proper maintenance. The report also shall include a certificate that the equipment conforms to the requirements of the contract and is ready for permanent operation and that nothing in the installations will render the manufacturer's warranty null and void. There shall be furnished in writing to the Owner for each piece of equipment, a manufacturers guarantee against defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of Substantial Completion, provided the equipment is properly serviced and operated under normal conditions and according to manufacturers instructions. The manufacturer shall replace, without additional expense to the Owner, any component which proves defective during the guarantee period. Items that are normally expended in service such as oil, grease, light bulbs, are to be exempt from the guarantee. In addition to the above, the manufacturer of various system components shall supply training as set forth in Section 01650. This training shall be non - concurrent with start up requirements and occur ! after completion of start up. 1.08 SPARE PARTS AND LUBRICANTS: Except as may be otherwise noted in this i specification, for each individual equipment component supplied, a complete set of manufacturers recommended spare parts as listed in the instruction manuals shall be supplied. Spare parts shall include, but not be limited to, all belts, inks, charts, gaskets, O- rings, packing and shear pins. Each spare part shall be labeled to identify its location for installation. All special tools or instruments required to perform normal in -field maintenance on all system components shall be supplied to the Engineer for delivery to the Owner. The provision for special tools shall be non - redundant where duplicate items are provided. A one year supply of all lubricants i used for any mechanical equipment provided under this contract shall be supplied to the Engineer for delivery to the owner. All lubricants shall be delivered in clean, tightly sealed containers and clearly labeled as to where they are to be used. 01300 -4 W F109000 1.09 BOND AND COMPLETED OPERATION INSURANCE: Prior to final payment the Contractor shall submit proof that bonds and completed operations insurance are in effect as required by Articles 5.01, 5.02 and 5.03 of the General Conditions. PART 2 AND 3 - PRODUCTS AND EXECUTION (not applicable). I 01300 -5 W F109000 SECTION 01400 GENERAL QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 —GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS: Specific quality control requirements for the work are indicated throughout the contract documents and are not repeated herein. The requirements for this section are primarily to performances of the work beyond furnishing of manufactured products. The term "Quality Control' includes, but is not necessarily limited to, inspection and testing and associated requirements. This section does not specify or modify Engineer's duties relating to quality control and Contract enforcement. 1.02 RESPONSIBILITY FOR INSPECTIONS AND TESTS: Unless otherwise noted, all testing and inspections required by these specifications shall be performed by a properly certified entity. All costs associated with the testing and inspections shall be the Contractors responsibility. The Contractor shall also be responsible for all tests or inspections required by any entity having jurisdictional control over the work. The costs for those required services by independent testing laboratories are recognized to be included in the contract sum. No failure of test agencies, whether engaged by Owner or Contractor, to perform adequate inspections or tests or to properly analyze or report results, shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for fulfillment of the requirements of the contract documents. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: Except as more definitively specified, the Contractor shall comply with recognized workmanship quality standards within the industry as applicable to each unit of work, including ANSI standards where applicable. It is a requirement that each category of trades person or installer performing the work be pre - qualified, to the extent of being familiar with applicable and recognized quality standards for that category of work, and of being capable of workmanship complying with those standards. The Engineer shall be the sole judge of what constitutes industry workmanship standards. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY - STORAGE- HANDLING: Handle, store and protect materials and products, including fabricated components, by methods and means which will prevent damages, deterioration and losses including theft (and resulting delays), thereby insuring highest quality results as the performance of the work progresses. Control delivery schedules so as to minimize unnecessary long -term storage at the project site prior to installation. Contractor shall provide covered, inside storage for all new equipment on the site which is not intended for outside installation. Electrical, hydraulic and pneumatic connections on all equipment shall be protected from the elements. Contractor shall store all material on the project site unless specifically authorized otherwise by the Owner. 1.05 WATER TIGHTNESS: All tankage, pressure vessels or other equipment containing liquids that are not subject to leakage testing, as may be specified elsewhere, shall be free of all leakage when filled to the maximum pressure or static head that could be applied during operation of the facilities. The duration of all leakage testing shall be 48 hours. Any damp areas resulting from the tests shall be considered leaks and shall be repaired. 1.06 DISINFECTION & TESTING: All tankage where work has been performed which is not otherwise subject to disinfection or testing requirements by this specification shall be disinfected with a 50 mg /I chlorine solution. This will include the R.O. System prior to the installation of membranes 01400 -1 WF109000 or other items that can be damaged by chlorine. Bacteriological samples shall be taken and run by a state approved laboratory until two consecutive days of safe samples have been obtained. All other FDEP and Health Department requirements related to disinfection and sampling shall be satisfied. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not applicable) 2.01 STAINLESS STEEL CASTINGS: Any cast 316SS shall not be surface contaminated by iron or other material that causes visible rust or staining. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION: Installer's Inspection of Conditions: The Contractor shall require the fabricator and installer of each major unit of work to inspect substrate to receive the work, and conditions under which the work will be performed, and to report (in writing to the Contractor and the Engineer) unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the fabricator and installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION QUALITY CONTROL: Manufacturer's Instructions: Where installations include manufactured products, comply with manufacturer's applicable instructions and recommendations for installation, to whatever extent these are more explicit or more stringent than applicable requirements indicated in the contract documents. The Contractor shall inspect each item of materials or equipment immediately prior to installation, and reject damaged and defective items. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods for securing work as it is installed; true to line and level, and within recognized industry tolerances if not otherwise indicated. The Contractor shall recheck measurements and dimensions of the worts, as an integral step of starting each installation. Install worts during conditions of temperature, humidity, exposure, forecasted weather, and status of project completion which will ensure best possible results for each unit of work, in coordination with entire work. Isolate each unit of work from non - compatible worts, as required to prevent deterioration. Mounting Heights: Except as otherwise noted, mount individual units of work at industry- recognized standard mounting heights, for applications indicated. Refer questionable mounting height choices to the Engineer for final decision. Adjust, clean, lubricate, restore marred finishes, and protect newly installed work, to ensure that it will remain without damage or deterioration during the remainder of the construction period. 3.03 CLEANING: All new facilities and existing facilities impacted by construction shall be fully cleaned to the satisfaction of the Engineer prior to final completion. All Contractor debris, dust, dirt, trash, etc., shall be removed. I I 01400 -2 WF109000 SECTION 01650 STARTING OF SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIRED START UP: Start up is required for the following systems: 1. High Pressure Pump and Motor 2. High Service Pump and Motor 3. Well Pump and Motor 4. Blower and Motor 5. Flow Meters 6. Conductivity Meters 7. Cartridge Filters 8. R.O. System (Membranes) 9. VFD's 10. All Instrumentation Items 11. Motor Operated Valves 12. Control Valves 13. Pressure Transmitters 14. Scrubber Recirculation Pumps 15. PLC 16. Level Sensors 17. Chemical Feed Pumps 18. Degasifier System 19. SCADA system 1.02 START UP REPORT: Start up reports shall conform to Section 01300, Submittals. 1.03 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE: The Contractor shall arrange for a qualified service representative from the company manufacturing or supplying equipment listed in 1.01 to perform the duties listed herein and Section 01300, Submittals. The Contractor shall include in his costs all services of the Manufacturer's Representative. A. The operation, testing, and adjustment shall be as required to prove that the equipment is left in proper condition for satisfactory operation under the conditions specified. B. After installation of the listed equipment has been completed, and the equipment is presumably ready for operation, but before it is operated by others, the representative shall inspect, operate, test, and adjust the equipment. The inspection shall include, but not be limited to, the following points as applicable. 1. Soundness (without cracked or otherwise damaged parts). 2. Completeness in all details, as specified. 3. Correctness of setting, alignment, and relative arrangement of various parts. 4. Adequacy and correctness of packing, sealing, and lubricants. 5. Correction of calibration. 6. Proper automated sequencing of start and shutdown. 7. Proper automated control of operation by software (if applicable) and safety devices. 01650 -1 Demonstration of equipment performance consistent with the requirements for the specification, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. For pumps, this shall include demonstration at least 3 points on the curve, selected by the Engineer. Proper operation shall be demonstrated to the Engineer's satisfaction. C. At least 60 days and not more than 90 days after the equipment is placed in operation a representative of the manufacturer in company of a representative of the Owner shall inspect each item for which a start up report was prepared making necessary adjustments, as necessary. The contractor shall notify the Owner in writing seven (7) days prior to the Manufacturers Representative visit. D. Thirty days prior to the expiration of one year Contractor correction period (General Conditions 13.07) for each piece of equipment which had a start up report, the Manufacturer's Representative, the Contractor, and the Engineer shall inspect the equipment. The Manufacturer's Representative shall make necessary adjustments. Failure of the Contractor to schedule and perform this item shall extend the warranty and correction period until 30 days after this event does occur. Engineer shall receive 7 days advance written notice of the intent to conduct this visit. E. Supply, to the Owner's plant and maintenance personnel, on site instructions and training on the operation of the equipment. The training shall be supplied by a factory trained manufacturers representative. The training shall be sufficient to fully communicate operation and maintenance recommendations to the Owner and shall not be less than the following lengths of time. Training on the following items shall be conducted with the Owner, through the Engineer, and be non - concurrent and scheduled a minimum of 10 days after satisfactory start-up and demonstration to the Engineer. The training times indicated are intended to represent the total training time per session. It will be necessary to conduct most of the training two times to accommodate the operators schedules. These sessions may not be consecutive. Motor Operated Valves 0.5 hr. Control Valves 0.5 hr. PLC's 2 hrs. High Pressure Pump and Motor 4 hrs. Well Pump and Motor 2 hrs. Scrubber Recirculation Pumps 2 hrs. Conductivity Meters 0.5 hr. Pressure Transmitters 0.5 hr. Flow Meters 0.5 hr. Cartridge Filters 0.5 hr. SCADA System 4 hrs. Computer System 16 hrs. Control Panels (ea.) 2 hrs. ea. Motor Starters /Breakers 1 hr. Chemical Feed Pump 0.5 hrs. Blower and Motor 2 hrs. RO System 8 hrs. Degasifier & Scrubber Systems 8 hrs. F. Specialized Training: Training of the degasifier, scrubber, and R.O. System shall include classroom type training on the operational, chemical, and mechanical theory of process and its application at this facility. A detailed outline of the classroom topics, with times anticipated for each topic, shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. The classroom sessions shall include 01650 -2 WF109000 suitable handouts and visual aids. At the end of each session, the manufacturer's representative shall administer a written 1 — hour test. The test shall be prepared by the manufacturer's representative and previously approved by the Engineer. The test shall be tailored to assess the degree to which the participants were able to grasp the subject matter. The tests shall be graded and confidentially submitted to the Engineer. The training times indicated are intended to represent the total training time. 01650 -3 WF109000 SECTION 01720 RECORD DRAWINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: The Work covered under this section shall include furnishing the Engineer all information necessary for a complete set of Record Drawings. 1.01 APPLICABLE CODES, STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS: The Record Drawings information shall be in strict accordance with the following codes and standards: A. Local county, municipal and utility codes B. Department of Environmental Regulation C. State of Florida Department of Health and Rehabilitative Services 1.03 MATERIALS: The Contractor shall mark on the construction drawings of the Contract Documents all field information. 1.04 DATUM: All elevations shall be based on USGS Datum. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 RECORD DRAWINGS: The record drawings shall correctly and accurately show all changes from the Contract Documents made during construction and shall reflect surveyed information which shall be performed by a professional land surveyor registered in the State of Florida. The drawings shall be neat and legible. A. Piping and Tubing: Record drawings shall show the following field information: 1. Show material used to construct lines. 2. Show location of tees, crosses, bends, terminal ends, valves, air release valves, and sampling points, etc., by distances from known above ground reference points (manholes, catch basins, and structures). 3. Show location of all sleeves and casing pipes. 4. Show all variations in required cover over pipe. 5. Show elevation and horizontal control of all water mains, sewer lines, electric conduit, chemical feed lines, water lines, etc., crossed or otherwise exposed during construction. B. Structures: Record drawings show the following information: 1. All elevations. 2. All horizontal control (including wall thickness). 01720 -1 W F 109000 C. Equipment: Record drawings shall show the following information: 1. Centerline elevations of all new pipes and equipment. 2. Elevation of suction bells or pump intakes. 3. Distance between pumps (centerline to centerline). 4. All horizontal control. 5. All equipment base elevations. 6. All motor and pump nameplate data. 7. Membrane type, model, manufacturer, serial numbers and locations. 8. Pressure vessel type, model, serial number and location. 9. Cartridge filter model number and size. D. Exterior Electrical /Instrumentation Conduits: Record drawings shall show the following information: 1. All horizontal and vertical control. 2. Elevation of the conduits. 3. Conduit material and size. 4. Number and sizes of wires in each conduit. 5. Grounding system. 6. All primary element nameplate data. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 RECORDS: Daily records of changes in location of piping, fixtures and other items shall be kept and recorded on the record drawings. The Contractor shall review the completed record drawings and ascertain that all data furnished is accurate and truly represents the work actually installed. No Record Drawings information will be accepted from subcontractors. 3.02 SUBMITTAL: The project shall not be considered to be in substantial completion until record drawings have been submitted and accepted by the Engineer. Record drawings are required for submittal to the Health Department for release of the system for use. This release is also a condition of substantial completion. In developing a project schedule the Contractor shall allow adequate time for the Engineer to transfer all record information to the drawings. Prior to final payment, the record drawings shall be revised by the Contractor to reflect any changes which have occurred since the substantial completion submittal. Record information shall be marked in red on the original bid drawings. Each drawing shall be reviewed and record information indicated at every 01720 -2 W F 109000 location where an item is shown. Record information which reflects changes to the drawings shall be recorded on every sheet where the information appears. I 01720 -3 WF109000 SECTION 02220 EXCAVATION AND FILL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: The extent of excavation and fill is shown on the drawings. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Codes and Standards: Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction, including the Florida Trench Safety Act. B. Testing and Inspection Service: The Contractor shall engage soil testing and inspection service, to include testing soil materials proposed for use in the work and field testing facilities for quality control testing during excavation and fill operations. The firm shall also have the capability of performing Standard Penetration Tests (SPT). Testing laboratory shall be approved by the Engineer prior to commencing earthwork. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit experience /qualification record and written description of testing laboratory's personnel and testing facilities for approval. B. Submit copies of all field reports, laboratory test reports, recommendations, etc., to the Engineer for approval. C. Submit selected procedure and design for stabilizing excavated areas where potential undermining of existing piping, concrete duct banks, or structure foundations may occur. D. All submittals shall be in accordance with the format established in Section 01300. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Existing Utilities: 1. Locate existing underground utilities in the areas of work. If utilities are to remain in place, provide adequate means of protecting during excavation operations. 2. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, consult the utility owner immediately for directions. Cooperate with the Owner, and public and private utility companies in keeping their respective services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities to the satisfaction of the utility owner. 3. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by the Owner or others, except when permitted in writing by the Engineer and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been provided. B. Use of Explosives: The use of explosives is not permitted. 02220 -1 WF109000 C. Protection of Persons and Property: 1. Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post with warning lights. Supply and operate warning lights on all excavations. 2. Protect structures, utilities, and other facilities from damages caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout and other hazards created by excavation operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SOIL MATERIALS: A. Backfill and Fill Materials: 1. Satisfactory soil materials for backfill and fill shall be, free of rock or gravel larger than %2 in. in any dimension, debris, waste, vegetable and other deleterious matter. 2. Suitable material shall be clean, granular, free draining, fine to medium sandy materials classified as SW or SP according to the Unified Soil Classification System, with no more than 5 percent by weight finer than a No. 200 sieve when tested in accordance with ASTM D -2487. B. Unsuitable Materials: 1. Unsuitable materials, such as calcium carbonate or aluminum hydroxide sludge, peat, muck, roots, logs, debris, brush sod, CL, ML, CH, MH, OL, OH according to the Unified Soil Classification System or other similar materials, shall not be used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: Examine the areas and conditions under which excavation and fill is to be performed and notify the Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 EXCAVATION: A. Excavation consists of the removal and disposal of materials encountered when establishing the required grade elevations. B. Earth excavation includes the removal and disposal of obstructions visible on the ground surface, underground structures and utilities indicated to be demolished and removed, material of any classification indicated. i C. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated elevations or site dimensions without the specific direction of the Engineer. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by the Engineer, shall be at the Contractor's expense. D. Stability of Excavations: 02220 -2 WF109000 local codes and ordinances having 1. Slope the sides of excavations to comply with oca g P PY jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible either because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated. 2. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in a safe condition until completion of backfilling. E. Shoring and Bracing: 1. Provide shoring and bracing to comply with local codes and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide materials for shoring and bracing, such as sheet piling, uprights, stringers and cross - braces, in good serviceable condition. 3. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of the time period excavations will be open. Carry down shoring and bracing as the excavation progresses. F. Material Disposal: 1. Roots and clearing and grubbing waste shall be disposed of in a manner approved by the Engineer. Burning will not be permitted. The Contractor shall be responsible for securing appropriate permits and complying with same. 2. Locate and retain fill materials away from edges of excavations. 3. Disposal of unsuitable material shall be provided by the Contractor off of the project site. 3.03 BACKFILL AND FILL: In all excavations, use approved fill material that has been sampled, tested and approved by the soil testing laboratory as conforming to the requirements of this specification. A. Prior to Backfill Placement: 1. Backfill excavations as promptly as the work permits, but not until completion of the following: a. Completion of construction below finish grade. b. Inspection, testing, approval, and recording locations of underground utilities. c. Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids with satisfactory materials. d. Remove trash and debris. e. Permanent or temporary horizontal bracing which is in place on horizontally supported walls. 02220 -3 WF109000 C. Ground Surface Preparation: Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placement of fills. Plow, strip, or break -up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so that fill material will bond with existing surface. D. Leveling and Backfill for, and Adjacent to, all structures, slabs, walkways, etc: 1. After stripping unsuitable materials, densify the in -situ soils to a depth of 24- inches. Subsequently, densify each lift of backfill with a vibratory roller. All fill shall be placed in layers which do not exceed 12- inches loose. The vibratory roller shall be a 1 -ton (static weight) walk- behind vibratory drum roller Wacker W -74, or equal. Each section of the work pad surface shall receive multiple overlapping (20 percent minimum) coverage of the roller as it operates at its maximum vibrational frequency and a speed not to exceed 1.5 miles /hour. Rolling of the sub -grade and each lift of fill shall continue until no additional settlement can be discerned and the density testing requirements are satisfied. In no case shall any section of the work pad, including sub - grade, receive less than 10 passes of the roller. The compaction zone shall include, at a minimum, the tank footprint plus a 15 foot wide perimeter zone extending beyond the structure. The Contractor shall monitor proof rolling operations to detect signs of pumping, weaving and other forms of instability indicative of buried deposits of weak and compressible soils. Weak soils (if any) detected during the proof rolling shall be excavated over the full vertical extent and removed. Removal shall extend to a minimum horizontal margin of 15 -feet beyond the edge of the structure. Clean fill satisfying this specification shall be used to replace all such excavations. 2. Backfill adjacent to structural elements shall be placed, as far practicable, as the adjacent structural elements have been completed and accepted. Backfilling against concrete shall be done only when approved. E. Compaction (In -Place Density): This applies to all areas. 1. Maximum Laboratory Density shall be the Modified Proctor Maximum Dry Density as determined in accordance with ASTM D1557, Method B or D, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Subgrade beneath and 10 -feet beyond all structures, walkways, slabs, etc. shall be compacted to 98% ASTM D1557 maximum laboratory density. Subgrade soils to a depth of 24- inches shall be densified to an equivalent relative compaction. 3. Fill and /or backfill beneath and 15 feet beyond all structures, walkways, slabs on grade, pipelines routes, shall be compacted to not less than 98% ASTM D1557 maximum laboratory density. 4. All fill shall be placed with a moisture content within 2% of the optimum. G. Grading: 1. Perform all grading in the areas so indicated and as required. 02220 -4 WF109000 2. Fill shall be brought to finished grades indicated within a tolerance of .05 of afoot and shall be graded to drain water away from structures, and as otherwise indicated on the plan. 3. Existing grades which are to remain and which are disturbed by the Contractor's operations shall be graded to provide surfaces suitable for the proper use of mowing machines. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Quality Control Testing During Construction: The testing laboratory and Engineer shall inspect and approve subgrades and fill layers before subsequent layer or further construction work is performed. B. Structure Areas: In structural areas, including walkways, slabs, trenches, and other structures, one density test shall be made for every 500 sq.ft., or portion thereof, of surface area of compacted material per compacted layer, starting with the sub -grade prior to placement of the initial lift. C. Foundations - Foundation bottoms shall be compacted, probed and tested for in -place density to verify that the foundation soils are dense and capable of supporting these proposed structure. At least one density test per ASTM D -1557 per 100 sq.ft. of foundation bottom area shall betaken. If organic and /or fine grained soils are located at or near footing bottoms, remove and replace with suitable materials. D. The Contractor shall perform sieve analyses on all backfill supplied. A sieve analysis shall be performed on each source and whenever the color, texture or general make -up of the backfill has changed as determined by the Engineer. The Contractor shall supply load tickets on every truck of fill which identify and confirm the source. 3.05 SCHEDULING: The Contractor shall take note of the scheduling requirements to maintain access to the existing site buildings and provide access to the existing well sites. I 02220 -5 W F 109000 SECTION 02260 FINISH GRADING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: To bring to finished elevations all earth materials as called for in the drawings. This general work includes the completion of finish grading so that surfaces of compacted material are correctly oriented with the requirements of the slab or other component which will rest on the grade at that point. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: All fill shall be clean sand, free from debris, vegetable matter and other deleterious substances. Refer to Section 02220 for further requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GRADING: Fill, backfill and rough grade as necessary to bring entire site level with elevations of undersides of concrete slabs, walks, paving and finished landscaping as indicated on drawings or in specifications. 3.02 FINISH GRADING: Where elevations are indicated on plans, obtain such finish elevations, and establish uniform slopes of finish grades between indicated elevations. Where elevations are not indicated, establish and obtain uniform slope from finished spot elevations at the exterior face of the building out to the nearest indicated elevations for finished grades, as shown on plans. Finish grade all areas for positive drainage. Leave no high /low areas to accumulate surface water. Achieve final grades as specified on the drawings, inclusive of the required top soil. In some areas, this will require removal of existing materials. Areas to be grassed shall be box bladed for leveling prior to grassing. i 02260 -1 W F109000 I SECTION 02485 GRASSING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: The Contractor shall furnish all materials and labor necessary for construction. It is the intent of this specification that all existing areas at the plant and /or Well R4 damaged by this construction are to be sodded. This will include but not be limited to the contractor staging area. 1.02 STORAGE OF MATERIALS: The Contractor shall provide space for storage of sod prior to placement in a manner that will not endanger or restrict pedestrian or vehicular traffic. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SOD, SEED and MULCHING: Sodding shall be in accordance with section 575 -1 through 575 -2 of the Florida Department of Transportation (DOT) Specifications. Sod in all areas shall be St. Augustine Floratam or Bahia to match the closest adjacent grassed areas. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SOD, SEED, MULCH: A. Sod: All areas to be grassed shall be box bladed for leveling to the satisfaction of the Engineer before the grassing operation commences. Hand tool leveling shall be performed in areas adjacent to structures. Final grades shall slope away from structures. All sodded areas shall be rolled for leveling with at least four passes on all locations or as required for suitable leveling. The adequacy of the roller and the acceptability of the rolling operation are subject to the Engineer's approval. B. Sodding shall be in accordance with Section 575 -3 of the DOT specifications. 3.03 SPRINKLER SYSTEM: A. Where sprinkler/irrigation systems exist, damaged areas shall be repaired or replaced. The Contractor's sodding operation shall not commence until the Engineer has approved the repaired or replaced system. 3.04 IRRIGATION: It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to supply sufficient irrigation water to develop a growing "stand of grass ". It is noted that the grassed area may not have an existing irrigation system in place. 3.04 COMPLETION: The grassing operation shall not be considered complete until a good stand of grass has been developed and the first mowing completed. The initial mowing shall be performed by the Contractor. All debris which may damage a mower shall be removed. 02485 -1 WF109000 SECTION 02610 PIPE AND FITTINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: Work under this section consists of furnishing all materials, supplies, equipment and labor in accordance with the requirements set forth herein and as shown on the drawings. 1.02 APPLICABLE CODES, STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS: The Work under this Contract shall be in strict accordance with the following codes and standards. A. Local, county and municipal codes. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). D. American Water Works Association (AWWA). E. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO). F. Florida Department of Transportation Specifications (FDOT). G. Federal Specifications. H. United States Department of Commerce Commercial Standards (CS). I. All local government rules and regulations. 1.03 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT: A. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings, materials and equipment shall be the standard product of a manufacturer and shall comply with the Contract Documents and applicable standards for such material or equipment. B. Prior to the start of Work, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a list of the manufacturers of all equipment and materials to be incorporated in the Work that conform to a standard, code or as specified. 1.04 WORKMANSHIP: All materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and to these Contract Documents. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer when the manufacturer's instructions conflict with these specifications. 1.05 SITE MAINTENANCE: The Contractor shall take the necessary steps to prevent objectionable blowing or drifting of dust, sand or other debris. 02610 -1 WF109000 1.06 STORAGE OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT: Pipe shall be strung in a mannerthatwill not endanger or restrict pedestrian or vehicular traffic. Pipe shall not be strung along routes more that 10 days prior to placement. 1.07 OPEN TRENCH: The amount of open trench shall be limited so that no more than 50 feet of open trench in advance of the backfilling operation will remain at the end of the working day. All open trench shall be protected by the Contractor with barriers, warning devices and traffic control devices, which shall be kept in the correct position, properly directed and clearly visible at all times. The barrier, warning and traffic control devices shall be suitably lighted at all times that vehicular traffic lights are required. Where pipelines cross plant roadways, vehicular traffic shall not be restricted for periods which exceed 4 hours. 1.08 EXISTING PIPING: This project includes the connection to existing piping /fittings /valves in numerous locations. The Contractor shall be responsible for the provision and installation of any necessary restraint systems to allow the existing system to be placed into temporary or permanent service. In addition, the Contractor shall supply any fittings, transitions or adapters necessary to accommodate the connection of, and to, existing systems, without sacrificing the overall system pressure rating. The Contractor shall expose and confirm horizontal and vertical location and material of existing piping to which connection will be made prior to ordering new piping /fittings. 1.09 PIPING SYSTEMS: The Contractor is advised that this project requires the use of several different piping materials. The Contractor shall provide all necessary transitions, couplings, etc. as necessary to connect the systems. Materials and pressure rating of the transitions shall be suitable for the application and subject to the Engineer's approval. In general, coated or uncoated carbon steel or other materials subject to corrosive attack (internally or externally) will not be acceptable. Stainless Steel shall be Grade 316 or 316L, unless specifically noted otherwise. The Contractor is further advised that the drawings communicate the overall intent of the major and minor piping systems on the project site. The Contractor shall investigate as required, anticipate, provide and install any and all additional fittings, adapters and transitions required to satisfy the intent of the piping systems shown on the drawings. 1.10 NSF CERTIFICATION: All piping which conveys water after the reverse osmosis pressure vessels shall be NSF 60/61 certified for potable water contact and satisfactory to agencies having jurisdiction for this purpose. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS: A. Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water Main Applications: 1. Ductile iron pipe shall conform to the requirements of ANSI /AWWA C151/A21.5 latest revision unless otherwise noted on the plans. The pipe shall be Special Class 52 thickness. Glands for mechanical joints shall be of ductile iron. 2. Fittings shall be ductile iron and conform to the requirements of ANSI /AWWA C1 10/A21.10 latest revision or ANSI /AWWA C153/A 21.53. Ductile iron fittings shall have a 350 psi minimum working pressure. The Contractor shall note that this specification allows the use of 'compact fittings. The drawings, however, are developed around the use of 'full body fittings. If `compact' fittings are used the 02610 -2 WF109000 I Contractor shall be responsible for making dimensional adjustments as required, subject to the approval of the Engineer. 3. Flanged ductile iron pipe shall be Special Class 53. Flanged ductile iron pipe shall have threaded ductile iron flanges, unless otherwise noted on the drawings, and shall conform to ANSI /AWWA C1 15/A21.15 latest revision. All flanges shall be ductile iron Class 150, ANSI B16.5. All above grade flanges shall be flat faced unless they are mating up to existing, or otherwise specified, raised face flanges. All gaskets shall be full faced 1/8" black neoprene, 50 Durometer. 4. Joints shall conform to the requirements of ANSI /AWWA C111/A21.11 latest revision. 5. Coatings: The internal surfaces of all ductile iron pipe and fittings for water distribution mains shall be coated with a cement mortar of standard thickness in accordance with ANSI /AWWA C104/A21.4 -85. The below grade and buried portion of outside surfaces shall be coated with a bituminous coating approximately one mil thick. The non -buried or submerged portion of all ductile iron pipe shall be coated per Section 09800. Piping located in pipe trenches inside the building shall be considered as non -buried and requires coating per Section 09800. B. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC) and Fittings for Water Distribution, Raw Water Mains, and Miscellaneous Small Pipe Applications: 1. Gasketed Joint Pipe: a. Gasket joint pipe, 4- inches thru 12- inches in diameter, shall conform to the requirements as set forth in AWWA C900 with dimension ratio DR 18 and shall bear the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) seal for potable water pipe. Unless otherwise noted, fittings for pipe 4- inches thru 12- inches in diameter shall be of the same material and rated to the same pressure as AWWA C -907, DR 18 pipe. Pipe larger than 12- inches in diameter shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C905 with dimension ratio DR 25 (165 psi) bearing the NSF seal for potable water pipe. Provisions must be made for contraction and expansion at each joint, or by a rubber ring sealed coupling. Clean, reworked material generated from the manufacturer's own pipe production may be used. All PVC fittings for pipe 4 -inch through 8 -inch shall be manufactured in accordance with AWWA C907 DR18 and bear the NSF seal for potable water. All fittings larger than 8 -inch shall be PVC gasketed, pressure rated fittings meeting the same material and pressure requirements of AWWA C905 DR25 PVC pipe. Unless otherwise noted, all PVC fittings for gasketed joint pipe shall be pressure rated (PR PVC). Pipe shall have ductile iron pipe equivalent outside dimensions. Fabricated fittings that are pressure rated ( PRPVC) are acknowledged to have dimensions that may be variable. The Contractor shall be responsible to insure proper fit of fabricated PRPVC fittings within the physical constraints available and adjust the piping system, subject to Engineer's approval, accordingly. All potable water pipe shall be blue, and raw water main shall be green. All other piping shall be white. 02610 -3 WF109000 b. Gasket joint pipe smaller than 4 in. in diameter, shall conform to Commercial Standard CS 256 and ASTM D -2241. All pipe shall bear the National Sanitation Foundation seal for potable water pipe. Provisions shall be made for contraction and expansion at each joint with a rubber ring, and an integral bell as part of each joint, or by a rubber ring sealed coupling. Pipe shall be made from SDR 21, 200 psi clean, virgin NSF approved Type I, Grade 1 PVC conforming to ASTM D -1784. Clean reworked material generated from the manufacturer's own pipe production maybe used. Fittings for pipe smaller than 4 in. in diameter shall be PVC and pressure rated wherever the pipe is subject to pressure testing. 2. Solvent Welded and Flanged Joint PVC Pipe and Fittings: All PVC pipe shall conform with the requirements of ASTM D -1785. Socket fittings shall conform with ASTM D -2467. Material shall conform with the requirements of ASTM D -1784 for PVC, Type 1, Grade 1. All PVC plastic pipe and fittings shall be Schedule 80 unless otherwise indicated. Flanges shall be socket type. All pipe shall be marked as prescribed in ASTM D -1785, and shall bear the NSF seal for potable water. No solvent welded joint PVC pipe larger than 2 -inch diameter shall be used except as indicated on the drawings. The Contractor shall provide and install expansion couplings as required by manufacturer to compensate for thermal expansion. The material of expansion couplings shall be suitable for the application and subject to the Engineer's approval. 3. Solvent Welded and Flanged Joint CPVC Pipe and Fittings: All CPVC pipe shall conform with the requirements of ASTM F-441. Socket fittings shall conform with the requirements of ASTM D -1784 for CPVC, Type IV, Grade 1. All CPVC plastic pipe and fittings shall be Schedule 80. All pipe shall be marked as prescribed in ASTM F- 441, and shall bear the NSF seal for potable water. No solvent welded joint CPVC pipe larger than 2 -inch diameter shall be used except as indicated on the drawings. D. Stainless Steel Pipe and Fittings: All stainless steel pipe and fittings shall be Schedule 10S, or higher, Type 316L seamless conforming to ASTM A312 and ASTM A403WP. All piping and manifolds shall be designed so that water will flow past all welds during normal operation. Connections shall be welded, flanged or grooved joint ends (Victaulic) as indicated on the drawings. Connections not otherwise designated shall be welded. Where Victaulic connections are indicated on the plans and the piping size and schedule preclude an ability to satisfy the specified test pressure, based on the connector manufacturer's specifications, Schedule 40S nipples shall be welded to the pipe/fittings to accommodate the use of Victaulics at the higher test pressure. Screwed ends will not be accepted except as specifically indicated. Butt welds shall be made with an inert gas arc welder, using compatible filler material and backing gas on the interior. Socket welds shall be made using an appropriate filler and no drop through to interior. All welds of stainless steel shall be electropolished and passivated. Flanges on piping and fittings in the system prior to the high pressure pumps (including at the well) shall be ANSI Class 150. Flanges on piping and fittings subsequent to the high pressure pumps shall be ANSI Class 300. The entire stainless steel piping system ahead of the high pressure pump shall withstand a working pressure of 150 psi minimum. The entire stainless steel piping system subsequent to the high pressure pump shall withstand a minimum working pressure of 400 psi. Flange gaskets shall be full faced black neoprene. If the piping is mating to equipment specified 02610 -4 WF109000 with ANSI Class 150 or ANSI Class 400 flanges, the appropriate adapter shall be supplied and installed. All stainless steel pipe and fittings shall be passivated. E. Copper Tubing: Copper tubing shall conform to ASTM Specification B -88 for "Seamless Copper Water Tube ", Type K, annealed temper furnished in coils (for below grade use) and drawn tempered (when furnished in rigid straight lengths) for above grade use. All flux shall be water based. All copper piping below grade shall be wrapped. Slab penetrations shall be sleeved. F. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe: HDPE piping shall comply with AWWA C901 latest revision (for sizes Y2 inch through 3 -inch) or AWWA C -906 (for sizes 4 -inch through 63 inch) and be approved for potable water service by the National Sanitation Foundation and bear the NSF seal. For sizes 3 -inch and smaller, the pipe shall be IPS size. For sizes 4- inch through 24 -inch the pipe shall have a standard dimension ratio (SDR) of 11. Fittings shall be butt fusion type satisfying ASTM D3261. Polyethylene tubing for chlorine shall be black. Piping shall be as manufactured by Phillips Drisco, Yarkey or Plexco. Polyethylene pipe used for sulfuric acid pipe or drain shall be as indicated on the drawings. G. Polyethylene Tubing: Polyethylene plastic tubing shall comply with AWWA C901 -88, be approved for potable water service by the National Sanitation Foundation and bear the NSF seal. The product shall be PE 3408, (high molecular weight, high density) rated for a minimum working pressure of 160 psi and the standard dimension ratio shall not exceed 9. Fittings shall be 316 Stainless Steel, equipped with compression type connection. Polyethylene tubing for chlorine shall be black. H. Double Contained Pipe /Fittings: Chemical piping shall be double contained where shown on the drawings. The entire system shall be by a single manufacturer and be pre - engineered. The system shall come complete with inspection ports, double contained valves, termination fittings, special fabrications for contained pump connections, adapters and transitions. Double contained valves shall be fabricated from the same materials as non - contained valves specified elsewhere in the specification. The annulus of the double contained system shall be fully sealed. The carrier piping shall be fully supported using supports compatible with the conveyed chemical. Supports shall be provided at a minimum of two at each fitting and one every four feet of pipe. PVC carrier and containment pipe and fittings shall be Type 1, Grade 1 PVC conforming to ASTM D -2467, ASTM D -1785 and ASTM D -1784 and bear the NSF seal. The following systems shall be used for the indicated chemicals. Carrier Containment Sulfuric Acid PVDF Sch 80 PVC Sodium Hypochlorite Sch 80 PVC Sch 80 PVC Sodium Hydroxide Sch 80 PVC Sch 80 PVC I. Miscellaneous Pipe and Fittings: 1. Brass IPB: ASTM B -43 for "Seamless Red Brass Pipe ", standard sizes, regular weight, annealed condition. 02610 -5 WF109000 2. Threaded Pipe Nipples: Short lengths unless otherwise required. Close lengths shall not be used except with special permission of the Engineer. Nipple stock shall be of same material used in connecting pipe and shall conform with material specifications. 3. Malleable Iron Screwed Pipe Fittings: Class 150, ANSI B16.3. 4. Screwed Cast Iron Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.12. 5. Screwed Brass or Bronze Fittings: ANSI 1316.17. 6. Screwed Unions: Screwed unions shall be bronze or brass or galvanized malleable iron provided with ground brass, Monel metal or other non - corroding seats. Unions with gaskets will not be permitted unless authorized by the Engineer. Unions for chemical feed lines shall be from same material as piping. 7. Brass Fittings: Brass fittings for flared copper tubes --ANSI 816.26. 8. Metal Pipe Couplings: Couplings shall be Rockwell, Dresser. Unless otherwise indicated, couplings 2 in. and smaller shall be malleable iron and couplings over 2 in. shall be cast iron. 9. Service Saddles (for DI, Steel and PVC Pipe): Service saddles shall be malleable or ductile iron, double strap, Mueller or Ford, for cast iron, ductile iron pipe. For PVC pipe, saddles and straps shall be brass or bronze, Mueller, Ford, designed for PVC pipe. Saddles on stainless steel pipe shall be 316 SS. For stainless steel pipe connections larger than 2 -inch, saddles shall be used. For stainless steel pipe connections 2- inches and smaller, 3000# half couplings shall be used. 10. Tube Fittings: Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, all tube fittings shall be Swagelok as manufactured by Crawford Fitting Company or Parker. 11. Nylon Braided and Teflon Tubing: Nylon braided and Teflon tubing shall be clear reinforced and suitable fora minimum working pressure of 100 psi at 73 °F in 1 -inch size. Large sizes may be derated but the minimum working pressure for any size shall not be less than 75 psi. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing and installing fittings, adapters, etc. required to connect to pipe and pumps where shown on the plans. All such fittings shall be fabricated from Teflon or Kynar. The tubing shall be approved by applicable agencies having jurisdiction for potable water contact and bear the NSF seal. 12. Restraining Rods: All rods and hardware used for pipe restraints shall be 316 SS, unless otherwise noted. 13. Uniflange: All uniflanges shall be Series 400 for ductile iron pipe. Where used for PVC an appropriate Series 900 Adapter flange shall be used. Uniflange shall be as manufactured by Nappco Incorporated. 14. Transition Coupling: Schedule 80 PVC to C900 PVC up to 16 -inch adaptor shall be Schedule 80 and rated at 220 psi minimum. Adaptor shall be slip fit solvent 02610 -6 WF109000 welded to Schedule 80 PVC and C900 pipe. Adaptor shall be manufactured by Nyloplast or Engineer approved equal. 15. Grooved End Couplings: Grooved end couplings shall be manufactured by the Victaulic Company of America. Couplings shall be Style 77 and manufactured from 316 SS with 316 SS nuts, bolts, washers, etc. Nuts, bolts and washers shall be 316 SS. The pipe wall thickness remaining after the grooving shall not be less than required to satisfy the published pipe pressure rating. It is noted that the shown grooved end couplings are considered minimal. The Contractor shall provide addition couplings with associated grooved end pipe where necessary to accommodate installation, future maintenance or provide allowance for thermal pipe expansion /contraction. Lever operated Victaulics shall be used for all cleaning connections to vessels and headers. 16. Grooved End Fittings: Grooved end fittings (also referred to as Victaulic fittings) shall be provided and installed as shown on the drawings. The fittings shall be Schedule 10, 316 SS, or Schedule 40, 316 SS as required to satisfy the pressure testing requirements. 17. SS Tubing: Stainless steel tubing shall be seamless fully annealed high quality 316SS complying with ASTM A269 or A213. The stainless steel tubing shall be of hardness Rb 80, or less, and based on a ultimate tensile strength of 75K psi. The tubing's OD shall be sized to match standard size precision tube fittings without adapters or reducers. The wall thickness shall be based on a working pressure of 3,600 psi minimum as calculated according to ANSI 831.3. The tubing shall be free of scratches and suitable for bending or flaring. The tubing shall be compatible with precision tube fittings. 18. Bell Restraints for PVC Pipe /Fittings: Restraint Harness for AWWA C -905 Series Pipe Bells (Sizes 14- inches - 36- inches): The restraint ring and gland shall be made entirely of ductile iron components conforming to ASTM A536. The harness assembly bolts shall be galvanized or Corten machine bolts. The bell ring shall be one (1) piece, singly cast, ductile iron designed to fit behind the pipe bell. The restraining gland shall use twist off type torque limiting hex heads on actuating screws to land restraint wedges with the required force onto the pipe surface. The restraining harness assembly, including glands and tie bolt configuration, shall have a pressure rating equal to or greater than that of the pipe on which it is used. The restraint harnesses shall be Series 2800 by EBAA Iron, Inc. Restraint Harness for AWWA C -900 Series Pipe Bells (Sizes 4- inches -12- inches): The restraint ring and gland shall be made entirely of ductile iron components conforming to ASTM A536. The harness assembly's bolts shall be Grade 5 galvanized or Corten steel machine bolts. The bell ring shall be split ring ductile iron with side bolt configuration designed to fit behind the pipe bell. The restraint ring shall have a serrated interior surface utilizing side bolts at a specified torque to wedge itself onto the pipe surface. The restraining harness assembly, including glands and tie bolt configuration, shall have a minimum working pressure of 150 psi or greater. The restraint harnesses shall be Series 1500 or Series 2500 (for PVC molded or fabricated fittings) manufactured by EBAA Iron, Inc. 02610 -7 WF109000 Restraint Harness for IPS OD PVC Bell Pipe Joints (Sizes 2- inches - 12- inches): The restraint ring and gland shall be made entirely of ductile iron components conforming to 60 -42 -10 ductile iron. The harness assembly's bolts shall be galvanized or Corten steel machine bolts. The bell and pipe rings shall be split ring ductile iron with side bolt configuration designed to fit across the bell and socket pipe joint. Both rings shall have a serrated interior surface utilizing side bolts at a specified torque to wedge itself onto the pipe surfaces. The restraining harness assembly, including glands and tie bolt configuration, shall have a pressure rating equal to or greater than that of the pipe on which it is used. The restraint harnesses shall be Series 6500 by EBAA Iron, Inc., or Uniflange Series 1360. 19. Flange Hardware: Unless otherwise noted, all flange bolts, nuts and washers which are either buried or located inside the building shall be 316 SS, except for the flanges inside the high service pump room which shall be galvanized per the requirements of Section 15100. 20. Ductile Iron Pipe Restraints: Ductile iron pipe restraints shall be Series 1100 or 1700, as required, for ductile iron pipe. Glands shall be manufactured of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536 -80. Restraining devices shall be ductile iron heat treated to a minimum hardness of 370 BHN. Twist off nuts shall be used to insure proper actuating of restraint devices. The restraint devices shall be Megalug, manufactured by EBAA Iron Sales, Inc. 21. Flexible Couplings: Flexible couplings shall be flanged using ANSI 1316.5, 150 pound, flat faced flanges. Flanges shall be coated with epoxy and reinforced as required to satisfy the stipulated pressure rating. Flexible couplings shall be fabricated from TFE conforming to ASTM D -1457, Type III and pressure rated at 150 psi minimum, at 90 degree F. Flexible couplings shall be as manufactured by Carbone U.S.A. Corporation. 22. Stainless Steel Expansion Joints: Stainless steel expansion joints shall be flanged and suitable to allow 3.8 inches of axial compression and 0.5 inches of axial offset in a 36 -inch size and rated at 150 psi @ 70 degrees F. The expansion joint shall be 316 SS. Stainless steel expansion joints shall be an OMNI -FLEX Model, manufactured by CAB Incorporated or UnaFlex. 23. Rubber Expansion Joint: Rubber expansion joints shall be flanged, single arch style with a %2 -inch steel backing ring. Rubber expansion joints shall be suitable for minimum 50 psi and manufactured by General Rubber Corporation. 24. PVC Tubing: PVC tubing shall be fabricated in compliance with and certified according to NSF -61. PVC tubing shall be reinforced with high tensile yam. The tubing shall be rated for 150 psi at 70 degrees F 3/4 -inch size. The tubing shall be Series K 6158, manufactured by KuriTec (Canton, MI), or Engineer approved equal. 25. Flanged Coupling Adapter: Flanged coupling adapters shall satisfy the requirements of ANSI /AWWA C219 current revision and be Model 602, manufactured by Baker, or equal. 26. Wall Sleeves: Wall sleeves shall be Link Seal Model S -316 with EDPM seal element. 02610 -8 WF109000 I PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION - The Contractor shall perform all excavation of every description and of whatever substances encountered to the depths indicated on the drawings or as necessary. This shall include all necessary clearing and grubbing of any foreign substance encountered within the structure or trench area. Excavated material suitable for backfill shall be piled in an orderly manner at a sufficient distance from the trench to prevent slides or cave -ins. A. Protection of Existing Facilities and Utilities: All existing improvements such as pavements, conduit, poles, pipes and other structures, shall be carefully supported and fully protected from injury and, in case of damage, they shall be restored by the Contractor without compensation. Existing utilities and other underground obstructions are shown on the plans, but the accuracy of the locations and depths is not guaranteed. The Contractor shall contact the utility prior to construction and arrange for the necessary assistance in locating and protecting the existing utilities. The Contractor shall be responsible for damages to these existing utilities and shall, in case they are damaged, restore them to their original condition. B. Trench Excavation: The minimum width of the trench shall be equal to the outside diameter of the pipe at the joint plus 8 in. each side of pipe for unsheeted or sheeted trench, with the maximum width of trench, measured at the top of the pipe, not to exceed the outside pipe diameter, plus 24 in., unless otherwise shown on the drawings. Trench walls shall be maintained vertical from the bottom of the trench to a line measured at the top of the pipe. From the top of the pipe to the surface the trench walls shall be as vertical as possible under soil conditions. No requirements stipulated herein, shall supersede the Florida Trench Safety Act. No more than 50 linear feet of trench shall be open in advance of the completed pipe laying operation without prior approval of the Engineer. Pipe trenches across roadways and driveways shall be backfilled as soon as pipe is installed. Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, adequate detour facilities are not available, no trench shall be left open across a roadway or commercial property driveway where adequate detour routes are not available for a period in excess of 30 minutes, or as directed by the governing authority. No trench shall be left open across any roadway or driveway for more than 24 hours. C. Shoring, Sheeting and Bracing: The Contractor shall do all shoring, sheeting and bracing or provide other approved facilities required to perform and protect the excavation and as necessary for the safety of the public, the employees, and the preservation of existing roads, structures and other utilities. The top of such sheeting left in place shall be cut off at a minimum elevation of 2.5 ft below finished grade. D. Disposal of Excess Materials: The Contractor shall dispose of the excavated materials not required or suitable for backfill. All surplus excavated material which is suitable for fill shall become property of the Contractor, and shall be disposed of by the contractor at his expense off of the project site. E. Unstable Soil Conditions and Over depth Excavation: Where unstable soil conditions are encountered, the excavation shall be increased as directed by the Engineer. The bottom of the excavation shall be brought up to the proper excavation elevation utilizing suitable and properly compacted backfill material. 02610 -9 WF109000 i 3.02 INSTALLATION OF WATER MAINS AND MISCELLANEOUS PIPING: Unless otherwise noted on the drawings or in other sections of this specification, the pipe shall be handled and installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and with the applicable AWWA or ASTM Standards. If a conflict exists between the manufacturer's instructions and the AWWA or ASTM Standards, the manufacturer's instructions shall govern. 1. Ductile Iron Pipe - AWWA C -600 2. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe - ASCE Manual No. 37, ASTM D2321. The Contractor shall use every precaution during construction to protect the pipe against the entry of nonpotable water, dirt, wood, small animals and any other foreign material that would hinder the operation of the pipeline. Where the groundwater elevation is above the bottom of the trench, the Contractor shall provide suitable dewatering equipment. All piping shall be placed in a dry trench, unless wet trench installation is approved by the Engineer. A. Depth of Cover: Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, or otherwise authorized by the Engineer, the pipe shall have a minimum depth of 30 in. B. Piping Restraint Systems: All piping systems shall be restrained to withstand the specified test pressure. In no case will this pressure be less than 150 psi, except for the containment pipe on double containment piping systems. In general, and unless otherwise specifically shown, all restraint systems shall be mechanical. All ductile iron or C900 PVC shall be restrained with Megalugs unless it is designated as flanged. At a minimum, joint restraints shall be provided on all below grade piping and fittings at the point where either a horizontal or vertical change in direction occurs. Joint restraints shall be used as indicated and /or as required as far back from fittings on the pipeline as necessary to maintain the system integrity at the specified test pressure. The number of joints to be restrained shall be according to DIPRA calculations and subject to the Engineer's approval. Where, in the Engineer's opinion a mechanical restraint system is not feasible, or where shown on the drawings, the Contractor shall use thrust or gravity blocks as required to restrain the piping system. The Contractor is cautioned that the thrust and gravity block details shown on the drawings are adequate only to 150 psi. For above -grade and trench piping, all valves and fittings shall be provided with concrete support blocks unless fabricated FRP stainless steel or aluminum supports are otherwise indicated. All above grade and trench PVC, FRP and stainless steel shall be supported at intervals recommended by the manufacturer but not less than the indicated supports. The Contractor is specifically cautioned to confirm the adequacy of the indicated supports with the pipe manufacturer and add additional supports of like design where required, subject to the Engineer's approval. Required support intervals shall be submitted with the shop drawing. All piping systems shall be fully supported. All piping systems shall be supported by 316L FRP, or aluminum pipe supports unless specifically noted to the contrary. Supports shall be designed according to the requirements shown on the plans. C. Connections to Existing Mains: The Contractor shall make connections to existing mains as shown on the drawings. Connections shall be made only after arrangements have been completed by the Contractor with the Owner of the system and shall be under the system Owner's immediate supervision. 02610 -10 WF109000 i D. Leakage Test: Leakage and pressure tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Engineer in accordance with AWWA C -600 Section 4 procedures. The Contractor will provide a suitable pressure gage, acceptable to the Engineer, for the test. The Contractor will provide all other necessary apparatus including a pump, flow measuring device, piping connections and fittings and the necessary labor to conduct the tests. The test shall be of two hour duration. During the test, the pipe being tested shall be maintained at a pressure of not less than 150 psi. For piping on the reverse osmosis system which is operationally subject to pressures in excess of 100 psi, the test pressure shall be a minimum of 1.5 times the normal operating pressure as defined by the Engineer. Leakage is defined as the quantity of water added to the pipe being tested during the test period. No pipe installation will be accepted if the leakage exceeds the quantities specified in AWWA C -600, Section 4.2. For pipe less than 3 -inch diameter or above grade piping systems, the acceptable leakage criterion shall be no visible leaks of any amount. Pipe and fittings shall be sufficiently exposed to permit examination for leaks by the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the testing pattern he proposes to follow prior to testing for the Engineer's approval. No more than 200 feet of line shall be tested at one time unless the Engineer specifically agrees, in writing, to a variation. The Contractor shall be responsible to provide any temporary valving or appurtenances to satisfy this requirement. Upon completion of all leakage testing, flushing and bacteriological clearances, all chemical feed piping shall be completely cleared of all water by purging with a dry inert gas. The Contractor is specifically cautioned that the effectiveness of the drying operation is critical for the sulfuric acid piping system. Suitable safety precautions shall be taken by the Contractor. E. Flushing of Completed Pipelines: Following the leakage test, each section of completed pipeline shall be as thoroughly flushed as possible. A minimum flow shall be used for flushing that will insure a velocity in the pipe of 2.5 ft per second. Water required for testing and flushing shall be furnished by the Contractor. The water shall be from a potable water source satisfactory to the Owner. The Contractor is advised that pigging for flushing maybe required on some pipelines due to unavailability of a suitable source of volume of water. F. Disinfection of Complete Pipeline: Following flushing, the Contractor shall disinfect all water distribution mains and service lines as follows. All process equipment shall also be disinfected according to the procedures described herein. The Contractor shall develop and submit for approval a plan for achieving the desired disinfection without damaging any of the process equipment. The plan shall include a method for disposal of the disinfecting agent and water at the end of the exercise. Water shall be fed slowly into the system applying sufficient chlorine to produce a dosage in excess of 50 ppm at the farthest point in the system from the point of application. The chlorine solution then shall be retained in the line for a period of 24 hours. At the end of this time if a minimum chlorine residual of 5 ppm is not obtained, the procedure shall be repeated. During the disinfection process, all valves shall be operated. The chlorine concentration used for disinfection shall be reduced, subject to the Engineers approval, to the extent that the above specified concentration will cause damage to process equipment. After disinfection, the water shall be flushed from the system at its extremities until excessive chlorine residuals are eliminated. Water samples for bacteriological examination shall be taken as directed by the Department of Health and submitted to the nearest approved bacteriological laboratory. The chlorine residual at the time of sample collection shall not exceed 4 mg/I and the pressure in the main shall not be allowed to drop below 20 psi after the samples are collected. Disinfection shall not be considered satisfactory until laboratory reports are satisfactory to the Department of Health or Department of Environmental Regulation. 02610 -11 W F109000 i G. Water for Disinfection, Testing and Flushing: Water required for disinfection, testing and flushing shall be furnished by the Contractor. The water shall be from a potable water source satisfactory to the Owner. The cost of the water shall be included in the unit cost of the pipe and no separate payment will be made for this item. H. Piping Stress: All flanged piping, fittings and other equipment shall be installed so that no pipe stress is transferred to the equipment. Flanged pipe and victaulic restrained piping /fittings shall remain aligned with the flange bolts removed. Contractor will demonstrate the lack of pipe stress prior to start up of pumps. I. Sample Points: The Contractor shall supply sample points on water mains in accordance with the standard Village details. A minimum of three (3) below grade and five (5) above grade in addition to those already identified on the drawings. Above grade sample points shall consist of a %2 -inch saddle and tap with a' /2 -inch ball valve material to match the piping. 3.03 BACKFILLING: A. Material: Shall be excavated material, essentially free of organic material, asphaltic concrete, clay, concrete, boulders and other deleterious materials. 1. Bedding and Pipe Embedment: The material in the bedding, around the pipe and to a depth of 1 ft over the pipe shall be sand or a mixture of sand, shell or crushed rock properly graded and mixed so that fine grain material from the side walls of the trench or backfill above the embedment will not migrate into the backfill material. The backfill shall meet the following limitations: a. Ductile Iron Pipe - All material shall pass through a 3/4 in. square opening laboratory sieve. b. Plastic Pipe and Fiberglass Pipe - All materials shall pass through a 1/2 in. square opening laboratory sieve for water mains and force mains. All material shall pass through a 1/2 in. square opening laboratory sieve for gravity sewers. 2. Above Pipe Embedment: The material shall be sand or a mixture of sandy material and rock, stone and shell. Rock, stone and shell shall pass through a 3 -1/2 in. ring. 3. Additional Fill: If sufficient suitable backfill material is not available from the excavation, additional fill meeting the above requirements shall be provided by the Contractor. B. Placing and Compaction: 1. Water Mains a. Under Pavement: Where the excavation is made through proposed pavements, including shoulders, curbs, driveways or sidewalks, or where such structures are penetrated by wellpoints, the entire backfill to the 02610 -12 WF109000 subgrade of the pavement or structures shall be made with predominantly sandy material free from rock, stones or organic matter, except that rocks passing a 3-1/2 in. ring will be permitted in the backfill between the elevation one foot above the to of the pipe and the bottom of the pavement subgrade. P PP P 9 The entire backfill material, including the material placed around and one foot above the pipe, shall be compacted to a density of not less than 100% of the maximum density, as determined by AASHTO T -99. Particular care shall be taken to insure that the backfill at the haunch is free from voids and is properly compacted. Compaction by flooding or puddling will be permitted only by written authorization from the Engineer. Roads, walks and driveways consisting of broken stone, gravel, marl, shell, shellrock, or a conglomerate of such materials are not considered as being permanent pavement. b. In Areas Not Under Permanent Pavement: Within right -of -ways or other areas where permanent pavement does not exist or is not proposed, including roads, walks and driveways consisting of broken stone, gravel, marl, shell, shellrock or conglomerate, the entire backfill to the subgrade of the pavement or structures shall be made with predominantly sandy material free from rock, stones or organic matter, except that rocks having a maximum dimension of 6 in. will be permitted in the backfill between the elevation 1 ft above the top of the pipe and 1 ft below the surface. Particular care shall be taken to insure that the backfill at the haunch is free from voids and is properly compacted. The bedding and embedment shall be compacted to a density of not less than 100 percent of maximum as determined by AASHTO T -99. The backfill material above 1 ft over the pipe shall be compacted to a density of not less than 85 percent of the maximum density, as determined by AASHTO T -99. Compaction by flooding or puddling will be permitted only by written authorization from the Engineer. c. Miscellaneous: Backfilling around meter boxes, valve boxes and other structures shall be accomplished in the same manner as the connected pipe. Extreme care shall be used in backfilling wellpoint holes to prevent voids and settlement. If necessary, the holes should be plugged with a concrete slurry, such plugging to be at the expense of the Contractor. d. Compaction Tests: The Engineer may at any time instruct the Contractor to partially excavate a previously backfilled trench or temporarily backfilling of a short section of the trench for the purpose of obtaining measurements of the density of the backfill. The testing will be paid for by the Contractor. The cost of the partial excavation and restoration of the backfill will be paid for by the Contractor. Any test failures will be paid by Contractor. Density tests shall be taken along each pipe run (maximum distance between tests shall be 100 feet). 3.04 RESTORATION OF DAMAGED SURFACES, STRUCTURES AND PROPERTY: Where pavement, sidewalks, trees, shrubbery, fences or other property and surface structures not designated as pay items, have been damaged, removed or disturbed by the Contractor whether deliberately or through failure to carry out the requirements of the contract documents, state laws, 02610 -13 WF109000 municipal ordinances or the specific direction of the Engineer, or through failure to employ usual and reasonable safeguards, such property and surface structures shall be replaced or repaired at the expense of the Contractor to a condition equal to that before Work began within a time frame approved by the Engineer. 3.05 PROTECTION: At the end of each workday the mains under construction shall be plugged to prevent the entry of small animals or rodents. Temporary plugs shall be provided for this purpose. 3.06 SUPPORTS: All above grade piping shall be fully supported at intervals which are no greater than the pipe manufacturer recommended distances. All support shall be fabricated of 316 SS unless otherwise noted, and secured with 316 SS hardware. All piping shall be clamped to supports using neoprene gaskets and 316 SS hardware. All pipe supports shall be installed to allow axial pipe movement due to thermal expansion /contraction without jeopardizing the integrity of the support. The Contractor is specifically advised that trench supports for the R.O. system are considered minimum. Additional supports of identical design may be required, depending on the pipe manufacturer. All such additional supports shall be provided and installed. In general, all PVC or CPVC piping under 3- inches in size shall be supported with wall brackets. In no event shall the support type, locations and spacing be less than for the same piping on the existing train. 3.07 CLEANUP: The Contractor shall maintain the site of the Work in a neat condition. The Contractor shall remove all excess materials, excess excavated materials and all debris resulting from his operations within a time frame approved by the Engineer. i ' i 02610 -14 WF109000 SECTION 02640 VALVES, GAUGES AND MISCELLANEOUS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: The Contractor shall furnish and install all valving equipment as shown on the drawings and as specified. 1.02 APPLICABLE CODES, STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS: The Work under this Contract shall be in strict accordance with the following codes and standards: A. Local, county and municipal codes B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) D. American Water Works Association Standards (AWWA) E. Florida Department of Transportation Specifications (DOT) F. Federal Specifications G. United States Department of Commerce Commercial Standards (CS) 1.03 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT: A. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings, materials and equipment shall be the standard product of a manufacturer and shall comply with the Contract Documents and applicable standards for such materials or equipment. B. Prior to the start of the Work, the Contractor shall submit a list of the manufacturers of all equipment and materials to be incorporated in the work that conform a standard, code or as specified. 1.04 R.O. SYSTEM: Reference is made in this section of the specification to "R.O. System" and "non -R.O. System" components. For purposes of this section, R.O. System components shall be deemed as anything within the "process train" located within R.O. building and system components located at Well R4, including but not limited to, raw water, feed water, product water, reject water and cleaning system water. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 VALVE OPERATORS: A. General: The rated torque capability of each operator, shall be sufficient to seat, unseat and rigidly hold in any intermediate position the valve disc it controls under the test conditions specified. All valves shall be equipped with adjustable mechanical stop - limiting devices to prevent over - travel of the valve disc in the open and closed positions. Operator 02640 -1 WF109000 housings, supports and connections to the valve shall be designed with a minimum safety factor of five based on the ultimate strength, or based on three on the yield strength of materials used. The rated torque capability of each cylinder portion of a cylinder operator shall be sufficient to seat, unseat and rigidly hold in any intermediate position the valve disc or plug it controls under the operating conditions specified. Operators to be buried shall be watertight. Above grade operators shall be weatherproof. The position of the operator shall be as shown on the shop drawings. The piece mark of the valves, the location, the size, the type of operator, the maximum working head, and the closing time shall be tabulated on the shop drawings. Unless otherwise noted, all non - buried valves shall be equipped with handwheel operators unless the valve has an electric operator with manual override. A valve key of suitable length shall be provided for buried operators. The Contractor shall be responsible for dimensionally confirming the required orientation of the valve operators (both manual and electric). Any required extensions or fabrications necessary to accommodate the installation of the operators shall be provided and installed. B. Gearing: All gear operators or traveling -nut operators shall be self - locking and designed to transmit twice the required operator torque without damage to the faces or the gear teeth or the contact faces of the screw or nut. Upon request, the manufacturer shall furnish the purchaser with certified copies of reports describing the procedures and results of the tests for each model and torque rating of operator to be furnished. Operators composed of worm gearing shall be totally enclosed in a gear case and shall have worm gears of bronze and worms of hardened steel that operate in a lubricant. Operators of the traveling -nut type shall have threaded reach rods of steel and shall have a bronze or ductile iron nut with internal threads. Operators shall be enclosed. C. Manual Operators: Manual operator shall have all gearing totally enclosed. Operators shall be designed to produce the specified torque with a maximum pull of 80 Ibs on handwheel or chainwheel operators and a maximum input of 150 ft-lb on operating nuts. i Stop - limiting devices shall be provided in the operators for the open and closed position. All operator components between the input and these stops shall be designed to withstand, without damage, a pull of 200 Ibs for handwheel or chainwheel operators and an input torque of 300 ft-lb for operating nuts. An arrow and the word 'open" or "close" shall be cast on the handwheel to indicate the direction to turn said handwheel. All operating nuts shall be designed so that counter - clockwise movement of the handwheel will open the valve and clockwise movement of the handwheel will close the valve. D. Electric Operators: This section applies to motor operators for all motor operated valves except motor operated ball valves on the chemical feed system. These operators are addressed in the specific valve section. The Contractor shall refer to the instrumentation and electrical drawings for identification of all valves which require motor operators. Motors shall be capable of producing not less than 2 times the required operator torque. Electric -motor drives shall be equipped with position limit switches and torque switches for open, closed and at least two intermediate positions. Switches shall be SPDT, 5 amps minimum at 120 volts. � I 02640 -2 WF109000 Any gearing in direct association with the electric -motor drive shall be totally enclosed and shall operate in a lubricant. Each electric operator shall be provided with a de- clutchable auxiliary handwheel for manual operation and local position indicator. The high pressure pump control valve operators shall be modulating and have two feedback potentiometers which will show 0- 100% open valve position. Potentiometers shall be mylar film, precision, 1000 ohms, plus or minus 1 % linearity, 1 watt, no steps over the 0 - 100% travel. Unless otherwise specified, electric- motor - operated valves shall operate from fully open to fully closed positions or the reverse in approximately 60 seconds, at the operating pressure times 150 %. The operator and valve manufacturer shall provide calculations to support the ability of the operator to satisfy these conditions with the shop drawings. The operators shall be 460 volt, three -phase for the motor. The enclosures for the motors and position and torque switches and terminal blocks shall be NEMA 4 with threaded hubs for control and power at conduit entrance. The electric operators shall include a motor and 120 volt enclosure space heater. The operators shall be as manufactured by Auma. 2.02 BUTTERFLY VALVES: All non -R.O. system butterfly valves shall conform to AWWA C504- 80, Class 150 -B. Hardware shall be constructed of 18 -8 Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel. Valves shall be flanged, wafer or mechanical joint as indicated. The disc shall be centered between flanges or mechanical joints. Direction to open valve shall be counter - clockwise. Valves shall be manufactured by Henry Pratt or Dezurik (no substitutions). Each valve disc shall rotate through an angle of 90 degrees from the fully opened to the fully closed position. The axis of rotation of all valve discs shall be horizontal except where otherwise shown on the drawings. A position indicator shall be provided for valves with a handwheel or electrical operator. 2.03 GATE VALVES: Non -R.O. System gate valves, larger than 2- inches, shall be double disc, bronze mounted, iron body, inside screw type with non - rising stem. Direction of rotation to open valves shall be counter - clockwise. Valves shall meet the requirements of AWWA C500 — latest revision. Ends shall be flanged, push -on or mechanical joint, as required. Valves shall be manufactured by Mueller, M &H Valve and Fittings, Clow or Kennedy Companies. Valves shall be furnished with all jointing accessories. Non -R.O. gate valves 2 -inch and smaller shall have a bronze body and disc (ASTM B 145), non - rising stem, screwed ends and Buna -N "O" ring packing. The valves shall be rated at 150 psi and manufactured by American, Kennedy, Milwaukee or Nibco. R.O. System gate valves shall be fabricated of all 316 SS as manufactured by Kitz, or equal. These valves shall be suitable for a working pressure of 600 psi and have non - rising stem with hand wheel operator. 2.04 NON -R.O. SYSTEM CHECK VALVES: Non R.O. system check valves 2 in. and smaller shall be bronze with screwed ends. Swing check valves shall be manufactured by Crane Company, Ohio Brass Valve Company. 02640 -3 WF109000 i Non R.O. system check valves larger than 2 in. shall be cast iron, bronze mounted and conform to AWWA C508 -82. Valves shall be flanged, mechanical joint or wafer as required and have a BUNA- N resilient seat. Valves shall be furnished with all jointing accessories. Valves shall be globe style rated for 150 psi, Series 600 silent check valves manufactured by Valve and Primer Corporation (APCO)or Series 1800 manufactured by Valvmatic Valve and Manufacturing Corporation. i 2.05 BALL VALVES: A. PVC, CPVC and PVDF Ball Valves: Ball valves shall be designed for a water working pressure of not less than 150 psi, shall be constructed of PVC or CPVC as indicated, and when in the fully -open position, shall have a port diameter not less than Schedule 80 PVC pipe of the same nominal diameter. Valves shall be designed with true union ends to permit removal of the valve from the line and with end connectors designed for solvent welding to the pipe. Valves shall be equipped with a manual lever type operator. Buried valves shall be equipped with a nut suitable for hand service and box. Ball valves shall be union design, manufactured by Type 21 as manufactured by ASAHI /America or True Blue as manufactured by Plastomatic Valves, Inc., or VX Series by IPEX. Thermoplastic motor operated ball valves shall be Hayward or Duo -Bloc by ASAHI /America and equipped with an electric operator designed to produce a torque of at least two times the required torque. Electric operators shall be reversing type, 115 volt AC, 60 cycle, single phase. Motors shall be housed in a NEMA 4 enclosure and be equipped with extra isolated limit switches for extra open /closed indication. The electric operators shall be Quartermaster Series 94 manufactured by ASAHI /America or Series EVR manufactured by Hayward. Motor operators shall contain limit switches and feedback potentiometers as required for the application and process monitoring and control from the central plant control system. B. Steel Ball Valves: All steel ball valves shall be constructed of 316 SS, including handle, stem, stem nuts, washers, stop plate, body and ball. Body bolts and nuts shall be 316 stainless steel. Ball valves shall be designed for a pressure not less than 600 psig. Valves shall have a female NPT inlet/outlet connections. Ball valves shall be Series 60, stainless steel swing -out ball valves, as manufactured by Whitey Co., or Series 44, as manufactured by Worcester Controls. 2.06 HIGH PRESSURE PUMP CONTROL AND FIRST STAGE PERMEATE BACK PRESSURE VALVES: The control valves at the high pressure pumps discharge and the first stage permeate back pressure valve shall be of the high pressure butterfly type. The body shall be wafer style to ANSI Class 300 for the high pressure pumps, ANSI Class 150 for the permeate back pressure. Body, disc and shaft shall be of Type 316 stainless steel. The seat shall be PTFE material and meet ANSI 1316.104 Class IV shut -off requirements. The valve packing and seal liner shall be TFE. The bushings shall be TFE lined 316 SS. The shaft shall be 17 -4 SST. The high pressure pump control valves shall be motor operated as shown on the drawings. The permeate back pressure valve shall be handwheel operated. The operator shaft shall be longer than standard to facilitate installation and operator as sown on the drawings. The valve shall be suitable for continuous throttling pressure drops of up to 80 psi without cavitation damage. Valve shall be as manufactured by Jamesbury, Keystone /Pratt or Fisher. 2.07 STAINLESS STEEL CHECK VALVES: R.O. System stainless steel check valves, including Well R4, and the stainless steel check valves at the well heads shall be of all 316 stainless steel or 02640 -4 WF109000 316L stainless steel construction, shall be of the double door wafer style design, Class 150. Check valve doors shall be spring loaded, normally closed, by means of one or more heavy duty 316 stainless steel torsion springs. Flow through the valve shall cause the doors to open. Upon loss of flow, the torsion springs shall cause doors to close before reverse flow starts, at a point of zero velocity to preclude slamming. Seat shall be 316 stainless steel. The valve shall be Series 9000 manufactured by Apco Valve & Primer Corporation or Dual Disc manufactured by Valvmatic Valve and Manufacturing Corporation. 2.08 R.O. STAINLESS STEEL BUTTERFLY VALVES: R.O. System stainless steel butterfly valves shall be of high - pressure type. The body shall be wafer style satisfying ANSI Class 300 for applications downstream of the high pressure pump and up to the reject control valve and ANSI Class 150 for applications upstream of the high pressure pump and on the permeate. The body and disc shall be of Type 316 stainless steel. The seat shall be PTFE material and meet ANSI -FCI 70 -2 Class VI shut -off requirements. The valve packing and seal liner shall be TFE. The bushings shall be TFE lined 316 SS. The valve shaft shall be 17-4 SST. The operator shaft shall be 316 SS (uncoated) or 304 SS and coated. The handwheel shall be aluminum or 316 SS. The high pressure pump control valves shall be motor operated as shown on the drawings. Other non - buried valves shall be handwheel operated. The handwheel operator shaft on the first stage permeate backpressure valve shall be longer than standard to facilitate installation and operation as shown on the drawings. The valve shall be suitable for continuous throttling pressure drops of up to 80 psi at full port equivalent flow velocity of 10 ft/sec without cavitation damage. Valve shall be as manufactured by Jamesbury, Keystone /Pratt or Fisher. 2.09 R.O. SYSTEM - CONCENTRATE PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE: The concentrate pressure reducing valve shall be a manual throttling valve, designed to prevent cavitation damage and to reduce noise. The valve shall be of the flanged globe style to ANSI Class 300 and shall have a linear flow characteristic. The Valve body and bonnet shall be Type 316 stainless steel. The packing shall be PTFE. The valve shall be suitable for pressure drops up to 275 psi at 350 gpm without cavitation and satisfy ASTM B16.34 Class IV shutoff requirements and be equipped with a Type 1008 handwheel operator. Valve shall be a Style ET III manufactured by Fisher Controls with (at a minimum) a Trim Designation 76 and a Cavitrol III cage. 2.10 RUPTURE DISCS: The product water rupture disc holders shall be fabricated of all 316 SS, 150 pound ANSI with carbon steel boltings. The rupture discs on the total product shall be 316 SS/Teflon /316 SS and set at approximately 15 psig. The rupture discs on the first stage product shall be 316 SS/Teflon /316 SS and set at 20 psi above the first stage backpressure or as required by the membrane manufacturer. Rupture discs shall also be vacuum rated to at least -10 psig. All rupture discs shall be Teflon coated. The exact rupture settings shall be as required by the Engineer and the membrane manufacturer shall certify the acceptability of the proposed rupture disc. Two (2) extra rupture discs shall be supplied for each installation point. The assembly shall be as manufactured by Fike Metal Products Corp. 2.11 AUTOMATIC AIR AND VACUUM RELEASE VALVE: Air release valves shall be of the size shown and shall have screwed ends. The bodies shall be of high- strength cast iron and the float shall be Type 316 stainless steel except for any automatic air release valves located on the R.O. supply, feed, reject or product, including those at the wells which shall have have 316 SS bodies and all internal parts. All moving parts shall be of stainless steel or bronze on non -R.O. valves. Valves shall be designed for not less than 150 psi water working pressure. Air release valves shall be Model 200A manufactured by Apco Valve and Primer Corporation or Model PL -10 as manufactured by Crispin. Air and vacuum release valves shall be Series 140, manufactured by Apco Valve and Primer Corporation or Series AL -10 manufactured by Crispin. Valve Model Numbers are 02640 -5 WF109000 based on 1 -inch size and shall be adjusted as required. Valves shall be 1 -inch unless otherwise indicated, and mounted on 1 -inch Schedule 40 316 SS pipe nipples with 316 SS isolation ball valves. Valves shall be fully supported with 316 SS support brackets. 2.12 VALVE BOXES: Valve boxes shall be 5 1/4" cast iron, adjustable, with cast iron drop cover. All buried valves shall be equipped with a valve box. Covers shall be marked "Sewer" for sewer systems and marked "Water" for water distribution systems. 2.13 PRESSURE GAUGES: Pressure gauges shall be direct reading, 4 -inch diameter (unless otherwise noted), 1/4 -inch male, bottom connected devices installed phenolic cases suitable for permanent outdoor applications. The pressure gauge ranges and action (vacuum /pressure /compound) shall be as shown on the drawings or stipulated in Section 11250 and Section 11301. If no pressure range is shown, the ranges shall be as follows: R.O. Feed 0 -600 psi, R.O. Reject ahead of control valve 0 -600 psi, R.O. first stage product 0 -60 psi, R.O. total product 0- 30 psi, Transfer Pump Discharge 0 -30 psi, High Service Pump Discharge 0 -100 psi, all others 0 -160 psi. All wetted parts shall be 316 SS. Pressure gauges shall be glycerin filled and equipped with a 316 SS snubber. Pressure gauges on the R.O. feed and concentrate shall be equipped with 316 SS diaphragm seals. All diaphragm seals shall be equipped with clean ports and shall be able to be dismantled, cleaned and repaired without interruption of the system. Unless otherwise noted, all gauges shall be installed on Y2 -inch, minimum, 316 SS pipe nipple. A minimum 1 /2-inch, 316 SS air bleed valve and minimum '/2 -inch, 316 SS isolation ball valve shall be provided at every gauge, except gauges used to measure pressure on corrosive chemical feed systems, where the air bleed, isolation valve and pipe nipple shall be PVC. Pressure gauges shall satisfy ASME B40.1, Grade 2A. Where gauges are mounted remote to the process pipe Y4 -inch 150 psi rated PVC tubing shall be used to interconnect the process pipe to the gauge. 2.14 BACKPRESSURE SUSTAINING VALVE: The valve shall be designed to maintain a constant upstream pressure and minimize surge associated with the pump starting and stopping and include an internal check valve assembly. The valve shall be of globe pattern design, controlled by field adjustable pilot valves and powered by water pressure obtained from the inlet and outlet side of the main valve. The valve shall open at a field adjustable, controlled rate of speed when the upstream pressure has satisfied the pressure setting of the back pressure pilot. The valve will then throttle at whatever position is required to maintain the upstream head as per the setting on back pressure sustaining pilot. The pilot assembly piping shall be equipped with a Wye strainer and 316 stainless steel isolation valve and dump port. The backpressure sustaining valve shall operate on the differential diaphragm pressure principle such that the area on the underside of the diaphragm is no less than the pipe area, and the area on the upper surface of the diaphragm is greater than the area on the underside of the diaphragm. The valve shall be capable of operating in any position and shall incorporate only one flanged cover at the valve top from which all internal parts shall be accessible. There shall be no stems, stem guides, or spokes within the waterway. The valve body and seat ring shall be ASTM A743, Grade CF -8 stainless steel with flanges conforming to the ANSI B16.5, 150 pound, flat faced, Standards. The valve shall have a Monel stem, 316 SS visual indicator BUNA -N diaphragm and seat disc. Pilot bodies shall be ASTM A473, Grade CF -8 stainless steel. The valve seals shall be easily removable. All control piping and valving shall be 316 stainless steel. A visual valve position indicator shall be provided for observing I .I 02640 -6 WF109000 the valve an osition at time. The valve shall have stainless steel trim and seat. All unspecified P Y interior components of the valve shall be 316 SS. The Contractor and manufacturer are cautioned that if iron oxidation or other compounds or elements giving similar appearance are evident on the surface of stainless steel castings, the valve shall be removed, returned and a factory epoxy coating (minimum 10 -12 mils) applied to the outside. The coating to be applied is subject to the Engineer's approval. The valve shall be manufactured by OCV Control Valves or ClaVal. 2.15 THERMOPLASTIC VACUUM BREAKERS: Thermoplastic vacuum breakers shall be suitable for use with the conveyed fluid. Vacuum breakers shall be 1 -inch, PVC with PVDF diaphragms, and installed on schedule 80 PVC pipe nipples, unless otherwise noted. Thermoplastic vacuum breakers shall be Series VBM manufactured by Plastomatic Valves, Inc. 2.16 THERMOPLASTIC PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES: Thermoplastic pressure relief valves shall be fabricated of Type 1, Grade 1 PVC. Seals shall be Teflon. Valves shall be 1 -inch and installed on 1 -inch pipe nipples unless otherwise noted. The pressure release shall be field adjustable from 5- 125 psi and have dedicated relief ports conveyed to the nearest trench. The maximum inlet pressure shall be 150 psi. The valves shall be manufactured by Plastomatic Valves, Inc., Heyward, Pulsafeeder or Wallace and Tiernan. 2.17 THERMOPLASTIC BACK PRESSURE SUSTAINING VALVES: Backpressure sustaining valves shall be manufactured from PVDF and have a PTFE wetted diaphragm. The spring housing shall be PVC. The backpressure spring shall be field adjustable from 5 to 100 psi. The maximum inlet pressure shall be 150 psi. The valves shall be manufactured by Plastomatic Valves, Inc., Heyward, Pulsafeeder or Wallace and Tiernan. 2.18 STATIC MIXERS: The sulfuric acid static mixer shall be constructed of FRP materials with a Derakrane resin and suitable for potable water contact. The mixer shall be coated with a UV resistant coating suitable for outdoor installation. The mixer shall be a nominal 16 -inch with Class 150, ANSI 816.5 flanged connections and nominal 68- inches in length. The mixer shall be rated to 150 psi at 180 degrees F. The mixer shall be capable of completely mixing up to 10 gph 93% Sulfuric Acid in a flow of water between 800 gpm and 2,500 gpm. The pressure drop across the mixer shall not exceed 1 psi at the maximum flow rate. The mixer shall have an integral % inch injection pipe that introduces the 93% sulfuric acid to the center of the water stream. The injection pipe shall be Halar. The injection pipe shall be flanged Class 150, ANSI B16.5. All connection hardware shall be PVC. The sulfuric acid mixer shall be a Model 16 KMS -FRP -3 as manufactured by Kenics, or Engineer approved equal. The R.O. product water static mixer shall be fabricated of 316 SS and contain three elements, each 6- inches in length. The mixer shall be designed to fully mix the first and second stage product water at a flow rate of 850 gpm with a headloss of 1 psi, or less. The mixer shall be 19- inches long, nomimal, and 8 -inch diameter with 10 -inch ANSI B16.5 150# flat faced flanges. The R.O. product static mixer shall be manufactured by UET, Inc., or Engineer approved equal. 2.19 STRAIGHTENING VANES: The straightening vanes shall be nominal 19- inches long, 8 -inch diameter and be suitable for straightening the flow from the static mixer adequately to facilitate accurate and reputable measurement by the downstream magnetic flow meter. The straightening vanes shall have ANSI B16.5, 150# flanges and be fabricated of all 316 SS. The straightening vanes shall be manufactured by Flow -In Corporation, or Engineer approved equal. 02640 -7 WF109000 2.20 THERMOPLASTIC R.O. SYSTEM BUTTERFLY VALVES: Valves shall be fabricated with PVC body and PVC disc and be of wafer design or lug, unless otherwise noted. Unless otherwise noted, all valves shall have geared, handwheel operator. Valves shall be rated for 150 psi at 140 degrees F. The valves shall be of lined body design, bubble tight. Only the liner and disc shall be wetted. The disc shall have double O -ring seals of EDPM. Seats shall be of the same material. The stem shall be 316 stainless steel and engage the full length of the disc. Shafts for handwheel operators shall be 316 SS and extended as required to accommodate the installation location, prevent conflicts and otherwise provide operational access. Handwheels shall be 316 SS or aluminum. The valves shall be Type 55 or 57 manufactured by ASAHI /America, or FK Series manufactured by IPEX. 2.21 THERMOPLASTIC CHECK VALVES: Thermoplastic check valves shall be PVC or CPVC as indicated on the drawings. Valves shall be PVC if not otherwise shown. Thermoplastic check valves shall be ISO 9001 certified and manufactured by Techno Corporation. 2.22 TAPPING SLEEVES & VALVES: Tapping sleeves shall be ductile iron manufactured by M &H #1174/1274, America Series 2800, Clow F5205/F5207, Tyler S -149, U.S. Pipe T -9, or Mueller H- 615. All tapping sleeves and valves shall be internally coated with two coats of potable water contact approved epoxy. Refer to Section 09800 for approved coatings. 2.23 CUTTING -IN SLEEVES: Cutting -in sleeves shall be manufactured by M &H, American, Tyler, U.S. Pipe or Mueller. Cutting -in sleeves shall be internally coated with two coats of potable water approved epoxy per Section 09800. 2.24 CURB STOPS: Curb stops shall be Mueller H 15316, Hayes or Ford for stops 1 -inch and smaller and Mueller H 10203 for stops over 1 -inch in size. 2.25 MAIN CONNECTIONS: All main connections for chemical feeds shall be manufactured by the feed pump manufacturer and include integral valve and check valve assembly to allow removal of diffuser under service conditions. Materials shall be fully compatible with the particular chemical. 2.26 HOSE BIBBS: Hose bibbs shall be brass body, % -inch unless otherwise noted. All hose bibbs shall be equipped with a brass or bronze Watts in -line vacuum breaker. 2.27 CORPORATION STOPS: Corporation stops shall be Mueller H -15020 for 1 -inch and H- 10046 for 2 -inch, or Ford F1101 -4 for 1 -inch and FB1700 for 2 -inch. 2.28 THERMOPLASTIC DIAPHRAGM VALVES: Thermoplastic diaphragm valves shall be Series DAB as manufactured by Hayward or Type 14 as manufactured by ASAHI /America. Thermoplastic diaphragm valves shall have PVDF bonnets and bodies with PTFE diaphragms. All wetted parts shall be compatible with 93% Sulfuric Acid up to 175 degrees Fahrenheit. Thermoplastic diaphragm valves shall be equipped with electric operators designed to produce a torque of at least two times the required torque. Electric operators shall be reversing type, 115 volt AC, 60 cycle, single phase. Motors shall be housed in NEMA 4 enclosure and be equipped with extra isolated limit switches for extra open /close indication. The electric operators shall be Quartermaster Series 92 as manufactured by ASAHI /America or Series EPL as manufactured by Hayward. Motor operators shall contain limit switches as required for the application and process monitoring and control from the central plant control system. PART 3 - EXECUTION Refer to Part 3, Section 02610. 02640 -8 WF109000 SECTION 03000 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: Supply and install all cast -in -place concrete as shown on the drawings and specified herein. All cast -in -place concrete on the project shall be ready mix per this specification. Pre - mixed, bagged mixes shall not be utilized for any purpose on the project unless specifically approved by the Engineer. 1.02 APPLICABLE CODES, STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS: The installation of cast -in -place concrete shall be in accordance with the following codes and standards: A. The local building code B. Portland Cement Association (PCA) C. American Concrete Institute (ACI) D. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) E. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) F. Federal Specifications 1.03 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS: A. Testing Agency: A professional, independent testing laboratory, approved by the Engineer, shall perform all testing and inspection procedures specified. B. Payment: The Contractor shall bear all costs of sampling and testing of concrete cylinders, as noted. Additional special tests may be ordered by the Engineer if there is a question as to compliance with the Contract Documents. C. Reports: Execute immediately after completion of each procedure or inspection and forward promptly to the Engineer three copies of each report. D. Molded Concrete Compression Cylinders: One set of four cylinders each sampling for each 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof for each day's placement of each mix design. Sample according to ASTM C172, process and cure according to ASTM C31, and prepare and test according to ASTM C39. Test one cylinder at age three days or seven days, as required by job conditions, and two cylinders for one valid test at 28 days. The fourth cylinder is to be cured and held for testing at 42 days if 28-day test indicated deficient results, or as a spare in case of cylinder damage. E. Air content: The total air content (entrained and entrapped) shall be measured in accordance with ASTM C231. Air content tests shall be performed on every truck where compression test cylinders are collected. F. Slump Tests: Slump tests shall be performed in accordance with ASTM C143 on every truck. 03000 -1 W F109000 I 1.04 REINFORCEMENT: Refer to Section 03200. 1.05 FORMWORK: Shall conform to ACI 347 and Section 03100. 1.06 SUBMITTALS: A. Mix designs: Submit mix designs prepared in accordance with ACI 318 and ACI 211.1 based upon ready -mix producers statistical data for past mix design test results. Historical data shall reference identical mix designs as referenced by mix components, quantities and mix number. B. Field Test Reports: Submit field test reports for all cylinder tests. PART 2 - PRODUCTS i 2.01 PORTLAND CEMENT: Conform to ASTM C150, Type I for all structures except the new clearwell which shall be Type II. It is noted that slag, flyash or other cement substitute will not be permitted unless specifically approved by the Engineer. 2.02 WATER: From domestic sources, free of harmful acids, alkalis, oil, organic or other deleterious materials. 2.03 CONCRETE AGGREGATES: Conform to ASTM C33 orASTM C330 (lightweight aggregates). A. Conform to ASTM C33: Local aggregates not complying with this standard may be used provided it can be shown by special test or a record of past performance these aggregates produce concrete or adequate strength and durability. B. Fine Aggregate: Clean, washed natural sand of hard, sound, uncoated grains. Manufactured clean, washed, hard sand may be used for structures other than water retention structures. C. Course Aggregates: Clean, washed, sound and crushed. D. Aggregate Size Requirements: Use largest practicable aggregate size for each condition of placement subject to limitations stipulated in paragraph 3.3, ACI Code 318. I 2.04 CONCRETE ADMIXTURES: Only admixtures specified and acceptable to the Engineer prior to use shall be included in mix designs. A. Water Reducing Agent: A water reducing agent conforming to ASTM C494 shall be used. The following are acceptable: 1. Pozzolith - Master Builders Company 2. Plastocrete - Sika Chemical Company 3. WRDA - Grace Construction Materials i B. Air Entrainment: All concrete shall entrain from two to four percent air, whether batched with or without other admixtures. One of the following, conforming to ASTM C260, may be used: 1. MB -VR - Master Builders Company 2. Sika -AER - Sika Chemical Company 03000 -2 W F109000 III 3. Darex AER - Grace Construction Materials C. Superplasticizer: A superplasticizer admixture may be used if approved by the Engineer. The superplasticizer shall satisfy the following requirements. 1. Conform to ASTM C494, Type F or Type G. 2. Superplasticizer admixture shall be added to the mix at the batch plant unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. 3. Provide documentation showing, at a 6 -inch slump plus or minus 1 -inch, the relative durability factors of air entrained concrete as determined in accordance with ASTM C-666, Procedure A, as compared to the same air entrained concrete mix at a 2 -inch slump or minus 1 -inch without superplasticizer admixture. 4. A qualified concrete technician employed by the manufacturer shall be available to assist in proportioning concrete materials for optimum use, to advise on proper use of the superplasticizer admixture and adjustment of concrete mix proportions to meet job site and climatic conditions. 5. Approved Products: a. Sikament 300, Sika Chemical Corp. or Engineered approved equal. b. Pozzolith 440 N, Master Builders Company, or Engineer approved equal. 2.05 CURING MATERIALS: A. Chemical Curing: Curing compounds shall be liquid, membrane forming and shall conform to ASTM C309, as approved by the Engineer. The liquid compound shall not reduce the adhesion of tile, paint, roofing, waterproofing or other material to be applied to the concrete. No liquid compound shall be allowed to cure a first pour of concrete which will receive a second pour. The use of a curing compound in lieu of water spray curing is subject to the Engineer =s approval and will, generally, not be approved as an alternate to impervious membrane and spray mist curing. B. Impervious Membrane Sheeting: Kraft paper or 4 mil polyethylene sheeting, in accordance with ASTM C171 may be used with approval of the Engineer. 2.06 CONCRETE MIX DESIGNS AND PROPORTIONS: A. Mix Design: Prepared according to ACI 211 and ACI 318, and submitted to the Engineer for review prior to batching any concrete, and based on previously tested and qualified component materials. Provide mix designs for all of the mixes. Pump mixes, when used, shall be approved in writing by the Engineer prior to use on the job. Each design shall have a mix number. B. Admixtures: Enter specific brands into mix designs where they are required or used. All admixtures must be approved in writing by the Engineer prior to use. C. Mix: Concrete shall be composed of Portland Cement, course aggregate, fine aggregate, admixtures, and water. Location or use of any of the following mixes will be shown on the drawings, or as stated herein. D. Specified Compressive Strength: 03000 -3 W171 09000 1. Provide concrete of the compressive strengths as shown on the drawings. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete shall have 28-day compressive strength of 4,000 psi. 2. Mix designs for the compressive strength specified shall have the following minimum properties. Where compressive strengths fall between the ones listed below, the criteria shall be linearly interpolated. Specified Maximum Minimum 28 -day Compressive Water- Cement Cement Content Strenath (f c) (psi) Ratio by Weight (lbs /Cubic Yard) 4000 0.45 564 I 3. The optimum water - cement ratio for mix designs in excess of 4000 psi 28-day compressive strength shall be determined by various mix designs, not to exceed 0.40. E. Air Entrainment: Total air content required (air - entrained and entrapped air) shall be as follows, and as measured in accordance with ASTM C231: i Nominal Maximum Size of Total Air Content coarse aagregate, in. Percentage by volume 3/8 6 to 10 2 5to9 3/4 4 to 8 1 3.5 to 6.5 1-1/2 3 to 6 2 2.5 to 5.5 3 1.5 to 4.5 1. All concrete shall be air entrained. i F. Slump Limits: Concrete, when placed at the forms, shall have a slump within the following limits as measured in accordance with ASTM C 143. Every truck load of concrete shall be slump tested. 1. Tolerance of plus -or -minus 1 inch. 2. Reinforced concrete: 3 inches. 3. Superplasticized concrete: 6 inches. G. Pump Mix Design: Proportions for concrete to be pumped shall be in accordance with those specified herein, except the aggregate shall be round gravel and satisfy ACI 304. Pump mix usage will be subject to Engineer approval. 2.07 CEMENT GROUT AND DRYPACK: A. Cement Grout: Mix 1 volume Portland cement, 2-1/2 volumes fine aggregate and sufficient water for the mixture to flow under its own weight. I 03000 -4 W F 109000 B. Drypack: Mix 1 volume Portland cement, 2 volumes fine aggregate and enough water to hydrate cement (a stiff mix). Do not mix more than can be used in 30 minutes. 2.08 CURBS: A. Construct roadway and sidewalk curbs as shown on the drawings and in accordance with local codes and regulations. B. Construct other curbs that support equipment or structural wall systems as indicated on the drawings. 2.09 WATERSTOPS: Waterstops shall be extruded flat strips having hollow center bulb, multiple ribs for full length. Width, 6 in., unless otherwise noted. The waterstop shall consist of polyvinyl - chloride resins combined with plasticizer, formulated to attain high tensile strength, adequate elongation, resistance to oxidation, acids, alkalis and low water extraction properties. The waterstops shall be extra heavy duty to withstand high heads of water (minimum 125 ft) and weigh at least 140 pounds per 100 feet. 2.10 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS: Shall be formed with tongue and groove wood members or galvanized metal keyed forms. 2.11 SEALING MATERIALS: Material for sealing and filling joints and for sealing premolded filler strip, shall conform to ASTM D1190 for "Concrete Joint Sealer; Hot - Poured Elastic Type ". PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 BATCHING, MIXING AND PLACING CONCRETE: A. Use Ready -Mixed Concrete: Conform to ASTM C94. Plant and truck mixers subject to examination by Engineer. B. Water and Mixing: Mix concrete at least 10 minutes, 5 minutes of which is at the job, after the last addition of water. Retempering in truck is prohibited. Any concrete in truck longer than 1 -1/2 hours after the water has been added at the plant, or any that has become harsh or nonplastic, shall be rejected based solely upon the Engineer's discretion. C. Load Tickets: Shall include all information required by ASTM C94 and be legible, showing quantities of all constituents in the batch, and bearing signature of plant inspector or bonded weighmaster. Maintain all tickets on file for inspection by the Engineer. All tickets shall show the mix number. Tickets not showing the mix number shall cause the load to be immediately rejected. D. Slumps: At point of delivery to forms the concrete slump requirements shall conform to this section of the specifications. E. Placing: The concrete shall be placed by suitable equipment as nearly as possible in its final location and without any segregation of the aggregate. Any free vertical drop shall not exceed 4-1/2 feet. For a given pour, the new concrete shall be placed against the last concrete only if the last concrete can, in the Engineer's sole opinion, be substantially vibrated into the new concrete. In general, the maximum allowable time between, placing new concrete against last concrete shall not exceed ninety minutes, although this time may be reduced by the Engineer based upon the characteristics and performance of the mix. The Contractor shall schedule trucks and organize the pour to minimize the length of time between placement of new and last concrete. For water retention structures, the Contractor shall develop and 03000 -5 WF109000 implement a contingency plan for a back -up truck in the event that the next scheduled truck is not on -site within 60- minutes of completion of the last pour. No pours of greater than 10 yd shall be scheduled to start after 2:00 P.M., unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Priorto placing concrete the forms shall be clean and free of debris with all surfaces wetted lightly. Before depositing new concrete on or against concrete which has set and is not part of the pour underway, the existing surfaces shall be cleaned at all laitance, foreign matter and loose particles and slushed with a neat cement grout. No concrete shall be placed without prior approval of the forms and reinforcing by the Engineer. F. Vibration: All concrete shall be placed with the aid of mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand forking or spading. Vibration shall be transmitted directly to the concrete and not through the forms. 3.02 CURING: A. General: The concrete shall be kept moist for fourteen days after pouring. Vertical forms may be left in place and horizontal surfaces continuously moistened with water via spray misting. If forms are removed, impervious membrane sheeting or chemical curing may be used if approved by the Engineer. The Engineer shall have the right to determine when forms may be removed and whether a curing compound can be used in lieu of spray misting. B. Chemical Curing: If approved for use by the Engineer, apply curing compound as soon as surface water has disappeared from concrete surfaces. Apply material with approved pressure spraying equipment, as per manufacturer's directions, in sufficient thickness to form effective water seal. C. Impervious Membrane Sheeting: The entire exposed surface shall be wetted thoroughly with a fine spray of water and then covered with polyethylene sheeting or plastic- coated materials laid directly on the concrete surface. Overlap 12 in. when a continuous sheet is not used. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS: Construction joints shall be located so that the maximum area for each cast shall not exceed 600 sq. ft. Length to width ratios shall not exceed 2 to 1. The construction joint criteria shall not apply to water retention structures where construction joints shall be located only where, and if, indicated on the drawings unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. In general, the Engineer will not agree to modifications of construction joint locations shown on the drawings. i 3.04 FINISHES: A. Form Finish: Hone down fins, ridges, high spots, with abrasive brick or power grinders while concrete is green, immediately after form removal. B. Form Tie Holes and Deep Depressions: Flush thoroughly with clean water, tamp to overfull with drypack, cure and hone flush. C. Rock Pockets, Honeycomb and Sand Streaks: Cut out at least 1 in. deep with sides perpendicular to surface, flush out, coat with neat cement paste, fill with drypack in at least two layers to overfull, cure and then hone to final correct surface, line or comer. D. Chamfers: All exposed edges of concrete shall have a minimum 3/4 in. chamfer. 03000 -6 W F109000 E. Finish: All exposed vertical concrete shall have a floated sand (burlap rub) finish. Building i ' slabs and miscellaneous horizontal h. Sidewalks shall have concrete shall have a troweled f nis a light broom finish. 3.05 CLEANUP: In accordance with General Conditions. 03000 -7 W F 109000 SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: Supply and install formwork for cast -in -place concrete as shown on the drawings and as specified. 1.02 APPLICABLE CODES, STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS: The installation of forms shall be in accordance with the following codes and standards: A. American Concrete Institute (ACI) B. American Plywood Association (APA) 1.03 DESIGN: All formwork shall be designed by a Florida Registered structural engineer. Special attention shall be given to the additional hydraulic pressures imparted by concrete containing superplasticizer admixture. The Contractor is specifically cautioned that not all of the specified superplasticizer admixtures will cure at the same rate. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 WOOD FORMS: All form lumber shall be free from warp, holes, loose knots, dressed to uniform width and thickness. All forming shall conform to ACI 347. A. Unexposed Concrete Surfaces: No. 2 common lumber or better lumber. B. Exposed Concrete Surfaces: Commercial standard, moisture resistant, concrete form plywood. 2.02 METAL FORMS: Use approved removable type metal forms. Recondition and clean before reusing. Do not oil or apply material which will stain exposed concrete or prevent bonding of stucco to concrete. Forms shall be smooth on interior so that no line shows on finished concrete. 2.03 FORM OIL: Clear non - staining mineral paraffin based oil. Diesel oil or motor oil will not be permitted. 2.04 FORM TIES AND SPREADERS: The following applies to all ties. A. Shall be metal, cone nut type. No embedded wood spreaders shall be permitted. B. Metal tie system shall be equal to the Penta -Tie System as manufactured by the Burke Co. 1. Plastic cone shall not exceed 1 in. diameter at the form and shall taper over a maximum length of 1 in. 2. Metal ties shall break off within the concrete section and not within the cone formed void. 3. Metal ties for water retention structures shall have a neoprene washer located in the middle of the concrete section to inhibit the flow of water along the tie shaft. 03100 -1 WF109000 i i 4. All plastic cones shall be removed and voids packed with drypack. 2.05 SHORING: Shall be vertical support members designed to cant' the weight of formwork and concrete; also the weight of any construction work above. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: A. Provide complete forms of such strength and construction as to prevent any spread, shifting, or settling when concrete is deposited, and tight enough to avoid any leakage or washing out of cement mortar. B. Design forms and false work supports so that they shall have sufficient rigidity to resist deflection more than 1/8-inch between supports after concrete has been placed and to assure a smooth and even appearance of surfaces. 1. Formwork for concrete containing a superplasticizer admixture shall be designed by a registered structural engineer and shall be reinforced to support the additional pressures exerted due to the admixture. C. Use bolts, rods and other approved devices for internal ties and spreaders; of such construction that when forms are removed, no metal is within one inch of an exterior within one - half inch of an interior concrete surface. D. Take special care that forms are true to required lines, grades and surfaces so as to give a uniform, neat and workmanlike finish to all concrete surfaces. Forms for the treatment unit vertical walls shall be rounded to result in a smooth round tank. E. Remove all dirt, chips, sawdust, rubbish, water and other foreign substances from forms by water hosing and air pressure before any concrete is deposited. Leave no wooden ties or blocking in concrete except where shown on the drawings for attachment to other work. Leave openings for the introduction of vibrators wherever necessary. Where required on account of excessive concrete drop, provide access in forms for placing of concrete to be approved by the Engineer. F. When removing forms, all bolts, anchoring wires and other fasteners shall be either removed, cut off to lengths as directed by the Engineer or left in place for anchorage of other work. G. Forms shall be in good condition and thoroughly cleaned and oiled before being reused. 3.02 COORDINATION: A. Secure all pipe sleeves, anchors and bolts in position before concrete is placed. B. Obtain information and instructions from other trades and suppliers in ample time to schedule and coordinate the installation of items fumished by them to be embedded in concrete so provisions for their work can be made without delaying the project. C. All forms and reinforcing steel shall be inspected by the Engineer and other applicable i 03100 -2 W F109000 agencies prior to placement of concrete. Vertical forms shall not be closed until the inspections are complete. The tops of all vertical form work shall be covered before concrete is in place. 3.03 SURFACE TREATMENT: Plywood panels shall have a smooth surface treatment to prevent any development of bond or adhesion to concrete and to seal plywood surfaces against moisture. Forms, except those lined with absorptive form lining, shall be clean and coated with a no staining mineral oil applied shortly before placing the concrete. In lieu of oiling, forms of unexposed surfaces may be thoroughly wetted immediately before placing the concrete. 3.04 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS: Make and locate as indicated on drawings and so as not to impair the strength of the structure and only at locations approved by the Engineer. Form keys in cold joints shown on the drawings. Refer to Section 03000 for additional information. 3.05 FORM REMOVAL: A. Determination of form removal timing is the Contractor's responsibility and shall be in accordance with ACI 347, except that the Engineer reserves the right to delay form removal for a period not to exceed 14 days after the pour. B. Do not remove forms, shores and bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight, and construction and design loads which are liable to be imposed upon it. Verify strength of concrete by compressive test results. C. Remove formwork progressively and in accordance with code requirements and so that no shock loads or unbalanced loads are imposed on the structure. D. Reshore structural members where required due to design requirements of construction conditions and as required to permit progressive construction. 03100 -3 WF109000 SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: Supply and install reinforcing steel as shown on the drawings and as specified. 1.02 APPLICABLE CODES, STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS: The installation of concrete reinforcement shall be in accordance with the following codes and standards: A. Local building code B. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) C. American Concrete Institute (ACI) D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) E. American Welding Society (AWS) 1.03 SHOP DRAWINGS: Provide bar schedules, bending diagrams and placing lists or fabrication drawings for all steel for Engineer's review prior to fabrication or delivery. Include sketch of typical millmarks and deformations on reinforcing bars. Furnish copies to the Engineer for approval in accordance with Section 01300. 1.04 STORAGE: Reinforcing steel shall be clean, new stock, properly marked and tagged for identification prior to placing. Store reinforcing to avoid excessive rusting or coating with grease, oil, dirt or other objectionable materials. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.01 REINFORCEMENT: A. Reinforcing Bars: Shall be deformed bars conforming to ASTM A615 Grade 60. Corbel reinforcement to be welded shall be ASTM A615, Grade 40. B. Chairs: 1. Shall be standard Class B or C as specified in ACI 315. 2. Reinforcement shall be supported by suitably sized dense precast concrete blocks for concrete poured on grade. Blocks shall be made from the same mix as the pour. C. Ties: Shall be No. 16 gauge minimum, fully annealed, black steel wire. D. Hooks and Bends in Reinforcing: Shall conform to ACI 315 unless otherwise shown on the drawings. 03200 -1 WF109000 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PLACING REINFORCING STEEL: A. Fabrication, detailing and placement of reinforcing steel shall conform to CRSI Manual of Standard Practice, ACI 315 and ACI 318. Reinforcement shall be carefully placed, rigidly supported and well tied with bar supports and spacers. B. Reinforcement shall be accurately placed and securely tied at intersections with 16 gauge black annealed wire. It shall be maintained in proper position by chairs, bar supports, or other devices approved by the Engineer. C. All splices shall be as shown on the drawings, or 36 bar diameters, whichever is greater. D. Concrete protection of reinforcing shall be not less than the following or as shown on the drawings if greater. 1. Concrete cast against and permanently exposed to earth or exposed to corrosive environment -- 3 inches. 2. Concrete cast against forms, but exposed to earth or weather: a. No. 6 through No. 11 bars -- 2 inches b. No. 5 bars, or equivalent, and smaller — 1 -1/2 inches. 3. Concrete cast against forms, but not exposed to earth or weather (interior construction): a. Slabs, walls and joists: No. 14 and No. 18 bars -- 1 -1/2 inches No. 11 bars and smaller for liquid retaining structures — 2 inches No. 11 bars and smaller elsewhere — 3/4 inch b. Beams and Columns, including primary reinforcement, ties, stirrups, and spirals -- 1 -1/2 inches. I E. The clear distance between parallel bars in a layer shall be the nominal diameter of the bar, but not less than one inch. Wherever conduits, piping, inserts or sleeves interfere with the placing of reinforcing steel as shown, the Contractor shall consult with the Engineer before pouring concrete. The bending or field cutting of bars around openings or sleeves will not be permitted. F. Clean bars of loose scale, heavy deposits or rust and oil, wax or other coatings that may reduce or destroy bonding, before placing. Check and clean again if necessary before concrete is poured. G. Concrete beam sizes may be increased as required for architectural details or to fit block coursing, subject to Engineer approval. 03200 -2 W F109000 H. Reinforcing steel in footings shall be assembled as mats with bars equally spaced and wired together at each intersection before concrete is placed. I. Center all footings on wall, pier or column above unless otherwise indicated. J. Dowel column and wall reinforcing to footing or pile cap with same size and number of dowels as vertical bars above. K. Dowels shall be hooked "L" at bottom and shall be lapped 36 bar diameter with the column or wall reinforcing above. L. Concrete columns shall be tied columns unless otherwise indicated. M. Provide one layer 6 x 6 - W2.9 x W2.9 WWF in slabs on grade including walkways and sidewalks unless otherwise indicated. 3.02 COORDINATION: Coordinate work with other trades in order to eliminate interference before concrete is poured. 3.03 CLEANUP: In accordance with General Conditions. 03200 -3 W F109000 SECTION 05140 ALUMINUM FABRICATIONS, WALKWAYS AND GRATING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED: The work under this section includes fabrication and erection of aluminum fabrications. This section also covers modifications to all grating systems. Unless otherwise noted, all walkways above grade and including stairways shall have an aluminum railing system with toe plate. All walkways and access platforms not otherwise indicated shall be covered with aluminum grating. All modifications to grating systems shall be performed such that the original design criteria of the system, as set forth herein, shall be retained. The Contractor is specifically advised that a portion of the project entails additions in the plant that will require modification to existing grating system in order to install the process equipment and piping. Where required, such modifications or replacement if required, shall be completed in a fashion that creates a finish product that is to the same standard and quality as would exist had the facilities been installed in the original construction contract, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Standards: Unless otherwise specified, all materials, workmanship and practices shall conform to the following Standards: 1. Standard Building Code. 2.Aluminum Construction Manual, 1976 Edition, by the Aluminum Association. B. Qualifications: Fabrication and erection shall be by a qualified fabricator and erector approved by the Engineer. Preparation of shop drawings shall not begin until the fabricator and erector have been approved. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: Complete shop drawings, including material lists, fabrication and erection drawings shall be submitted for approval. Fabrication shall not be approved until the submission has been approved. Submittals shall in accordance with the requirements set forth in Section 01300. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Standard Shapes, Bars & Plates: 1. ASTM B 209 - Alloy 6061 -T6 2. ASTM B 308 - Alloy 6061 -T6 B. Standard Threaded Fasteners: 1. Nuts, bolts and washers shall be 316 stainless steel. C. Welding Electrodes: 4043 filter metal. 05140 -1 W F109000 2.02 ALUMINUM WALKWAY GRATING: A. For 3 -foot or less spans: 1-1/2 inch deep serrated I-bars (alloy 6063 -T6) spaced at 1 -3/16 inch center -to- center shall be capable of supporting at least 681 PSF uniform load with no more than 0.207 inch deflection and at least 1021 pounds per foot of width concentrated load at midspan with no more than 0.166 inch deflection. Grating shall have end plates so that all (- bars are supported on all sides of grating panel. B. For 4 -foot or less spans: 1 -1/2 inch deep serrated 1 -bars (alloy 6063 -T6) spaced at 1 -3/16 inch center -to- center shall be capable of supporting at least 383 PSF uniform load with no more than 0.369 inch deflection and at least 766 pounds per foot of width concentrated load at midspan with no more than 0.295 inch deflection. Grating shall have end plates so that all (- bars are supported on all sides of grating panel. C. For 5 foot or less spans: 2 inch deep serrated I -bars (alloy 6063 -T6) spaced at 1 -3/16 inch center -to- center shall be capable of supporting at least 429 PSF uniform load with no more than 0.436 inch deflection and at least 1339 pounds per foot of width concentrated load at midspan with no more than 0.312 inch deflection. Grating shall have end plates so that all (- bars are supported on all sides of grating panel D. For 6 foot or less spans: 2-1/2 inch deep serrated I -bars (alloy 6063 -T6) spaced at 1 -3/16 inch centers shall be capable of supporting at least 460 pound uniform load at a deflection of no more than 0.506 inch and 1379 pounds of concentrated load at midspan with a deflection of no more than .405 inch. Grating shall have end plates so that all I -bars are supported on all sides of the grating panel. E. Gratings shall be fastened at 24 inch centers along each supported edge, with a minimum of four aluminum fasteners with stainless steel hardware per panel in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. F. Aluminum grating shall have a mil finish, acidic detergent cleaned. G. Band all grating openings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION A. Fabrication shall be in accordance with the specified standards. Splices not indicated on the drawings will not be permitted. B. Surface Treatment: Treatment is required where indicated on the drawings. 3.02 ERECTION A. Erection shall be in accordance with the specified standards and as indicated on the drawings. B. No painting required, unless otherwise noted. 05140 -2 W F109000 C. Welding: Welding of aluminum shall be performed by the Gas Metal Arc (MIG) or Gas Tungsten ARC (TIG) process, per AWS Welding handbook. All welding shall be performed by an AWS certified welder. i 05140 -3 W F109000 SECTION 05145 STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE: This section covers the Work necessary to furnish, install, and erect the structural aluminum and other related components of the types, shapes and weights shown on the drawings. The Work shall include all metal parts required for permanent connection of the structural aluminum as well as any temporary bracing used for erection. This section shall apply to the support trees and miscellaneous aluminum shapes on the RO Building. 1.02 ALTERNATIVES: Like items provided hereunder, although for different services, shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization for, maintenance, spare parts, and manufacturer's service. The use of a manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is for the purpose of establishing the standard of quality and general configuration desired only. Products of other manufacturers will be considered in accordance with applicable portions of these Specifications. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: The Contractor shall comply with the following codes and standards unless specifically directed otherwise: A. AA "Specifications for Aluminum Structures ", Aluminum Construction Manual, Fifth Edition B. AWS "Code for Welding in Building Construction ", 1995. C. Florida Building Code. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: Shop Drawings, signed and sealed by a Florida registered Professional Engineer, shall include descriptive information as required to fully describe the aluminum components to be erected. Shop Drawings shall conform to AA recommendations and specifications and shall show all holes, etc., required for other Work. Include complete details showing all members and their connections, anchor bolt layouts, schedules for fabrication procedures, and diagrams showing the sequence of erection. Submittals shall include, but not be limited to the following: A. Complete Information and Dimensions B. Sequences of Erection C. Mill Certificates D. Connection Calculations - Calculations, signed and sealed by a Florida registered professional engineer, shall include design assumptions, manual calculations, computer printouts, and any other information required to evaluate the connection designs. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE: Structural aluminum Work shall be performed by experienced erection craftsmen routinely performing such work. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING & ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS: Load, handle, transport, and unload structural members in such a manner that they are not excessively stressed, 05145 -1 WF109000 deformed, or otherwise damaged. Once delivered, protect structural aluminum members and packaged materials from damage and deterioration. Material shall be stored in a dry area and shall not be placed indirect contact with the ground. Do not place materials on the structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to the members or the supporting structures. Damaged materials or structures shall be immediately removed and replaced at no additional cost to the OWNER. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Rolled Plates, Structural Shapes, and Bars: ASTM B 308, Alloy 6061 -T6 B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 308, Alloy 6063 -T C. Bolts:ISI 316, Stainless Steel 2.02 FABRICATION: Fabricate items of structural aluminum in accordance with the drawings, AA Specifications, and as indicated on the final reviewed Shop Drawings. Properly mark materials for field assembly. Where finishing is required, complete the assembly, including bolting and welding of units, before start of finishing operations. Weld or bolt shop connections, as required. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections or other connections are shown or specified. All connections unless shown otherwise shall develop full strength of members joined and shall conform to AA standard connections. A. Welded Construction: Comply with AWS code procedures, appearance, and quality of welds and welders, and methods used in correcting welding Work. Unless otherwise shown, all butt welds are complete penetration. B. Holes: Provide holes as necessary or as indicated for securing other Work to structural aluminum framing, and for the passage of other Work through aluminum framing members. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing, and other specialty items as required. No torch cut holes shall be made. C. Finishes: Structural aluminum shall be cleaned and protected as specified elsewhere. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Apply touchup paint as necessary by brush or spray which is the same thickness and material as that used originally. 2.03 QUALITY CONTROL: The Contractor shall give ample notice to the Owner's representative prior to the beginning of any fabrication Work so that the Owner may observe fabrication if so desired. The Contractor shall furnish all facilities for the inspection of materials and workmanship in the shop and Owner's representatives shall be allowed free access. Any Work found to be defective or not meeting the specifications will not be used on this Project. Owner observation at the shop is intended to help avoid errors. It is expressly understood that the Contractor is responsible for furnishing proper materials and workmanship. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION: The Contractor shall verify all dimensions and shall make measurements necessary to be fully responsible for accuracy and layout of Work and relationships between various 05145 -2 WF109000 portions of the Project to be encountered. Any discrepancies shall be reported and clarified prior to starting fabrication. 3.02 PREPARATION: The structural aluminum to be erected is composed of supporting aluminum members and frames and requires interaction with all other structural elements. Therefore, the structural aluminum components will likely require temporary bracing and coordination with other elements of building. The Contractor shall be responsible for designing and installing all construction bracing required and shall be responsible to provide temporary support until all components are in place and construction is complete. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces which will be in permanent contact before assembly, and provide for appropriate isolation of aluminum from concrete, plaster, masonry of dissimilar metals. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 3.03 INSTALLATION: A. Set structural members accurately to the lines and elevations required and support all elements with the Contractor's construction bracing members. Align and adjust the members before permanently fastening. Level and plumb individual members of the structure within specified tolerances. B. Anchor Bolts: Furnish anchor bolts and other connectors required for securing structural aluminum to in -place Work. Furnish templates and other devices for presetting bolts and other anchors to accurate locations. C. Bases and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond - reducing materials and roughen to improve connection to surfaces. Clean the bottom surface of base and bearing plates and provide proper isolater, as required. Set loose and attached baseplates and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, leveling nuts, or other adjustable devices. Tighten the anchor bolts after the supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Baseplates shall be properly secured prior to placing loads on structure. D. Poor Alignment: Where misfits in erection bolting are encountered, the Owner's representative shall be immediately notified. Acceptable fixes to such problems typically include reaming holes for oversized bolts, plug welding and redrilling, refabrication, or connection redesign. Holes in members shall not be enlarged by burning or by the use of drift pins. 3.04 WELDING: Welding of aluminum shall be performed by the Gas metal Arc. (MIG) or Gas Tungsten Arc. (TIG) process, per AWS Welding Handbook criteria. 3.05 COATINGS: Structural aluminum shall not be coated, unless otherwise specified. It is noted that the support trees for the reverse osmosis pressure vessels shall be coated. The coating system shall be as set forth in Section 09800. 05145 -3 WF109000 SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: The extent of metal fabrications work is shown on drawings and includes items fabricated from iron, steel, aluminum and stainless steel shapes, plates, bars, strips, tubes, pipes and castings which are not a part of structural steel or other metal systems in other sections of these specifications. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible. Do not delay job progress; allow for trimming and fitting wherever taking field measurements before fabrication might delay work. B. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS: A. Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of miscellaneous metal work which will be exposed to view, use only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness. 1. Steel Plates, shapes and bars: ASTM A36. 2. Steel Plates to be Bent or Cold Formed: ASTM A283, Grade C. 3. Steel Bars and Bar -size Shapes: ASTM A306, Grade 65, or ASTM A36. 4. Galvanized Carbon Steel Sheets: ASTM A526, with ASTM A525, G90 Zinc coating. 5. Epoxy Anchors: Anchor bolts shall be bonded to concrete through the use of a cartridge or injection system that contains premeasured amounts of polyester resin, quartz sand aggregate, and a hardening agent. Bolts shall comply with AISI 316 Stainless Steel. Approved products are: a. Two component high strength low deflection ceramic filled epoxy as supplied by ITW Ramset/Red Head identified as Epcon Ceramic 6. b. HVA Adhesive Anchor as manufactured by Hilti, Inc. of Tulsa, Oklahoma. 6. Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type, 316 SS unless otherwise noted. Provide bolts, washers and shims as required, 316 SS unless otherwise noted. 05500 -1 WF109000 7. Nonshrink Nonferrous Grout: CE CRD C588. 8. All miscellaneous fabrications designated as stainless steel shall be 316 or 316L stainless steel. All stainless steel fabrications shall be passivated. All stainless steel shapes located inside buildings and above floor level (excludes trenches) shall be electropolished. 9. All aluminum shapes shall be alloy 6061 -T6 or T6063 -T6 as defined by ASCE and supplied in standard shapes as set forth in the Aluminum Construction Manual, unless otherwise noted. 10. Unless otherwise noted as structural carbon steel shapes shall be hot dipped galvanized. 2.02 FASTENERS GENERAL: Unless otherwise noted, all fasteners shall be 316 S.S. and shall be so stamped for ready field identification. Structural fasteners shall satisfy structural requirements. 2.03 FABRICATION, GENERAL: A. Workmanship: 1. Use materials of size and thickness shown or, if not shown, of required size and thickness to produce strength and durability in finished product. Use type of materials shown or specified for various components of work. 2. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 in. unless otherwise shown. Form bent -metal comers to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. 3. Weld comers, seams and all adjoining members with full fillet welds continuously, complying with AWS recommendations. At exposed connections, grind exposed welds smooth and flush to match and blend with adjoining surfaces. 4. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type shown, or if not shown, Phillips flat -head (countersunk) screws or bolts. 5. Provide for anchorage of type shown, coordinated with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended use. B. Galvanizing: Provide a hot dipped galvanizing coating for all miscellaneous metal items, unless aluminum, brass, bronze or stainless steel. ,I 1. ASTM A153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware. 2. ASTM Al23 for galvanizing rolled, pressed and forged steel shapes, plates, bars and strip 1/8 in. thick and heavier. 05500 -2 W F109000 3. ASTM A386 for galvanizing assembled steel products. 2.04 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS: A. Rough Hardware: 1. Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork, and for anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete or other structures. 2. Manufacture or fabricate items of sizes, shapes and dimensions required. Fumish malleable iron washers for heads and nuts which bear on wood structural connections; elsewhere, fumish steel washers. B. Trench Cover Plates: The chemical trench cover plates shown on the drawings shall be V4- inch diamond plate fabricated from A -36 steel. Each plate shall be a maximum of 48- inches long, width to suit, and have a 4 -inch by 1 -inch slot in each end, with rounded comers. The plates shall be hot dipped galvanized after all drilling and cutting is complete. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: Examine the areas and conditions under which miscellaneous metal items are to be installed and notify the Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION: Furnish setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items have integral anchors, which are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site. 3.03 INSTALLATION: A. Setting Loose Plates: 1. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of any bond - reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean the bottom surface of bearing plates. 2. Set loose leveling and bearing plates on wedges, or other adjustable devices. After the bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten the anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut-off flush with the edge of the bearing plate before packing with grout. 3. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal -arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, and methods used in correcting welding work. 05500 -3 W F109000 SECTION 06600 FABRICATED FIBERGLASS AND FIBERGLASS GRATING AND HANDRAILS PART I - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Furnish all labor, material, equipment and incidentals to fabricate and install the items specified herein and shown on the drawings. This shall apply to all miscellaneous fiberglass fabrications. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Products to comply with the current edition of the applicable National Bureau of Standards, Voluntary Product Standard PS 15. B. Safety factors: Liberal safety factors shall be used in the design of all products. Working stresses shall not exceed the lower value of one -third of the yield strength or one -fifth of the ultimate strength of the material. The fiberglass products shall be designed for stresses to which these products will be subjected during fabrication, erection and continuous operation as shown on the drawings. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings: Submitted in accordance with Section 01300 shall include detailed design calculations for all fabricated products. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL: Products shall be furnished by manufacturers having a minimum of 5 years experience in the manufacture of similar items with a record of successful installations. Support members shall be as shown on the drawings and as required in this section. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Fiberglass structural shapes: 1. Structural FRP members supplies under this specification shall be manufactured using the pultrusion process. The composite shall consist of a glass fiber reinforced polyester resin matrix, approximately 50 percent resin to glass ratio. 2. Glass reinforcement shall be of three varieties: a. A surfacing mat shall be used on all exterior surfaces for maximum chemical resistance. b. Continuous glass strand rovings shall be used internally for longitudinal strength. c. Continuous strand mats shall be used internally for transverse strength. 06600 -1 W F109000 3. Resin shall be a halogenated polyester, possessing inherent fire and chemical resistance. Antimony trioxide shall be added (3 to 5 percent) to impart Class I flame spread and flammability ratings as per ASTM E -84 and D -635. 4. The following minimum mechanical properties shall apply. a. Ultimate tensile strength 30,000 psi (longitudinal coupon) Ultimate tensile strength 7,000 psi (transverse coupon) Ultimate tensile strength 20,000 psi (full section in bending) b. Ultimate compressive strength 30,000 psi (longitudinal coupon) Ultimate compressive strength 15,000 psi (transverse coupon) Ultimate compressive strength (full section in bending) 20,000 psi c. Ultimate shear strength 5,500 psi d. Ultimate bearing strength 30,000 psi e. Modulus of elasticity (full section in bending) 2.5 x 10 f. Barcol hardness 50 5. All fiberglass intended for external usage shall be gel coated for UV inhibition. B. Miscellaneous FRP Supports: Minor FRP channels, unistrut, and supports (including clamps and hardware) for small diameter piping (less than 2- inches in diameter), or where otherwise required by drawings, shall be as manufactured by Aickenstrut. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All work shall be erected level, and /or plumb, and shall meet required heights, layout and details precisely. All work shall be adequately fastened, anchored or braced. B. All work shall be executed in accordance with the best practices of the trade, by persons skilled in the craft. C. Installation shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations in the locations shown on the drawings. D. All fiberglass installations shall be suitably braced and supported to be fully rigid, stable and secure. Acceptability in this regard shall be solely the Engineer's opinion. 06600 -2 WF109000 3.02 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Final acceptance test shall demonstrate that products have been properly installed and are in correct alignment. 06600 -3 W F109000 SECTION 06620 FIBERGLASS- REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) DUCTWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE: This section specifies the requirements necessary to furnish and install, complete, the fiberglass- reinforced plastic (FRP) ductwork system for the odor control systems to be installed adjacent to the process basins and the aerobic digesters or as otherwise shown on the drawings. 1.02 DESIGN CRITERIA: A. All FRP ductwork shall be in accordance with the latest editions of ASHRAE Handbook, National Standard PS 15 -69, SMACNA Industrial Duct Construction Standards, and the Standard Mechanical Code. Where conflict among these references arises, the most stringent source shall be followed, as determined by the Engineer. B. Ductwork fabricated for this project must meet all requirements of ASTM D2996 for filament wound pipe, ASTM C581, standard practice for determining chemical resistance of thermose. C. SERVICE DUTY: 1. Duct Pressures: FRP exhaust ductwork shall be suitable for pressures of 14- inches WC negative to 20- inches WC positive inside the duct. The manufacturer shall certify that the duct is designed to satisfy this criteria. 2. Temperature range up to 250° D. SUPPORTS, ANCHORAGE AND RESTRAINTS: 1. General a. When supports, anchorages and restraints for equipment, piping and ductwork are not shown on the drawings, the Contractor shall be responsible for their design and installation. The system shall be designed to withstand applicable local and land criteria. All calculations shall be signed and sealed by a Florida Registered Professional Engineer. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: All FRP ductwork shall be fabricated and installed by qualified, experienced mechanics who have a minimum of 5 years experience with lay -up, filament wound or contact molded, and fabrication and joining of this type of material. A. All resins used in the fabrication of FRP ductwork shall be approved for intended use. Apply resins in accordance with the Vendor's published technical Criteria. 06620 -1 WF109000 B. FACTORY INSPECTION: 1. The Engineer shall maintain the right to tour the FRP duct manufacturer's plant any time that fabrication is being performed on ductwork intended for this project. 2. Notify the Engineer when production has been completed on the first 50 lineal feet of fabricated ductwork. At any time after that date, the Engineer may exercise the option, without any advance notice, to tour the plant and inspect stages of fabrication to ensure that quality control is being maintained. 3. The visitation and inspection option shall remain in effect throughout the entire cycle of production for materials used on this project. C. FACTORY SUPPLIED TEST SAMPLE: The duct fabricator shall provide a minimum of three sample specimens for mechanical property tests and lamination lay -up analysis. Test specimens shall be submitted to the Engineer and Vendor of the resins used in the duct construction process. D. Number and log all manufactured duct sections. Log entries must contain piece number, description and date of manufacture. The log or log copy shall be delivered with each shipment. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: Provide the following shop drawing submittals: A. Complete specifications, descriptive drawings, catalog cuts and descriptive literature which shall include data on the duct material, hanging weight, fabrication techniques, resins and fillers proposed to the finished duct material B. Drawings of the duct layout at the same scale as the building drawings or a minimum of 1/8 -inch scale, showing location and dimensions of all main and branch runs, fittings, offsets, takeoffs and accessories. C. Detailed information of structural, mechanical or other changes or modifications necessary to adopt materials to the arrangement or details shown. D. Recommended procedure for the protection and handling of materials prior to installation. E. Shop drawings of suspended ductwork indicating point loads and seismic restraint locations, along with applicable details keyed to layouts. F. Show drawings for support frames, equipment and ductwork supports and associated anchorage point load locations, along with Contractor's calculations and details to the layouts. 1.05 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTUERS: Fiberglass ductwork shall be fabricated by one of the following manufacturers: A. Midwest Fabricators LLC, Salt Lake City, UT B. Jacobs Air Water Systems, Tampa, FL 06620 -2 WF109000 C. Industrial Plastic Systems, Inc., Lakeland, FL D. Daniel Company, Adelanto, CA PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 FRP DUCTWORK A. INTERNAL CORROSION - RESISTANT SURFACE: 1. The internal liner in contact with the contaminated exhaust air stream shall be constructed of materials resistant to the chemicals stated. 2. Thickness of this corrosion liner shall be 50 -mil minimum, specifically layed up as a corrosion barrier and formed separately from the materials and procedures of the intermediate structural layers. 3. Resins used for this internal corrosion- resistant liner shall only be: Derakane 510A B. INTERMEDIATE STRUCTURAL LAYER: 1. The intermediate layer of duct wall thickness shall be fabricated by either filament wound or hand laid -up techniques to the dimensional thickness and strength required by the ASTM Standards. 2. The outer surface shall be relatively smooth with no exposed glass fiber ends. 3. Resins used for this intermediate structural layer shall be selected for their strength characteristics. C. EXTERNAL LAYER: 1. Outdoor Ductwork: a. The exposed external surface of all FRP ductwork installed outdoors, whether on grade or on roof, shall provide protection against ultraviolet degradation and weather erosion. The duct shall carry the flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke contribution rating of in excess of 1,000. b. External duct protection shall be provided by an ultraviolet stabilizer added to the final coat of resin that also incorporates paraffinated wax curing elements and color pigment. c. An alternative system to polyurethane paint with color pigments may be used if approved by the Owner. 06620 -3 W F109000 2.02 DAMPERS A. Equipment isolation dampers, header separation manifold dampers and exhaust branch duct balancing dampers shall be manufactured using the same materials as the ductwork. Round dampers shall be single butterfly blade type. Damper blade shall be non - binding with blade to wall clearance of not greater than 0.005 inch. Construct damper bodies from a one -piece mold with flanges molded to the barrel. Shafts shall be fitted with seal roller or ball bearing external to the air stream and protected by a corrosion- resistant shat seal. The bearing carriers shall be bonded to the damper barrel. Support the damper operator shaft with an external bearing mounted to the carrier bracket. Damper shafts and blade shall be constructed of FRP or FRP- coated stainless steel. Handwheels shall be 316 SS, aluminum or FRP. B. Rectangular control dampers shall be opposed -blade with external linkage, sealed shaft bearings and Teflon blade seals. Rectangular back draft dampers shall be parallel -blade type with external linkage, sealed shaft bearings and Teflon blade seals. Blade shaft shall be fiberglass- coated Type 316 SS. Blade shaft shall have a neoprene or Teflon shaft seal. Damper will be supported on external bearings. Bearings may be either ball type or pressed -fit Teflon onto the shaft. The shaft seal shall not have any bearing load applied to it. Damper shall also have locking quadrants with adjustable stops. 2.03 DRAINS: A. Provide duct drains in the bottom of all main and branch ducts as shown on the drawings to allow removal condensate. At a minimum, drains shall be located at every rise and at the head of all drops. Install drain lines as shown in details on the drawings. 2.04 FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR: A. Provide flex connectors as shown in the details on the drawings. Flex connectors shall be flanged, constructed of materials of similar chemical resistance as duct system and provided by the ductwork vendor. 2.05 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: A. Support FRP ductwork using details and methods described in the SMACNA Industrial Duct construction Manual. B. Protect the duct form clamping force of strap hangers with a 1/8 -inch thick layer of neoprene pad. C. When the anchors are required, they shall be externally bonded to the duct. Drive screws or other penetrations of the duct linter are not permitted. D. Maximum spacing of supports shall not exceed 12 feet for sizes 8 inches and under or 20 feet for ducts over 20 inches. E. Provide supports which are independent of equipment and walls. F. Vibration isolation for hangers shall be constructed using industry standard systems and devices. I 06620 -4 WF109000 PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. GENERAL 1. All materials and equipment shall be installed as shown and described herein and may be required by the applicable codes of the State and Village. Drawings do not attempt to show exact details of all ductwork and no extra payment will be allowed for obstruction by work of other trades or local obstructions to the work under this contract with required offsets. Where diagrams have been made to show duct connections, the Contractor is cautioned that these diagrams must not be used for obtaining material quantities. 2. Changes in location of equipment of ductwork, advisable in the opinion of the Contractor shall be submitted to the Engineer for review before proceeding with the work. All measurements and dimensions shall be verified at the site. All equipment shall be adjusted and left in a condition satisfactory to the Engineer. 3. Any preparation of the structural components of the building required for equipment and material regarding this unit of the contract shall be done by the particular affected trade and shall be done to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 4. All workmanship shall be done onsite unless grinding operation is tented with HEPA filtration. 5. Slope ducts as indicated on the drawings, a minimum of one sixteenth of an inch per linear foot of duct, toward the drains. B. Backdraft Dampers: Provide backdraft dampers where indicated with material and construction selected for compatibility with the intended service. Submit shop drawings. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Supplier's /Manufacturer's Services: The suppliers and /or manufacturer's representative for the material specified shall be presented at the jobsite as requested by the Contractor for installation assistance, inspection and approval of the installation, testing, startup assistance and inspection during normal operation. B. TESTING, GENERAL 1. Repair all leaks and restart test until stipulated results are achieved. 2. Advise the Engineer 48 hours in advance of each test. Failure to do so will require that the test be rescheduled. 06620 -5 WF109000 3.03 CLEANING A. Thoroughly clean all parts of the installation at the completion of the work. All surface defects and scuff marks shall be removed or painted. The Contractor shall note that if surface defects, scuff marks or surface irregularities due to field joints require touch up, the new coating system shall extend to the next natural physical break in the duct work. The Contractor shall clean up and remove from the premises all refuse material, crates and rubbish arising from his work. i 06620 -6 WF109000 SECTION 07190 VAPOR BARRIER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Furnish labor, material and equipment required for the installation of vapor barrier under all reinforced concrete placed against soil. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in Section 01300, submit Manufacturer's data and installation instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 VAPOR BARRIER: A. Vapor Barrier: Polyethylene sheets with a minimum tensile strength of 4500 psi in accordance with ASTM D -882, vapor transmission rating of 0.02 and perm. rating of 0.045 in accordance with ASTM E -95, and a puncture resistance of 15 lbs in accordance with ASTM D- 2582. Provide "Rufco 400" by Americover, "T -55" by Griffolyn, or equal. B. Adhesive/Tape: Type approved by the Manufacturer of the vapor material. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 VAPOR BARRIER: Place vapor barrier under all slabs on grade; lap edges 12 inches and seal with adhesive tape. Lay with seams perpendicular to and lapped in the direction of placement. Do not penetrate vapor barrier. Protect from damage until concrete is placed. Punctures and tears in vapor barrier shall be repaired using patches of the material which overlaps puncture or tear a minimum of 12 inches; seal with tape or adhesive. Fill under vapor barrier shall be compacted, clean, free of debris and protrusions. 07190 -1 WF109000 SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: The required applications include, but are not necessarily limited to the following: Exterior building wall joints. Flashing and coping joints. Miscellaneous concrete construction joints, excluding potable water contact areas. Floor (interior) joints. Partition and ceiling joints. Equipment and isolation joints. Gasketing for assembly of components, excluding potable water contact. Provide joint sealants at all of the above locations. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300. A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, recommendation and installation instructions for each type of material required. Include manufacturer's published data, or letter of certifications, or certified test laboratory report indicating that each material complies with the requirements and is intended, generally, for the applications shown. B. Guarantee, Joint Sealers: Submit written guarantee agreeing to repair or replace joint sealers which fail to perform as air -tight and water -tight joints; or fail in joint adhesion, cohesion, abrasion resistance, weather resistance, extrusion resistance, migration resistance, stain resistance, or general durability; or appear to deteriorate in any other manner not clearly specified by submitted manufacturers data as an inherent quality of the material for the exposure indicated. Provide guarantee signed by the Installer and Contractor. Guarantee period is 2 years. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Examine the joint surfaces and backing, and their anchorage to the structure, and the conditions under which the joint sealer work is to be performed. Do not proceed with the joint sealer work until satisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Weather Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of sealants under adverse weather conditions, or when temperatures are below or above manufacturer's recommended limitations for installation. Proceed with the work only when forecasted weather conditions are favorable for proper cure and development of high early bond strength. Wherever joint width is affected by ambient temperature variations, install elastomeric sealants only when temperatures are in the lower third of manufacturer's recommended installation temperature range. 07900 -1 WF109000 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL: A. Colors: For exposed materials provide color as indicated or, if not indicated, as selected by Engineer from manufacturer's standard colors. For concealed materials, provide the natural color which has the best overall performance characteristics. B. Hardness: As recommended by manufacturer for application shown, unless otherwise indicated. C. Modulus of Elasticity: Provide the lowest available modulus of elasticity which is consistent with exposure to weathering, indentation, vandalism, abrasion, support of loading, and other requirements. D. Compatibility: Before purchase of each required material, confirm its compatibility with each other material it will be exposed to in the joint system. E. Size and Shape: As shown or, if not shown, as recommended by the manufacturer for the type and condition of joint, and for the indicated joint performance or movement. F. Grade of Sealant: For each application, provide the grade of sealant (non -sag, self - leveling, no- track, knife grade, preformed, etc.) as recommended by the manufacturer for the particular condition of installation (location, joint shape, ambient temperature, and similar conditions), to achieve the best possible overall performance. Grades specified herein are for normal condition of installation. For non - vertical joints apply an elastomeric joint sealant. Use a closed cell neoprene joint filler beneath the sealant in all traffic areas (as determined by the Engineer). Rout and seal all joints at interface of slabs and block walls. 2.02 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS: One - Component Polyurethane Sealant: Polyurethane based, one -part elastomeric sealant, complying with FS TT- S -0227E and ASTM C -920. 2.03 NON -ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS: Acrylic -Latex Sealant: Latex - rubber - modified, acrylic - emulsion- polymer sealant compound permanently flexible, non - staining and non - bleeding; recommended by manufacturer for protected exterior exposure. 2.04 BITUMINOUS SEALANTS: Bituminous Caulking Compound: Manufacturer's standard, non - sag, bituminous, general - purpose caulking compound, containing mineral fiber filler. 2.05 JOINT FILLERS: A. Bituminous and Fiber Joint Filler. Provide resilient and non - extruding type premolded bituminous impregnated fiberboard units complying with ASTM D 1751, FS HH -F -341, Type and AASHTO M 213. B. Closed -Cell Neoprene Joint Filler: Provide expanded neoprene complying with ASTM D 1056, Class SC (oil- resistant and medium swell), of 2 to 5 psi compression deflection (Grade SCE 41); except provide 13 to 17 psi compression deflection (Grade SCE 44) wherever filler is applied under sealant exposed to traffic. 2.06 GASKETS: Exposed Closed -Cell Neoprene Gasket: Provide extruded or molded expanded neoprene complying with ASTM C 509, Grade 4, black; formed with durable self -skin to the profile shown or, if not shown, as required to maintain a watertight and airtight seal. 07900 -2 WF109000 2.07 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: A. Oakum Joint Filler: Provide untreated hemp or jute fiber rope, free of oil, tar and other compounds which might stain surfaces, contaminate joint walls, or not be compatible with sealants. B. Joint Primer /Sealer: Provide the type of joint primer /sealer recommended by the sealant manufacturer for the joint surfaces to be primed or sealed. C. Bond Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by the sealant manufacturer to be applied to sealant- contact surfaces where bond to the substrate or joint filler must be avoided for proper performance of sealant, provide self - adhesive tape wherever applicable. D. Sealant Backer Rod: Compressible rod stock of polyethylene foam, polyethylene jacketed polyurethane foam, butyl rubber foam, neoprene foam or other flexible, permanent, durable non - absorptive material as recommended for compatibility with sealant by the sealant manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS: Complywith manufacturer's printed instructions except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified, and except where manufacturer's technical representative directs otherwise. 3.02 JOINT PREPARATION: A. Clean joint surfaces immediately before installation of sealant or caulking compound. Remove dirt, insecure coatings, moisture and other substances which would interfere with bond of sealant or caulking compound. Etch concrete and masonry joint surfaces as recommended by sealant manufacturer. B. Prime or seal the joint surfaces wherever shown or recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Do not allow primer /sealer spill or migrate onto adjoining surfaces. 3.03 INSTALLATION: A. Exterior joints and other joints indicated to receive sealant: Polysulfide sealant. B. Interior Joints: Acrylic -Latex Sealant. C. Set joint filler units at proper depth or position in the joint to coordinate with other work, including the installation of bond breakers, backer rods and sealants. Do not leave voids or gaps between the ends of joint filler units. D. Install sealant backer rod for liquid elastomeric sealants, except where shown to be omitted or recommended to be omitted by sealant manufacturer for the application shown. E. Install bond breaker tape wherever shown and wherever required by manufacturer's recommendations to ensure that elastomeric sealants will perform properly. 07900-3 W F 109000 i F. Employ only proven installation techniques, which will ensure that sealants will be deposited in uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with complete "wetting" of the joint bond surfaces equally on opposite sides. Except as otherwise indicated, fill sealant rabbet to a slightly concave surface, slightly below adjoining surfaces. Where horizontal joints are between a horizontal surface and vertical surface, fill joint to form a slight cove, so that joint will not trap moisture and dirt. G. Install sealant to depths as shown or, if not shown, as recommended by the sealant manufacturer but within the following general limitations, measured at the center (thin) section of the bead; �I 1. For sidewalks, pavements and similar joints sealed with elastomeric sealants and subject to traffic and other abrasion and indentation exposures, fill joints to a depth equal to 75% of joint width, but neither more than 5/8" deep nor less than 3/8" deep. 2. For normal moving joints sealed with elastomeric sealants but not subject to traffic, fill joints to a depth equal to 50% of joint width, but neither more than 1/2" deep nor less than 1/4" deep. 3. For joints sealed with non - elastomeric sealants and caulking compounds, fill joints to a depth in the range of 75% to 125% of joint width. H. Spillage: Do not allow sealants or compounds to overflow or spill onto adjoining surfaces, or to migrate into the voids of adjoining surfaces. Clean the adjoining surfaces by whatever means may be necessary to eliminate evidence of spillage. I. Recess exposed edges of gaskets and joint fillers slightly behind adjoining surfaces, unless otherwise shown, so that compressed units will not protrude from the joint. J. Bond ends of gaskets together with adhesive or by other means as recommended by the manufacturer to ensure continuous watertight and airtight performance. Miter -cut and bond ends at comers unless molded comer units are provided. 3.04 CURE AND PROTECTION: Cure sealants and caulking compounds in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and surface durability. Advise the Contractor on procedures required for the cure and protection of joint sealers during the construction period, so that they will be without deterioration or damage (other than normal wear and weathering) at the time of Owner's acceptance. 07900 -4 W F109000 I SECTION 09800 COATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE: The work described in this section of the specifications includes the furnishing of all materials, labor, tools, and equipment to apply all coatings, as specified or as shown on the drawings. The Contractor is specifically cautioned that this Section includes requirements for equipment and other items specified elsewhere in this document. The work includes surface preparation and coating all items supplied and installed under this contract, or existing facilities damaged pursuant to this work. 1.02 GENERAL: All coatings and paints shall be products of the manufacturer(s) approved by the Engineer. The manufacturer's coating schedules, surface preparation and application instructions shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. Colors shall be selected by the Engineer. 1.03 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATION: Coatings used for potable water applications must be approved by the State of Florida Department of Environmental Protection for potable water use. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer certification from the manufacturer stating that the coatings are approved. The coatings specified herein for contact with potable water are currently acceptable to the regulatory agencies for this use. This approval must be still in effect at the time of shop drawing approval. If it is not, the Contractor shall utilize another named manufacturer, or if none is named, another manufacturer, subject to the Engineer's approval. 1.04 PAINTING NOT INCLUDED: A. The following categories of work are not included as part of the field - applied finish work, or are included in other sections of these specifications. B. Pre - Finished Items: Unless otherwise indicated, do not include painting when factory- finishing or installer finishing is specified for such items as finished electrical equipment including light fixtures, switchgear, distribution cabinets, instruments and meters. Pumps and motors are not included in this exception, unless specifically noted to the contrary. C. Concealed Surfaces: Concealed surfaces shall be coated per this specification prior to installation. In particular, surfaces which will be concealed behind bolted connections shall be fully coated per this specification prior to assembly. D. Finished Metal Surfaces: Unless otherwise noted, metal surfaces of anodized aluminum, 316 stainless steel (excluding nuts, bolts, and washers on painted pipe and equipment), chromium plate, bronze and similar finished materials will not require finish painting, unless otherwise indicated. This shall not include above grade copper items or all galvanized items, which will require coating. Also, 304 stainless steel items shall be coated. All stainless steel and galvanized surfaces shall be passivated prior to coating if recommended by coating manufacturer. All copper surfaces shall receive a wash primer or other suitable preparation as recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineerfor proper P erformance of in the coat All aluminum surfaces which are imbedded or otherwise in h 9 contact with concrete, shall be coated on the contact side. Handrails, railings, stair treads 09800 -1 WF109000 and grating including embed and shelf angles of FRP or aluminum shall not be coated. Windows, doors and louvers shall be coated by manufacturer per specification. E. Operating Parts and Labels: Moving parts of operating units, mechanical and electrical parts, such as valve and damper operators, linkages, sinkages, sensing devices, motor and fan shafts will not require finish painting, unless otherwise indicated. Do not paint over any code- required labels, such as Underwriters' Laboratories and Factory Mutual, or any equipment identification, performance rating, name, or nomenclature plates. 1.05 SUBMITTALS: Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300. A. Manufacturers Data; Painting: Submit 4 copies of manufacturer's technical information including paint label analysis and application instructions for each material proposed for use. B. Samples; Painting: Submit samples for Engineers review of color and texture only. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. Provide a listing of the material and application for each coat of each finish sample. Samples of available colors shall be submitted to the Engineer for selection. 1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: A. Store paint products in a clean orderly manner in a well dry, ventilated space; no smoking in storage area. B. Deliver all materials to the job site in original, new and unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturers name and label, and the following information: Name or title of material. Fed. Spec. number, if applicable. Manufacturers stock number and date of manufacturer. Manufacturers name. Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents. Thinning instructions. Application instructions. Color name and number. Manufacturers Safety Sheet 1.07 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Apply water -base paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and the surrounding air temperatures are between 50 degrees F and 90 degrees F unless otherwise permitted by the paint manufacturers printed instructions. B. Apply solvent- thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and the surrounding air temperatures are between 45 degrees F and 95 degrees F unless otherwise permitted by the paint manufacturers printed instructions. C. Do not apply paint in rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 95 %; or to damp or wet surfaces; unless otherwise permitted by the paint manufacturers printed instructions. 09800 -2 WF109000 D. Painting may be continued during inclement weather only of the areas and surfaces to be painted are enclosed and heated within the temperature limits specified by the paint manufacturer during application and drying periods. 1.08 TOLERANCES: This specification sets forth the required dry film thickness. Where minimum thicknesses are specified all tests shall exceed the minimum amount. However, the manufacturer's maximum thickness shall also not be exceeded. Where a maximum is not indicated by the manufacturer, the maximum shall be 150% of the minimum. Where a range of thickness is given, all tests shall be with the specified range. The tolerance is specified by the range. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. The following coating manufacturers are acceptable, where indicated. 1. Tnemec 2. Ameron 2.02 COLORS AND FINISHES: A. Prior to beginning work, the Contractor will furnish color chips for surfaces to be painted. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review. B. Color Pigments and Finish: Pure, non - fading, applicable types to suit the substrates and service indicated. The finish of the coating system (flat, semi - gloss, gloss) shall be semi- gloss unless otherwise indicated. C. Paint Coordination: Provide specified finish coats which are compatible with specified prime paints used. Review other sections of these specifications in which prime paints are to be provided to ensure compatibility of total coatings system for various substrates. Upon request from other trades, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials proposed for use, to ensure compatible prime coats are used. Remove incompatible primers and re -prime as required. Notify the Engineer in writing of any anticipated problems using specified coating systems with substrates primed by others. D. Color Coding: All pipes shall be color coded per AWWA classifications. Where AWWA does not designate a color, industry standards color as indicated by the Engineer shall be used. This may require the use of non - standard colors where the Engineer indicates it is necessary to match our existing color. The Contractor is further advised that several colors may be required on various items. 2.03 MATERIAL QUALITY: A. Provide the best quality grade of the various types of coatings regularly manufactured by acceptable paint materials manufacturers. Materials not displaying the manufacturer's identification as a standard, best -grade product will not be acceptable. 09800 -3 WF109000 i 1. Proprietary names used to designate colors or materials are not intended to imply that products of the named manufacturers are required to the exclusion of equivalent products of the other named manufacturers. 2. Federal Specifications establish the minimum acceptable quality for paint materials. Provide a written certification from the paint manufacturer that materials provided meet or exceed these minimums. 3. Manufacturers products which comply with the coating qualitative requirements of applicable Federal Specifications, yet differ in quantitative requirements, may be considered for use only when acceptable to the Engineer. Fumish material data and manufacturer's certificate of performance to the Engineer for any proposed substitutions. 4. Provide undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits. 5. The primer, overcoat, and intermediate coats shall be from one manufacturer, exclusive of a Thoroseal preparation system where specified. 2.04 COATING SYSTEMS: A. Submerged Materials (ductile iron, steel, PVC, FRP, 304 SS, etc.) 1. Primer: a. Amercoat 395 HS amine cured epoxy with a minimum dry film thickness equal to 4.0 mils per coat. r b. Tnemec 20 -1255 Pota -Pox, with a minimum dry film thickness equal to 4.0 mils per coat. 2. Overcoat: a. Amercoat 395 HS amine cured epoxy with a minimum dry film thickness equal to 5.0 mils per coat. b. Tnemec WHO2 (Tank White) Pota -Pox, with a minimum dry film thickness equal to 5.0 mils per coat. B. New Below Grade Materials (buried steel, buried RGS conduit, exterior below grade precast concrete, exterior below grade cast -in -place concrete): 1. Primer and Finish Coat: a. Amercoat 78HB coal tar epoxy with a minimum dry film thickness equal to 8.0 mils per coat. b. Tnemec 461-1-413 Tneme -Tar coal tar epoxy with a minimum dry film thickness equal to 8.0 mils per coat. 09800 -4 W F109000 C. Non - submerged Metals and Misc. Non - submerged Items (i.e., non -buried pipe, fittings, valves, supports, conduit, brackets, metal fabrications, etc.). All stainless steel, galvanized, aluminum, FRP, PVC, CPVC and copper surfaces shall be scarified and solvent cleaned per SSPC SP -1. 1. Primer: Apply a stripe coat of primer prior to the general primer application to all edges, welds, seams and comers. All flanges, retainer glands, etc. shall be caulked after the primer has been applied. The primer coat shall not be applied to galvanized, stainless steel surfaces, stainless steel, FRP, PVC, CPVC or aluminum surfaces. a. Amercoat E211 inorganic zinc with a minimum dry film thickness equal to 2.5 mils per coat. b. Tnemec 90 - 97 organic zinc, with a minimum dry film thickness equal to 3.0 mils per coat. 2. Intermediate Coat: a. Amercoat 383 HS polyamide epoxy with a dry film thickness equal to 5.0 mils per coat. b. Tnemec Series N69 Hi -Build Epoxoline with a minimum dry film thickness equal to 4.0 mils per coat. 3. Finish Coat: a. Amercoat 450 aliphatic polyurethane coating with a minimum dry film thickness equal to 2.0 mils per coat. b. Tnemec Series 1074U Endura Shield 11 with a minimum dry film thickness equal to 2.5 mils per coat. D. Motors, Pumps, and other mechanical equipment - Non - Submerged. 1. Primer Coat: Surface preparation and primer coat shall be shop provided per this specification. If manufacturer is unable to provide specified primer system, it shall be field performed. a. Ameron Amerlock 400 with a minimum dry film thickness equal to 5.0 - 8.0 mils per coat. b. Tnemec 135 Chembuild epoxy mastic, with a minimum dry film thickness equal to 4.0 - 6.0 mils per coat. 2. Intermediate Coat: a. Amercoat 383 HS polyamide epoxy with a minimum dry film thickness equal to 5.0 mils per coat. 09800 -5 W F109000 i b. Tnemec Series N69 Hi -Build Epoxoline, with a minimum dry film thickness equal to 4.0 mils per coat. 3. Finish Coat: a. Amercoat 450 HS aliphatic polyurethane coating with a minimum dry film thickness equal to 2.0 mils per coat. b. Tnemec Series 1074U Endura Shield II, with a minimum dry film thickness equal to 2.5 mils per coat. E. Well R4 Pad and Miscellaneous Support Pads at WTP: 1. Primer and Finish Coat(two coats required): a. Amercoat 383 HS polyamide epoxy with a minimum dry film thickness equal to 5.0 mils per coat. b. Tnemec Series N69 Hi -Build Epoxiline, with a minimum dry film thickness equal to 4.0 mils. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Applicator must examine the areas and conditions under which painting work is to be applied and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Applicator. B. Starting of painting work will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of the surfaces and conditions within any particular area. C. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions otherwise detrimental to the information of a durable paint film. 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION: A. General: Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in strict accordance with the paint manufacturer's instructions and as herein specified, for each particular substrate condition. When the specified and recommended manufacturer's surface preparation system differ, use the system which in the Engineer's opinion is the more restrictive (conservative). Tar stops shall be applied to all items with bitumastic coatings. B. Carefully remove all hardware, hardware accessories, machine surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items in place and not to be finish- painted, or provide surface- applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting operations. Remove if necessary, for the complete painting of the items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting of each space or area, reinstall the removed items by workmen skilled in the trades involved. 09800 -6 W F109000 C. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil and grease prior to mechanical cleaning. Program the cleaning and painting so that contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall onto wet, newly - painted surfaces. D. Ferrous Metals: 1. All ferrous surfaces shall be sand blasted to a "Near White, SSPC -SP10" condition as specified by the Steel Structures Painting Council. Coatings shall be applied to all blasted surfaces before surface oxidation appears, but in any case, prior to the end of the same workday on which the blasting occurred. 2. The pumps, motors, or similar equipment shall be shop primed only using the specified system. Intermediate and finish coats shall be field applied. The manufacturer of all um s, motors and similar equipment shall submit a written P P certification to the Engineer that the surface preparation and prime coats satisfy the requirements. i certification n h II miffed prior and accepted specification equ ements This cert cat o shall be sub p p to release for shipment. Touch u shall be applied as required. The equipment P P PP q manufacturer shall submit written documentation confirming the surface preparation and coating is per specification. The Contractor is specifically advised that the dry film thickness of all factory applied coatings will be field confirmed by the Engineer. a le o Any coating not meeting the requirements of the specifications, in th so p inion of the Engineer, shall be removed, surface preparation repeated and the coating reapplied to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 3. Except as noted in item 2 above, all surface preparation and coating work shall be performed in the field, unless otherwise specifically identified in the specification or on the drawings. E. Cementitious Materials: 1. Prepare cementitious surfaces of concrete, concrete block, to be painted by removing all efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and by roughening as required to remove glaze. Concrete surfaces, other than concrete block, shall be brush blasted per SSPC SP -7. 2. Determine the alkalinity and moisture content of the surfaces to be painted by performing appropriate tests. If the surfaces are found to be sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning of the finish paint, correct this condition before application of paint. Do not paint over surfaces where the moisture content exceeds that permitted in the manufacturer's printed directions. The Contractor shall provide written documentation to the Engineer that the alkalinity, moisture content and any other substrate requirements of any cementitious surface is acceptable and within the coating manufacturer's recommended limits for application of the coating. The coating manufacturer shall also test the alkalinity and moisture content of all concrete surfaces prior to the application of any coating and provide written certification of results and suitability for coating. F. PVC, FRP, CPVC, PE, Aluminum, Stainless Steel, Copper Surfaces: Clean free of oil and surface contaminants with an acceptable non - petroleum based solvent. Galvanized surfaces shall be prepared according to SSPC SP -1 scarified prior to applying coatings. 09800 -7 WF109000 3.03 MATERIALS PREPARATION: A. Mix and prepare painting materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions. B. Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers. Maintain containers used in storage, mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. C. Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density, and stir as required during the application of the materials. Do not stir surface film into the material. Remove the film and if necessary, strain the material before using. 3.04 APPLICATION: Apply paint in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for the substrate and type of material being applied. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through the final coat of paint, until the paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. Give special attention to insure that all surfaces, including edges, comers, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. All paint shall be spray applied. Adjacent surfaces shall be protected from overspray to the satisfaction of the Engineer and to fully protect against overspray. 3.05 SCHEDULING PAINTING: A. Apply the first -coat material to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. B. Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where in feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and the application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat. C. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply each material at not less than the manufacturers recommended spreading rate, to establish a total dry film thickness as indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by coating manufacturer. See Section 09800, 1.08 for further discussion. 3.06 COMPONENTS REQUIRING COATING: The Contractor shall coat all the components described below. This list attempts to identify key components requiring coating. The Contractor shall refer to the drawings and other sections for more discussion on coating requirements. In general, all items shall be coated. The Contractor shall contact the Engineer concerning any item in question which is not included in this list. The cost for all coating systems shall be included in the base bid. i A. Submerged Materials (ductile iron, steel, PVC, FRP, 304 SS, etc.) 1. Nuts and bolts (except 316 stainless steel). 2. All submerged miscellaneous metals. 3. Exterior of all submerged pipe, fittings and valves (incl. PVC pipe, 304 SS pipe, ductile iron pipe and fittings. 09800 -8 WF109000 4. All non cementitious surfaces inside the clearwell. B. New Below Grade Materials (buried steel, buried RGS conduit, exterior below grade precast concrete, exterior below grade cast -in -place concrete) 1. RGS conduit 2. Exterior of electric pull boxes C. Non- Submerged Metals and Miscellaneous Non - Submerged Items: 1. Above grade pipe, fittings, valves, meters, etc. including items in trenches. 2. Above grade valving and appurtenances, including items in trenches. 3. Pipe supports, etc. including items in trenches. 4. Structural members, including items in trenches and pressure vessel support trees. 5. Exposed conduit (all except buried). 6. Supports and brackets including items in trenches. 7. All nuts, bolts and washers (excluding 316 stainless steel except on piping to be painted). 8. Electric pull box covers 9. Electric pull box/manhole covers, and frames (inside and outside) 10. All ferrous, stainless steel, PVC, CPVC, PE, PVDF, FRP, galvanized aluminum work not specified elsewhere. 11. Well R-4 Pump Base D. Motors, Pumps, and all Concrete Supports at WTP - Non - Submerged: 1. Motors 2. Pumps 3. Blowers 4. All miscellaneous mechanical equipment E. Well R-4 and Miscellaneous Support Pads at WTP: 1. Well R4 pump pad and concrete supports. 2. All concrete support pads on the WTP site. F. Damaged Areas: Any existing facilities and /or equipment whose coating is damaged during construction, shall be recoated. The Contractor shall special and extra precautions to not damage floor and other coatings in the WTP Building. If such coatings are damaged, the Contractor shall repair the entire area to a "paint break" location to insure consistent texture and color. This criteria is noted to potentially cause the need to re -coat an entire floor in a given roon. 3.07 QUALITY CONTROL: A. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility properly and coordinate the fabricator's P tY to P P eri Y noti fY surface preparation and painting operations so that they conform to the requirements of these specifications. 09800 -9 WF109000 B. All paint shall be delivered to the site in unopened cans and shall be properly stored, stirred, and mixed prior to application. C. The finished surfaces shall be free from runs, ridges, voids, drips, waves, laps and variation in color, texture and finish. Painting found defective shall be scraped or sandblasted off and repainted as directed by the Engineer. Before final acceptance of the work, damaged surfaces of paint shall be cleaned and repainted or touched up as directed by Engineer. The Contractor shall take special and extra precautions to not damage floor and other coatings in the WTP Building. If such coatings are damaged, the Contractor shall repair the entire area to a "paint break" location to insure consistent texture and color. This criteria is noted to potentially cause the need to re -coat an entire floor in a given room. D. Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly - painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion of painting operations. E. At the completion of work of other trades, touch -up and restore all damaged or defaced painted surfaces. F. Successive coats of paints shall completely cover the previous coat so it cannot be seen. Each coat shall be tinted to make the various coats distinguishable. Successive coats shall be applied after a minimum 24 hour drying period unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer. 3.08 TESTING: The Contractor shall have available at the site a Tooke thickness gage and an elcometer or Micro -Test magnetic dry mil gage for the determination of coating thicknesses. A device to measure pit depth or other suitable instrument shall be supplied to measure the thickness of cementitious coatings or others not reasonably measurable by magnetic or scratch devices. No intermediate or finish coats shall be applied until the Engineer has accepted the previous coat. 3.09 PROTECTION: Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting and finishing work. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to the Engineer. 3.10 TOUCH -UP: The Contractor shall supply the Owner with one quart of each coating and color used on this project. Cans shall be unopened and properly identified. 3.11 WORK QUALITY: The finished surfaces shall be free from runs, ridges, drips, waves, laps, and variation in color, texture, and finish. Painting found defective shall be scraped or sandblasted off and repainted as directed by the Engineer. Before final acceptance of the work, damaged surfaces of paint shall be cleaned and repainted or touched up as directed by the Engineer. Caulk all flanges on piping prior to application of coatings with Sika 1 -A caulk. All surfaces which have non - coated metal -to -metal contact such as nuts, bolts, valve bonnets, valve covers, etc. shall be caulked prior to coating. 3.12 CLEAN -UP The Contractor shall use the manufacturer's recommended cleaning solvent for all clean -up. During the progress of the work, the Contractor shall remove from the site all discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans and rags at the end of each work day. Upon completion of the painting work, the Contractor shall clean window glass and other paint- spattered surfaces. Spattered paint shall be removed by washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or otherwise damage finished surfaces. 09800 -10 WF109000 SECTION 10400 PIPINGNALVING /EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK: The work shall include the fabrication and installation of the piping, valving and equipment identification system for the new R.O. process equipment. This section does not apply to panels, sample stands, switch gear or similar items with labelling requirements specified in other sections. In general, tags and markers shall match the existing tags and markers. 1.02 MANUFACTURING: The identification system shall be manufactured by the Seton Name Plate Company. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 WORDING: The wording and colors shall be as approved by the Engineer and generally match the existing. 2.02 EQUIPMENT TAGS: Equipment tags shall be 1 1/2" diameter with 5/32" top hole. The tag shall be 1/8" thick plastic and have space for two lines of print. All equipment shall be tagged according to the numbering system set forth on the Process and Instrumentation drawings including the number and item description. All instrument and equipment items shall be labelled. The tags shall be secured to all valves, instruments and equipment with 316 SS wire. 2.03 PIPING MARKERS: Piping markers shall be snap on type for sizes under 6- inches in diameter and strap on type for sizes over 6 inches. Every new non -buried process pipe for the feed, reject, product, cleaning and chemical feed system inside the R.O. building shall receive pipe markers. Each marker shall include a directional flow arrow. The lettering size shall be according to the following table: Outside Pipe Diameter (in.) Size of Letters (in.) 3/4-1 1/4 1/2 1 1/2-2 3/4 3 -6 11/4 8 -10 21/2 >10 31/2 The length of the field shall be adjusted to accommodate the lettering size, but shall not exceed 24 inches. Strap on markers shall be secured with 316 SS spring coils. 10400 -1 WF109000 i 2.04 COLOR CODING: The following color coding system shall be used for markers and tags: Field Letter Product Blue White Concentrate White Black Feed Water Green White PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: The piping markers shall be placed no more than 20 feet apart with at least one marker on every straight run and additional markers at turns and where pipes pass through walls. I I 10400 -2 WF109000 SECTION 11211 HORIZONTAL WELL PUMPS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE: Work covered under this section shall consist of furnishing and installing the pumping unit shown on the drawings and specified herein. The pump shall be of a horizontal process pumps and include the pump, motor, corrosion resistant drip edge base plate, coupling, and all miscellaneous equipment to produce a fully functional pumping system. The new well pump installation shall be as shown on the plans or described in the specifications. 1.02 GUARANTEED EFFICIENCY: The pump shall operate at not less than the efficiencies stipulated in this specification for the corresponding head and flow conditions. Certified performance curves based on testing of the actual pump /motor assembly, to be shipped shall be prepared and submitted to the Engineer for acceptance prior to shipment. All submittals shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 01300. A minimum of three test points shall be plotted for each curve. These points shall coincide with the specified flow requirements. At a minimum, the head, flow, horsepower draw, pump efficiency and NPSH requirements shall be shown at each point. The submitted curves shall show the date, time and location of the test and be signed by the person in responsible charge of performing the test. In the event the pump does not meet the specified efficiency, the Contractor shall make the necessary modifications, repairs or replacements to make the unit conform with the specifications and re -test the unit in accordance with the above criteria to demonstrate conformance. The Contractor is specifically cautioned that there will be no tolerance on the required head, flow and efficiency conditions. Refer to Section 16050 for additional relevant information related to performance testing. The Contractor is specifically cautioned that there will be no tolerance on the required head, flow and efficiency conditions and that some of the criteria contained herein may be more stringent than Hydraulic Institute requirements. 1.03 VIBRATION: Vibration testing shall be in accordance with Section 13080, Vibration. 1.04 ARTESIAN FLOW: The Contractor is advised that Well R-4 is under artesian p ressure. All steps necessary to facilitate the installation of the specified equipment without spillage or leakage of the high chloride artesian source shall be taken. Any spillage shall be cleaned up to the satisfaction of agencies having jurisdiction. 1.05 MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE: The Contractor shall provide for the presence of competent personnel representing the manufacturer of the pump to check the installation, adjust the alignment, place the installation in service and instruct the Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance thereof. The Engineer shall be given seven days advance written notice of the desired startup date and time. Start-up for each installation shall be scheduled consecutively on the same day. A startup report shall be submitted to the Engineer and accepted prior to attainment of substantial completion. See Sections 01650 and 01300 for other related requirements. 1.06 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: The pumps shall be as manufactured by, and the pumping unit shall be as assembled by Goulds or Peerless. 11211 -1 WF109000 i PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 WELL PUMP (1 REQUIRED): A. OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS: The pumps shall satisfy all of the following flow, head and efficiency requirements: FLOW Head (ft) Efficiency (qpm) Maximum Design Minimum Minimum 800 123 116 75 Design Pt. 1111 93 75 1250 85 80 67 The pump shall be a horizontal ANSI B73.1. Provided all other criteria are satisfied the pump shall be a Goulds Model 3180 or Peerless Model 8196 process pump and operate at nominal 1800 RPM. The pump shall be end suction with a 6 -inch suction and 4 -inch discharge. The pump shall not overload the motor anywhere along its curve, independent of service factor. The minimum motor horsepower shall be 40. The electrical design is based on a 40 horsepower, 460 volt, 3 phase, 60 Hz motor. If more motor horsepower is required to satisfy any of the above criteria, the Contractor shall be responsible for making the required modifications to the electrical design, subject to the Engineer's approval and supplying /installing the up- sized equipment. B. Casing: Pump casing shall be 316 stainless steel designed for heavy duty service. The casing shall be horizontal end suction with center line discharge and the 6 -inch suction and 4 -inch discharge flanges integrally cast with the casing. The casing shall be designed for back pull -out of the bearing frame without disturbing the suction or discharge piping. The interior shall be smooth and free from surface defects. Thickness, diameter, and drilling dimensions of suction flanges shall be Class 150 ANSI flat faced. Discharge flanges shall be Class 150 ANSI flat faced. Casings shall be drilled and tapped forvertical priming, gauge, and drain connections. Suitable lifting lugs or eye bolts shall be provided. Casing shall be tested in the manufacturer's shop under a hydrostatic pressure of 150% of maximum head, which will be the pump shut -off head. C. Impeller: Impeller shall be of single suction open type made entirely of 316 stainless steel, finished smooth all over and of ample strength and stiffness for maintaining the maximum capacity of the unit. It shall be statically and dynamically balanced to ISO 1940 G6.3 and shall be keyed to the shaft and securely held in axial position on the shaft with shaft nut or reverse threaded with O -ring seal. The stuffing box shall be fitted to the casing and sized to accommodate industry standard mechanical seals as set forth below. D. Shaft: The shaft shall be 4340 steel solid through the stuffing box of such dimensions that the maximum fiber stress is designed for less than 1/2000 inch deflection through the stuffing box. E. Mechanical Seal: The pump shall be equipped with a single inside bellows type mechanical seal as manufactured by John Crane. Seal faces shall be silicon carbide and metal parts shall be Alloy 20. 11211 -2 WF109000 F. Bearings: Bearings shall be flood oil lubricated, ball bearing. An auxiliary double row ball bearing shall be provided for thrust load and to hold the rotor in axial alignment. The radial bearing shall be single row. Bearings shall have a minimum rated service life of 50,000 hours in accordance with the standards of the Bearings Manufacturers Association. Bearing shells shall be rigidly supported by suitable brackets, which may be cast with pump casing or separately cast. Where bearing brackets are separately cast, they shall be babbitted, flanged, bolted, and doweled to casing and bored with the casing and frame adapter as a unit. G. Rotating Element: The complete rotating element shall be of such design that it can be removed from the case without disturbing the suction and discharge piping. H. Couplings: Couplings shall be spacer type all metal type as manufactured by Falk, Sierbath, or Woods. Couplings shall be protected by an aluminum OSHA approved guard. I. Base: The entire assembly shall some fully installed on a 316 stainless steel base. The base shall be field coated per Section 09800. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ASSEMBLIES OR UNITS: Where the contract documents require the Contractor to furnish and install an assembly or unit, the Contractor shall furnish all component parts as required by the manufacturer of the assembly or unit. 3.02 EQUIPMENT SETTING: All pumps, motors, and equipment shall be set, leveled, plumbed, and aligned. All wedges shall be stainless steel and placed 12 inches or less center -to- center. All equipment shall be anchored as recommended by the manufacturer. Grout used in setting of equipment shall be non - shrink grout such as "Embeco ", manufactured by the Master Builder's Company of Cleveland, Ohio. The bases shall be fully filled with grout. The Contractor shall provide additional holes in the baseplate as necessary to ensure complete grouting of the bases. Refer to Section 15100 for anchoring. 11211 -3 WF109000 SECTION 11214 VERTICAL TURBINE R.O. HIGH PRESSURE PUMP PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE: Work covered under this section shall consist of fumishing and installing the pumping and drive equipment as shown on the drawings and specified herein. The pumping assemblies covered by this section include the R.O. high pressure pump (1 required). The pump is a multi- stage vertical turbine and includes bowl assembly, column pipe, discharge head, sole plate, electric motor, electrical connections, pump barrels and all other materials and equipment necessary to provide a complete and operable system. It is the intent of this specification that the new pumping assembly be identical to the existing units except as may be specifically identified differently herein or on the drawings. The heater in the spare motor shall be connected. 1.02 GUARANTEED EFFICIENCY: The pump shall operate at not less than the efficiencies stipulated in this specification for the corresponding head and flow conditions. Certified performance curves, based on testing of the actual pump /motor assembly to be shipped, shall be prepared and submitted to the Engineer for acceptance prior to shipment. The pump test shall be conducted including the pump can and the test results shall include all losses from suction to discharge flange. All submittals shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 01300. A minimum of seven test points shall be plotted for each curve. These points shall coincide with the specified flow requirements. At a minimum, the head, flow, horsepower draw and pump efficiency shall be shown at each point. The submitted curves shall show the date, time and location of the test and be signed by the person in responsible charge of performing the test. In the event the pump does not meet the specified efficiency, the Contractor shall make the necessary modifications, repairs or replacements to make the unit conform with the specifications and re -test the unit in accordance with the above criteria to demonstrate conformance. The manufacturer is specifically cautioned there will be no tolerance on the required head, flow and efficiency conditions that some of the criteria contained herein may be more stringent than Hydraulic Institute requirements. 1.03 VIBRATION: All pump and motor units shall be statically and dynamically balanced to meet the vibration requirements set forth in Section 13080. 1.04 MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE: The Contractor shall provide for the presence of competent personnel representing the manufacturer of the pump and motor to check the installation, adjust the impeller setting, place the installation in service and instruct the Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance thereof. The Engineer shall be given 7 days advance written notice of the desired start-up date and time. Start-up for each installation shall be scheduled consecutively on the same day. A start-up report shall be submitted to the Engineer and accepted prior to attainment of substantial completion. See Section 01650. Also see Section 01300 for O &M Manual requirements. 1.05 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER: The pump shall be as manufactured by, and the pumping unit shall be as assembled by Afton Pumps, Inc. The pumping unit, including pump, motor, shafting, column pipe, discharge'head, pump barrel and appurtenances shall be from the same supplier. A contractor or sub - contractor shall not be considered as a supplier for this purpose. 11214 -1 WF109000 PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. MATERIALS: Pumps and all related equipment shall be constructed of materials suitable for the intended applications. B. NAMEPLATES: All data plates shall be of stainless steel suitably attached to the pump. Data plates shall contain the manufacturer's name, pump size and type, serial number, speed, impeller diameter, design capacity, head and other pertinent data. C. HARDWARE: All stainless steel machine bolts, nuts and capscrews shall be of the hex head type. Hardware requiring special tools or wrenches shall not be used. D. PARTS NUMBERING: Parts shall be completely identified with a numerical system to facilitate parts inventory control and stocking. Each part shall be properly identified by a separate number, and those parts which are identical for more than one size unit shall have the same number. E. COATING: Refer to Section 09800. I 2.01 VERTICAL TURBINE PUMP (1 Required): A. OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS: FLOW Head (ft) Efficiency (gpm) Maximum Design Minimum Minimum 750 750 745 67 Design Pt. 1110 675 80 1250 650 645 82 The pump shall be a Model MPV, Size 8 x 10 x 12 - 10 stage vertical can type pump with John Crane O -ring type 8131 mechanical seal, four piece adjustable spacer coupling and coupling guard. The pump shall operate at nominal 1800 RPM. All pumps shall be non - overloading on the motor anywhere along the pump curve, independent of motor service factor and be minimum 300 hp. Refer to Section 16050 for additional motor requirements. B. GENERAL: The vertical turbine pump assemblies, excluding the motors, shall be all 316 l SS. The pump "T" section discharge head shall be such that its frame will accommodate at least a 300 hp motor. The pump can (barrel) shall be long enough to accommodate ten stages at a maximum, but shall not exceed 11' -0" length overall from mounting flange face to can bottom. Pump can diameter shall be 16 inches. The Contractor shall confirm the size of the designed holes for the pumps and notify the Engineer of required modifications, if any, prior to releasing pumps for production. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing debris or any concrete chipping necessary to accommodate the installation. The pumps for high pressure system shall be vertical turbine type, and mounted in a fabricated stainless steel barrel which serves as the suction sump. The complete pumping units, consisting of 11214 -2 WF109000 driver, "T" section discharge head, 316 SS column shaft as required, 316 SS turbine type bowl assembly and can shall be in accordance with these specifications. Pumps shall be open lineshaft construction, product lubricated, suitable for the application and in accordance with the following specifications. The pumps shall be of American manufacture and shall conform to ANSI /AWWA E101 as modified herein. C. BOWL ASSEMBLY: The bowl shall be 316 stainless steel, conforming to ASTM A351 GR CF8M. They shall be free from sand holes, blow holes or other faults and must be machined and fitted to close tolerances. Bowls shall have rabbet fits for alignment and connected by flanged and bolted construction. The suction bowl shall have a carbon, self lubricating, bearing positioned in a housing supported by four vanes. A sand collar shall be positioned above the bearing and rotate with the shaft. The impellers shall be of the enclosed type, manufactured of 316 stainless steel, conform to ASTM A351 GR CF8M, and shall be statically and dynamically balanced. They shall be free from defects, accurately machined and finished. Impellers shall be securely fastened using straight keys and a circular thrust ring. The pump shaft shall conform to ASTM A276 GR, 316 SS turned and ground. Bearings shall be carbon, self - lubricating. Renewable wear rings shall be furnished on both the casing and the impeller. Bowl wear rings shall be babbated carbon. Impeller wear rings shall be ASTM A 276, 316 SS. Mating wear surfaces of hardenable materials shall have a difference in Brinell hardness number of at least 50, unless both the stationary and rotating wear surfaces have Brinell hardness numbers of at least 400. Renewable wear rings shall be held in place by press fit with locking pins or threaded dowels. D. COLUMN ASSEMBLY: If used, the column shall be open line shaft construction and no section shall exceed 5 feet in length. The pipe shall be 316L S.S., Schedule 40, flanged and bolted construction. The bearing retainer shall be 316 stainless steel and aligned by rabbet bits and clamped between the column flanges. Bearings shall be grooved carbon, self lubricating. Bearing spacing shall be selected to insure operation at a minimum of 15% plus or minus the critical speed. The shaft shall conform to ASTM A276, Type 316 SS turned and ground. The diameter will be sized to conform with ANSI /AWWA E101 specification for the required horsepower. For pumps requiring 500 HP or less, the shafts shall be coupled with 316 SS threaded couplings designed with a 1 -1 /2 times safety factor and shall have left hand threads to tighten during operation; for pumps requiring more than 500 HP, the shafts shall be coupled with keyed couplings. E. SUCTION BARREL: The fabricated steel suction barrels shall be flanged at the top to receive the vertical turbine pump discharge heads. The flange shall serve as a base plate to carry the installed weight of the complete unit. The pump barrels shall be constructed of 316L S.S., conforming to ASTM A744 GR CF8M, and shall be suitably sized for the intended suction pressure. The suction flange shall be located on the "T" type discharge head. Barrel velocities past the bowl shall not exceed 3 ft. per second. An elliptical bottom shall provide smooth flow into the pump suction. The flange connection between the discharge head and the barrel shall be "O" ring sealed and conform the ANSI 16.1 flange dimensions. The suction barrel base plate shall contain provisions for anchor bolts with vertical adjustment capability for leveling. F. DISCHARGE HEAD: The discharge head shall be 316L SS construction, with 400# ANSI raised face flanges, designed for above ground suction and discharge, "T" type 11214 -3 WF109000 configuration. The head shall support the driver with a machine rabbet fit for alignment. Vibrations limits will be as specified in Section 13080. The seal shall be designed for maximum discharge pressure at shut off and adjustable externally from the pump. The gland and shaft sleeve shall be 316 SS. The headshaft shall be 316 SS, and coupled to the motor shaft with a spacer type, adjustable flanged coupling. The discharge head shall be furnished so that its mounting plate forms a leakproof fit to the suction barrel by use of an O- ring. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EQUIPMENT SETTING: All pumps, motors and equipment shall be set, leveled, plumbed and aligned before being permanently anchored. All wedges shall be stainless steel, placed not more than 12 in. on centers. All equipment shall be anchored as recommended by the manufacturer. Anchor bolts, nuts, and washers shall be epoxy type and fabricated from 316 SS and set on 1 -inch of non -shrink grout. 3.02 PIPING STRESS: Unless it is specifically permitted by the equipment manufacturer, piping connected to pumps shall be assembled so that no pipe stress or weight is transferred to the equipment. Flanged pipe fittings attached to equipment shall remain aligned with flange bolts removed. 3.03 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS: All equipment shall be installed and connected in strict accordance with the manufacturers installation instructions. 3.04 NEATNESS: All equipment shall be mounted and installed in a neat manner. The edges of brackets cut in the field shall be filed smooth. The areas of brackets covered by equipment or by contact with a structure shall be painter prior to the installation. Tubing runs shall be vertical or horizontal and secured with the necessary clips. 3.05 ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION: The Contractor is advised that the initial operating condition will be different from the design point. The Contractor under supervision by the manufacturer, will be required to remove the pump after the initial start-up of the pump and the RO system is completed and accepted. Upon removal the Contractor under supervision by the manufacturer will be required to remove one or more stage from the pump as directed by the Engineer and re- install the assembly. The Owner's representative shall be trained on how to perform this operation. The removed components shall be delivered to the Owner but shall not be considered as fulfillment of any spare parts obligations. After reinstallation the Contractor shall make suitable modifications to the plant operating software to accommodate the changes. 11214 -4 WF109000 SECTION 11235 DEGASIFIERS AND SCRUBBERS PART 1 —GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK: The work includes a degasifier, a two stage scrubber system and replacement of the recirculation pumps on the existing first and second stage scrubbers. This will essentially include a new degasifier (No. 2) and two new, associated, scrubbers with all appurtenances, including but not limited to, a new blower and four recirculation pumps (two as replacements) associated new and revised piping /valving /controls and new duct work to yield two fully functional degasifier /scrubber systems. Associated adapters, connectors and fittings are required. Modification of the existing recirculation pumps also includes demolition, removal and disposal of existing piping /valving and supports, etc. The existing and new degasifier /scrubber systems shall be complete, coordinated systems consisting of, but not limited to, the following new facilities: blower /fan (1), blower/ fan motor (1), first stage scrubber (1), second stage scrubber (1) recirculation pumps (4), interconnecting duct work (duct, fittings, transitions, etc.) as required, dampers, pH meter/tansmitter (1), pH meter /controller (1) and ORP controllers (2), pre wired NEMA 3R/12 316 SS scrubber control panels (4), recirculation fluid piping /valving, gauges and other items needed to provide a fully functional system. The Contractor shall note that the new controls include a new ORP probe and controller for the new and existing second stage scrubbers. For the existing second stage scrubber this will include modification of the scrubber shell to accommodate installation of the probe. The Contractor shall note that the new degasifier and scrubber system is generally intended to replicate the existing system except where specific upgrades and improvements are identified (recirculation pump replacement, addition of ORP controllers, etc). The overall installation quality, materials, etc., shall match the existing except where enhancements /improvements are specifically identified to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: The Owner reserves the right to reject acceptance of delivery of any or all pieces of equipment found, upon inspection, to have any or all of the following: blisters, chips, crazing cracks, burned areas, dry spots, foreign matter, surface porosity, or sharp discontinuity. All piping, ducts, etc. shall be fully and rigidly supported with 316 SS hardware and brackets, unless supports of a different material are otherwise specified. All connections to the existing ductwork or facilities that are not flanged shall be made by the degasifier system manufacturer. The Owner reserves the right to be present at the fabricator's facility for visual inspection of the equipment to be supplied. The inspection may occur prior to any lamination of the tower, prior to application of the gel coat and /or upon completion and prior to shipment. The Contractor shall provide written notification of the availability for inspection at the above noted junctures. The manufacturer shall not proceed past the noted point of fabrication, or ship the assembly until the Engineer has indicated the desire to inspect, or not. Delays induced by the desire to inspect shall not be considered as justification for the extension of contract time or additional cost. 1.03 STANDARDS: All FRP components of the assembly shall be fabricated in accordance with all applicable standards including but not limited to ASTM D3299 and ASTM D581. The new degasifiers and scrubbers shall be anchored, guyed or otherwise secured to withstand all applicable windload criteria, but not less than 140 mph, 3 second gust speed, Exposure B as set forth in ASCE 7 - current edition. The design shall be based around the vessels being empty. The manufacturer shall submit, as part of the shop drawings, windload confirmatory calculations which are signed and sealed by a properly registered Florida Professional Engineer. 11235 -1 WF109000 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: All parts shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration will occur during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed and the units and equipment are ready for operation. The equipment shall be delivered on -site as fully assembled as transportation will allow. Finished surfaces of all exposed openings shall be protected. I 1.05 MANUFACTURER WARRANTY: In addition to the Contractor's warranty set forth herein. The degasifier and scrubber manufacturer shall supply a Direct -to -Owner warranty for all work performed under this contract. The term of the warranty shall be 5 years from the date of substantial completion of the project, and shall cover all materials and labor associated with making any repairs needed to return the unit(s) to a serviceable condition. The warranty shall include, but not be limited to, delamination of all PVC /FRP materials. 1.06 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER: The new degasifiers, scrubbers, duct work, power and control panel and appurtenances shall be manufactured by Duall Division of Met -Pro Corporation. 1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: All parts shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration will occur during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed and the units and equipment are ready for operation. The equipment shall be delivered on -site as fully assembled as transportation will allow. Finished surfaces of all exposed openings shall be protected. 1.08 DESIGN CRITERIA: The design criteria and performance requirements are as set forth below. Degasifier No. 2 (1 Required) Diameter 9.0 ft. Water Flow 1250 gpm (initial) 1650 gpm (ultimate) Mist Eliminator Packing min. 1 ft. of 2" Jaeger TriPacks Packing min. 10 ft. of 3 Y2" JaegerTriPacks Inlet pH 5.8 -6.2 Water Temperature 77 °F Air Flow 6600 scfm Packing Depth 10 ft. Inlet H 10 mg /I (maximum) Required Removal Efficiency 93% Mist Eliminator Efficiency 1 % water loss (max) First Stage Scrubber (1 Required): I Diameter 4.5 ft Air Flow 6600 scfm Recirculation Pump Flow 120 gpm Mist Eliminator Packing min. 1 ft of 2" Jaeger TO Packs Packing min 10 ft of 3'/2" Jaeger Tri Packs Inlet H 150 mg /I @ first stage Required Removal Efficiency 99% (in combination w /second stage) 11235 -2 WF109000 Second Stage Scrubber 0 Required): Diameter 4.5 ft Air Flow 6600 scfm Recirculation Pump Flow 120 gpm Mist Eliminator Packing min. 1 ft. of 2" Jeager Tri Packs Packing min. 10 ft of 3 %" Jaeger Tri Packs Inlet H 150 mg /I @ first stage Required Removal Efficiency 99% (in combination w /first stage) It is noted that the criteria established above requires certain minimums for different items. The criteria also establishes a minimum performance standard. If a conflict exists between the specified items and the performance standard, the performance standard shall take precedence. The airflow rates, tower diameter packing height and /or other relevant design parameters shall be modified as required, subject to the Engineer's approval, to satisfy the performance criteria. PART 2 - PRODUCT 2.01 DEGASIFIER: The degasifier shall be forced draft, counterflow type, cylindrical design, 9.0 ft diameter and of overall height as shown on the drawings (minimum) or otherwise required to satisfy the performance criteria. The degasifier shall be fabricated of PVC overlaid with FRP. The PVC shall be Type I, Grade 1 conforming to ASTM 1784 -89 with a minimum 1/8 -inch thickness. The FRP overlay shall have a minimum thickness of 3/16 -inch. The resin shall be reinforced with an interior Type C fiberglass veil and an exterior continuous, even - tensioned fiberglass filament -wound reinforcement. A final gel coat shall be provided and placed such that no glass fiber is exposed. The final gel coat shall be pigmented with the color to match the existing degasifier color. The fiberglass overlay shall contain a UV inhibitor to protect the resin from ultraviolet degradation. A bonding coat shall be used between the PVC and FRP. The bonding coat and bonding method shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. The water and induced air will circulate countercurrently: the induced air being introduced below the packing. The water distribution system for the degasifier shall include a parting box and interior distribution weir to meet indicated height constraint. The inlet distribution weir shall be V -notch type and designed to evenly distribute the flow over the full surface area at the initial and ultimate design flow rates (1250 gpm and 1650 gpm, respectively). FRP vanes or other Engineer approved equipment shall be provided at the air inlet to facilitate an even distribution of air across the packing. The manufacturer shall submit calculations showing design basis, number of transfer units (HTU /NTU), UG, etc. along with test results from similar systems in operation, demonstrating H removal efficiency. A 6 -inch minimum distance shall be provided between the packing support and the top of the air inlet duct to facilitate distribution of air across the packing. The vessel shall have an internal baffles at the air inlet to ensure distribution and act as an air redistributor. The degasifier shall be provided with access ports to allow for gravity loading and unloading of the packing, and for maintenance of the the distribution system packing support system, mist eliminator and sump. The degasifier shall contain a mushroom style trap on the liquid discharge. The trap shall function properly to prevent gas discharge into the clearwell at the initial and ultimate flow rates. The trap shall be easily removable and pluggable (with threaded connections and /or couplings) to facilitate sealing during cleaning operations. The degasifier shall have an internal header for even distribution of cleaning solutions at 4 gpm /ft Connections to the cleaning header and pump outlet to a cleaning pump shall be piped to grade, valved as necessary and oriented as directed by the Engineer for easy cleaning access, including extension to the edge of the pad, if desired. 11235 -3 WF109000 A Type I manufactured FRP ladder shall be permanently affixed to the outside of the degasifier to gain access to the top of the unit and the top clear viewing port. The ladder shall be affixed with 316 SS hardware. The ladder shall include a T -rail safety device and two belts and be suitable for permanent outdoor installation in South Florida. All indicated clear doors shall have opaque PVC covers secured in four locations with 316 SS bolts and wing nuts. The degasifier shall have an exhaust air outlet at the top of the tower suitable for connections to FRP ducts leading to an odor control scrubber. A manually operated FRP slide type damper shall be provided to control the back pressure on the unit. The degasifiers shall each be equipped with mist eliminators to reduce water loss to less than 1 %. A drain on the FRP duct with trap and PVC ball valve shall be provided at the low spot. All ducting and piping shall be fully supported with FRP supports from the concrete structures pads and /or the vessel, subject to the Engineer's approval. The degasifiers shall be provided with lifting lugs and maintenance access ports. All internal piping shall be Schedule 80 PVC. All connections and nozzles shall be reinforced thermosetting resin. All connections 2 -inch and larger shall be flanged with ANSI B16.5 150 pound standard bolting patterns. Provide FRP pipe and equipment support brackets integrally molded to the tower for all piping and instrumentation. All impulse tubing to gauges and controls shall be 316 SS, Swagelok or Parker. All instruments shall have 316 SS isolation ball valves. (Coordinate with mechanical /instrumentation design). All gaskets shall be black neoprene. All attachment hardware shall be 316 SS. All PVC components which are wetted, or potentially wetted, shall be constructed with PVC approved for potable water contact by agencies having jurisdiction. All FRP components which are wetted, or potentially wetted, shall be fabricated with resins approved for use with potable water by agencies having jurisdiction or coated for potable water contact per Section 09800. This shall include, but not be limited to, having NSF approval. The Contractor is cautioned that proof of NSF certification will be required and the use of "approvable" or acceptable materials is not necessarily considered to be the same as actually having the certification. Final decisions as to acceptability will be based upon regulatory input. All nozzles shall be gusseted for support. Unless otherwise specified, nozzles on top shall have flanged faces perpendicular to the centerline of the vessel, and nozzles on side walls shall have flanged faces perpendicular to radial centerlines. Tolerance on angle flange face with respect to vessel centerline shall be Y2 degree. Unless otherwise specifies, nozzles on top and sides of all type of vessels shall be attached to the vessel wall according to Figure 3, ASTM D3299. Flanges for pipe connections shall be flat faced with drilling conforming to ANSI B16.5. Manholes on the top head of vertical vessels shall be of the hinged type. Blind flanges shall be the same thickness as the flanges to which they are attached. Tolerance on flatness shall be the same as for flanges. A Magnahelic Series 2000 gauge shall be mounted on the degasifier to measure differential pressure across the unit. A separate gauge shall be supplied to measure the blower discharge pressure. The gauges shall be manufactured by Dwyer. The impulse tubing shall be 316 SS Swagelok or Parker with 316 SS isolation ball valves. 2.02 SCRUBBER TOWERS: The scrubbers shall be forced draft, counterflow type, cylindrical design. The first and second stage scrubbers shall each be 4.5 ft diameter. Scrubber heights shall be as shown on the drawings (minimum), or as otherwise required to satisfy the performance criteria. The scrubbers shall be fabricated of PVC overlaid with FRP. The PVC shall be Type I, Grade 1 conforming to ASTM 1784 -89 with a minimum 1/8 -inch thickness. The FRP overlay shall have a 11235 -4 WF109000 minimum thickness of 3/16 -inch. The resin shall be reinforced with an interior Type C fiberglass veil and an exterior continuous, even - tensioned fiberglass filament -wound reinforcement. A final gel coat shall be provided and placed such that no glass fiber is exposed. The final gel coat shall be pigmented with the color to match the existing scrubber color. The fiberglass overlay shall contain a UV inhibitor to protect the resin from ultraviolet degradation. A bonding coat shall be used between the PVC and FRP. The bonding coat and bonding method shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. The scrubber vessels shall consist of a side entry, top discharge, counter - current packed bed with integral recirculation sump. Access doors shall be provided to facilitate easy removal of packing. All internal nozzles shall be accessible from access doors. All chemical feed fittings, pump suction, overflow, drain, fresh water make -up, liquid level control, site gauge and any other necessary fittings shall be included. The area below chemical feed ports shall be equipped with an FRP drip edge to prevent chemical leakage from running down the vessel. The liquid level control shall be from a level sensing device installed in an isolated PVC tube adjacent to the sump. The device shall be a dry reed type switch with stem and magnet containing float switch. Materials shall be suitable for the application. The float switch shall activate a NC, energize to open 120 V solenoid valve which bypasses the normal fill rotameter. At a low /low level the system shall be de- energized. The normal fill rotameter shall be a Model RM direct reading meter, manufactured by Dwyer, with a range as recommended by the system manufacturer. Direct reading differential pressure gauges shall be installed on each scrubber inlet and outlet. The gauges shall be Magnahelic Series 2000, manufactured by Dwyer. The impulse piping shall be 316 SS and equipped with a valved drip leg, Swagelok or Parker. Packing material shall be polypropylene random dumped Jaeger Tri- Packs. All packing support grids, mist eliminator support grids shall be designed to withstand the operating load with a minimum of 300% safety factor. Supportive calculations shall be submitted. Total packing depth shall be a minimum of 10 ft. in all scrubbers. Manufacturer shall submit calculations showing design basis, number of transfer units (HTU /NTU), UG etc. along with test results from similar systems in operation, demonstrating H removal efficiency. The scrubbers shall be supplied with a 3 -inch diameter cleaning port. This port shall be located at the same elevation of the chemical feed ports oriented valved similar to the new degasifier and extended to the pad edge as directed by the Engineer. The cleaning port shall be extended up at a 45 angle with cap to facilitate ease of adding chemicals. The degasifier and odor control unit shall be provided with lifting lugs to provide access for maintenance. All connections and nozzles shall be reinforced thermosetting resin. Distribution header and laterals shall be Schedule 80 PVC. Nozzles shall be designed for a minimum pressure drop and be fabricated of PVC. Spray nozzles shall be PVC and spray patterns shall overlap to ensure that no dry spots will occur on the surface of the packing. A minimum of 18" shall be provided between the spray nozzles and the top of the packing to facilitate water distribution and provide access for maintenance. All connections 2- inches and larger shall be flanged and shall have ANSI standard dimensions and bolting patterns. All bolts, fasteners, supports, hinges, lifting lugs, etc., shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Gaskets shall be black neoprene. The scrubber shall be equipped with a demister and the unit outlet shall be screened with a removable, 20 mesh FRP screen and frame. The area on the back of all flanges around each bolt hole shall be the diameter of a standard washer and shall be flat and parallel to the flange face. This area shall be spot faced if necessary to meet this requirement. 11235 -5 WF109000 All nozzles shall be gusseted for support. Unless otherwise specified, nozzles on top or bottom shall have flanged faces perpendicular to the centerline of the vessel, and nozzles on side walls shall have flanged faces perpendicular to radial centerlines. Tolerance on angle flange face with respect to vessel centerline shall be'/ degree. Unless otherwise specified, nozzles on top and sides of all type of vessels shall be attached to the vessel wall according to Figure 3, ASTM D3299. Nozzles on bottom of vessel shall be attached according to Figure 4, ASTM D3299. Flanges for pipe connections shall be flat faced with drilling conforming to ANSI 1316.5. Manholes on the top head of vertical vessels shall be of the hinged type. Blind flanges shall be the same thickness as the flanges to which they are attached. Tolerance on flatness shall be the same as for flanges. Suitable FRP lifting lugs shall be provided for use in transporting and placing FRP vessels. The vessels shall be equipped with taps and connection points as shown on the drawing, and as required to accommodate controls, chemical feeds and operation. 2.03 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONALITY: A. General: Controls shall be provided to produce fully functional degasification and scrubber systems. A manufacturer's panel, fully complying with Section 16950, shall be i provided for each scrubber and will contain all necessary equipment including, but not limited to pH and ORP analyzers, sump level and fill controls, suitable alarms, recirculation pump safety shutoffs, recirculation pump seal water solenoid, etc. A separate flow switch in the pump suction or discharge line shall also shutoff the pump on low flow. Analog surge protection terminal blocks and standard terminals shall be provided to facilitate remote monitoring of all functions (digital and analog) as well as remote control of the caustic feed pump and sodium hypochlorite feed pumps. The manufacturer shall include all appropriate interconnecting conduit and cable. The scrubber systems shall be, and manufacturer panel shall facilitate, the sequenced start up and shut down of the system as part of the plant operating software. The new scrubber panel shall also include the ORP controller for the existing second stage scrubber (to be supplied as part of this project). The new first and second stage scrubbers shall include pH analyzers. The first stage pH shall be used for control of the existing caustic pump. The second stage pH shall monitor and alarm out of range only. The new ORP analyzers (one in the new second stage and one to be added to the existing second stage) shall be used to control separate sodium hydrochlorite feed pumps. Level control and other functionality shall be as set forth elsewhere in this section and as described in the instrumentation drawings. The manufacturer's panel shall include, at a minimum, the following items: (1) lockable, fused disconnect switch, 20 amp, 230 volt, single pole (2) 120 volt receptacle (3) local audible alarm (4) alarm silence and reset button (5) interlock to stop chemical feed pumps or otherwise shutoff chemical feeds when the recirculation pump is off (6) terminal strip for remote alarm and system status tie -in 11235 -6 WF109000 (7) pH out of range alarm light for first stage and second stage scrubbers (new) (8) ORP out of range alarm light for second stage scrubbers (both) (9) pH and ORP analyzers /transmitters /controllers as indicated (10) 4 -20 A signal for remote pH and ORP indication to analog 24VDC surge protection terminal block (11) operating status lights for all equipment (12) H -O -A for the recirculation pumps with additional contacts for hand and auto position inputs to remote PLC's B. Automatic Chemical Controllers: One pH, two ORP controllers and one pH meter /transmitter shall be provided; new second stage pH meter /transmitter and first stage pH meter /controller and new ORP for proposed and existing second stage. The controllers shall be mounted in the manufacturer's panel, built per Section 16950 requirements. The controllers shall have a digital display with a 0 -14 for pH and 0 -1000 my for ORP measuring range and two 4 -20 mA outputs that may be assigned to the process variable, temperature or the PID controller output. The controller shall have a dual alarm relay with two individual adjustable controls to establish low and high alarm points so that the alarm relay is energized whenever the process solution is outside of these points. The pH and ORP analyzers /transmitters /controllers shall be Great Lakes Model P63 PID Controller. The pH and ORP probe shall be located in the sump area wired to individual PVC NEMA 4X junction boxes mounted on the scrubber vessel. The probes shall be fully encapsulated convertible mounting style for insertion or submersion applications with wetted materials consisting of vinylester body, ceramic salt bridge, glass process electrode, titanium palladium ground electrode, viton and RTV sealant. 2.04 BLOWERS /MOTORS: A new blower and motor shall be provided and installed for the new degasifier. The new (degasifier blower) motors shall be 30 HP, 3 phase, 460 volt TEFC, corro -duty, 1800 RPM. Refer to Section 16050 for additional relevant information. The blowers shall deliver the required flow and not overload the motors at any point on the blower curve, exclusive of service factor. Should a larger motor be required to satisfy this requirement, the Contractor shall make suitable modifications to the electrical design, subject to the Engineer's approval. A new blower /motor shall be provided and installed at the new degasifier. The blower shall deliver the design flow, 6600 scfm at minimum 12" W.C. (or as necessary to deliver the flow on a forced draft basis through the degasifier and the two stage scrubber system). The blower wheel shall be axial design of all fiberglass reinforced polyester or PVC with FRP overlay with encapsulated steel hub and stainless steel shaft. The shaft shall be encapsulated through the blower shaft seal. The blower shall be fabricated of alternated layers of fiberglass cloth and 11235 -7 WF109000 fiberglass resin and the shaft shall be Type 316 stainless steel. The blower rotor shall be designed for a minimum tip speed of 265 ft/sec. The blower housing shall be seamless fiberglass reinforced polyester constructed of alternated layers of fiberglass cloth and fiberglass resin or PVC with FRP overlay. The housing shall be additionally braced with steel inlet side and drive side plates, fastened to the fiberglass housing with Type 316 stainless steel encapsulated hardware. The blower shall have a 316 SS inlet screen. The blower will be furnished with a flanged inlet and outlet, and a PVC pipe coupling type drain with PVC ball valve. The access door will be gasketed and bolted to the blower housing with Type 316 stainless steel encapsulated hardware. Bearings shall be grease lubricated ball or roller bearings in housings that allow easy bearing replacement. Shaft seal shall be neoprene gasketed FRP plate attached to the blower housing with Type 316 stainless steel hardware. The blower shall be equipped with a flexible coupling, damper and check damper on each blower inlet and easy access belt guards. The blower shall be supplied with a filter housing, integrally attached, to filter out 95% of 10 micron size and larger particles. The filters shall be designed at a maximum of 500 fpm velocity. The housing shall be made of 316 stainless steel, aluminum or FRP. Retaining screens shall be 316 stainless steel and shall be hinged (both front and back) for easy maintenance. A weather /acoustic intake hood shall be provided and be flip -up type with side compression clips for quick detachment. The weather /acoustic hood and filter housing shall be lined with minimum 1 % - inches of closed cell polyurethane foam or other acoustically equivalent material approved by the Engineer. The acoustic material shall be suitable for the environment and be retained with suitable sized hardware cloth fabricated of the same material as the housing and fixed in place with 316 SS hardware. The Contractor shall note that the filter /housing will be larger than the existing and consider the physical constraints in the design /sizing and configuration of the unit. The blower shall be manufactured by Dual[ Division, Metro Corporation or Hartzell Corporation. 2.05 SCRUBBER RECIRCULATION PUMPS (4 REQUIRED): A new scrubber recirculation pump shall be provided for each new scrubber and each existing scrubber to deliver the scrubbing solution from the sump to the spray nozzles. The nozzles shall be sized to evenly distribute the flow over the surface of the packing at the flow rate and pressure delivered by the pump. The recirculation pumps for the first and second stage scrubbers shall be 120 gpm @ 60 ft TDH. All pumps shall be driven by an 1800 RPM, 5.0 HP, 460 volt, 60 cycle, 3 phase, TEFC Corro -Duty motor with a 1.15 service factor and space heater. The pumps shall be non - overloading anywhere along their curve independent of service factor. Refer to Section 16050 for additional relevant requirements. The pumps shall be end suction and satisfy ANSI B73.1 or ANSI B73.3 and have 316 SS casing and impeller. The pumps shall be the same and either have a John Crane mechanical seal or be of sealless magnetic drive design, as follows. A. Mechanical Seal Design - The seal shall be equipped for an external potable water flush. A seal water 120 V NC solenoid valve and 316 SS manual isolation SS ball valve shall be provided and will open upon pump start. The seal water system shall also include a 316 SS pressure regulator, flow indicators and % -inch 316 SS needle valve. The pump shaft and shaft sleeve shall be 316 SS. The pump shall be oil lubricated, with a cast iron bearing frame and have a visible reservoir and site glass. The pumps shall be frame mounted and have an all metal gear type coupling with aluminum coupling guard. The casing shall have ANSI 150 pound flat faced flanges and include a casing drain with 316 SS plug. The base shall be 316 SS. Notwithstanding specific materials set forth herein, all pump materials in contact with the pumped fluid shall be suitable for contact with a highly chlorinated, high pH (10 -12) scrubbing 11235 -8 WF109000 solution. The pumps shall be 2x3x8 Model HT 3196 manufactured by Goulds or 2x3x8 MTP 8196 manufactured by Peerless. B. Sealless Magnetically Coupled — The pumps shall be magnetically coupled using Neodymium rare earth magnets. The suction and discharge connection shall be 3 -inch and 1- 1 /2 -inch ANSI 150 pound flat faced flanges. The pump flanges shall be integrally cast into the pump casing. The pump materials shall be as follows: casing — 316 SS, impeller— 316 SS, rear casing — Hastalloy C, bushings /bearings — silicon carbide, thrust rings and shaft sleeve — silicon carbide, gaskets — PTFE. The pumps shall be ANSI dimensional and include a 316 SS base. Notwithstanding specific materials set forth herein, all materials in contact with the pumped fluid shall be suitable for contact with a highly chlorinated, high pH (10 -12) scrubbing solution. The pumps shall be frame mounted with an all metal, gear type coupling and aluminum coupling guard. The assembly shall include the manufacturer's optional dry run protection watt monitor. All conduit and cable necessary to make this device functional shall be included. The pumps shall be Model MAXP Series, ANSI, Magnetic Drive, Sealless Centrifugal Pump manufactured by Magnatex Pumps, Inc. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: All parts shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration will occur during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed, and the units and equipment are ready for operation. The equipment shall be delivered on -site as fully assembled as transportation will allow. Finished surfaces of all exposed openings shall be protected. 3.02 INSTALLATION: All vessels shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers technical data and printed instructions, and in the locations shown on the drawings. Install all equipment on 1 -inch non -shrink grout. 3.03 QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURE: The vessel manufacturer shall have quality control procedures adequate to ensure that all vessel fabrications comply with these specifications and ensure that all laminates are at least the equal of the reference samples in laminate quality. Quality control shall include a final inspection by the manufacturer and written record of this final inspection by the manufacturer. Written record of this final inspection shall be submitted to the Engineer for acceptance prior to shipment. The objective of manufacturer's quality control and inspection procedure shall be to ensure that all vessels comply with the specifications after fabrication is complete and prior to shipment of the vessels to the job site to minimize the amount of re -work by the manufacturer at the site. A. MANUFACTURER'S INSPECTION: 1. All vessels shall be tested at the place of manufacture, and the manufacturer shall provide the following information: a. Hardness readings. b. Thickness measurements. c. Measurements showing compliance with dimensions and tolerances in diameters, lengths, squareness of ends, angles of fittings and flanges, and 11235 -9 W F109000 flatness of flanges. d. For vessel laminate quality; presence of pits, foreign inclusions, dry spots, air bubbles, pinhole pimples, and delamination. 2. All vessels shall be factory hydrostatically tested for leaks by filling with water after fabrication is complete. Vessels shall be checked for leaks after they have been filled for at least 1 hour. The manufacturer shall run this test prior to the time of shipping for all vessels. 3. A separate inspect record shall be made for each vessel. Inspection records shall be sent to the Engineer for acceptance prior to shipment of vessels. 4. The vessels may be inspected at a place of manufacture by a representative of the Engineer. Final acceptance will be contingent upon satisfactory further inspection upon arrival t the job site. 5. If the factory inspection and tests show that any of the vessels do not meet the specifications, corrective measures shall be taken or the defective vessel shall be replaced with a new vessel which satisfies the conditions specified prior to shipment to the job site, at the Engineer's discretion. 3.04 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PAINTING: All PVC overlayed with FRP vessels will be coated with a polyester gel coat on all exterior surfaces at the factory. Other equipment to be supplied under this Section requiring surface preparation and shop priming shall be performed as part of the work of this Section. Refer to Section 09800 for coating requirements. 3.05 FIELD TESTING: The Contractor shall satisfy all requirements set forth in Section 01650 for start up. In addition, the following work shall be completed. The new scrubbers shall be tested with 150 ppm of hydrogen sulfide generated by a tank supplied by the manufacturer. The equipment supplier shall furnish utilities, labor, hydrogen sulfide generator, flow meter for air flow measuring and portable hydrogen sulfide analyzer. The test shall be conducted using the Interscan electro /chemical gas sampling system. The test shall be supervised by the equipment supplier and witnessed by representatives of the Engineer and Owner. The system shall demonstrate a minimum of 99% removal of hydrogen sulfide from the influent air stream at design conditions. Upon completion of the testing, a report summarizing the results of testing shall be submitted. This report shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Florida. If the system or any component thereof fails to operate properly and to remove odors at the existing hydrogen sulfide concentration, the necessary changes shall be made or components shall be replaced until the system operates to satisfy the requirements of this specification to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 11235 -10 WF109000 SECTION 11245 CARTRIDGE FILTERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: The Contractor shall furnish and install a complete prefilter unit including appurtenances and filter cartridges for the R.O. process. The assembly shall be as shown on the plans and described herein. The unit shall be identically equal to the existing unit except as set forth below or noted on the plans. 1.02 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA: The cartridge filter assembly shall provide pretreatment of raw water prior to the membrane train for a minimum flow of 1290 gpm per vessel. The vessel shall be constructed to use one piece 30 -inch cartridges. 1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: The filter and cartridges shall be manufactured by Parker Hannifin Corporation, Commercial Filters Division or Aerex. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL: All filter vessels shall be self supporting and fabricated of 316L stainless steel with 316SS welded external attachments including, but not limited to, support legs and davit. Closure shall have 316SS stainless steel swing bolts with Xylan coated hex bolts and aluminum bronze pin nut or 316 SS capscrew swing bolts and aluminum bronze clevis pin. The vessel internals shall consist of 316SS cartridge support posts, 316SS support top seat/spring assemblies, spring assembly, and 316SS bottom seat cups. Alternately, the 316 SS bottom seat cups may be replaced with a 316 SS machined separator plate. The internals shall be designed to accept either single or double open end cartridges. An alignment/cartridge support plate shall be provided for horizontal type filters. The assembly shall provide 0.25- inches distance between filter cartridges. Snap lock type tube guides or Uni -seal tube guides will not be accepted. Coverlift must be mechanical davit with four tapered cover guide pins for cover alignment on horizontal units. Buna -N O -ring seal is required with spare Buna -N O -ring included. The vessel shall be rated for 150 psig working pressure at a minimum temperature of 150 degrees F. The vessel shall have an ASME Code U stamp, with label. Vessel shall have standard ANSI B16.5150 lb. flat face flanged inlet and outlet and be situated according to the drawings. The vessel shall come equipped with two 1/2 -inch NPT couplings for pressure gauge connections (one to the unfiltered and one to the filtered chamber). The vessel shall also have two 3/4 -inch NPT connections for the vents, (one filtered, one unfiltered) equipped with a PVC ball valve and two 2 -inch NPT connections for the drains, (one filtered, one unfiltered) also equipped with a PVC ball valve. The vessel shall have additional flanged connections for the process flow of the size and at the locations shown on the drawings. The vessel shall have a glass bead blast exterior finish or iron free aluminum oxide blast to SSPC -SP5, White Metal. The vessel internals shall be all 316SS and accommodate the specified cartridges and securely seat the cartridges in place. Two 0 -100 psi pressure gauges shall be included with the vessel (one for the filtered and one for the unfiltered water). The gauges shall have 4 -inch dials with all 316SS internals, and a phenolic case. The gauges shall be glycerin filled, have 316SS isolation ball valves, 316SS diaphragm seals and be installed on a 316SS 1/2 -inch pipe nipple. All NPT connections shall be plugged 3,000 pound half couplings. All internal and external surfaces shall be pickled and passivated. 2.02 R.O. PROCESS MICRON FILTER (1 required): The micron (cartridge) filter for the R.O. process shall be of horizontal design. The vessel inlet and outlet flanges shall be 8 -inch. The vessel shall be rated for a total maximum flow of 1290 gpm at a rate per 10 -inch cartridge of 5 gpm. 11245 -1 WF109000 The vessel shall be a Model 6LMP86H- 3-8FKI from Parker Hannifin or Model A11 CF3086H- 3-8-316 from Aerex Industries, Inc. 2.03 CARTRIDGE FILTER ELEMENTS: Elements shall be cartridge type manufactured by Commercial Filters Honeycomb Model HFT1 M30A or Matrix Separations Model EPP1 A30P. A full set shall be installed and a full spare set provided. Filters shall be wound depth cartridges, constructed of napped polypropylene on a polypropylene center core. Sufficient cartridges shall be provided for two complete fills of the vessel. The cartridges shall be rated at 90% removal at 3 micron for the R.O. process. Initial sets of cartridges will be designed as double open end. The filters shall be one piece construction, 304nches long as indicated, continuous pattern, 34nch ID, two 7 /164nch O.D. t 1/164nch O.D. The cartridge must be constructed of 100% polypropylene material, FDA approved for potable water use. Core covers on cartridges are not acceptable. Pressure drop nomographs must be supplied with the bid package. SERVICE CONDITIONS Design Flow/Vessel 1290 gpm Nominal Micron Rating 1 um Pressure Drop Clean <4.0 psi w/ 1 um Flow Rate/104nch Cartridge Length <5 gpm Filter Cartridge Length Winches Filter Cartridge Media Polypropylene FDA Potable Use Cartridge Center Core Polypropylene PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL: The vessel shall be installed true and plumb. The vessel shall be secured to the floor /support with 316SS epoxy anchors and set on 1 -inch of non -shrink grout to match the existing unit. 3.02 PIPING/VALVING: The connecting piping and valving shall be installed as shown on the plans. The drain shall be piped to the adjacent trench. The piping/valving configuration shall be the same as the existing units unless specifically identified otherwise on the plans or in the specifications. 11245 -2 WF109000 N 112 SECTION 0 5 REVERSE OSMOSIS SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK: The Contractor shall furnish and install a complete, functioning reverse osmosis system as shown on the plans and described herein. It is the intent of these documents to describe the minimum facilities to be provided. If additional material and equipment are required to make the system fully functional or to achieve the specified product quality or quantity, the Contractor shall supply and install these items. For purposes of this section, the reverse osmosis system shall be considered to include all materials and equipment located inside the R.O. building which is, in the Engineers opinion, process related. The existing system consists of two trains, each rated at 1.2 MGD and consisting of 40 vessels in a 27 x 13 array per train. Each vessel has the capacity to contain six 40 -inch or four 60 -inch elements. The existing piping, instrument and control systems were designed in anticipation of an additional one train. The general intent of these documents is to specify the provision and installation of one additional train that is to be fully a duplicate of the first train, except as may be specifically identified to the contrary. It is noted that while the control system design contemplated the addition of future trains, it has not been tested for functionality. The Contractor shall anticipate and provide for the need to make functional modifications to the operating software as necessary to incorporate the start-up, shutdown and monitoring of the third train. All piping, fittings and electrical/instrumentation items required to install the new R.O. system and make it operational shall be supplied whether or not they are specifically identified on the drawings. All pressure ratings shall be adequate for a minimum 400 psi system. The Contractor shall confirm field dimensions and elevations of all interconnecting piping and electrical/instrumentation items. The Contractor shall supply written confirmation of these verifications to the Engineer. Any misalignment resulting from failure to obtain accurate field and shop information in this regard shall be sufficient cause for the Contractor to revise the installation plan and submit same for approval to the Engineer and, supply /install the required modifications. The Contractor shall supply and install any and all fittings, adapters, connectors, supports, etc., required to make the system functional at the indicated minimum pressure and flow. All materials of construction and pressure ratings shall be consistent with, and suitable for, the application and fabricated of non - corroding material. All materials in contact with process water shall bear the NSF seal and be acceptable to agencies having jurisdiction. 1.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: Where the plans and specifications require the Contractorto fumish and install an assembly or unit, the Contractor shall furnish all component parts as required by the manufacturer of the assembly or unit. 1.03 MANUFACTURERS REPRESENTATIVES: The manufacturer's representatives for the supplied equipment shall be present during start-up and supply a start-up report per Section 01300 and 01650 The membrane manufacturer shall also be present during various phases of the construction. The membrane manufacturer's representative shall have a minimum of ten years direct experience with municipal membrane systems. The representative shall be in the direct employ of the membrane manufacturer and have responsible field experience with the startup and operation of at least five separate membrane systems, including systems knowledge. The Contractor shall submit the name and resume of the proposed representative to the Engineer for 11250 -1 W F109000 approval. The Engineer shall have the right to require the replacement of the manufacturer's representative at any time during the construction or start up period. The manufacturer shall make all reasonable efforts to utilize the same manufacturer's representative during the entire course of the project, but subject to the Engineer's approval, may substitute a different manufacturer's representative if necessary, as long as he /she satisfies the experience criteria set forth herein. 1.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Forthe base lump sum bid amountthe membranes shall be as manufactured by Koch Membrane Systems, Inc. In the event that an alternate deductive is offered and accepted, the membrane manufacturer shall be Hydanautics, Inc. The pressure vessels shall be as manufactured by CodeLine Pentair Water Treatment, Inc. or Protec. 1.05 DESIGN/WARRANTY BASIS: The design basis for the system is established below. Chemical analysis for the composite raw water source is included. 'I COMPOSITE RAW WATER FEED ANALYSIS ** ITEM CONCENTRATION (mg/I) Total Hardness as CaCO 1138. Total Alkalinity as CaCO 160. Sulfate 360. Chloride 2600. Calcium as Ca 160. Sodium 1250. Magnesium as Mg 180. Barium 0.02 Strontium 8.7 Silica as Si0 13. PH* 7.2 Total Dissolved Solids 5000. Temperature °C 23.4 Hydrogen Sulfide 12.0 Silt Density Index 1.5 * pH shall be adjusted to 6.8 with sulfuric acid. ** Each parameter is subject to a variance of ( +) or ( -)10% except the pH value which may only vary by 3% and SDI which may be as high as 2.5, prior to filtration. REQUIRED PRODUCT QUALITY** ITEM (as ion) CONCENTRATION (mq /I Calcium L.T. 5.0 Magnesium L.T. 5.0 Sodium L.T. 60.0 Sulfate L.T. 5.0 Chloride L.T. 95.0 Silica Dioxide L.T. 1.0 Total Dissolved Solids L.T. 175.0 PH G.T. 5.3 11250 -2 W F109000 ** Based on the following criteria: Design First Stage Feed Pressure *: 256 psi (max.) Total Manifold Loss Allowance: 6 psi Design First Stage Product Backpressure: 35 psi (max.) Design Second Stage Product Pressure: (approx.) 6 psi Design Permeate Flow: 1,200,000 gpd /train = 833 gpm Design System Recovery: 75% Average Flux (Total System)(Maximum): 13.0 gal /ft/day Maximum First Element Flux: 20.0 gal /ft/day * For purposes of this discussion, design first stage feed pressure shall be based on year zero inclusive of the first and second stage product pressure inclusive of first and second stage manifold losses and otherwise represent the required pressure at the entry point to the first stage. The required product quality is computed on the basis of the normal" feed water. The required product quality and characteristics shall be demonstrated prior to substantial completion. Projections shall demonstrate that the product shall continue to meet the specified quality criteria and characteristics for the three (3) year interval immediately following substantial completion and be inclusive of a 5% per year fouling allowance. Variation in the raw water quality by more than 10% for each parameter (3% for pH) shall not be cause to void the warranty. However, variations greater than the indicated amounts will result in a modification to the required water quality. Any such modifications to the warranty values is subject to the Engineer's approval. To determine satisfaction of the above quality characteristics at stipulated pressured and flows, the product from each train will be sampled. In addition to the overall product water quality criteria specified herein, each pressure vessel shall be tested for Total Dissolved Solids (TDS). The TDS from each vessel in the first stage and the second stage shall not exceed the average TDS for the respective stage by more than 15% of the average. If the product from any vessel exceeds this criteria, the vessel shall be probed and the TDS from each membrane determined. Any membrane TDS that exceeds 60% of the average TDS for the stage shall be replaced. Testing shall continue until the quality criteria, at the established flows and pressures, set forth herein, are satisfied. The membrane manufacturer shall warrant the system to satisfy the indicated quality at the designated operating conditions at the end of 3 years. Failure to satisfactorily meet the required product quality, or quantity, either initially or anytime during the 3 year warranty period, will be adequate cause for the replacement, modification and /or addition of membrane or making pump modifications and associated electrical upgrades at the Contractor's expense and subject to approval of proposed modifications by the Engineer. The provision of additional membranes will include the provision and installation of additional piping, fittings, pressure vessels and related appurtenances. 1.06 OPERATING SOFTWARE: The operating protocol and software for the next reverse osmosis train has been generally developed with the existing plant. However, the Contractor shall anticipate the need to modify reports and copy existing logic and modify as appropriate for Train #3 database and 10. The membrane manufacturer shall review the operating protocol and logic for the existing facility. This review shall include detailed on -site observation of the normal start-up sequence, normal shutdown sequence, alarm conditions, abort conditions, monitoring screens and reports. The review shall also include a detailed review and analysis of the operating protocol. The membrane manufacturer will be required to determine the protocol by physical observation and testing of the operating system under differing conditions. To assist with the latter, the Owner will be available to assist the membrane manufacturer. The membrane manufacturer shall submit a written report which identifies any aspects of the proposed start -up, shutdown or operating procedures 11250 -3 W F109000 (including warnings and shutdowns) which would in anyfashion jeopardize the manufacturer's ability to fully warrant the membranes. Such observations shall include recommended changes which may improve the system operation or are otherwise advisable, even though they may not presently impact warrantability. The review and report shall be submitted to the Engineer for review. Any recommendations made by the membrane manufacturer and agreed to by the Engineer shall be implemented by the Contractor. The Contractor shall note that software modifications and adjustments to reflect varying field conditions, manufacturer's recommendations and the fact that the operating logic has not been tested for this train shall be anticipated. Particular emphasis and work shall be anticipated for modifications to start-up and shutdown sequences and associated operational impact on alarms and total or partial shutdowns. 1.07 PRESSURE TESTING: The entire system shall be pressure tested per Section 02610. The pressure vessels shall be field tested at 400 psi, prior to installation of the membranes. The vessel manufacturer shall supply all necessary plugs, adapters or fittings necessary to conduct this test. PART 2 - PRODUCTS i 2.01 REVERSE OSMOSIS MEMBRANES: The base bid membrane elements shall be Koch Membrane Systems, Inc. Model TFC 8060HR -590 (Magnum). The deductive alternate membrane elements shall be Hydranautics, Inc., Model CPA3 -LD. The membranes shall be designed for installation in a 27 x 13 array to satisfy the design criteria set forth in Section 11250, 1.05. Each membrane shall have not more than 400 sq.ft. (590 sq.ft. For Magnums), and have 31 mil (minimum) brine spacers. A total of 160, 60 -inch or 240, 40 -inch elements shall be supplied and installed. All elements shall be for installation in a nominal 8 -inch diameter pressure vessel and have a double O -ring (each end) interconnector. Membrane material shall be thin film composite. When operated continuously, each train shall be capable of producing 1,200,000 gpd. The Contractor shall provide a computer projection demonstrating compliance with the performance criteria set forth in this specification. All assumptions made for the projection shall also be submitted. Any assumptions regarding the existing system (water quality, pressure, flow, etc.), not deemed reasonable by the Engineer shall be modified. The product and reject flow rates, pressures and other operating criteria shall be presented in the computer projection for each element. The manufacturer's recommended operating criteria for individual elements shall not be violated. The Contractor shall supply additional membranes, valving, piping and connections, etc., above those noted above or shown on the drawings as required, to satisfy the criteria. The manufacturer's warranty shall reflect the fact that at the end of the initial three year period of operation, the second stage shall be operable with a minimum 90% salt rejection when functioning at the design pressure. The feed, interstage and reject headers shall be sized with the appropriate hydraulic capacity as defined by the Engineer. The ultimate system shall be hydraulically capable of the operating at rates between 65% and 80% recovery. If the membrane manufacturer deems the indicated piping /valving sizes to be inadequate, the sizes shall be modified, subject to the Engineers approval. The system shall incorporate and provide for operation of a pre and post flushing arrangement. The new pressure vessels shall be set up for in -place cleaning as set forth on the drawings. 2.02 PRESSURE VESSELS: The membrane pressure vessels shall be nominal 8 -inch diameter and capable of holding six 40 -inch elements. The vessels shall be designed to incorporate side entry ports for the feed and concentrate. The vessels shall be fabricated of FRP with PVC end caps and 316 SS or 316L SS hardware. The vessels shall be complete with end closures, 11250 -4 WF109000 membrane element end adapters, spacers and mounting hardware. The design operating pressure for the vessels and feed and reject piping and valving (up to the control valve) is 450 psi. The pressure vessels shall be manufactured per ASME Code Section X and bear the ASME label. The system shall be capable of withstanding a pressure of 2,000 psi without failure. The pressure vessels shall be supported as shown on the drawings. The vessels shall be secured with the manufacturer's standard cast urethane saddle and stainless steel straps and hardware. The pressure vessels shall be Series 80A manufactured by Advanced Structures, Inc. or Model PRO-8- 450-SP-6W manufactured by Protec. 2.03 VESSEL CONNECTIONS AND PIPING ASSEMBLY: The feed and concentrate ports shall be 1 % inch and grooved for Victaulic connections. The product ports shall be 1 -1 /44nch, NPT female. Product ports not on the discharge end shall be capped with solvent welded PVC caps. All product hoses shall be secured with 316 SS damps. The feed, rejec interstage and header, bends, tubes and connections shall be assembled with Vicaulic couplings to permit easy disassembly. The Victaulic connections shown on the drawings shall be supplied at minimum. All non-Victaulic connections shall be welded unless specifically identified otherwise. 2.04 SAMPLE POINTS: The Contractor shall supply and install 316 SS Swagelok fittings with all 316 SS isolation ball valves to provide representative sampling of the plant and individual membrane performance. Specific sample point connection points are subject to the Engineer's approval. Sample points shall be provided for each of the following: Individual Vessel Product (40) First Stage Concentrate Header (1) Second Stage Concentrate Header (1) First Stage Feed Header (1) Common First Stage Product Header (1) Common Second Stage Product Header (1) Three additional sample points shall be provided, as field designated by the Engineer. All sample lines, except product from individual tubes, shall be isolated at the source with a 316 SS ball valve. All sample or instrumentation connections to stainless steel piping will be accomplished using a 316 SS half coupling. Piping connections to all piping shall be accomplished in a manner which does not reduce the rated system pressure. 2.05 PRESSURE GAUGES: Pressure gauges shall be installed on each train at the locations designated below. Refer to Section 02640 for the pressure gauge specification requirements. Location Range Cartridge Filters (as specified in Sec. 11245) (2 required) 1. Feed ahead of HPP 0-160 psi 2. Feed after HPP, before Control Valve 0 -400 psi 3. Feed between Control Valve and membranes 0 -400 psi 4. Interstage 0-400 psi 5. Concentrate before reject control valve 0-400 psi 11250 -5 WF109000 I I 6. Concentrate after reject control valve 0 -160 psi 7. Product- before backpressure valve 0 -160 psi 8. Product- after backpressure valve 0- 30 psi All gauges shall be installed on the various headers in locations approved by the Engineer, and be generally identical to the locations of similar gauge on the existing train. 2.06 CLEANING SYSTEM: The existing R.O. system includes a complete in -place counter and co- current (both required) cleaning system as shown on the plans. The cleaning system piping shall be modified as required to accommodate the new train and be fully functional including all pipe and fittings necessary for complete system cleaning, including all uninstalled spools and fittings. The Contractor shall demonstrate the fit suitability of the cleaning spools to the Engineer prior to substantial completion. The cleaning system is designed to clean a minimum of 10 pressure vessels and a maximum of 16 pressure vessels at one time. The training provided by the membrane manufacturer shall include the cleaning operation. I 2.07 MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY: In addition to the Contractor's Warranty set forth in the Contract, the Contractor shall provide the Owner a three -year warranty from the membrane manufacturer. The manufacturers warranty shall include the following elements. A. Establishment of an initial minimum permeate flow and minimum salt rejection. The minimum criteria shall be as set forth in published technical bulletins by the manufacturer. B. Guarantee that at the end of the three -year period the minimum permeate flow shall be 70% of the initial flow and that the salt passage required to give the minimum flow will not exceed 135% of the specified maximum value. For purposes of measuring these value the pressure shall be maintained at the level required to give the initial rated flow. C. The warranty shall establish a linear three -year proration for replacement cost based on the membrane cost at the time of replacement. D. The warranty covering the product quality shall establish feedwater quality, temperature and pressure criteria upon which the warranty is conditional. These criteria are set forth in Section 11250, 1.05 and shall be included in the manufacturers warranty on product quality. The required third year product quality is as set forth in Section 11250, 1.05. I E. The term of the warranty shall commence on the project substantial completion date. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: The Contractor shall install all equipment in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations and the approved shop drawings, and all work shall be performed by experienced personnel in accordance with recommended practices. The new train's vessels shall be installed as shown on the plans. Stabilizing rods and hardware shall be 316 SS. The stack shall be rigid and stable. External aluminum bracing shall be provided and installed as required to satisfy this requirement. The installation shall fully comply with the membrane manufacturers recommendations. The Victaulic connections shown on the drawings are considerations to be minimum. The Contractor shall supply and install additional Victaulics as required for installation and operation, including allowance for thermal pipe expansion. i 11250 -6 WF109000 The Contractor is advised that fabricated aluminum or FRP supports shall be provided and installed as required to properly and rigidly support all new piping and equipment associated with the R.O. facility inside the building. This shall include piping and equipment associated with the raw water, feed water, concentration, product and cleaning system. In general, the system installation shall match the existing system. In cases where the design differs from the existing, and in the Engineer's opinion is less stringent, the design shall control. The design of the reverse osmosis equipment contemplated field erection of the primary components. The support system is not designed for shop erection and transportation of a completed train to the site. 3.02 TESTS: The Contractor shall provide all piping/valving and other devices necessary to pressure test the system at 400 psi. The pressure test duration shall be two (2) hours. All visible leaks shall be eliminated and the test repeated until no visible leaks are present The pressure test shall be conducted prior to the installation of the membranes. The Contractor shall erect suitable safety barricades to protect the existing structure facilities and personnel during the pressure test At the completion of installation and pressure testing, all new systems shall be cleaned, checked and tested. The unit shall then be started up and normal adjustments for operation made. The Contractor shall provide ten days written notice to the Engineer that the plant is ready to undergo the performance test. The unit shall be operated at full capacity for minimum continuous period of 24 hours. During this period, readings shall be taken each 1/2 hour to determine if all the performance criteria can be met. In addition, at the beginning, after 12 hours and at the end of the 24 hour test, the membrane manufacturer shall secure a conductivity reading from every element and submit to the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide the necessary fittings, etc. to perform this work. Any element which, in the Engineer's opinion, is not performing in a manner consistent with projections or adjacent elements shall be replaced regardless if whether the overall product quality requirement is satisfied. In the event any of the guarantees cannot be met, the Contractor shall be responsible for making any changes required in order to meet the guarantees. Following the completion of any required changes, the test shall be repeated. The Contractor shall be responsible for the disposing of permeate produced during the startup and testing periods. The disposal method shall include ail required piping and valving to simulate normal production operation to the degasifier. The Contractor may assume the permeate may be directed to the on -site storm drainage system at the plant. In the event the drainage system becomes full during the test, the Contractor shall provide a temporary pump and piping to deliver the water toward the back of the property for infiltration. The Contractor shall disinfect, then flush, the entire RO train, including the cartridge filter, high pressure pumps and piping with a chlorine solution and secure two consecutive days of satisfactory bacteriological samples that satisfy the Engineer and the Health Department requirements. 3.03 PAINTING AND FINISHING: Except as provided for in Section 09800 all surfaces shall be factory finished and/or coated in a manner consistent with the existing facilities. The Contractor is specifically cautioned to carefully review Section 09800. Such finishes and /or coatings shall be clearly ndicated and specified on the shop drawings shall wire the En ineer's approval. I. riY P p 9 require 9 P epoxy Alkyd coating systems will not be acceptable and epoxy, vinyl and p xy ester coating systems will generally be acceptable depending upon the application. On completion of the installation, all surfaces shall be touched up where necessary with a coating similar to that applied at the factory. All 316 stainless steel shall be passivated and electropolished. 11250 -7 WF109000 3.04 INSTALLATION SUPERVISION: The membrane manufacturer's representative shall supervise certain aspects of the construction. The Contractor shall complete the installation in full accordance with the membrane manufacturer's recommendations, subject to the Engineer's approval. The membrane manufacturer's representative shall be on -site as necessary to ensure proper "system" installation and operation. At a minimum, the representative shall be present as follows: e A. Three (3) separate 8 -hour site visits prior to membrane loading to inspect the complete pressure vessel and piping installation. B. During the entire membrane loading process. (The serial numbers and location of each membrane shall be recorded and submitted to the Engineer.) C. For a period of not less than twenty-one (21) working days during the start up preparation and initial start up period. This time may occur in multiple trips, depending upon the progress of construction and the desire of the Engineer. Periods when the system will not function due to installation problems, mechanical problems or system control problems (instrumentation or electrical) shall not be counted toward fulfilling this requirement. None of the above time shall be concurrent with formal training requirements specified elsewhere herein; but the representative shall explain and discuss operational issues with the operational staff during this period. I 11250 -8 WF109000 SECTION 11301 CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE: The covered under this section include furnishing and installing all equipment and connections required for an additional sodium hypochlorite feed pump. The system design is based on the use of 12% sodium hypochlorite diluted to 6% and shall include suitable valving and all associated appurtenances and equipment to yield a fully functional system. This project also includes the addition of a sulfuric acid feed point to the product water, extension of sodium hydroxide feed system and sodium hypochlorite feed system to the new scrubber system. Re- assignment of existing sulfuric acid and sodium hydroxide feed pumps to new feed points and reconfiguration of the associated instrumentation and controls shall be provided by the Contractor. 1.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Acceptable manufacturers for various system components are identified herein. Use of alternate manufacturers is not acceptable unless approved under the provisions set forth elsewhere in this specification. 1.03 ASSEMBLIES OR UNITS: Where the plans and specifications require the Contractor to furnish and install an assembly or unit, the Contractor shall furnish and install all component parts as required by the manufacturer of the assembly or unit. 1.04 SAFETY. All belts, drives, wheels, gears, couplings and other hazardous moving parts shall be protected with suitable safety guards complying with the rules and regulations of the Florida Department of Commerce and OSHA. Outlet ports from all pressure relief valves or vents shall be conveyed to ground level and the discharge directed away from operator stations or traffic, or, returned to tanks as indicated. 1.05 MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION: Specific construction materials for various system components are set forth in the specification and/or on the drawings. Any items in contact or potential contact with sodium hypochlorite shall be fabricated from the following materials and be approved for potable water applications by applicable regulatory agencies. Sodium Hypochlorite (15 %) - FRP, CPVC, Teflon, PVC, PVDF, Alloy 20, Monel, Hastalloy C Sodium Hydroxide (50 %) - PVDF, Teflon, PVC, CPVC, EDPM, 316 SS, Hypalon, Kynar Sulfuric Acid (93 %) - PVDF, Kynar, Teflon, Viton 1.06 MISCELLANEOUS FITTINGS: The Contractor shall be responsible for providing and installing miscellaneous fittings, unions and adapters necessary to connect the various system components and make the entire system functional. 1.07 SCHEDULING: The Contractor is specifically advised that the existing gas chlorination system at each plant must remain fully functional until the new system is made operational. Temporary piping, valving and equipment shall be supplied and installed as required to maintain the ability to chlorinate at both plants. 1.08 CHEMICALS) TESTING /DRYING: The new pump system shall be fully tested with water prior to the introduction of hypochlorite. The Contractor shall be responsible for pressure testing the entire 11301 -1 WF109000 system with water at 150 psi or other lower oressure that represents the maximum pressure rating of other system components. 1.09 LABELING: The sodium hypochlorite pump shall be labeled to describe the respective compound and location (i.e., "Sodium Hypochlorite - Clearwell "). Labels shall be black lamcoid nameplates with white numerals and attached to the feed equipment with PVC hardware PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE FEED PUMP (1 required): All wetted parts shall, in the Engineer's ' opinion, be fully compatible with the compounds specified at temperatures up to 120 degrees F. Each pump shall be equipped with an isolated PVC, 500 ml calibration chamber, permanently installed with PVC or FRP hardware. All chemicals injected into mains shall be through a main connection with integral poppet check valve and isolation valve, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Each pump shall be equipped with all manufacturer available options or features associated with feeding sodium hypochlorite including, but not limited to, auto degassing assemblies. I The materials specified in this section are considered to be the minimum acceptable in relation to their ability to resist corrosive attack by the pumped fluid. Any change in the specified materials is subject to the Engineer's approval. The specified materials are not necessarily available as the manufacturer's standard or normally available options. The chemical feed pumps shall be manufactured by Wallace and Tiernan. The Contractor shall supply the following. A. Sodium Hypochlorite Feed Pump (1 required): The pumps shall be positive displacement type with manually adjustable stroke length over 0 -100% on the highest of four available pulleys. Four of the pumps (all except the pump feeding the scrubber) shall have a maximum capacity of 540 gal/day when operating at 100% stroke length and a speed of 72 strokes/minute. The fifth pump shall have a maximum capacity of 288 gal/day when operating at 100% stroke length and a speed of 72 strokes/minute. The stroke length shall be adjustable with the pumps operating. The pump head, check valve body and seat shall be fabricated from PVC. The check valve balls shall be TFE. The diaphragm shall be TFE faced. The pump shall be driven by a maximum % HP, 460 volt, 3 phase, 1725 rpm, TEFC, inverter duty motor. The pumps shall be Model Encore 700 manufactured by Wallace and Tiernan Division, Pennwalt Corporation. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL: All pumps and other equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, subject to the Engineer's approval. Install all equipment indicated to be on a slab on 1 -inch of non -shrink grout. 3.02 VIBRATION & ALIGNMENT: Properly align and adjust all equipment to eliminate vibration. 3.03 TESTING: The Owner will supply the feed chemicals after the system has been pressure tested and performance tested with water. Confirmatory testing with chemical shall occur subsequently. No visible leakage will be accepted. The Contractor shall provide at least 14 days advance written notice that the system is ready for receipt of chemicals. The system shall be tested with sodium hypochlorite prior to application for substantial completion. 11301 -2 WF109000 SECTION 13080 VIBRATION AND ALIGNMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: It is the intent of this section to set forth the testing required to be performed to ensure that alignment and vibration is within the specified tolerances. The testing shall be performed and corrective action taken for all pump /motor installations which equal or exceed 20 horsepower. The Contractor will be fully responsible for all costs associated with the testing, corrective action and re- testing whether or not the initial tests prove the installation was within specified tolerances. If the testing indicates that the equipment does not meet specified tolerances, corrective action shall be taken and the equipment re- tested until acceptable results are obtained. 1.02 TOLERANCES: A. The vibration due to unbalance shall not exceed Hydraulic Institute NEMA standards and in no case be greater than a maximum velocity of 0.4 in /sec. B. The vibration shall not be destructive to the equipment in any way. Velocity due to any factor other than unbalance shall not exceed 0.08 inch/second velocity. 1.03 TESTING FIRM REQUIREMENTS: One firm shall perform the vibration test, alignment, and corrective action. Multiple firms to perform this work will not be acceptable. The qualifications of the company to perform the testing shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. Qualifications shall include the following. A. Names, experience, and individual qualifications. B. List of previous customers, (last two years), including telephone numbers. C. References for similar work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 VIBRATION AND ALIGNMENT: Vibration analysis shall be performed on all installed pumps and motors (20 horsepower or larger only). The report of the analysis will include the following: A. Vibration Profiles (vibration profile shall be generated by a recorder. Hand held recorders used to hand generate charts or graphs are not acceptable). B. Machine generated vibration tolerance nomograms and severity charges shall provide a h for velocity and displacement shall be visual hard record copy of all frequencies. Charges ty p submitted. C. Instructions for reading the report data. D. List problem areas, etc., due to heat, vibration, and alignment. 13080 -1 WF109000 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 VIBRATION AND ALIGNMENT REPORTS: Vibration reports will be submitted before substantial completion or pump /motor service start up which ever occur first. All vibration profiles are to be submitted irrespective of results. Vibration profiles will be repeated until the pump /motor conform to Part I requirements. 3.02 VIBRATION TEST: The Engineer shall witness all vibration tests. The Contractor shall give the Engineer seven days written notice prior to a vibration test. Vibration reports shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300, Submittals. 3.03 CORRECTION OF VIBRATIONS PROBLEMS INDICATED BY VIBRATION REPORT: All on site corrective action in the form of balancing, alignment shall be performed by the personnel performing the vibration testing. I I I I 13080 -2 W F109000 SECTION 15100 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT - GENERAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: The work to be performed under this section consists of furnishing all materials and equipment and performing all necessary services for a complete, operable installation of all mechanical and control equipment delineated in the applicable subsections following in strict accordance with the Contract Documents. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 All anchor bolts, anchor bolt templates, and location drawings required for installation of the equipment, support columns, and for other equipment or machinery shall be furnished by the Contractor. Anchor bolts and sleeves shall be set in place in forms and cast in concrete. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain such anchor bolts, templates and approved location drawings in proper time to avoid delay, and it shall be his further responsibility to check and approve the setting of anchor bolts and sleeves prior to the casting of the concrete. Parts of anchors of metal work that are not built into masonry and concrete shall be coated with an approved coating (see Section 09800). Except where other bolting is required for standard shear or column moment connections (as agreed to by the Engineer), anchor bolts for column base plates or other parts of structural elements shall be of 316 stainless steel. Anchor bolts for drives, control cabinets, electric cabinets, motors, fans, blowers, pumps and other mechanical equipment shall be of 316 stainless steel. Refer to Section 02610 for additional information regarding flange bolts. Anchor bolts shall be of ample sized, based solely on the Engineer's opinion, and shall be provided with washers and hexagonal nuts of the same quality as the metal of the bolts. All threads shall be clean cut and of United States Standard sizes. The method of placing anchors into existing structures shall be approved by the Engineer. 2.02 Unless otherwise specified, stud, tap and machine bolts shall be of the best quality refined bar iron. Washers and hexagonal nuts of the same quality of metal as the bolts shall be used. All threads shall be clean cut and shall conform to ANSI Standard B1.1 -1949 for Unified and American Screw Threads for Screws, Bolts, Nuts and other threaded parts. 2.03 Bolts, anchor bolts, nuts and washers not specified to be stainless steel shall be zinc coated, after being threaded, by the hot - dipped process in conformitywith the ASTM Standard Specifications for Zinc (Hot Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strip, Designation Al23 -73, or the ASTM Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware, Designation A153 -73, as is appropriate. 2.04 Anchor bolts and expansion bolts shall be set accurately. If anchor bolts are set before the concrete has been placed, they shall be carefully held in suitable templates of approved design. Where indicated on the drawings, specified or required, anchor bolts shall be provided with spare plates at least 4 inches by 4 inches by 3/8 inches or shall have square heads and washers. If anchor bolts or expansion bolts are set after the concrete has been placed, all necessary drilling, caulking or grouting shall be done at the Contractor's expense, and care shall be taken not to damage the structure or finish by cracking, chipping, spalling, or otherwise during the drilling or caulking. WF109000 15100 -1 2.05 SAFETY GUARDS: All belts, drives, wheels, gears, couplings and other moving parts shall be protected with suitable safety guards which will comply with rules and regulations of the Florida Department of Commerce and OSHA. 2.06 STAINLESS STEEL: All nuts, bolts and washers specified to be 316 SS or 316L SS shall be so stamped for ready field verification. Materials not stamped accordingly will be automatically rejected. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CUTTING AND PATCHING: The Contractor shall leave all chases or openings for the installation of his own or any other Contractor's or subcontractor's work, or shall cut the same in existing work, and shall see that all sleeves or forms are at the worts and are set in ample time to prevent delays. The Contractor shall see that all chases, openings and sleeves are located accurately and are of the proper size and shape and shall consult with Engineers and the Contractors or subcontractors concerned in reference to this work. In case of failure to leave or cut all such openings or have all such sleeves provided and set in proper time, the Contractor shall cut them or set them afterward at his own expense, but in doing so he shall confine the cutting to the smallest extent possible consistent with the work to be done. In no case shall piers or structural members be cut without the written approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall carefully fit around, close up, repair, patch and point around the work specified to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer. 3.02 FOUNDATIONS, INSTALLATIONS AND GROUTING: The Contractor shall furnish the necessary materials and construct suitable concrete foundations for all equipment installed at no additional coat to the Owner, even though such foundations may not be indicated on the drawings. The tops of foundations shall be at such elevations as will permit grouting as specified, fully dimensioned, with the shop drawings for such equipment. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer. In setting pumps, motors, and other items of equipment, the Contractor shall make allowance of at least 1 -inch for grout under equipment bases unless otherwise noted. A minimum of 2- inches of grout shall be used for bridge crane beams. Shims used to level and adjust the bases shall be stainless steel. Shims may be left imbedded in the grout, in which case they shall be brass or bronze and installed so as to be as inconspicuous as possible in the completed work. Grout shall be Embeco No. 636 non - shrinking grout, Master Flow 713, applied and cured in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Where practical, the grout shall be placed through the grout holes in the base and worked outward and under the edges of the base and across the rough top of the concrete foundation to a peripheral form so constructed as to provide a suitable chamber around the top edge of the finished foundations. Where such procedure is impractical, the method of placing of grout shall be as approved by the Engineer. After the grout has hardened sufficiently, all forms, hoppers, and excess grout shall be removed and all exposed grout surfaces shall be patched in an approved manner, if necessary, and given a burlap rubbed finish. 3.03 STANDARDIZATION OF GREASE FITTINGS: The Contractor shall ensure that all grease fittings on all pieces of equipment furnished under this Contract are standardized so that only the zerk type fittings are used. Fittings shall be of standard or giant size according to the type of service to be performed. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, all fittings shall be the product of one WF109000 15100 -2 manufacturer. Fittings which are not readily accessible shall be piped to an accessible location. 3.04 NAMEPLATES: Each piece of equipment shall be provided with a substantial nameplate of non - corrodible metal, securely fastened in place and clearly and permanently inscribed with the manufacturer's name, model or type designation, serial number, principle rated capacities, electrical or other power characteristics, and similar information, as appropriate. 3.05 LUBRICANTS: Lubricants shall be provided as per Section 01300. 3.06 TOOLS: Tools shall be provided as per Section 01300. 3.07 INFORMATION TO BE OBTAINED FROM THE MANUFACTURER: The Contractor shall obtain all items named in these specifications or so noted on the plans from the equipment manufacturer and such incidental items as may be required for the safe and proper operation of the equipment for its intended purpose(s). Shop drawings will not be approved until all materials are listed along with the names and catalog numbers of any unit being fumished by separate manufacturers. Equipment offered contrary to the provisions of this paragraph will be rejected. 3.08 TESTING: All testing and retesting, if required, of equipment specified under this Contract including any, and all, superintendence, labor, power, fuel, water, special devices and /or testing equipment required shall be performed by the Contractor at no additional expense to the Owner. Unless specified elsewhere to the contrary, all liquid containing, or possible liquid containing facilities, shall be tested to the maximum realistic hydraulic head which could be realized under normal, or emergency, conditions, as determined by the Engineer. 3.09 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS: The Contractor shall provide all fittings, connectors, adapters, sleeves or other related items to facilitate the connection of shown piping to specified equipment. Materials of construction shall be compatible with the fluids being conveyed and the same as the piping unless otherwise noted, or required. 3.10 WELDING: Unless otherwise noted, all equipment which is assembled by the use of welding shall have continuous full fillet welds. This provision shall apply to both shop fabricated and field fabricated items. Where plates or other members are lapped, full fillet welds shall be provided on the inside and outside faces to seal the overlap areas. Where the item thickness, configuration or overall design may induce a risk of "oil canning" by use of continuous welds, the manufacturer shall provide additional stiffeners or other methods to prevent such deformation. All welding shall be performed by an AWS certified welder with an active certification for performance of the required welding. WF109000 15100 -3 SECTION 16000 ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: The work covered by this specification shall include furnishing all labor, material, equipment and services to construct and install the complete electrical system as shown on the drawings and as specified. This work shall include, but not be limited to the following: Distribution systems for lighting, power, controls and instrumentation (from 24 volts DC to 480 VAC) including the R. O. Well 4 service entrance rated main breaker, feeder breakers and power and control panel for R. O. Well 4, all additional starter units to go in existing MCC200,1200 amperes feeder breaker in existing MD200 for MCC300, new MCC300, all additional starters, VFD's, feeders, instrumentation panels, power and control panels, junction boxes, feeder breakers, transformers and panelboards. Complete R. O. Well 4 area, equipment lighting systems including all photo cells, fixtures, conduits, cables, switches, lamps, pull boxes and receptacles. Furnish and install all additions and modifications to existing programmable logic controller (PLC) panels, power and control panels, all control devices, VFD panels and existing motor control centers. Furnish and install MCC300. Ground System including all above and below grade cable, rods and connectors for equipment, conduits, ties to existing duct banks, panels, starters, etc. for a completely integrated grounding system. Connect motors and equipment installed under other sections of this specification. Receive, handle, install and connect power and signal conduits and cables to the instrumentation, control and p ower devices which will be furnished under this and other sections of the specification. Required excavation, backfill and concrete for all electrical and instrumentation work including the modifications to existing duct banks, manholes, pull boxes and walkway and roadway modifications required for the modifications to existing duct banks and manholes. Provide all power, grounding, cable and instrumentation testing, including the required documentation, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, Owner and specifications. This testing will include ground resistance verification and D.C. High Potential Testing (Hipot) of all cables from No. 8 AWG. to 1,000 MCM single and multi- conductor. Furnish and install all cables including data highway cables, instrumentation cables, control cables and power cables from DC Data and 24 VDC level to 480 VAC. Furnish, install and connect all motor operated positioning equipment, isolation valves and control valves. 16000 -1 WF109000 I 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: All work under this Division shall be performed under the immediate direction of fully qualified foremen. Unless approved by the Engineer, there shall be no change in supervision during the course of construction. i The Contractor shall employ on the job a full time Electrical Foreman, who has been approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit, in writing and in full detail, the experience record of the person who will be foreman during the complete job. The submission shall indicate jobs of similar scope where the person has been recently employed as foreman on the installation of a project of this type and scope. There shall be on -site during the entire construction period, a master electrician or licensed electrical journeyman. Licensing shall be by the regulatory agency with jurisdiction over the site and no work shall be performed unless the master electrician or journeyman is present. All workmanship shall be of the highest quality, and the right to require immediate removal from the project of any personnel for cause, is reserved to the Engineer. 1.03 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS: The installation of the electrical work shall comply with the latest issue of the following codes and standards: All applicable local, state, and federal codes National Electrical Code (NEC) National Electrical Safety Code (ANSI C -2) American National Standards Institute (ANSI) National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) All applicable National Fire Codes (NFPA) National Board of Fire Underwriters (NBFU) Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers(IEEE) Life Safety Code (NFPA 10 1) Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 1.04 COORDINATION: The Contractor shall review the plans and specifications of all trades in order to thoroughly acquaint himself with the scope of his work, and shall arrange to locate equipment, conduit, outlets and switches; in the proper relationship to their work. In case of interference, or conflict, the final decision regarding which discipline shall adjust, will be made by the Engineer. 1.05 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT: A. All material, devices and panels shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., or a similar approved agency, and be in strict accordance with the requirements of the NEC and all local codes and ordinances having jurisdiction. All panels shall be UL listed and labeled as a completed assembly. The panel fabricator will furnish and install all items not specifically detailed in the drawings required to have the panels UL listed and labeled. All inspections, approvals and modifications required to have the completed panel labeled and listed by UL will be furnished by, and the responsibility of the panel fabricator and Contractor. B. The same type of material shall be the product of one manufacturer. C. UL listed material shall bear UL label. All panels shall be UL listed. 16000 -2 WF109000 1.06 RECEIVING AND STORAGE: A. The Contractor shall receive, unload, store and be responsible for all electrical equipment and materials received at the job site. B. All items shall be suitably protected from the weather and from physical damage. 1.07 SHOP DRAWINGS: A. Refer to General Conditions and Division 1. Submittals shall be made for each of the following items: 480 VAC equipment including service entrance rated power and control panels, VFD's, MCC300 complete, feeder breakers, and starters complete with control power transformers, relays, pilot lights, selector switches, push buttons and terminal blocks. All disconnects, fused and non - fused, indoor and outdoor. Individual push- buttons and selector switches, including the enclosures, that are not installed in common or master control panels. Individual starters for single and three -phase applications, 120 to 480 VAC, indoor and outdoor, including the enclosure and all control components. All junction boxes and pull boxes, indoor and outdoor, painted steel indoor and 316 SS and fiberglass outdoor. All conduits and fittings including rigid galvanized steel, aluminum, PVC, 40 mil PVC coated rigid galvanized steel, and flexible, PVC coated watertight steel conduit or sealtite. All wire from shielded data and instrumentation cable to 2KV VFD power cables. Submittals will include details of insulation material, shielding material, color coding, gauge and stranding. Submit a copy of the form to be used for Hipot testing of the 480 volt cables and 2KV VFD cables. Light fixtures and lamps. Plugs, receptacles and switches with voltage and current ratings, dimensions and terminal and plug configurations. Transformers including lighting, isolation and power. The submittals will have details of dimensions, connection diagrams, insulation system, temperature ratings and VA or KVA ratings. Breaker panels, single and three phase, 120, 240 and 480 volt, with details of dimensions, bus material, breaker ratings and bus ratings including short circuit and bus bracing amperages and voltages. Power and control panels including all power and control components, enclosure material of construction, terminal blocks, marking system, dimensioned layouts, wiring diagrams, schematic diagrams, nameplate schedules and complete bill of materials with individual sheets for each item from each component manufacturer. 16000 -3 WF109000 All variable frequency drives (VFD's) added to existing power and control panels for the chemical feed pumps. B. Submittals shall be supported by descriptive materials, i.e., catalog sheets, product data sheets, diagrams, performance curves, photometric data and charts published by the manufacturer, to show conformance to specifications and design requirements. The Engineer reserves the right to require samples of any equipment to be submitted for approval. 1.08 CUTTING AND PATCHING: The Contractor shall install his work in a manner and at such times as will require a minimum of cutting and patching. The Contractor shall do all cutting and patching necessary in connection with his work. 1.09 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL: The Contractor shall perform all excavation to install conduits and duct banks indicated on the drawings or specified unless otherwise indicated or specified to be performed by others. The trenches shall be backfilled with materials approved for backfilling, free from large clods of earth and stones, deposited in 6 -in. layers and compacted at least equal to that of the surrounding undisturbed material. Settling the backfill with water will not be permitted. Backfill shall be brought to a suitable elevation above grade to provide for settlement and shrinkage. Where installation passes through existing roadways or parking lots, any road base (shell, rock, etc.) encountered shall be replaced in kind and compacted to 98 %, AASHTO -T99. 1.10 CLEANING AND PAINTING: A. Oil, dirt, grease and foreign materials shall be removed from all raceways, fittings, boxes, panelboard trims and cabinets, to provide a clean surface for painting. Scratched or marred surfaces of lighting fixtures, panelboards, switchboards, motor control centers, or other equipment enclosures shall be touched up with paint furnished by the equipment manufacturer specifically for that purpose. B. Unless indicated on the drawings or specified, all painting shall be done per the requirements of Section 09800. 1.11 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION: Engraved nameplates shall be provided for individual items in all motor control centers, control panels, individual starters, junction boxes, terminal boxes and panelboards. Identifying nameplate information shall be according to the name designations on the electrical/instrumentation drawings and subject to the Engineer's approval. The voltage in every device shall be indicated on the nameplate. Nameplate shall be black lamcoid with white core for lettering. Letters shall be 3/16" minimum. All cable and wire shall be identified with an approved plastic marker. Mark all exposed junction boxes with circuit numbers. All panelboards shall be provided with typewritten circuit directory mounted under clear plastic frame on interior or panel door. 1.12 TEST, INSPECTION AND GUARANTEE: A. Refer to General Conditions and Division 1. All testing, both acceptance and operations, shall be performed by the Contractor in accordance with this specification, the applicable standards of NEMA, ASA, IEEE and IPCEA, and the recommendation of the manufacturer of the item being tested. B. Before an application for final acceptance of the work will be considered, all tests deemed necessary by the Engineer to show proper execution of the work shall have been 16000 -4 WF109000 performed and completed in the presence of an Engineer's representative. Scheduling of all testing procedures shall be arranged to suit the convenience of the Engineer. The tests shall include the following, at a minimum: 1. Insulation resistance testing of electrical motors shall be made when the motors are received, when they are installed and at the time of start up. The insulation resistance or megger testing of the motors will need the following criteria: a. All 460 volt motors shall pass a minimum meggar reading correct to 20 degrees C. Any motors not passing this test shall be dried and retested until they either pass or are found to be unsatisfactory. Meggar tests shall be taken with motor winding temperatures at ambient temperature. b. During installation, all motors shall be inspected for cleanliness, damages, moisture, alignment, proper lubrication, oil leaks, and phase identification. Means shall be taken to check for proper rotation. c. It shall be the Contractors responsibility to see that all motors have satisfactory meggar reading records before connecting them to their respective feeder cables. The minimum megohm readings shall be as required by the manufacturer, but, in no case shall it exceed the criteria established below. Megger Minimum Equipment Voltage Megohms 460 volt motors 1 KV 15 115 volt motors 500V 5 2. Hipot testing of all No. 8 AWG and larger 480 volt cables after installation and before final connections to any equipment. The test shall be performed in accordance with ICEA S -61 -402, NEMA, WC5, Section 6.11, 1.1 to 1.5 at 70% of the Table 3 -5, d -c test voltage, KV for 0 -600 volts Phase -to- Phase, 100 and 133 percent insulation level cables. The resulting voltages which will be used for the testing of the 600 volt type THHN/THWN cables are as follows: No. 8 to No. 2 AWG 4.2 KV DC No. 1 to No. 4/0 AWG 5.25 KV DC 250 - 500 MCM 6.3 KV DC 550 - 1000 MCM 7.35 KV DC The test voltages shall be applied in the following manner. The initial DC test voltage should not be over 1.8 KV (3 x 600 volts). The increase to the full test voltage shall be uniform and not in less than a 10 seconds time period and not over a 60 seconds time period. The test voltage shall be held for 5 minutes. A report shall be submitted to the Engineer that includes all details of the test, including complete cable description, test equipment, time, temperature, and weather conditions, test voltages, time duration of test and microamps at each test voltage level. The microamps and test voltage will be recorded at 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 45 seconds, 1 minute, 2 minutes, 3 minutes, 4 minutes and 5 minutes. Each conductor will be tested to ground and to each conductor in the same conduit or multiple- conductor cable. For example, individual five (5) minute test would be made and recorded for phase B to ground, phase C to ground, phase A to B, phase B to C and phase A to C. 16000 -5 WF109000 A single ground test maybe made with all phases tied together and tested to ground. If this test shows acceptable results, the individual ground test may be eliminated. The three (3) individual phase to phase tests must be made for all cables in addition to the single or individual ground tests. C. The electrical work shall include the provision of any assistance (such as removal of panelboard trims and junction and pull box covers) deemed necessary by the Engineer to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of the drawings and specifications. D. The Contractor shall provide all test instruments required, and test all wiring connections for continuity, grounds and short circuits before any equipment or fixtures are energized. Prior to energization of switchboard, megger check all phase -to -phase and phase to ground insulation resistance levels and record readings. E. The Contractor shall test all motors for proper rotation and change the wiring if required. F. All three phase receptacles shall be tested if they are properly phased the same in order to provide proper phase rotation of motors. Test grounding in accordance with the execution section of this specification. Any defects or deficiencies discovered in any of the electrical work shall be corrected. 1.13 TEMPORARY FACILITIES: Refer to Division 1 for General Requirements on temporary facilities. 1.14 PERMITS AND FEES: The Contractor shall procure all required permits and arrange for inspections and pay such fees as are thereby incurred. Any fees due the Village of Tequesta shall be waived. 1.15 PROTECTIVE MATTING: Fire resistant rubber matting, 36- inches wide, shall be installed on the floor in front of all electrical devices in the MCC Room. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DISTRIBUTION AND POWER PANELS: A. Panelboard assembly shall be enclosed in a code gauge steel cabinet with flush or surface trim as indicated, and ample wiring gutters on top, sides and bottom. Hinged doors covering all switching device handles shall be included in all panel trims, except that panelboards having individual metal clad externally operable deadfront units may be supplied without such doors. B. Interior doors shall have non - locking catch. Doors over 48 in. in height shall have a vault handle and 3 -point catch arranged to fasten door at top, bottom and center. C. Provide typewritten circuit directory inside of door under clear plastic frame. D. Panel bus structure shall be for voltage, phase, AIC rating specified at the operating voltage, capacity and number and size of branch circuits indicated. Bus bars shall be copper silver plated sized in accordance with UL Standards. Unless otherwise noted, full size neutral bar shall be included. Panelboard shall contain a copper silver plated ' equipment ground bus, brazed or riveted to the enclosure. The AIC rating of all distribution and power panels shall be in compliance with complete short circuit and coordination study i 16000 -6 WF109000 of the entire facility including the Greensand Filters WTP and the R.O. WTP speicified in 16040, 101. E. Panelboards shall be of the dead -front type equipped with thermal- magnetic circuit breaker branches, of sizes and interrupting rating shown of drawings or indicated in the panelboard schedule. Breakers shall provide instantaneous trip on short circuit and time delay on overloads, and be mechanically trip free from the handle. Breakers shall be quick -make, quick -break and bolted to the bus. Two and three pole breakers shall be common trip, operated by a single handle. Tie handles are not acceptable. All breakers sized 225 amps and above shall be of the interchangeable trip type, with the trip unit sealed to prevent tampering. All circuit breakers shall have a minimum AIC as specified at the operating voltage and shall be in compliance with the complete short circuit and coordination study of the entire facility including the Greensand Filters WTP and the R.O. WTP as specified in 16040, 101. F. Outdoor panels shall be in 316 stainless steel NEMA 3R/12 enclosures, with sunshields and single turn quick release latches and three (3) point stainless steel handle systems. G. Panelboards shall be the product of Cutler- Hammer, General Electric, Siemens, or Square D. 2.02 LIGHTING PANELBOARDS: A. Cabinets shall be steel of code gauge with ample wiring gutters for all wires and connections, minimum of 4 in. on all sides, minimum 20 in. wide. Hinged doors, covering all switching device handles shall be included in all panel trims. Doors shall have semi - flush type cylinder lock and catch. All locks shall be master -keyed with all other power and lighting panelboards. Provide typewritten circuit directory on the inside of the door, under clear plastic frame. B. Branch circuits shall be quick -make, quick- break, thermal magnetic circuit breakers of the number of poles, type, size and interrupting rating indicated. Ground fault interrupting breakers shall be provided where indicated. Panel shall be provided with main circuit breaker where indicated. All circuit breakers shall have a minimum AIC as specified at the operating voltage and shall be in compliance with the complete short circuit and coordination study of the entire facility including the Greensand Filters WTP and the R.O. WTP as specified in 16040, 101. C. Panel bus structure shall be for voltage, phase, AIC rating specified at the operating voltage, and capacity indicated. Bus bars shall be copper, silver plated sized in accordance with UL Standards. Provide full size neutral bus bar and ground bus in each panel. The AIC rating of Lighting Panelboards shall be in compliance with complete short circuit and coordination study of the entire facility including the Greensand Filters WTP and the R.O. WTO as specified in 16040, 101. D. Outdoor panels shall be 316 stainless steel, NEMA 3R/12 and mounted on 316 ss supports, with 316 SS hardware. E. Panelboards shall be the product of Cutler- Hammer, General Electric, Siemens, or Square D. 16000 -7 WF109000 2.03 DISCONNECT SWITCHES: A. All switches shall be heavy duty, 600VAC fusible or non - fusible as required, quick -make, quick -break in NEMA Type 4X, 316 SS enclosures unless otherwise indicated on the drawings for fiberglass enclosures in specific locations. B. Switches shall be of number of poles, amps, and volts indicated. Metal nameplate on front cover shall indicate switch type, catalog number, and horsepower ratings with both standard and time delay fuses. Switch handle shall be capable of being locked in the "off' position. All switches shall be Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., listed and horsepower rated. Switches shall be Cutler- Hammer, General Electric, Siemens, or Square D. 2.04 MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS: Each fractional horsepower single phase motor rated less than 1 hp shall be protected by a motor switch with overload protection. Overload protection shall be melting alloy or bimetallic type and shall be provided in each ungrounded conductor serving the motor. Switches shall be surface or flush mounted as indicated. Switches shall be NEMA 4X 316 SS enclosure unless otherwise indicated. Provide switches with pilot light where indicated on drawings. Switches shall be Allen- Bradley, Cutler- Hammer, General Electric, Siemens or Square D. 2.05 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS: A. Shall be 600V class, 60 hertz, two winding, single or three phase, of kVA and primary and secondary voltages indicated with standard full voltage capacity taps above and below normal Sound levels shall be in accordance with the applicable NEMA -ANSI standards according to kVA rating. B. Transformers shall be sized for a 150 degree C rise; above a 40 degree C ambient, at rated kVA. C. All transformers shall incorporate a UL class 220 degree C insulation system in accordance with the latest NEMA ST -20, and listed by UL, Inc. Maximum hot spot temperature shall not exceed 220 degrees C. D. All cores to be constructed of high grade, non -aging silicon steel with high magnetic permeability, and low hysteresis and eddy current losses. Magnetic flux densities are to be kept well below the saturation point. The core laminations shall be clamped together with structural steel angles. The completed core and coil shall then be bolted to the base of the enclosure but isolated therefrom by means of rubber, vibration - absorbing mounts. There shall be no metal -to -metal contact between the core and coil and the enclosure. On transformers 500 kVA and smaller, the vibration isolating system shall be designed to provide a permanent fastening of the core and coil to the enclosure. Sound isolating systems requiring the complete removal of all fastening devices will not be acceptable. E. All transformers shall be UL listed for the specified temperature rise. F. Transformers shall be as manufactured by General Electric, Hevi -Duty, Siemens, Square D or Cutler Hammer. G. Dry type transformers mounted outdoors shall be in 316 SS, NEMA 4X enclosures with sunshield. 16000 -8 WF109000 2.06 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS: A. Furnish and install conduit system including boxes, fittings and supports. The types of conduits required (3/4 in. minimum) for the project include: rigid galvanized steel (RGS) for underground only, either encased in concrete, or painted with two (2) coats of coal tar epoxy as per the specification, rigid aluminum overhead or exposed, non - metallic (PVC) with Schedule 80 exposed and Schedule 40 below grade in concrete and liquid -tight flexible metallic conduit. Rigid Schedule 80, exposed PVC conduit and fittings shall only be in the areas designated and shall begin at the wall entrance to either area. The main run to that point shall be rigid aluminum overhead or exposed and 40 mil PVC coated galvanized steel from underground. B. Rigid steel conduit shall be heavy wall, threaded, hot dipped galvanized inside and out supplied with a coupling on one end and a thread protector on the other end. RGS conduit below grade, not encased, shall be coated with two -8 mil coats of coal tar epoxy. C. Rigid aluminum conduit shall be extruded from 6063 alloy in temper designation T -1 with a maximum of 0.1 % copper content and shall conform to ANSI C80.5 and UL-6. Provide conduit manufactured by Alcoa, Kaiser, V.A.W. Aluminum or equal. Use copper - free cast aluminum conduit bodies equipped with threaded covers or gasketed covers secured with at least two (2) 316 SS screws. D. Rigid non - metallic conduit shall be PVC Schedule 40 and 80 as indicated, and shall conform to industry NEMA Standard TC -2. Fittings and cement shall be by the same manufacturer as the conduit. Where temperature changes in excess of 140 Degrees C (25 Deg. F) are anticipated, expansion joints shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. E. Liquid -tight flexible metal conduit shall be galvanized inside and outside, with moisture and oil -proof PVC jacket extruded over outside and a continuous copper ground under the jacket. F. For each electrical raceway system indicated, provide a complete assembly of conduit, or duct with fittings, including but not necessarily limited to, connectors, nipples, couplings, bushing, expansion fittings, hangers, straps and other components and accessories as needed to form a complete system. Fittings shall be of the same material as the conduit. Where conduit changes from one material to another, appropriate adapters approved for the purpose shall be used. The coupling or fitting transition from 40 mil PVC coated RGS from underground to rigid aluminum shall be made up with Bumdy Penatrox A -13 compound. G. All conduit and fittings, intended for areas indicated as hazardous, shall be as approved by the NEC for class and division indicated. Materials shall be of the best quality designed for the type of hazard indicated. H. Acceptable manufacturers for conduits are Alcoa, Kaiser, V.A.W. Aluminum, LTV, Wheatland, Triangle, LCP, Certainteed, Carlon, Electri-Flex and Anaconda. For fittings O.Z., Carlon, Appleton, and Crouse - Hinds. 2.07 BOXES AND FITTINGS: A. Interior outlet boxes shall be weatherproof cast aluminum of the type, shape, size and depth of box to suit each respective location. Boxes shall be minimum 1 -1/2 in. deep and 16000 -9 WF109000 single or gang type of size to accommodate devices noted. Provide outlet box accessories as required for each installation. B. Weatherproof outlet boxes shall be corrosion -proof cast aluminum of the type, shape, size and depth, with threaded conduit ends, cast metal face plate with spring- hinged waterproof cap, including gasket and corrosion -proof fasteners. Springs and screws will be 316 stainless steel. C. Outlets on exposed conduit systems shall be of the threaded hub, cast aluminum, conduit type fitting, suitable for the wiring devices to be installed. Covers shall be of a type designed to fit the switch, receptacle or other specified fittings. Any springs on covers, screws and nipples will be 316 stainless steel. D. Conduits entering gasketed boxes or equipment enclosures shall terminate with gasketed hubs. Hubs shall be "Scru-tite" by Myers, Crouse -Hinds or Efcor. E. Conduit bodies shall be cast aluminum of the type, shape and size to suit each location, constructed with threaded conduit ends, removable cover, gaskets and corrosion- resistant 316 stainless steel screws. F. Provide corrosion- resistant, stainless steel box knockout closures, conduit locknuts and malleable iron conduit bushings of type and size to fit respective use and installation. Where grounding connections are required, bushings shall have terminals for bonding jumper. 2.08 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES: Shall be constructed of code 316 stainless steel gauge of the dimensions required by Article 370 of the NEC for the number, size and position of conduits and conductors entering and leaving the box. They shall have full - access, hinged, screw clamp covers, for surface installation, mounted with corrosion- resistant 316 stainless steel machine screws. Where intermediate cable supports are necessary because of box dimensions, provide reinforced flange and removable #12 gauge 316 SS channels for supports of conductors. Non - metallic electrical enclosures where called for, shall be of the type indicated on the drawings and shall be as manufactured by Robroy or Carlon. Provide grounding lugs in all boxes. All mounting hardware for the boxes will be 316 stainless steel. 2.09 GROUND RODS: Shall be copper -clad steel sectional type of size indicated, as manufactured by Copperweld Steel Co. Ground fittings, clamps and jumpers shall be high strength copper alloy, brass or silicon bronze, as manufactured by Bumdy or O.Z. 2.10 CONDUCTORS: A. All power and control conductors, other than the 2KV, EPR insulated, shielded VFD cables, shall be copper type THHN/THWN or XHHW unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, and shall conform to the requirements of Palm Beach County and latest edition of ICEA, NEMA and the NEC and shall meet all relevant ASTM Specifications. All conductors shall be new and shall have size, type of insulation, voltage and manufacturers at regular r intervals. Grounding n the outer covering name permanently marked o 9 P Y conductors shall be made of soft drawn stranded copper. Insulated grounding conductors shall be rated for 600 volts and shall have green outer covering type THHN/THWN, XHHW or THW insulation. B. All conductors for power, other than the 2KV, EPR insulated, shielded VFD cables, and lighting shall have 600 volt insulation, #12 AWG minimum. Conductors for control wiring 16000 -10 WF109000 may be #16 AWG stranded, Type XHHW, TFF, MTW OR THHN/THWN. All conductors shall be stranded copper. C. Conductors used in fixture channels shall be type THHN/THWN or XHHW, rated 90 degrees C. D. All conductors #10 AWG and smaller shall be joined with self - insulated 600 volt pressure type connectors. Conductors larger than #10 AWG shall be joined by compression type connectors bolted together with brass, bronze or stainless steel machine screws, bolts, washers and hex nuts. Terminal connections shall be made using solderless, pressure type lugs. Tape shall be "Scotch" brand #88. E. All wiring including low voltage control, data and instrumentation cables shall be suitable for use in wet locations as defined by the NEC, where installed in raceways below grade. All cables used on NEC defined wet locations shall be acceptable to the regulatory authority. All electronic (4- 20mADC) single pair cables shall be two (2) conductor, 18 gage, 300 VAC copper, twisted with tape foil shield and drain wire. The shield is to be grounded at one location only, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. The cable shall be Houston Wire and Cable No. HW10101801 or equal for a single pair shielded cable. Single triad shield cables for potentiometer single cable shall be three (3) conductors, No. 18AWG, 300 VAC, copper, twisted triad with tape foil shield and drain wire, Houston wire and cable no. HW 101180T or equal. All Ethernet network cables shall be Cat. 6/6e, twisted pair, bonded cable with Industrial Grade PVC jacket, Belden Cat. No. 7927A. F. All 115 to 480 VAC motor lead terminations shall be made with heat shrink, 1 KV Minimum motor termination kits, Raychem Type MCK or IPP Type LVMK. G. All VFD motor feeder cables shall be three (3) conductors with a ground, tinned copper braid shielded Type TC power cables with XLPE and EPR conductor insulation, 2 KV minimum insulation rated 100 degree C, and an overall PVC or neoprene jacket. VFD motor feeder cables from No. 12 AWG to 535 kcmil AmerCable Series 37- 102 - XXXVFD VFD cable, part No.37- 102- 319VFD for a 4/0 AWG cable. H. Acceptable manufacturers for conductors are Houston Wire & Cable, Southwire, Belden, Rockbestos, AmerCable and Okonite. Acceptable manufacturers for connectors are O.Z., Thomas & Betts, Bumdy, 3M, llsco, NSi and Anderson. 2.11 WIRING DEVICES: A. Duplex receptacles shall be specification grade, 20 amps, 125 volts, 3 -wire grounding type, NEMA 5 - 20R, Hubbell #5362. 1. Single Receptacle, NEMA 5 -20R, Hubbell #5361. 2. Duplex Receptacle, 20 amps, 250 volts, 3 -wire grounding type, NEMA 6 -20R, Hubbell #5462. 3. Duplex Receptacle, weatherproof, spring - loaded with gasketed hinged cover for FS boxes, Hubbell #5206. 4. Single Receptacle, weatherproof cover, Hubbell #5211. 16000 -11 WF109000 5. Ground Fault Interrupter (GFI) duplex receptacle G.E. #TGTR115f, Square D, or Hubbell. 6. Special purpose receptacles shall be of number of poles, voltage and amperes as indicated on the drawings and shall be provided with matching plug. 7. All receptacles shall be brown or ivory, color as selected by Engineer. B. All switches shall be specification grade, side and back wired, 20 amps, 120 -277 volts ac. 1. Single pole switch, Hubbell #1221. 2. Double pole switch, Hubbell #1222. 3. Three -way switch, Hubbell #1223. 4. Four -way switch, Hubbell #1224. 5. Weatherproof switch in a FS box, Hubbell #1781. 6. Weatherproof switch with pilot light in a FS box, Hubbell #1785. 7. Switch with pilot light, Hubbell #1221 -PL. 8. Key operated switches, Hubbell #1221 -L series. 9. All switches shall be brown or ivory, color as selected by Engineer. C. Wall plates shall be of appropriate type and size for all wiring and control devices, signal and telephone outlets. Plates shall be ASTM 302 stainless steel. Device plates for use with devices flush- mounted in exposed masonry construction shall be sized to cover masonry opening. Device plates for surface mounted devices shall be for use with the type of outlet box in which the device is mounted. D. Acceptable manufacturers for wiring devices are Arrow -Hart, General Electric, Hubbell, Pass & Seymour, or Siena. 2.12 MANHOLES AND PULLBOXES: Handholes shall be precast, reinforced concrete as manufactured by Brooks Products, Inc. The sizes shall be as shown on the drawings. The cover and angle frame shall be steel, traffic rated and coated per Section 09800. 2.13 CONTROL STATIONS: All remote control stations, including 2 watts, single turn potentiometers at VFD operated motors indicated on the drawings, mounted at equipment and motors shall be 600 VAC rated, heavy duty, NEMA 4X, non - metallic, corrosion resistant units made of molded high impact strength, fiberglass reinforced polyester and all 316 SS screws. All control stations shall be Crouse Hinds Series NCS /NCSC with the contact, operator and legend plate configurations to match each specific application requirement. The following are examples of the required units only. The quantities and final configurations are the responsibility of the Contractor, which must have additional sets of isolated contacts for each position to provide the 24 VDC inputs to the PLC. A. Hand - Off -Auto (H-O -A) - Crouse Hinds Catalog No. NCS 2124 (Dead End) or NCSC2124 (through feed) with a "Hand - Off - Auto" legend plate, 3 position, maintained, four 16000 -12 WF109000 circuit, single device with 3/4 -inch NPT hubs(s). HS2040 and HS2300. B. Off -On - Crouse Hinds Catalog No. NCS 2122 (Dead End) or NCSC2122 (through feed) with an "Off -On" legend plate, 2 position, maintained, four circuit, single device with 3/4 " net hub(s). C. Auto -Open - Crouse Hinds " Catalog NO. NCS2122 (Dead End) or NCSC2122 (through feed) with a special engraved Auto -Open " legend plate. 2- position, maintained, four circuit, single device with a 3/4" NPT HUB(s). D. Hand - Off -Auto and Open -and Close - Crouse Hinds Catalog No.NCS23, three device enclosure with a single 3/4 -inch hub, a Catalog No. NCSC23 with two 3/4 -inch hubs, a Catalog No. N25W 12321 selector switch in top position, 3 position, maintained, four circuit with a "Hand - Off -Auto" legend plate, a Catalog No. N2PS1211 R red push -button in middle position, 2 circuit momentary with an "Open" legend plate and a Catalog No. N2PS1211 G green push -button in the bottom position, 2 circuit momentary with a "close" legend plate. HS2302, HS2304 and HS 2305. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SERVICE: Furnish and install complete electric service as shown on the drawings. The Contractor shall contact the local utility for any regulations that apply and for the exact location of the service point. All work required for a complete electric service, shall be the responsibility of the contractor and performed to the complete satisfaction of the utility company in accordance with all applicable codes. Voltage, phase and number of wires will be as indicated on the drawings. 3.02 CONDUIT, BOXES AND FITTING: A. All above grade conduits shall be exposed rigid aluminum unless otherwise indicated. Exposed conduits shall run parallel to and at right angles to building lines and shall be supported and secured as required and at intervals as per NEC. Bends or offsets may be PP q P Y made with standard conduit ells or with an approved bender or hickey at radius of curves not less than NEC Table 346 -10; or hub threaded type conduit fittings. B. Conduits installed within concrete floor slabs shall be rigid steel galvanized; conduits installed in direct contact with earth shall be rigid steel galvanized or PVC Schedule 40 encased in concrete, unless otherwise indicated. Provide expansion joints where required. Conduit above grade within the building shall be rigid aluminum. Rigid non - metallic conduit (PVC) shall be installed in accordance with Article 347 of the NEC. Where transition is made from below grade installation to an installation above grade, transition shall be made with rigid galvanized elbows and 40 mil coated RGS to above grade aluminum. Conduit connections to indoor pull boxes, panelboards, etc., shall be made by use of rigid, zinc or aluminum grounding type conduit hubs, such as Myers ST Series. All ground screws and lugs will be tied to the main ground system or ground cables with No. 12 AWG minimum cable. The metallic conduit system shall form a continuously conductive grounding system. A code size grounding conductor shall be run in all non - metallic raceways. Unless other wise noted, all below grade conduit and conductors shall be installed with 36- inches of cover, minimum. Unless otherwise noted, where below grade conduits cross process piping, plumbing or storm drains, the conduits shall be installed to pass beneath the piping systems. C. Provide liquid -tight flexible metallic conduit for motor connections and for other electrical equipment connections where subject to movement and vibration and in areas subjected to moisture, corrosive atmosphere and dripping oil or grease. 16000 -13 WF109000 D. Conduit support devices shall be attached to structure with wood screws on wood; toggle bolts on hollow masonry; lead shields on solid masonry; and galvanized mailable iron one hole spacers or clamp backs, PC, EC or RC clamps on steel. Nail or perforated straps will not be acceptable. All screws and machine bolts with washers and nuts will be 316 stainless steel. No conduits will be run directly to a surface without using galvanized mailable iron one hole spacers or clamp backs. E. All conduit shall be carefully cleaned before and after installation. The ends of all conduits shall be protected with standard caps to prevent the entrance of water or debris. All empty conduits shall be left with a Nylon fish wire. F. Outlet boxes for switches and receptacles in exposed wiring systems shall be FS or FD boxes with matching device plates. All unused threaded openings shall be closed with pipe plugs. All outlet boxes shall be installed in conformity with all requirements or the NEC. All screws for covers and plates will be 316 stainless steel. G. Aluminum conduit will not be mounted directly to unpainted or galvanized steel supports or clamps. Two (2) layers of electrical tape, such as 33+ or 88, will be put around the aluminum conduit at the point of contact with the supports or clamps. 3.03 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES: Shall be installed where indicated on the drawings and where necessary to terminate, tap -off, or redirect multiple conduit runs. Boxes shall be of size indicated or as required by NEC. Where feeder splices are to be made, boxes shall be large enough to provide ample work space. Boxes shall be supported independently of conduits entering them. Brackets, rod hangers, bolts or other NEC approved supporting methods may be used. All boxes shall be placed in accessible locations. Access panels of suitable size shall be provided where required, and suitably marked for identification. All boxes will be supported as indicated on the drawings or with 1 '/" deep minimum 316 SS stainless steel Kindorf or Unistrut type channel or 1 %2 x 1 %2" x 1/4" 316 SS stainless angle. All hardware will be 316 stainless steel. 3.04 CONDUCTORS: A. No conductors or cables shall be installed in conduits, ducts, or raceways until the raceway system has been completed and cleaned. Care shall be exercised when installing conductors to prevent damage to conductor or insulation. Use only approved cable pulling lubricants for pulling -in conductors. Wire sizes shall be as indicated on the drawings. B. Conductors shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and no splices shall be made except within outlet or junction boxes. Each feeder cable or conductor group in panels, pull boxes or troughs shall have a permanent tag with suitable numbers and letters. Terminal strips shall also be lettered or numbered for each identification. Any conductor termination shall allow an extra three inches at the termination to allow for future re- termination. C. White heat shrink wire markers will be fumished and installed for all wiring, regardless if factory or field installed, on both ends of all wires as per the schematic, wiring and vendors equipment diagrams. The markers must be printed with black permanent ink by a machine. Hand written or individual adhesive type wrap around labels will not be acceptable. Expanded dot matrix printed markers will not be acceptable. The numbers and letters must be letter quality where all lines and shapes appear a solid. The markers shall be equal to Tyton Hellerman Type THS or Panduit Cat. No. HSOOX044FIT. The printer shall be equal to Panduit Model TDP43M with Easy Mark software. D. All conductors pulled to and terminated in junction boxes, terminal boxes, starters, instruments, control devices and all control panels will be left with slack or a small loop that 16000 -14 WF109000 will allow for retermination of the conductor(s) if the end becomes damaged or a lug must be cut off. Conductors will not be pulled tight to a termination point and will not be run in a direct path to the termination point. The conductors will be routed in wireways, wireducts n I and along g enclosure sides and bottoms in such a manner as to provide adequate wire for retermination without having to splice in additional wire. 3.05 WIRING DEVICES: A. Shall be of the type, size, voltage and number of wires as indicated on the drawings and ass specified. All devices shall grounded. All p be grou ded devices shall be mounted within outlet boxes to allow device plates to be in contact with the outlet boxes on all sides. B. Wall switches shall be installed on the strike side of doors and as detailed on the drawings, with the "on" position up. C. Where more than one switch occurs in the same location, they shall be installed in gang type boxes. D. Receptacles shall be mounted with "U" ground terminal at the bottom and the neutral conductor on the left terminal, facing the receptacle. E. Device plates'shall be one piece, single or multi -gang type, selected to match the device or combination of devices. 3.06 DISCONNECT SWITCHES: Disconnect switches shall be provided, where indicated on the drawings, and in accordance with Article 430 of the NEC. Switches shall be installed to be fully accessible. Disconnect switches shall be provided where required by code and where they are not included as installed items in factory assembled equipment requiring a disconnect. Disconnects shall be sized as indicated on drawings, or where not indicated shall be not less than the branch circuit rotective device required to be fused in order to protect the equipment as re required b the P q P q Y equipment manufacturer, the shall be provided and sized to suit manufacturers specifications with Y P Pe time delay type fuses. 3.07 FUSES: Furnish and install a complete set of fuses of the type indicated, for all fuse holders, including those required in equipment furnished by others to which electrical connection is made under this contract. The Contractor shall replace all fuses blown during construction at his expense. The Contractor shall furnish three spare fuses of each size used on the job, to the Owner. 3.08 MOTOR CONTROLS: A. Furnish, install and connect motor starters of size and type shown or required, where indicated on drawings. Generally, motor starting equipment and control devices and Section 16040 shall be installed and connected under this Section. The Contractor shall review all plumbing, HVAC and other mechanical drawings and specifications for mechanical equipment requiring electrical service to determine exactly what equipment will be furnished under other Sections. Equipment not furnished, but necessary for the proper operation of the system, such as H -O-A switches, push- buttons, safety switches and other accessory devices as indicated on the drawings or as required by the NEC, shall be provided under this Section, and installed and connected for satisfactory operation as approved by the Engineer. Provide all stainless steel channels, angles and frames as required to mount all equipment. B. Wiring and control diagrams or sequences shown or called for on the electrical drawings or specified, and all relays, contactors, pushbuttons, as called for shall be furnished, installed and connected for a complete installation under this Section of these specifications. 16000 -15 WF109000 i 3.09 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS: A. All equipment requiring electrical connections shall be connected under this Section of these specifications. Where electrical connections to equipment requires specific locations, such location shall be obtained from shop drawings. Do not scale drawings for location of circuit stub -ups or boxes mounted in wall or floor, to serve specific equipment. Where equipment is to be served through conduit stub -up, conduit shall be stubbed -up not less than 4" above floor, where transition shall be made to sealtite flexible conduit for connection to equipment. B. Electrical circuits to equipment furnished under other sections of the specifications are based on design loads. If actual equipment furnished by another manufacturer whose electrical characteristics vary from those on which electrical design was based, the electrical circuits and protective devices shall be revised to be compatible with the equipment furnished at no additional cost. C. Power cables and leads to motors and transformers shall be clearly marked to show phase sequence. 3.10 GROUNDING: A. Provide a grounding system for equipment and system neutral in accordance with the requirements of Article 250 of NEC and all relevant local regulations. B. Ground rods shall be 3/4 in. x 10 ft -0 in., copper -clad steel, unless otherwise indicated. Lugs and connectors shall be of an approved solderless type. Bonding to building steel, buried cable grids and ground rods shall be by the thermoweld or cadweld process and coated with two coats of acid resistant, epoxy type paint or Koppers 300M Bitumastic coating. C. The resistance to ground shall not exceed 5 ohms, unless otherwise indicated to be lower, and readings shall not be taken within 48 hours of a rainfall. Longer rods or additional rods shall be used, if necessary to obtain the desired resistance. Ground resistance readings shall be taken before connection is made to the building cold water piping system. Results of ground resistance readings shall be forwarded in writing, immediately to the Architect/Engineer. A minimum of two (2)10' - 0 ", 3/4" ground rods shall be driven at each point indicated on the drawings. D. A grounding conductor shall be installed in all conduits including flexible conduit and non- metallic conduit installations. Grounding conductors shall be type THW with green insulation, sized in accordance with Article 250 of the NEC. E. Each low voltage distribution and branch circuit panelboard shall be provided with a copper silver plated equipment ground bar, brazed or riveted to the enclosure or cabinet. 3.11 LIGHTING FIXTURES: A. Provide all lighting fixtures of the type, size and rating indicated in the fixture schedule on the drawing or specified herein. B. Ballasts for HID lamps shall be HPF, regulating type, with crest factor of not more than 1.8. Primary current shall not exceed operating current. 16000 -16 WF109000 C. Lamps shall be provided for all fixtures in accordance with fixture schedule. At time of substantial completion, lamps in all fixtures, which are observed to be noticeably dim after Contractors use and testing, shall be replaced with new lamps. D. Furnish and install lighting fixtures of the types indicated, where shown on drawings and at the indicated heights, in accordance with the fixture manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices. Comply with NEMA standards and requirements of the NEC pertaining to installation of fixtures, and with applicable portions of NECA's "Standard of Installation ". E. Protect fixtures from damage during the construction period and clean all fixtures of dirt and debris upon completion of installation and before final acceptance by Owner. 3.12 DUCT BANKS: A. All underground duct banks shall be constructed of conduits encased in concrete with the top of the duct bank not be less than 36- inches below grade in all areas. Unless otherwise noted, where duct banks cross process piping, storm drains or plumbing systems, the duct banks shall be installed to pass under the process piping and other non - electrical piping systems with a minimum of 6 -inch clearance. Existing piping above duct banks shall be fully supported during construction. Structures exposed as a result of excavations to install duct banks shall be fully supported to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Every conduit entering a duct bank will be a minimum size of 1 -1 /2" in the duct bank and sized as per the conduit and cable schedule when they are out of the duct bank. Combining of cables in larger conduits in the duct bank to reduce the number of encased conduits will not be accepted. A minimum of 1 W of concrete shall be provided between conduit and a minimum of 3" of concrete shall be provided between conduits and earth. All concrete for underground duct bank encasement shall be red. B. A no.3 /0 AWG bare stranded copper ground cable shall be run in all duct banks and shall tie into ground rods in each manhole and the ground grid system at the termination point. C. Duct bank conduits that tie into manhole or pull box windows shall terminate with bell fittings on PVC conduits and grounding bushings on all RGS conduits. No.8 AWG minimum bare stranded copper ground wire shall tie the RGS grounding bushings to the duct bank and manhole ground system. There shall not be any cut edges of PVC or RGS conduits in the manhole or pull box walls or windows. D. All duct bank conduit cables entering manholes or pull boxes shall be bundled with black heavy duty cable ties to keep the conductors for each conduit separate and easily identified. Each bundle shall be tied around the outside walls of the manholes or pull boxes on the heavy duty insulated cable racks on each wall, to leave the middle open for access to all cables. 3.13 CLEANING: In accordance with the General Conditions. 16000 -17 WF109000 SECTION 16040 600 VAC CLASS SWITCHGEAR ADDITION TO MD200, STARTER & BREAKER ADDITIONS TO MCC200 AND NEW MOTOR CONTROL CENTER MCC300 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: This section describes the design, materials and testing of a 1600 amperes frame, 1200 amperes adjustable LSIG trip, fixed mounting power circuit breaker with a 65KA RMS symmetrical interrupting current rating at 508VAC to go in an existing Eaton/Westinghouse Pow -R -Line C switchboard designated MD200, the 600VAC, 1200 amperes, 65 KAIC at 480VAC MCC300 and the revised and new combination starters and feeder breakers added to existing 600 volt rated motor control center MCC200 . The work shall include III r ( ) a labor, material, equipment and services to construct and install the complete systems as shown on the drawings and as specified, including main distribution panel MD200, modified MCC200 and new MCC300. A complete short ort circuit, coordination and ARC Flash Hazard study of the entire electrical system from the load side terminals of the service entrance utility company transformer(s) secondary 480 VAC terminals to the 120/208 WYE secondary terminals of the 480 to 120/208 WYE transformers shall be provided as a part of this project. The short circuit study shall provide the symmetrical fault currents available at each 480 VAC equipment bus from the line side of the service entrance rated 3000 amperes, 600VAC, 65 KAIC at 480VAC main circuit breaker in automatic transfer switch ATS 200 that is an integral part of MD200, to the line and secondary side of the 480 to 120/208 VAC transformer T200 including all cable and breaker impedances and all contributions from the panelboards, switchgear, motors and motor starters in the Greensand Filter Water Plant. The short circuit study shall provide two (2) diagrams and node summary tables or spread sheets with one (1) based on an infinite impedance on the primary side of the service entrance utility company transformer and the second one based on the actual available fault current available from the utility company at the primary side of the service entrance utility company transformer. The coordination study shall provide all instantaneous, short time and long time over current trip settings for the phase and ground fault protective relays from the main breaker in ATS200 to all new and existing MCC feeders and main circuit breakers in the entire electrical system. The coordination study trip settings shall provide fault clearing from the breaker nearest to the fault to prevent nuisance or concurrent tripping or breakers head of the breaker intended to clear the fault. The ARC Flash Hazard study shall include the ARC Flash Warning Labels as required by and in compliance with NEC110.16 and NFPA70E. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: All submittals shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 01300. In addition, the following items shall be provided. A. Submit with each shop drawings a copy of the ratings, circuit diagrams, dimensional data, weights, conduit entry restrictions, anchor bolt locations, phase monitors, watts transducer JT300, current transformers, lightning and surge arrestors, trip units, protective relays, MCC300 structures, power circuit breakers, all starter components, elapsed time meters, pilot devices, motor circuit protectors (MCP's) in the starters, current transmitters, interface terminal block details and a complete Bill of Materials. B. After shop drawing approval, the vendor shall furnish one (1) set of reproducible tracings of final certified drawings and four (4) sets of all drawings and data sheets or manuals 16040 -1 W F109000 that include the following: 1. Plan, elevation and location of equipment. 2. Dimension outlines including weights. 3. Terminal arrangements, type and location of accessories. 4. Assembly details. 5. Complete bill of material. 6. Any and all other drawings required for erection and installation of the equipment. 7. Complete power and control wiring diagrams including all accessories. 8. Operations, maintenance and Installation instruction books. 9. Recommended spare parts. 10. Protective relays and trip unit setting curves for voltage, current, frequency and power versus time. 11. Short circuit study with available fault current diagrams. 12. Coordination study with all protective relay and trip write settings. 13. ARC Flash Hazard study with the ARC Flash Warning Labels as required by and in compliance with NEC110.16 and NFPA70E. i 1.03 STANDARDS: The design, fabrication and performance of the equipment shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following standards and codes. Underwriters Laboratories - UL1008 Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems- NFPA110 IEEE - IEEE Standard 4 (Orange Book) IEEE - IEEE Standard 241 (Gray Book) American National Standards Institute (ANSI) National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA), ICS2- 447 -AC National Electrical Code (NEC) NFPA Any conflict between the above mentioned documents and this specification shall be referred to the Engineer for clarification before proceeding with the fabrication or installation of the affected parts. 1.04 TESTS: Standard design and production tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of NEMA, ANSI, and IEEE Standards. 1.05 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The individual 600 VAC Class combination starters and feeder breakers go into the existing Eaton /Cutler Hammer Freedom Series 2100 MCC manufactured in February, 1999 under G.0 number PDE01598, Neg -ALT number FV4001062902 -0001 for Tequesta WTP and designated MCC 200 shall be Eaton /Cutler Hammer. B. The complete new 1600 amperes frame, 1200 amperes adjustable LSIG trip, fixed mounting power circuit breaker with a 65 KAIC RMS symmetrical interrupting current rating at 508VAC shall be an Eaton Magnum MDS -616 to go into the existing Eaton/Westinghouse front access only 3000 amperes, 600VAC main bus, Pow -R -Line C switchboard rated for 65 KAIC at 480VAC, manufactured in February of 1999 for Tequesta WTP and designated MD200. C. The complete new 600VAC Class, 65 KAIC at 480VAC, 1200 amperes main bus MCC300 shall be manufactured by Eaton /Cutler Hammer, Square D, Allen- Bradley or General Electric. 16040 -2 W F109000 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 STRUCTURAL DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF EXISTING MD200 A. MD200 consists of rigid, freestanding front access only sections which are joined together to a complete four (4) section, service entrance rated main distribution panel including the service entrance rated 3000 amperes main circuit breaker as an integral part of the Automatic Transfer Switch ATS200 with the 2000 amperes generator breaker. B. The incoming line section, generator breaker section and all feeder breaker sections are configured for bottom entry. The section for the new 1200 amperes power circuit breaker for MCC300 has four (4) existing empty 4" conduits which will each have 3 -500 kcmil and 1 -No. 4/0 AWG ground cable pulled in for termination in the section ground bus and on the power circuit breaker lugs. All mounting hardware, lugs and doors shall be furnished with the power circuit breaker to adapt it to the existing Eaton/Westinghouse Pow -R -Line C switchboard. C. The main bus of MD200 is 3000 amperes, 100% rated, 600VAC copper braced for 65 KAIC at 480VAC. 2.02 STRUCTURAL DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF EXISTING MCC 200 A. Motor Control Center MCC 200 consists of rigid, free standing sections which are joined together to form two (2) complete assemblies to make up the front and rear sections for MCC 200 as shown on the drawings. The front and rear sections of MCC 200 are independent units, each assembly being 21" deep, mounted back to back, with the main 1600 amperes copper bus systems tied together with the bus transition sections as indicated on the drawings. B. The main incoming line section of MCC 200 is bottom entry from five (5) 4" conduits, each with 3 - 500 MCM and 1 - 350 MCM ground cables. The incoming service is 3 -phase 480/277 VAC wye without the neutral brought into MCC 200. C. Motor Control Sections: Full length horizontal (top and bottom) and vertical wireways are provided for wiring the motor control sections. Units are separated by isolating barriers that are removable for wiring. Each vertical section is designed for front installation of standard plug -in starter or breaker units or bolt -in units and is equipped with removable side covers to simplify future installation of additional sections. Each vertical section shall has space for 72" of any combination of starter units. Blank sections within each vertical section has access holes through the bus insulation and barriers every 6" of working height for plugging in future units. Motor Control Centers are NEMA 1A/12 structures with gaskets on all doors and removable plates. Each blank section has a blank hinged door and a unit support shelf with track for mounting future units. D. STARTER & BREAKER UNITS: 1. Each unit enclosure shall be of NEMA Type 1A/12 construction with continuous hinge, gasketed doors that are mechanically interlocked with the circuit breakers to prevent opening the door when the breaker is closed. Each unit shall be capable of being padlocked in the "on" or "off" position with up to three locks. 2. All plug -in units of the same size shall be interchangeable if rearrangement is desired. E. BUS: MCC 200 front and rear sections are furnished with a three phase silver or tin plated 16040 -3 WF109000 solid copper main bus, rated at 1600 amperes and braced for a minimum short circuit duty of 65,000 RMS ampere symm. A solid silver plated vertical bus rated 400 amperes is provided in each section. F. GROUND BUS: 1. A one -fourth by two inch uninsulated copper ground bus extends through the entire bottom length of the motor control center structures. 2. The neutral of each control power transformer shall be wired with a #12 AWG conductor to the ground bus. G. CIRCUIT BREAKERS: The circuit breakers shall be 2 pole or 3 pole, as shown on the single line diagram, 60 hertz, 600 volt, molded case type. Feeder breakers shall be thermal magnetic. Motors shall have an instantaneous trip magnetic only adjustable trip motor circuit protector in combination with the starters. All feeder and starter breakers shall be furnished with copper lugs. Breaker ratings shall be as follows: 1. Feeder breakers up to and including 150A frame shall have a minimum of 65,000 RMS symmetrical amperes interrupting capacity at 480 VAC, equal to Cutler Hammer/Westinghouse type HFD. 2. Feeder breakers above 150A shall have a minimum of 65,000 RMS, symmetrical amperes interrupting capacity at 480 VAC interchangeable thermal unit and adjustable magnetic trip equal to Cutler HammerMestinghouse type HJD from 150 - 250 AMPS and type HKD from 250 - 400 AMPS. 3. Motor starter magnetic trip only breakers from 3 amperes continuous to 400 amperes shall have a minimum of 65,000 RMS symmetrical amperes interrupting capacity at 480 VAC equal to Cutler HammerMestinghouse type HMCP. H. MOTOR STARTERS: The starters shall be as shown on the single line diagram and shall be the combination type full voltage magnetic or solid state reduced voltage and shall consist of the following components: a. Full voltage magnetic non - reversing or reversing type. 1. NEMA sized and rated contactor, with three eutectic alloy or bimetallic ambient compensated type, manual reset thermal relays and 2 normally open and 1 normally closed auxiliary contacts in addition to those needed for normal contactor operation on both the contactor and the overload relay. The correct sized overload heater elements shall be provided with each unit. 2. Control power transformer (480 to 120V) with 100 VA continuous additional capacity above the requirements of the starter. 3. Two (2) primary fuses for the control power transformer. 4. Secondary control fuse. 5. Control circuit terminal strip for terminating each outgoing wire and each spare contact. The terminals shall be 600 VAC sectional type with tubular clamp 16040 -4 WF109000 screw contacts that do not require lugs on the wires. 6. Elapsed time meter 7. Pilot light, 120 VAC transformer type, press to test, "Motor Run ", full size 30.5 mm, heavy duty NEMA 4X corrosion resistant oil tight components. 8. Motor circuit protector (MCP) with magnetic only adjustable trip. b. Reduced voltage starters shall be modular microprocessor controlled solid state type designed for use with 3 phase AC induction motors. The design using six (6) SCRS shall have the following characteristics and shall be Cutler- Hammer Intelligent Technologies IT Series sized for severe duty 1.15 service factor motor applications: 1. Stepless acceleration from 0 -VAC and 0 -Hz to 480 -VAC and 60 -Hz. 2. Adjustable current limit -From 150% to 425% of rated current with automatic recalibration to 600% after acceleration (approximately 6% to 50% locked rotor torque). 3. Volts and Hertz ramp duration is adjustable from 2 to 30 seconds. 4. Thermal Capacity 425% rated current for 5 seconds 300% rated current for 30 seconds 250% rated current for 60 seconds 115% rated current continuous 5. Power /energy -saver option to reduce voltage, current, and improve power factor at less than full load conditions. 6. Soft start- minimized torque peaks for smooth acceleration, pulse duration adjustable from 0 to 2 seconds. 7. Electromagnetic interlock - One maintaining auxiliary contact to show full voltage run status of the starter. 8. Six SCR configuration - For full wave control. 9. Solid -state overload relay with highly repeatable trip characteristics. The unit will have trip curves for both motor and controller with automatic hot starter recalibration and retentive state indication with power loss manual reset standard, automatic available. 10. Thermal characteristics - 40 Deg. C ambient enclosed. 11. Phase sequence protection. 12. Solderiess lugs - For copper wire. 13. LED indicators - For "Line voltage," "Incorrect Phase Sequence," and "On." 16040 -5 WF109000 14. SCR protection - Including Metal Oxide Varistor, RC Network, and Overtemperature Switch. 15. Shorted SCR detection. 16. Undervoltage protection. 17. UL and CSA listing. 18. Unit circuit breaker will have a short trip release mechanism controlled by the shorted SCR detector. 19. The starter unit will have phase unbalance/ instantaneous overload and protection against phase loss and phase unbalance. 20. Up -to -speed indication with an isolated contact closure for auxiliary contacts. 21. Overload relay with alarm contact. 22. Integral full voltage, horsepower rated, NEMA sized bypass contactor to shunt the SCR's at the end of ramp or up to speed contact closure point of the starter controls. 23. Control power transformer the same as items I.a,2. thru I.a,4 above. 24. Control circuit terminal strip the same as item I.a,5. above and as detailed on drawings E4 and E5. 25. Elapsed time meter. I. WIRING: 1. The starter and feeder breaker MCC units shall be wired using standard copper conductors with 90 Deg. C rate thermoplastic insulation. Control wiring shall be #14 AWG. Power wiring shall be minimum #12 AWG. Wires and terminal blocks shall be marked as indicated on the attached drawings. 2. Copper, pull apart type terminal blocks adequate for terminating two #12 AWG conductors shall be provided for the control circuits. 3. Wiring shall be NEMA Class I, Type B. Each starter shall be wired in accordance with the attached drawings. J. CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMER: Control power will be 120V, single phase and shall be provided from a control power transformer in each starter. Sizing of transformers shall be as required for the application plus 100 VA additional capacity but not less than 180 VA. Dual element, time delay fuses [two (2)] shall be provided on the primary of the transformer, equal to Buss Type FNQ. One (1) shall be provided on the secondary, equal to Buss Type FNM. K. CONTROL COMPONENTS: An overload reset button with rubber boot shall be mounted in each compartment door. 16040 -6 WF109000 L. CURRENT TRANSFORMER/TRANSMITTERS: Each of the designated starters on the single line diagrams will have a two (2) wire current transducer with an AC primary current as shown on the single line or individual motor schematic diagrams and a 4 - 20 mADC output with a 24VDC +/ -10% power supply. Equal to Model Series PCM 242 by Instrument Transformers, Inc. in Clearwater, Florida or Riley Corporation Sales, Inc. Model 420 and 420L. See Drawings E -4 and E -5 for details. M. OUTGOING CONNECTIONS: Each starter unit shall have power and a ground terminal for terminating the motor leads and ground cables from the field. N. NAMEPLATES: Nameplates shall be rigid laminated phenolic with black surface and white core. Each nameplate shall be fastened to the compartment door with two (2) nylon pushmount rivets. The unit nameplates shall be 1" x 3" minimum with 3/16" high characters. For engraving see motor control center schedule. Abbreviations are not acceptable. O. FINISH: Smooth and clean the enclosures and prime coat the inside and outside surfaces. Standard indoor finish is gray ANSI No. 49. 2.03 STRUCTURAL DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF MCC300 A. Motor Control Center MCC300 shall consist of rigid, free standing sections which are joined together to form complete assemblies for MCC300 to make up the front of MCC300 as shown on the drawings. All sections of MCC300 shall be front accessible only for mounting back to back or against a wall. The front sections of MCC300 shall be independent units, each assembly being a maximum of 21- inches deep. B. MCC300 shall be UL labeled for operation on an electrical system with available fault currents up to 65 KAIC at 480 VAC. The UL label for the 65 KAIC at 480VAC rating shall be for the entire MCC including all bus, feeder breakers and starters. C. The dimensions are critical and shall not exceed the length and depth shown on the drawings. The total number of spaces available for future units shall not be reduced and their orientation shall not be modified so that combining spaces for a single large unit installation shall be possible. D. The main incoming line section of MCC300 shall be for bottom entry conduits and cables from four (4) 4" conduits, each with 3 - 500 kcmil and 1 — 4/0 AWG ground cables. Copper lugs shall be provided for terminating each of these cables. The incoming service shall be 3 -phase 480/277 VAC WYE without the neutral brought into the MCC. E. Motor Control Sections: Full length, horizontal (top and bottom) and vertical wireways shall be provided for wiring the motor control sections. Individual units shall be separated by isolating barriers that are removable for wiring. Each vertical section shall be designed for front installation of standard plug -in starter or breaker units or bolt -in units and shall be equipped with removable side covers to simplify future installation of additional sections. Each vertical section shall have space for 72" of any combination of starter units. Blank sections within each vertical section shall have access holes through the bus insulation and barriers every 6" of working height for plugging in future units. Control centers shall be NEMA 1A/12 structures with gaskets on all doors and removable plates. Each blank section shall have a blank hinged door and a unit support shelf with track for mounting future units. 16040 -7 WF109000 F. STARTER & BREAKER UNITS: 1. Each unit enclosure shall be of NEMA Type 1A/12 construction with hinged doors with gaskets that are mechanically interlocked with the circuit breakers to prevent opening the door when the breaker is closed. Each unit shall be capable of being padlocked in the "on" or "off' position with up to three locks. 2. All plug -in units of the same size shall be interchangeable if rearrangement is desired. G. BUS: All MCC's sections shall be fumished with a three phase silver or tin plated solid copper main bus, rated at 1200 amperes, all braced for a minimum short circuit duty of 65,000 RMS amperes symmetrical. Solid, silver plated, vertical bus rated at 400 amperes, 600VAC, 65 KAIC shall be provided in each section. H. GROUND BUS: 1. A 0.25" by 2.0" un- insulated copper ground bus shall extend through the entire bottom length of the motor control center structures. The structural steel supporting each section shall be connected to the bus. 2. The neutral of each control power transformer shall be wired with a #12 AWG conductor to the ground bus. The Ground bus shall have a lug at each end for connecting two #410 AWG copper ground cables. I. ENCLOSURE: Each vertical section of the assembled MCC300 shall be as shown on the drawings or the manufacturers standard where the drawings are not specific. J. CIRCUIT BREAKERS: The circuit breakers shall be 2 pole or 3 pole, as shown on the single line diagram, 60 hertz, 600 volt, molded case type. Feeder breakers shall be thermal magnetic. Motors shall have an instantaneous trip magnetic only adjustable trip motor circuit protector in combination with the starters. All feeder and starter breakers shall be furnished with copper lugs. Breaker ratings shall be as follows: 1. Feeder breakers up to and including 150A frame shall have a minimum of 65,000 RMS symmetrical amperes interrupting capacity at 480 VAC, equal to Cutler HammerMestinghouse type FFD. 2. Feeder breakers above 150A shall have a minimum of 65,000 RMS, symmetrical amperes interrupting capacity at 480 VAC, interchangeable thermal unit and an adjustable magnetic trip equal to Cutler Hammer/Westinghouse type HJD from 150 - 250 AMPS and type HKD from 250 - 400 AMPS. 3. Motor starter magnetic trip only breakers from 3 amperes continuous to 400 amperes shall have a minimum of 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes interrupting capacity at 480 VAC equal to Cutler Hammer/Westinghouse type HMCP. K. MOTOR STARTERS: The starters shall be as shown on the single line diagram and shall be the combination type full voltage magnetic or solid state reduced voltage and shall consist of the following components: 1. Full voltage magnetic non - reversing or reversing type starter units. 16040 -8 WF109000 a. NEMA sized and rated contactor, with three eutectic alloy or bimetallic ambient compensated type, manual reset thermal relays and 2 normally open and 1 normally closed auxiliary contacts in addition to those needed for normal contactor operation on both the contactor and the overload relay. The correct sized overload heater elements shall be provided with each unit. b. Control power transformer (480 to 120V) with 100 VA continuous additional capacity above the requirements of the starter. C. Two (2) primary fuses for the control power transformer. d. One (1) secondary control fuse for the control power transformer and controls. e. Control circuit terminal strip for terminating each outgoing wire and each spare contact. The terminals shall be 600 VAC sectional type with tubular clamp screw contacts that do not require lugs on the wires. The quantity layout and markings shall be as shown on the drawings. f. Elapsed time meter in each starter door. g. Pilot lights and controls as shown on the drawings. h. Motor circuit protector (MCP) with magnetic only adjustable trip. 2. Reduced voltage starters shall be modular microprocessor controlled solid -state type designed for use with 3 phase AC induction motors. The design using six (6) SCRS shall have the following characteristics and shall be sized for the amperes shown on the drawings for severe duty 1.15 service factor 460 VAC motors. a. Step -less acceleration from 0 VAC and 0 Hz to 480 VAC and 60 Hz. b. Adjustable soft stop controls with an independently adjustable ramp time. C. Adjustable current limit - From 150% to 425% of rated current with automatic recalibration to 600% after acceleration (approximately 6% to 50% locked rotor torque). d. Volts and Hertz ramp duration is adjustable from 2 to 30 seconds. e. Thermal Capacity 450% rated current for 30 seconds 300% rated current for 60 seconds 115% rated current continuous f. Power /energy -saver option to reduce voltage, current, and improve power factor at less than full load conditions. g. Soft start- minimized torque peaks for smooth acceleration, pulse duration adjustable from 0 to 2 seconds. 16040 -9 WF109000 h. Electromagnetic interlock - One maintaining auxiliary contact to show full voltage run status of the starter. i. Six SCR configuration - For full wave control. j. Solid -state overload relay with highly repeatable trip characteristics. The unit shall have trip curves for both motor and controller with automatic hot starter recalibration and retentive state indication with power loss manual reset standard, automatic available. k. Thermal characteristics - 40 Deg. C ambient enclosed. I. Phase sequence protection. M. Solderless lugs for copper wire. n. LED indicators for "Line Voltage, "Incorrect Phase Sequence," and "On." o. SCR protection, including Metal Oxide Varistor (MOV), RC Network, and an over temperature Switch. p. Shorted SCR detection. q. Under voltage protection. r. UL and CSA listing. S. Unit circuit breaker shall have a shunt trip release mechanism controlled by the shorted SCR detector. t. The starter unit shall have phase unbalance/ instantaneous overload protection and protection against phase loss and phase unbalance. U. Up -to -speed indication with an isolated contact closure for auxiliary contacts. V. Overload relay with alarm contact. W. Full voltage, horsepower rated, bypass contactor to shunt the SCR's at the end of ramp or up to speed contact closure point of the starter controls. The bypass contactor shall have two (2) N.O. auxiliary contacts wired to the control terminal block. X. Control power transformer the same as items K, 1, b thru K, 1, d above. y. Control circuit terminal strip the same as item K, 1, a above. Z. Elapsed time meter, pilot lights and controls as sown on the drawings. 16040 -10 WF109000 L. WIRING: 1. The motor control centers shall be wired using standard copper conductors with 90 Deg. C rated thermoplastic insulation. Control wiring shall be #14 AWG. Power wiring shall be a minimum of #12 AWG. Wires and terminal blocks shall be marked as indicated on the attached drawings. 2. Copper, pull -apart type terminal blocks adequate for terminating two #12 AWG conductors shall be provided for the control circuits. 3. Wiring shall be NEMA Class I, Type B. Each starter shall be wired in accordance with the attached drawings. M. CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMER: Control power shall be 120V, single phase and shall be provided from a control power transformer in each starter. Sizing of transformers shall be as required for the application plus 100 VA additional capacity but not less than 180 VA. Dual element, time delay fuses [two (2)] shall be provided on the primary of the transformer, equal to Buss Type FNQ. One (1) shall be provided on the secondary, equal to Buss Type FNM. N. CONTROL COMPONENTS: An overload trip reset pushbutton with a rubber boot shall be mounted in each compartment door. O. CURRENT TRANSFORMER/TRANSMITTERS: Each of the designated starters on the single line diagrams shall have a two (2) wire current transducer with an AC primary current as shown on the single line or individual motor schematic diagrams and a 4 - 20 MADC output with a 24VDC +/ -10% power supply. The current transformer /transmitters shall be equal to Model Series PCM 242 by Instrument Transformers, Inc. in Clearwater, Florida or Riley Corporation Model 420, 420L or 420XL. See the drawings for the sizing details. P. INCOMING & OUTGOING CONNECTIONS: The incoming line terminals of MCC300 shall be sized to accommodate 4 -1 /C 500 kcmil copper, non - shielded cables per phase. Incoming line cables shall enter the cubicles from underground. Terminals shall be made of copper. Outgoing cables shall exit the motor control center from underground unless otherwise noted. Each starter unit shall have power terminals and a ground terminal for terminating the motor leads and ground cables from the field. Q. NAMEPLATES: Nameplates shall be rigid laminated phenolic with black surface and white core. Each nameplate shall be fastened to the compartment door with two (2) stainless steel screws. The unit nameplates shall be 1" x 3" minimum with 3/16" high characters. For engraving see motor control center schedule. Abbreviations are not acceptable. R. FINISH: Smooth and clean the enclosures and prime coat the inside and outside surfaces. Standard indoor finish is gray ANSI No. 49. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: MD200 power circuit breaker, MCC300 complete and starter and feeder breaker units shall be installed in existing spare units in existing MCC 200 as shown on the drawings. 16040 -11 WF109000 SECTION 16050 ELECTRIC MOTORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: This specification section outlines the requirements forall three phase electric motors. Motors five (5) horsepower and larger shall meet all applicable requirements set forth herein. Smaller motors shall be as specified in the various other specification sections, but in general, shall be of premium quality, suitable for the environmental conditions of the installation location, suitable for continuous duty under the actual load conditions excluding service factor, externally coated in accordance with Section 09800 and built in accordance with the requirements of ANSI, IEEE, NEMA and UL Standards. All motors shall be constructed in accordance with the manufacturer's standard practices where they do not conflict with this specification. 1.02 APPLICABLE STANDARDS: All electric motors, 25 hp or larger, shall be manufactured according to the issue of the following standards current at the time of the bid. A. Motor Performance Testing: NEMA MG1 - 12.53A. IEEE 112 Method B. B. Motor Noise Testing: IEEE 85. C. Winding Immersion Testing: NEMA MG1 - 20.48. D. Motor Efficiency Nameplating: NEMA MG1 - 12.53B. E. General Design Standards: NEMA MG1, ANSI, AFBMA, IEEE. 1.03 APPLICATION: Unless otherwise noted all motors, regardless of size, shall be non - overloading anywhere along the curve of the driven equipment, exclusive of service factor. If the supplied driven equipment requires a larger motor than shown on the drawings and stated in this specification in order to satisfy the non - overloading criteria, the Contractor shall be responsible for upgrading the entire electric power system including the emergency power generation system, to accommodate the increased load. The proposed method to accomplish this upgrade shall be submitted to, and approved by, the Engineer in writing prior to the work being initiated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ENCLOSURES: The enclosures for all motors shall be cast iron. All enclosures shall be suitably treated to inhibit corrosion and adequately braced to resist distortion and vibration. Drains shall be provided at the lowest location to prohibit accumulation of liquids. Enclosures manufactured from synthetic materials are not acceptable. Enclosures for all motors shall be suitable for the application to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Unless otherwise specified, non - submersible motors installed inside fully enclosed buildings shall be open drip proof and non - submersible motors installed outside fully enclosed buildings shall be totally enclosed, fan cooled. 2.02 INSULATION, TEMPERATURE RISE AND MISCELLANEOUS: All motors shall be supplied with Class F insulation system to accommodate continuous operation at 115% of nameplate horsepower. The motors shall be designed to operate at or below the temperature limits of a Class B WF109000 16050 -1 insulation system when operated continuously at the nameplate horsepower at a 1.0 service factor. These motors shall be rated for 80 degree C temperature rise above an ambient of 40 degrees C. All motors shall have copper stator windings with additional treatment for tropical and fungus moisture, acids and alkalis. This treatment shall be accomplished with a vacuum impregnating process. Leads shall be nonbraided, nonwicking type with lead positioning gasket between the motor frame and conduit box. 2.03 STARTING: All motor windings shall be adequately braced to permit across -the -line full voltage starting. Maximum allowable in -rush shall be 650% FLA. The motor manufacturer shall ensure that the motor has sufficient torque to accelerate the load when started by a reduced voltage auto - transformer type starter with taps set at 65 %. 2.04 HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL MOTORS: The horizontal and vertical motors set forth below shall have the following characteristics. DRIVEN NOMINAL HP VOLTAGE PHASE CYCLE ENCLOSURE INVERTER REQ'D EQUIPMENT SPEED DUTY REQ'D NOMINAL (RPM) EFFICIENC' FULL LOAD HIGH 1800 300 460 3 60 ODP YES 95.9 PRESSURE PUMP NEW 1800 30 460 3 60 TEFC CORRO NO 92.0 DEGAS. DUTY BLOWER SCRUBBER 1800 5 460 3 60 TEFC CORRO NO 88.0 RECIRC. DUTY PUMPS CHEM. FEED 1800 3/4 460 3 60 TEFC CORRO YES N/A PUMPS DUTY WELL 1800 40 1 460 3 1 60 TEFC I NO 94.0 R4 PUMP It is noted that some of the identified required nominal efficiencies will dictate the use of premium efficiency motors. Motors not identified above shall have performance characteristics consistent with the specified driven equipment. If not otherwise indicated in the equipment specification or the electrical design documents, motors shall be 460 volt, 3 phase, 60 cycle, standard efficiency. All motors shall be capable of operating at the variation of voltage and frequency specified in NEMA M61. All motors shall have a minimum 1.15 service factor. I WF109000 16050 -2 2.05 HORIZONTAL MOTOR BEARINGS: The horizontal motors shall have anti - friction bearings with a B10 life of 60,000 hours or greater. Anti friction bearings shall be provided with readily accessible grease inlet and outlet fittings in the bearing housing to allow re- greasing from the exterior. 2.06 VERTICAL MOTORS: The pump driver shall be mounted on the discharge head and be capable of handling the continuous down thrust as specified by the pump manufacturer. The design shall provide a B -10 life of five years at the rated flow. Provisions shall be made for momentary upthrust equal to 30% of the rated downthrust. The motor shall have minimum 75% extra high thrust capability. Unless otherwise indicated, vertical motors shall be vertical solid shaft "P" base drivers designed per NEMA, ANSI and IEEE standards. Vertical motors shall be equipped with non - reversing ratchets. 2.07 INVERTER DUTY MOTORS: All inverter -duty motors shall be supplied with a Class H insulation system to accommodate continuous operation at 115% of the nameplate horsepower at reduced speeds from 10% to 50% of the rater full speed RPM. The motors shall be designed to operate at or below the temperature limits of a Class B insulation system when operated continuously at the nameplate horsepower at 1.0 service factor and 100% the rated full speed RPM and at or below the temperature limits of a Class F insulation system when operated continuously at 115% of nameplate horsepower and 100% the rated full speed RPM. Inverter -duty motors shall be supplied with constant velocity cooling fans if necessary to keep the motor operating temperature within the limits of a Class B insulating system for 100% torque or full load amperes at lower speeds and a Class F insulation system for 115% torque or full load amperes at lower speeds. All inverter -duty motors shall be designed with insulation systems to meet the corona inception voltage requirements on NEMA Part 31.4.4.2, which is rated to withstand peak voltages of up to 1600 volts. INVERTER -READY MOTORS ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE. 2.08 NOISE REQUIREMENTS: Sound levels measured at five feet from the motor shall not exceed 90 DBA. 2.09 SPACE HEATERS: All motors, one horsepower and greater shall be equipped with single phase, 120 volt, 144 watt space heaters, unless otherwise noted on the drawings or elsewhere in this specification. Higher wattages are acceptable per the manufacturer's recommendations on larger motors, subject to the capacity of the CPT or other 120 V power source. 2.10 TERMINAL BOXES: The motor lead, space heater terminal boxes shall be cast iron with threaded conduit hubs and stainless steel cap screws. A ground lug shall be provided inside the motor lead terminal box that is attached to the motor frame with a cap screw in a tapped hole in the motor frame. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL: All parts shall be factory assembled and tested prior to shipment. No motor shall be shipped to the site which does not meet all requirements of this specification. 3.02 INSTALLATION: The motor shall be installed true and plumb to meet the requirements of all sections of this specification. The Contractor shall supply all items necessary to couple or otherwise attach the motor and motor drive to the driven equipment. 3.03 VIBRATION TESTING: Vibration testing shall be in accordance with Section 13080. 3.04 MEGGAR TESTING: All motors shall be meggar tested upon receipt at the job site and again prior to start up. All meggar results shall be recorded and presented in report form to the Engineer. Refer to Section 16000. WF109000 16050 -3 3.05 FACTORY PERFORMANCE TESTING: Motors 100 horsepower and larger shall be factory tested and certified. The tested motor shall be used for any specific equipment (pump, etc.) test. The motor test shall be a short commercial test per NEMA MG1. 3.06 FIELD PERFORMANCE TESTING: All three phase motors shall be field tested under varying operating conditions, as defined by the Engineer. The current draw shall not exceed the nameplate full load amps of the motor, independent of service factor at any point. In addition, the phase balance shall be checked by comparing the amperage on each phase to the average of all phases. No phase shall be more than 5% above, or below, the average. The above motor performance criteria shall be satisfied at the electric utility voltages supplied as long as the average supplied voltage in within 10% of nominal line voltage (eg., 460 V) and the voltage balance, measured as described above for the amperage, is within 2 %. If the utility voltage does not satisfy this criteria, the acceptability of motors shall be determined while operating under emergency generator power (if available). If the emergency generator power does not yield a voltage balance that is within 2 %, the Contractor shall make modifications to the systems as approved by the Engineer to cause the system to satisfy these criteria. Failure to satisfy these criteria will result in either the motor, driven equipment, or both, being deemed defective. WF109000 16050 -4 SECTION 16110 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: A. This section describes materials and installation of the lightning protection system for the R.O. Well No. 4 System and the No. 2 Scrubber Structures'utilizing all heavy duty Class II equipment and material. B. Lightning protection system grounds shall be tied into the main sub -grade ground system loops. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the General Conditions and the following. B. Submit material list including manufacturer, complete part number and quantities. C. Submit statement that material and design conforms to the requirements for a UL master label. 1.03 STANDARD: A. National Bureau of Standards Code for Protection Against Lightning, Handbook 46 (American Standard C5). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL: A. Attach to all new structures an embossed brass plate UL master label and provide UL Master Label Certificates signifying that the installation of the lightning protection system at the R.O. Well No. 4 System and the No. 2 Scrubber Structures at the Village of Tequesta R.O. Water Treatment Plant (WTP) have; (1) been made by an accredited installer of a manufacturer of listed lightning protection material, (2) materials used are subject to factory inspection and are labeled, and (3) the installation of the labeled materials has been made according to these requirements. 2.02 AIR TERMINALS: A. Provide Class it heavy duty nickel -tipped solid copper air terminals 518 inch minimum diameter and tapered to a point. Air terminals shall bear a UL label. B. Provide copper and aluminum compatible air terminal bases when mounting copper air terminals on aluminum structures, equipment and buildings. 16110 -1 WF109000 2.03 CONDUCTORS: A. Conductors shall bear the UL label for lightning protection at 10 -feet intervals. B. Provide Class Il heavy duty copper conductors of 98% conductivity in all areas that a UL bonded system allows the use of copper. C. Main copper conductors shall be Class II, 167.800 circular mils or 3/0 and shall not weigh less than 528 pounds per 1,000 feet. D. Secondary copper conductors shall have 14 AWG minimum strand and shall have 10 strands. A solid strip of thinned copper 1/16" thick and 1" wide can also be used. E. Counterpoise copper conductors shall be MO AWG with 28 strands of .0865 -inch- diameter wire and shall not weigh less than 660 pounds per 1,000 feet. F. Risers from the counterpoise conductors to the main conductors on the equipment or structures and between air terminals shall be No. 3/0 AWG, as detailed in 2.03 C above. G. Aluminum conductors will not be used in the system. Copper conductors will be run in 1 PVC conduit on all aluminum equipment, structures and buildings. 2.04 GROUND RODS AND CLAMPS: A. Provide Class 11 heavy duty copper clad steel sectional ground rods 3/4 inch diameter and 10 feet long. B. Provide exothermic welded cable to ground rod underground connections or ground rod damps that make contact with the ground rod for a distance of 1 -1/2 inches, measured parallel to the axis of the ground rod and with the cable itself for distance of at least 1 -1/2 inches. Clamps shall be secured with at least two bolts or cap screws. Do not provide crimp -type fittings for any ground connections or cement for an attachment method to any equipment, strictures or slabs. 2.05 SPLICERS AND CLAMPS: A. Connector fittings for lightning conductors at "end -to -end," "tee," or "wye" splices shall be capable of withstanding a pull test of 200 pounds. Splicers, connectors, and bonding devices shall comply with set standards for lightning protection systems and be of an accepted UL inspected and approved type. Provide bolted damps and splicers. Do not provide crimp type. B. Exothermic welding process is to be utilized where shown to connect conductors to metal bodies, reinforcing steel, ground rods or other cables, as manufactured by Cadweld. 2.06 FASTENERS: A. Screws or bolts employed to secure the fasteners shall be 316 stainless steel. B. Galvanized or plated steel nails, screws or bolts are not acceptable. 16110 -2 WF109000 C. Provide 316 stainless steel masonry anchors with diameters of 1/4 inch minimum. Anchors shall be capable of withstanding a pull test of 100 pounds. Plastic or fiber anchors are not acceptable. PART 3 - EXECUTION: 3.01 AIR TERMINALS: A. Air terminals shall extend above the object to be protected not less than 10 inches nor more than 36 inches. Air terminals exceeding 24 inches in height shall be supported with a suitable brace located at a point not less than one half the height of the air terminal. 3.02 CONDUCTORS: A. Do not make bends of conductors over 90 degrees. Minimum bending radius shall be 8 inches. B. Support conductors every 3 feet or less. C. Conductors run through metal pipe, tubing or conduit shall be bonded at both ends of the pipe, tubing or conduit. D. Where conductors are embedded in concrete, bond the reinforcing steel to the conductor with a main size conductor. Reinforcing steel shall be bonded at the top and bottom of each embedded download. Roof conductors embedded in concrete shall be bonded to reinforcing steel at 100 -foot intervals minimum. Bond with welded type Cadweld connectors. E. Install counterpoise conductors as shown on the drawings. Lay in a trench not less than 2 feet deep at a distance between 3 and 8 feet from the nearest point of the stricture. 3.03 BONDING OF METALLIC BODIES: A. Bond bodies of conductance to the main lightning conductor. Bodies of conductance include metal ventilators, radio antennas, and other large metal bodies whose height above the roof exceeds the height of the air terminals. Provide a bonding surface of not less than 3 square inches. Provision shall be made to guard against the corrosive effect introduced by dissimilar metals at points of bonding. Cables shall be main -size conductors and shall maintain a horizontal or downward path to the main conductor wherever possible. B. Bond bodies of inductance to the lightning protection grounding system. Bodies of inductance include metal roof drains, plumbing vents, copings, flashings, gutters, downspouts, small wall vents, door and window frames, interior piping, ductwork, and machinery, and in general any isolated metal object. The interconnecting conductor for both interior and exterior bodies of inductance shall be secondary size conductors. C. If a metal water supply system is present and the lightning conductor has been grounded to the water pipe, then the above metallic bodies may be connected either to the water pipe system, the nearest lightning conductor, or to another metallic body already connected to the system. It is recognized that many bodies of inductance will be grounded automatically through their structural connection to the water supply system and require no additional 16110 -3 WF109000 bonding. D. It is possible that some metal bodies may be bodies of both inductance and conductance. In such cases, the requirements (as to size of conductor) covering bodies of conductance shall apply. I E. Antenna towers and/or radio masts shall be bonded to the main conductor of the lightning protection system with a main -size conductor. F. Light stanchions and poles shall be bonded to the main conductor of the lightning protection system and shall have an air terminal attached to the top of the pole, stanchion or fixture. The riser cable will be inside the pole or stanchion and brought out only at the top or bottom for the point of attachment. If approved for a UL bonded system, a Class II heavy duty damp may be used at the top and bottom of the stanchion or pole to attach the cable and use the stanchion or pole as the cable riser. In any case, there will not be any exposed cables run up the outside of the light stanchions or poles. Provide copper and aluminum compatible air terminal bases when mounting copper air terminals on aluminum light stanchions and poles. Aluminum air terminals shall not be used. 3.04 GROUNDING: A. Drive ground rods from 3 to 8 feet from the structure. Top of rod shall be 12 to 18 inches below grade level. B. If electric and/or telephone service employing driven ground electrodes enter a protected structure, the ground electrodes shall be interconnected with the lightning protection system so as to obtain common grounding about the structure. Tie to main grounding system shown on the drawings. The interconnection shall be made using main -size conductors. C. Ground fences every 50 feet and on each side of every gate with a ground rod, main -size conductor and ground damps. 3.05 CORROSION PROTECTION: A. Do not install bare copper lightning protection materials on aluminum roofing or siding material or other aluminum surfaces. Install in conduit and coat the small portion of exposed copper conductors that come out of the conduit to connect to the air terminals to prevent corrosion and bleeding on the surface. Aluminum conductors will not be used. B. All risers from the ground grid to copper air terminals and exposed cables on structures, enclosures and equipment will be encased in 14nch Schedule 40 PVC conduit to within 2- inches of a connection point. There will not be any bare cable risers or taps on the structures that will bleed when exposed to water or moisture. C.Provide copper and aluminum compatible air terminal bases when mounting copper air terminals on aluminum structures, equipment, buildings, light stanchions and poles. Aluminum air terminals shall not be use. 16110 -4 WF109000 I 3.06 INDICATOR OF GROUNDING: A. Attach stamped metal tags to or adjacent to each down conductor, indicating in feet the exact vertical depth in the ground of each ground terminal. Down -leads shall also be indicated by suitable markings on the depth tag or on a separate tag. Tags shall be of corrosion- resistant metal and shall be placed at heights of from 3 to 6 feet above grade. i 16110 -5 WF109000 SECTION 16900 INSTRUMENTATION & CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE: A. The work to be accomplished under this Section consists of furnishing and installing the various items of hydraulic, pneumatic, and electrical control and metering, equipment necessary for the measuring, controlling, and indicating of flows, pressure, level, ORP, conductivity, pH, temperature, turbidity and for carrying out other measurement, control functions and the necessary appurtenances thereto as described in these specifications and as shown on the plans. These items shall be installed complete as specified herein, or to the true intent of these specifications or as shown on the plans. It is the intent of these specifications that all parts, piping, tubing, valves, wiring, and accessories required for a complete installation in operating condition will be furnished and installed by the Contractor in accordance with the recommended practice of the manufacturer and as approved by the Engineer. The work shall also include the certified recalibration of all the existing common line instruments affected by the volume increases at the Village of Tequesta RO WTP and recalibration shall include reconfiguring the PLC's and all MCP OITs data bases and scaling factors for the revised volumes and the addition of the third RO train. The Contractor shall provide the required personnel for a start-up team of engineers, technicians and system integrators to test all existing and new PLC and OIT software systems and PLC 1/0 from the initial check out to the final start-up of all systems at design parameters. B. Applicable Codes, Standards and Specifications: The installation shall comply with the applicable rules and regulations of the following: 1. National Electrical Code (NEC). 2. Occupational Safety and Health Standards (OSHA). All codes, standards or specifications quoted in this or other sections shall be the issue in effect at the time of bid date unless shown otherwise. C. Permits and Fees: The Contractor shall procure all required permits and arrange for inspections and pay such fees as are thereby incurred. D. Drawings: The contract drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the conduit and wiring systems. If any departures from the contract drawings are deemed necessary by the Contractor, details of such departures and the reasons therefore shall be submitted as soon as practicable to the Engineer for approval. No such departure shall be made without prior approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall furnish, on clean copies of the contract drawings, marked Record Drawings showing all deviations made during construction. 16900 -1 WF109000 E. Completeness and Responsibility: All instrument components and control devices incorporated in the system shall be the product of and furnished by manufacturers who are regularly engaged in the production of such equipment. The entire instrumentation system shall be fumished by a single supplierwho shall perform all systems engineering, prepare all necessary internal and external wiring, pneumatic and hydraulic piping drawings, and assume full responsibility for the successful functional operation of the equipment in accordance with the performance requirements of the specifications. Functional requirements of the various aspects of the control system are described in detail in subsequent paragraphs of these specifications. It is the intent of these specifications that the system be complete in every detail and fully operable. Substitutions on functions specified will not be acceptable. 1.02 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS: The Contractor shall furnish and install all instruments, appurtenant equipment, piping and accessories as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. All conduit and wiring between panels and all field mounted devices; between panels; between field mounted devices and between all instrumentation and power sources shall be furnished and installed under this and /or appropriate electrical sections. All piping, tubing, valves, flanges, nozzles, etc. required to tie the primary elements into the process piping, tanks, vessels and equipment shall be furnished and installed under this section of the specifications. The Contractor shall coordinate the work of the system supplier's service personnel during construction, testing, calibration and acceptance of the instruments. The supervisory service of a factory trained service engineer who is specifically trained on the type of equipment herein specified shall be provided for a minimum period of one 8 -hour day during construction to assist the Contractor in the location of sleeves; methods of installing conduit and special cable; mounting pipe; mounting primary elements and wiring the equipment prior to placing it into service. Upon completion of the installation of each instrument, the services of the above service engineer shall be provided for a period of not less than one 8 -hour day for calibration. The Contractor shall provide sufficient time to place the system into satisfactory operation. The required j training associated with the instrumentation is as set forth in Section 01650. All equipment shall be checked during the first year of operation by the selected manufacturer at intervals of three months for a period of not less than one day or as may be required to correct any defects to the satisfaction of the Owner. All services described shall be included in the contract price. Shop drawing submittals shall include component manufacturer's data sheets indicating pertinent data, including all calculations for size, etc., identification of each component by tag number and nomenclature as indicated on the drawings and in the specifications and component drawings showing dimensions, mounting and external connection details. The data sheets and component drawings shall be submitted with the piping schematics and wiring schematics, each on a single drawing with full description of operation. Component identification on the schematic shall be as indicated above. If shop drawings are "approved as noted ", the Contractor shall resubmit four (4) 16900 -2 W F109000 corrected sets, as part of the O &M Manual. All material submitted for approval shall be contained in one submission. Partial submittals will not be reviewed. Sales bulletins and other general publications are not acceptable as submittals for approval. Operating instructions shall incorporate a functional description of the entire system including all data sheets previously fumished, and the system schematics which reflect record drawing modifications. Special maintenance requirements peculiar to the system shall be clearly defined along with special calibration and test procedures. These manuals shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300, SUBMITTALS. Special Tools: There shall be a kit supplied which shall contain special size wrenches and other types of tools, not normally available, which are necessary for assembling, disassembling, aligning and calibrating the equipment. All of the equipment shall be the manufacturer's latest and proven design which has been in operation in the field for at least one year. Specifications and drawings call attention to certain features, but do not propose to cover all details entering into the design of the instrumentation system. The completed system shall be compatible with the functions required and the equipment furnished by the Contractor. All electrical components of the system shall operate on 120 volt, single - phase, 60 hertz current, except as otherwise noted in the specifications and on the drawings. All necessary fuses or switches required by the instrumentation manufacturer for his equipment shall be provided with the equipment. All instruments requiring an internal power supply shall have an internal on-off switch. The drawings and specifications indicate the energy sources that will be provided. Any other devices necessary to obtain proper operation of the instrument system from these energy sources shall be furnished with the instrumentation. Pneumatic and electronic signals, where due to length of transmission line or load imposed, shall have amplifiers, repeaters or isolators installed as required to minimize transmission lags or degradation of control or process variable values. All electronic (4- 20mADC) signal wire shall be two conductor, 18 gage, copper, twisted with tape foil shield and drain wire. The shield is to be grounded at one location only, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. The cable will be Houston Wire and Cable, No. HW10101801 orequal. The cable must be UL listed for wet locations as defined by the NEC. All differential sensing devices, such as flow transmitters, shall have a 316 stainless steel three (3) valve manifold for isolation and calibration. All field mounted air users shall be supplied with a filter regulator and output gauge, piped and mounted. 16900 -3 WF109000 All pressure sensing devices shall have a provision for venting at high point. All impulse piping shall be connected to the process line in a manner which minimizes signal error induced by entrapment of air. Tube Type: Individual tubes shall be 1/4, 3/8 or Y2 inch, as noted, bare 316 stainless steel welded tubing. Multi -tube bundles shall be 1/4 inch black polyethylene tubes with PVC barrier, armor and outer thermoplastic jacket. Where tubing is buried it shall be installed in galvanized rigid steel conduit. All tube fittings shall be Swagelok, 316 SS. Tube Runs: Vertical or horizontal runs of tubing in close proximity shall be bundled in an acceptable manner. All concealed runs shall run continuously without joints. Installation of tubing to instruments shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Tubing Junction Boxes: All tubing from individual devices connected to a common panel shall be routed through a 316 SS or fiberglass junction box and continued to the panel in a multi -tube bundle. All fiberglass junction boxes shall have a UV inhibited gel coating. Tube Mounts: Tubing shall be mounted to wall surfaces by means of 316 stainless steel tubing racks securely mounted to the surface. It shall be possible to remove any single tube without disturbing other tubing. Tubing entering and leaving concealed areas shall be identified byfunction in accordance with the identification number given in the instrument schedule on the plans. Identification tags shall be 316 stainless steel and secured to the tubing with 316 stainless steel wires except in the case where tubing is copper in which case the tags and wires shall also be copper. Instrument Mounts: All instruments shall be mounted in readily accessible positions. If necessary, special stands shall be fabricated to hold instruments that cannot be pipe stand mounted due to intervening pipes, etc. All special stands shall be all aluminum or 316 stainless steel. All mounting hardware, screws, machine bolts with washers and nuts will be 316 stainless steel. Signal Conduits: All low voltage signals 24V do and below shall be isolated from high level control or power signals in separate conduits. All instrumentation signal conduits below grade will be rigid galvanized steel (RGS), continuous from the start to the final termination point, encased in concrete or direct buried and rigid aluminum above grade. All underground RGS conduits will have grounding bushings and a No. 8 AWG copper minimum cable run to a ground lug at the termination points or from bushing -to- bushing in manholes, handholes or pull - boxes. Surge Protection: All field mounted primary element transmitters with 4-20 MADC outputs will have a transmitter mounted surge portection unit wired across the 4-20 MADC output terminals and tied to the instrument ground. The surge protector is a 316 SS encased unit with 1/2" NPT male threads for mounting in a spare hub of the transmitter or in a Myers type ST1 hub intalled in the transmitter enclosure. The surge protection unit is a Telematic, MTL Instruments Group, part numberTP48 -N. All 4-20 MADC signals will terminate on a surge protection terminal block in the PLC 1/0 panel(s). The surge protection terminal blocks shall be a Phoenix Contact plug -in block assembly for one (1) or two (2) 24 VDC, 4-20 MADC signal cables. The single assembly shall be an MCR- Plug TRAB Series made up of a Cat. No. 2839208 Type PT2X2 -BE base and a Cat. No. 2856032 Type PT1X2- 24DC-ST plug. The two cable assembly shall have the same base Cat. No. 2839208 with a Cat. I 16900 -4 WF109000 No. 2838228 Type PT2X2- 24DC -ST plug. 1.03 FIELD CALIBRATION: All instrument shall be calibrated in the presence of the Engineer in accordance with the range and accuracy specified herein. Process calibration, such a volumetric drawdown tests on flows and level measurements, shall be conducted on all measuring systems as requested by the Engineer. 1.04 TEST EQUIPMENT: The Contractor or Manufacturer's Representative shall have properly calibrated test equipment available onsite for testing all installed equipment. The test equipment shall have current certificates of calibration to meet ISO9000 Series requirements such as ISO9002 certificate calibration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MAGNETIC FLOWMETERS: FIT2306, FIT2313, FIT2311 and FIT2041 The flowmeter systems shall be of the low wattage, electromagnetic induction type that are calibrated for use with pulsed DC coil excitation and microprocessor - based, digital display transmitters with menu driven internal calibration functions that do not require the use of an external calibrator. The minimum calibration span shall be 2.0 ft/sec and the maximum calibration span shall be 33 ft/sec for the 4-20 MADC output. The digital or pulse output accuracy will be ±0.25% of flow rate for line sizes from 1/2 to 18 inches for flow velocities from 2 to 33 ft/sec. For flow velocities less than 2 ft/sec. the accuracy shall be + 0.005 ft/sec. The 4 to 20 MADC output accuracy will be ±0.03% of the reading in addition to the above 0.25% accuracy. The transmitter display shall be configurable in engineering units in any range from 0 - 999. The transmitter enclosure will be NEMA 4X cast aluminum with an epoxy finish or FRP and will be separate from the flow tube with mounting hardware for wall or 2" pipe mounting. There will be a minimum of three (3) 1/2" NPT threaded holes in the transmitter for separation of AC supply, current output and pulse output wiring. The power supply shall be 120 VAC, 60Hz and the consumption will be 15 watts or 30VA maximum. The outputs shall be 4 - 20 MADC, internally powered, into 0 - 500 OHMS and 0 - 2000 pulses per second at 100% input pulse output, internally powered into 0 - 300 OHMS. The outputs may also be configured for external power supplies with the 4 - 20 MADC output into 0 - 1800 OHMS when powered by a 50VDC supply and the pulse output rated up to 280 MA when powered by a 40VDC maximum supply. The transmitter shall be Foxboro Model IMT25- SDADB11 MBC (Tag Number). The magnetic flowtubes shall be wafer body thru 6" and flanged body for all flowtubes larger than 6" unless otherwise shown on the drawings. All flowtubes shall be wet calibrated to verify their specified accuracy traceable to the U.S. National Institute of Science and Technology (NIST). The enclosures shall be NEMA type 4X for watertight and corrosion- resistant protection, with a ductile iron flow tube housing, cast aluminum junction/terminal box and epoxy paint. All signal, power and output cables shall be furnished and installed by the instrumentation contractor to interconnect the flowtube and remote mounted transmitter. Provide 316 SS grounding rings for all flow tubes installed in non - metallic pipe. The wafer body flowtubes, up thru 6 ", shall have ceramic liners, platinum electrodes and mounting hardware for ANSI Class 150 Flanges. The flowtubes shall be the Foxboro 8000A series with an example model code of 8006A- WCR- PJGFNA A for a 6" flowtube. 16900 -5 WF109000 The flanged body flowtubes above 6" shall have PTFE liners, 316 S.S. electrodes and ANSI Class 150 R.F. steel flanges. The flowtubes shall be Foxboro 8300 Series with an example model code of 8310- SA- BA- T- C- J- G -CPZ -T for a 10" flowtube or 9300A Series with an example Model Code of 9310A- SI- BB- P- B- J -G -N -T for a 10" flowtube. 2.02 PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS: PIT2301, PIT2302, PIT2307, PIT2309, PIT2310 and PIT2042 The pressure transmitters will be indicating electronic transmitters with encapsulated electronics for measuring gauge pressure and transmitting a linear 4 - 20 MADC output signal for use in a standard two -wire 24VDC nominal system. All sensor wetted parts will be 316 stainless steel and will have silicone fill fluid. The transmitter will have a 1/2" NPT, 316SS process connection. The transmitters shall have an accuracy of ±0.2% of full scale and sensitivity and repeatability of 0.05 %. A digital indicating meter shall be provided for local indication and shall read in engineering units proportional to the linear output signal. The transmitter shall have field adjustable span and zero over the range specified on the drawings. The transmitter shall utilize solid state components in the electronic circuits. The transmitter shall be designed for standard 1/2 -inch NPT electrical conduit connection. The enclosure shall be NEMA 4X, watertight, O -rings shall be Viton, housing cover and base shall be die -cast aluminum. The minimum overrange pressure limit will be 50% above the upper range limit of each transmitter. All interconnecting piping between the process and the transmitter shall be furnished as required and will all be 316 SS. The transmitters shall be Foxboro Model No. IGP10- D- 22 -D(10 -300 PSIG) OR E(100 -3000 PSIG) -1- F- M2- L1- V1- Z1 -T(SEE TAG NUMBER). 2.03 CONDUCTIVITY TRANSMITTERS and SENSORS: AIT2308 and AIT2312 Conductivity sensors shall be of the insertion type Great Lakes No. 342266A or Foxboro No. 871 CC -D-4 (cable length and terminal type) for a 0 - 500 uS /cm range calibrated to 0 - 500 us/cm (Micro Siemens /cm), a cell factor of 0.5 (GLI) or 10 CM -1 (Foxboro),process isolation ball valve (316 SS), Foxboro No. 0051351 or Great Lakes No. MH114M3C(316 SS). An indicating transmitter for conductivity shall be of the four -wire type with a 4 - 20 MA signal proportional to the span. The housing shall be NEMA 4X and access openings shall be sealed to exclude moisture and corrosive atmospheres. Unit shall be Foxboro 873CC- A- I -X -CGZ or a Great Lakes Model C53A2131S system that meets all of the above requirements. Mount the sensor in the process stream or flow with compression fittings so that the probe may be removed easily and cleaned periodically. All piping, fittings and hardware required to adapt the sensors to the process piping will be 316 S.S. and will be furnished by the Contractor. 2.04 pH and ORP TRANSMITTERS AND SENSORS: AE/AIT2010 (pH), AE/AIT2608 (pH), AE/AIT2609 (pH), AE/AIT2614 (ORP), and AE/AIT2619 (ORP) The pH sensor assembly shall be a differential type sensor with three (3) measuring electrodes with a process electrode and reference electrode measuring the pH differentially with respect to a third ground electrode. The sensor shall also have a temperature compensator sensor, a metal ground electrode to eliminate ground loop currents in the measuring electrode, 10' of integral signal cable and an integral preamplifier for signal conditioning to extend the distance requirements from the 16900 -6 WF109000 probe to the analyzer to 3000 feet. The body material shall be liquid crystal polymer (LCP) and shall have 1° NPT mounting threads on both ends for insertion flow - through or suspended mounting. There shall be two (2 mounting configurations for the sensors with one being suitable for submersion in tanks or wet -wells and the other being suitable for insertion in a process pipe when in service, with all 316 SS mounting hardware. The sensors shall be a GLI International Model No. 6028PO for loops 2010 (pH), 2608 (pH), 2609 (pH), 2614 (ORP) and 2619 (ORP) and Model PD2P1 PEEK with a 316 S.S. insertion ball valve assembly and mounting hardware No.99X4H 1135z. The transmitter, HACH Model P53, and the analyzer /transmitter/PID controller, Model SC100, power supply shall be fused and require 120 VAC, 60 HZ power. The range shall be 0 -14 pH. There will be a digital display for 0.00 - 14.00, the enclosure shall be NEMA 4X with 316 S.S. screws, the process and control variable outputs shall be 4-20 MADC self generating and all calibration controls shall be front panel mounted and accessible when the exterior weatherproof door with a window is open. The analyzer /transmitter /PID controller shall be a HACH Model P53 and a PID Controller HACH Model SC100. All cables required for sensor to transmitter interconnection shall be furnished and installed including 316 stainless steel enclosures and terminal blocks as detailed on the drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: Equipment shall be set, leveled, and aligned before being permanently anchored. All areas of brackets, mounts, panels, etc., covered by equipment or by contact with a structure shall be painted prior to installation. 3.02 INSTRUCTIONS: Manufacturer's instructions shall be followed in strict accordance for the installation, connection and testing of equipment. 3.03 TESTS: Tests shall be conducted by the Contractor on the instrument and control systems. The equipment shall be demonstrated to operate in accordance with the requirements of this and /or other sections of the specifications and drawings. The test(s) shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer or his authorized representative. The Contractor shall furnish all instruments and personnel required for the tests and the Owner will furnish the necessary electric power. 3.04 NEATNESS: All equipment shall be mounted and installed in a neat manner. The edges of brackets cut in the field shall be filed smooth. The areas of brackets covered by equipment or by contact with a structure shall be painted prior to installation. Tubing runs shall be vertical or horizontal and secured with the necessary clips. 3.05 MECHANICAL COORDINATION: The Contractor shall coordinate the mechanical piping and tankage connection requirements with the instrumentation requirements and provide and install all suitable, flanges, valves, adapters, couplings, saddles and other items as required for a complete installation. All primary elements shall be fully supported. 3.06 CLEANUP: In accordance with the GENERAL CONDITIONS. 16900 -7 WF109000 SECTION 16920 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS AND OPERATOR INTERFACE TERMINALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section describes the hardware and software requirements for the new and modified Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) additions for the Village of Tequesta Water Treatment Plant No. 3 RO Train Expansion, which shall include additions and modifications to the existing RO Plant Main PLC Panel MCP, the existing Hypochlorite PLC Panel PLC2800 and the existing Well Field No. 1 HSP Station PLC for the addition of new RO Well R4 and the all new expansion RO Plant PLC panel designated MCP2 that will be an expansion PLC panel for existing RO PLC Panel MCP which will also be located in the existing RO Plant MCC Room. 1.02 SCOPE A. The work to be performed for this section shall consist of furnishing, installing and testing all equipment and appurtenances necessary for the installation of the complete and functioning programmable logic controller (PLC) system and Operator Interface Terminals (OIT's) that provide the control and monitoring functions indicated on the drawings and specified herein and that shall be detailed in the PLC logic and OIT screen development meetings with the Owner, the Engineer and the selected system integrator and instrumentation contractor. B. This specification describes the new PLC system which shall be designated MCP2 PLC located in the existing RO WTP MCC Room with the existing Main PLC Panel MCP and the modifications and additions to existing RO PLC MCP, the existing Hypochlorite PLC Panel PLC2800 and the existing Well Field No. 1 Station PLC for the addition of new RO Well R4. The specification also describes modifications and upgrades to all existing Allen - Bradley 5/30B and 5/03 PLC's as described herein, including but not limited to the integration of PLC MCP2 into the new, upgraded and expanded plant wide DH+ and Ethernet SCADA system network. The Contractor shall furnish all labor and material required for the PLC system including the panels, equipment, software, OIT screen development, programming, conduit, cable, tie -ins, checkout and start up of the complete integrated system. C. The latest version available at the time of installation of all PLC development software and communication driver software required to communicate with InTouch by Wonderware control automation and operating system software over an Ethernet and DH+ network data highway to a system of four (4) remote operator interface terminals (OIT's) and six (6) PLC'S, shall be furnished with the PLC systems and shall be registered to the Owner. All PLC functional logic and operating logic software, shall be furnished with the PLC system and shall be fully annotated with rung comments, instruction comments, address comments and instruction nicknames to match the 1/0 diagrams, loop diagrams and start-up /shut down sequences and operating protocols developed in the PLC logic and OWS screen development meetings. NOTE: There shall not be any payments made to the Contractor for hardware or software until certified documentation indicating that all the software is registered to the Village of Tequesta has been submitted to and accepted by the Engineer. 16920 -1 WF109000 D. The work shall include furnishing all additional PLC modules, relays, circuit breakers, terminal blocks, wiring and modifications and additions to the PLC logic in the existing Allen - Bradley PLC -5/30 CPU System in the RO WTP MCP panel in the MCC room and the existing Allen - Bradley SLC 500 Series, 5/03 CPU System in the Well Field No. 1 HSP Station PLC for the monitoring and control of the new RO Well R4. The Well Field No. 1 HSP Station PLC system communicates with the MCP PLC at the RO plant over a radio supervisory control and data acquisition ( SCADA) system. The programming shall include additional screens and reports in MCP PLC and MIP -OIT1 and MCP -OIT2 (Operator Interface Terminals) to control and monitor the RO WTP expansion equipment and systems and the RO Well R4 equipment. E. The Contractor shall provide the fully annotated software and programming required to perform the following functions in addition to the interlocking, monitoring and control functions indicated on the loop diagram drawings and developed in the PLC logic and OIT screen development meetings. 1. Provide load control management logic revisions to include RO Train No. 3 HPP Motor M2300 to start-up equipment in timed steps following establishment of power following a momentary outage or a transfer of existing 480VAC ATS200 located in the existing R.O. Building MCC Room in MD200. i 2. Provide startup, shutdown and other operating and control logic for the new R.O. Train No. 3 process control as set forth in this specification and the process and control logic development meetings. 3. Provide elapsed running time meter data registers for all the monitored motors or equipment in existing, modified and new PLC's including MCP, MCP2, PLC2800 and Well Field No. 1 HSP Station. The data registers shall provide data to the meters on MCP -OIT1 and MCP -OIT2 screens. There shall be a non -reset meter and an operator re- settable meter for each of the monitored motors. 4. Fully document the logic with electrical tag names serving as 1/0 point nicknames for all connected 1/0 points, verbal descriptors of all real and internal 1/0 points and registers, and rung descriptions sufficient to troubleshoot PLC logic from a printout of the logic. F. The Contractor must coordinate all PLC and OIT software additions, modifications, installations and down loading with the Village of Tequesta RO WTP supervisors and operating personnel before any modifications are made. The RO WTP is an existing fully operational plant that must continue to run 24 hours per day during the construction and start-up period of the No. 3 RO Train and the Remote Well R4 Systems. The Contractor shall furnish and install all material, PLC logic software development, report generation software development, report format revisions and HMI /OIT screen development and operating system software development required to incorporate the No. 3 RO Train and the Remote Well R4 Systems including production and usage calculations, daily totalization calculations, reports and all system additions included in this plant improvements project, into the existing plant wide SCADA System. 16920 -2 WF109000 I The No. 3 RO Train shall be tied into the new MCP2 PLC and 1/0 expansion panel tied to the existing MCP -PLC in the RO WTP MCC and MD200 switchgear room. The Well R4 system shall be tied into existing, modified and additional PLC 1/0 at the Well field No. 1 HSP Station PLC and radio modem panel. The new MCP2 and existing MCP -PLC are an Allen - Bradley 5/30B CPU PLC system connected to the existing OIT supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA) system through an Allen - Bradley DH+ Network and the four (4) HMI /OIT stations are connected through an Ethernet Network. The existing Well Field No. 1 HSP Station PLC is an Allen- Bradley SLC500 PLC system with a 5/03 CPU communicating with the telemetry system radio through the CPU DF -1 communications port that is received at the MCP -PLC through the PLC 5/30B CPU DF -1 communications port. The Contractor shall furnish all hardware, material, PLC development and operating software and logic and all HMI /OIT development and operating software and logic to modify the existing PLC HMI /OIT Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) system while retaining the configuration where existing MCP -0I71 or MCP -OIT2 are fully capable of operating the entire expanded plant wide and City wide SCADA system with the other station out of service. The existing HMI /OIT operating and control system software is InTouch by Wonderware. The entire system must be upgraded for the addition of the No. 3 RO Train and the Remote Well R4 systems and upgraded to the latest version available at the time of purchase of the InTouch by Wonderware automation and operating system software. Preliminary screens, databases and PLC logic are existing for adding RO Train No. 3. The screens, database and PLC logic have not been activated, confirmed and tested with active or simulated PLC 1/0 or operator initiated start up and shut down sequences. The Contractor shall provide adequate time and personnel to verify, add to and modify the existing screens, database and PLC logic to tie in, test and start up the RO Train No. 3 and Remote Well R4 systems to the existing HMI /OIT, PLC and radio telemetry SCADA systems. The Contractor must provide their own development software for the Allen- Bradley PLC 5/30B PLC, the Allen- Bradley SLC500 5/03 CPU PLC, the InTouch by Wonderware and all the networking and report generating software. The Contractor shall develop all software on their computers and prepare it for downloading only on the existing RO WTP plant -wide SCADA system. The Village of Tequesta SCADA system equipment shall not be used by the Contractor for development of the revised software systems. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer and the Village of Tequesta with electronic file copies and hard copies of the final software systems for all the PLC, HMI /OIT, networking and report generation systems. There shall not be any password protection of the final software other than what is requested by the Engineer and the Village of Tequesta. 16920 -3 WF109000 The software development and system integration work shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Revise the PLC and HMI /OIT databases to include all the 1/0 and logic additions associated with the No. 3 RO Train and Remote Well R4 systems and all system additions included in the plant expansion project. This will require screen re- configuration. 2. Develop additional operating screens for monitoring and controlling all system additions included in the No. 3 RO Train (including modified sulfuric acid feed) and Remote Well R4 systems. 3. Modify the existing alarm screens to include all system additions included in the No. 3 RO Train and Remote Well R4 systems for equipment, operation and process alarms. 4. Add trending for all analog signals in the No. 3 RO Train, Remote Well R4 systems and the new sulfuric acid feed point. 5. Modify and make additions or add as necessary to the reports for daily, monthly and yearly operating data generation for all system additions included in the No. 3 RO Train and Remote Well R4 systems. The report data shall also include, but not be limited to, operating hours, maintenance alerts from operating hours, with a manual operator reset when maintenance is complete, totalization of equipment starts in a 24 hour day, and sulfuric acid usage at the two feed points. 6. Modify the existing plant and overview screens to include all system additions included in the No. 3 RO Train and Remote Well R4 systems. 7. Develop PLC logic for manual and automatic control of all system additions included in the No. 3 RO Train and Remote Well R4 systems. All interlocking systems, shutdowns and start-up parameters shall be modified to include all system additions included in the No. 3 RO Train and Remote Well R4 systems. Fully document the logic with electrical and instrumentation tag names serving as 1/0 point nicknames for all connected 1/0 points, verbal descriptions of all real and internal 1/0 points and registers and rung descriptions sufficient to troubleshoot PLC logic from a printout of the logic. Adequate time for meetings with the Village of Tequesta and the Engineer shall be included by the Contractor for clarification of any questions the Contractor has concerning the operating requirements of the No. 3 RO Train and Remote Well R4 systems that the logic must provide and review of the proposed logic from the Contractor. The clarification and logic review meetings are essential to minimize the time required for start -up of the plant. The Contractor shall allow for a minimum of five (5), with (6) hours minimum meetings, excluding travel time, for logic and system review, and four (4), six hours minimum meetings for screen and report development. 16920 -4 WF109000 (Note, for purposes of the above R.O. Train No. 3 shall be considered to include the new sulfuric acid feed system, the expanded hypochlorite feed system and all modifications to the degasifier and scrubber system.) G. OPERATING SOFTWARE MODIFICATIONS: The operating software shall be modified for the addition of the third train. Refer to Section 11250 1.06 for additional requirements relevant to this modification. The software shall also be modified to reflect all other items added during the current expansion, including but not limited to, the new degasifier, new first stage scrubber system, new second stage scrubber system, new ORP control to existing second stage scrubbers, new pH and ORP control to new scrubbers, re- configuration /assignment of existing sodium hydroxide and sulfuric acid feed pump assignments, new sulfuric acid feed point and new sodium hypochlorite feed pump. Existing screens and reports shall be modified and new screens shall be added to reflect the new and modified system. Existing set point screens shall be modified to reflect the new and modified existing operating software. Operating software shall reflect the following. Third RO Train — Refer to Section 11250 1.06. New Degasifier — The new degasifier shall be integrated into the train start-up /shutdown sequences. At least one degasifier /scrubber system shall be operational when one or two trains are operating and both degasifier /scrubber systems shall be operating when two trains are in service. Existing Scrubbers — The existing first stage scrubber system currently controls pH automatically with a dedicated sodium hydroxide feed pump. This will be unchanged. The existing second stage scrubber chemical feed control is manual. For the existing second stage scrubber an existing pH meter/transmitter will be unchanged as a `monitor' only system since sodium hydroxide feed to this scrubber will continue to be manual. The existing second stage scrubber will be modified to include a new ORP probe and controller. This will automatically control an existing dedicated sodium hypochlorite feed pump. Sodium hydroxide and sodium hypochlorite control will be accomplished locally in the modified manufacturer's panel but fully monitored remotely. New Scrubbers — The new scrubber chemical feed systems will be set up identically to the modified existing scrubbers. The first stage pH will be automatically maintained by controlling one of the existing sodium hydroxide feed pumps. The second stage will include a pH meter /transmitter and will be monitored only. The second stage ORP will automatically control the new sodium hypochlorite feed pump. Sodium hydroxide and sodium hypochlorite control will be accomplished locally in the modified manufacturer's panel but fully monitored remotely. Sulfuric Acid Feed — A new sulfuric acid feed point included in the current project will be fed from an existing feed pump. The pump will be controlled from either the pH on Degasifier #1 feed or Degasifier #2 feed (operator selectable). The existing sulfuric acid feed point selection will be modified such that, when in automatic, one pump must be `PRE' and the other one `POST', but either can be in either position. The operating software set forth herein is preliminary and subject to modification per this specification. Adjustments to the operating software shall be anticipated to occur during start-up, operations and shutdown to reflect specific operating characteristics of the system. Multiple meetings for further development and refinement shall be anticipated. 16920 -5 WF109000 i H. The Contractor shall provide UL listed and NEMA rated enclosures to house the PLC, remote 1 /0, power supplies, and terminal blocks as shown in the drawings. 1. All panels shall be UL listed and labeled as a completed assembly. The panel fabricator shall furnish and install all items not specifically detailed in the drawings required to have the panels UL listed and labeled. All inspections, approvals and modifications required to have the completed panel labeled and listed by UL shall be furnished by, and the responsibility of the panel fabricator and contractor. 2. The Contractor shall mark all internal wires as shown on the drawings and as specified in Sections 16900, 16950 and 16000. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1. The programmable controllers and all of the corresponding components within the family of controller products shall be offered by a company who regularly manufacturers and services this type of equipment. 2. All equipment shall be furnished by a single supplier, shall be of the latest and most modern design and shall have overall accuracy as guaranteed by the manufacturer. The supplier furnishing the equipment shall be responsible for the installation, testing and the correct operation of the equipment after the loading of the functional logic. The PLC supplier covered in this specification section is responsible for the input and output wiring from the terminal blocks to the PLC modules and the correct electrical functions of all the PLC hardware and components the new and modified MCP, MCP2, PLC2800 and Well Field No. 1 HSP Station PLC panels. B. Applicable Standards 1. The design, testing, assembly, and methods of installation of the wiring materials, electrical equipment and accessories proposed under this Contract shall conform to the National Electric Code, OSHA and to applicable state and local requirements. UL listing and labeling shall be adhered to under this Contract. 2. Any additional cost resulting from any deviation from codes or local requirements shall be borne by the Contractor. 3. ISA and NEMA standards apply. 3. All products shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with recognized industrial standards. i VIBRATION 3.5 mm Peak -to -Peak, 5 -9 Hz: 1.OG, 9 -150 Hz. The method of testing is to be based upon IEC 68 -2 -6 and JIS C 0911 standards for vibration. The system is to be operational during and after testing. 16920 -6 WF109000 SHOCK 15G, 11 msec. The method of testing is to be based upon IEC 68 -2 -27 and JIS C 0912 standards for shock. The system is to be operational during and after testing. NOISE IMMUNITY Showering arc per NEMA ICS 2- 230.40 Surge withstand per ANSI /IEEE C- 37.90A -1978. RADIATED NOISE FCC regulations Rule 47, 15J, Class A VDE regulations 0871 Limit Class A REGULATORY UL 508, 1012 CSA C22.2 No. 142, C22.2 FM AGENCIES Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D. C. The manufacturer shall have a fully operational quality assurance and quality control program in place and shall comply with ISO9001 standards for "Quality Systems - Model for Quality Assurance in Design /Development, Production, Installation, and Servicing ". 1.04 INSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Written instructions for the installation, programming, operation and maintenance of the equipment furnished shall be provided. The instructions shall be short, easy to understand directions specifically written for this project describing the various possible methods of operating the equipment. B. The instructions shall include procedures for tests required, adjustments to be made, and safety precautions to be taken with the equipment. These documents are to be submitted to the Engineer for approval. C. All onsite training and instruction shall be given by the project technical representative assigned to the project by the supplier or other personnel as approved by the Engineer. The supplier shall provide sixteen (16) hours of training for personnel selected by the Owner in the operation and general maintenance of the MCP, MCP2, PLC2800 and Well Field No. 1 HSP Station PLC system. This training shall be in addition to training specified in Section 01650. D. A minimum of four (4) copies of operations and maintenance manuals shall be provided. E. Any conflict between the drawings and documents and this specification shall be referred to the Engineer for clarification before proceeding with the fabrication of the panels or the affected parts or proceeding with the logic and screen development. The contract drawings indicate the general arrangement of the equipment, panels and systems. If any departures from the contract drawings are deemed necessary by the Contractor, details of such departures and the reasons therefore shall be submitted as soon as practicable to the Engineer for approval. No such departure shall be made without prior approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall furnish, on clean copies of the contract drawings, marked Record Drawings showing all deviations made during construction. 1.05 SUPPORT: The manufacturer or its authorized representative shall provide complete technical support for all of the products. This shall include headquarters or local training, regional assistance and a 1-800" phone line for the duration of the warranty period. 16920 -7 WF109000 i 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Materials and Shop Drawings: 1. Furnish, as prescribed under the General Requirements, Shop Drawings covering the items included under this section of the work. 2. Shop Drawings shall be submitted as a complete package for interface checking. All equipment shall be submitted at one time as a package and shall be submitted at an early date to expedite construction. All panel drawings, circuit drawings, schematics, and manufacture's cut sheets with a system interconnecting diagram shall be submitted at one time, as a package for complete interface checking. 3. The information shall include dimensional drawings, anchoring details, installation instructions, test results and wiring diagrams. These shall be submitted in the form of shop drawings and manufacturer's cut sheets for panels, PLC equipment, power supplies, UPS'S, terminal blocks, signal conditioners and all panel components. The information shall include catalog descriptions, schematics and manufacturer names. 4. A system diagram shall show all connections required between component parts of The system and between the various systems specified. Electrical and Instrumentation terminal blocks shall be numbered with machine printed markers as per the drawings. Each line shall be identified at each .termination point with the same number, and this number shall not be used again for any other purpose in the complete control scheme. 5. Shop drawings submitted for approval that do not contain sufficient information for complete interface checking shall be returned by the Engineer as not approved. 6. The manufacturer shall include in his shop drawings a general outline of the type(s) of tests he intends to perform to demonstrate conformance of the system to the specifications and project requirements. 7. The Contractor shall submit the number of copies indicated in the General Requirements and shall obtain approval from the Engineer prior to fabricating or ordering the instruments, panels, and accessories covered. 8. Submittals that are contrary to the design or specifications, which are approved in error, do not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for providing the specified equipment. 9. A list of manufacturer's recommended spare parts is to be supplied with the system, including the manufacturer's current price for each item. 1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Manufactured material shall be adequately packed to prevent damage during shipping, handling, storage and erection. All material shipped to the project site shall be packed in a container properly marked for identification. Blocks and padding shall be used to prevent movement. B. Shipping containers for materials that must be handled with the aid of mechanical tools shall be shipped in wood - framed crates. 16920 -8 WF109000 C. All materials shipped to the project site shall have at least one layer of plastic wrapping or other approved means to make it weatherproof. D. The Contractor shall inspect the material prior to removing it from the carrier. If any damage is observed, he shall immediately notify the carrier so that a claim can be made. If no such notice is given, the material shall be assumed to be in undamaged condition; and any subsequent damage that occurs to the equipment shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Repair and replacement of damaged parts shall be done at no expense to the Owner. E. The Contractor shall be responsible for any demurrage charges resulting from the handling of the materials. 1.08 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEES A. The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner a written one year guarantee that all equipment and parts thereof, material and /or workmanship shall be first class and free from defects and that the guarantor shall, upon notice and without undue delay, without expense to the Owner, make good or repair, the whole or in part of the work which shall, within the indicated time after the date of acceptance of the completed work, fail or develop unfitness for the purpose for which it is intended, as a result of any defect in design, material or workmanship. A sample copy of the warranty shall be supplied with shop drawings. B. The Contractor shall warrant its products against all defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year. The CPU digital and analog 1/0 modules, communications modules, data highway /Ethernet modules, Device Net modules and remote 1/0 transmit and receive modules utilized in the PLC'S shall carry a three (3) years return to factory warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All equipment shall be supplied with a permanently attached identification tag. This tag shall be included on all field and panel mounted devices. The tags shall include the device name, serial number, Engineer's tag identification and instruction book number. In addition, those items shipped separately shall have plain markings on the shipping carton exterior showing the serial number and /or Engineer's tag identification. The tags shall be either stamped metal or engraved vinyl. B. The PLC MCP2 and all associated communication equipment shall be mounted in the PLC MCP2 1/0 panel. The PLC equipment, communications equipment, power supplies and all field instrumentation shall be powered by 120 VAC, 60 Hz power from breakers located in the PLC 1/0 panel PLC MCP2, which receives its power from the existing external UPS systems in the existing RO Plant MCC and switchgear room. 2.02 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the complete and functional PLC hardware system. The PLC system shall be A -B Rockwell Automation ControlLogix series 5/30B and SLC500 5/03 PLC systems with DH+ and Ethernet networking communication ports or interfacing modules. 16920 -9 WF109000 B. The PLC shall include a spare local RS -232 serial interface after all PLC and OIT remote and Ethernet local area networks are connected and functioning. The interface shall: 1. Provide local access to all the functions of The PLC system. 2. Support configuration of 1/0 modules through a Windows 2000 or Windows XP Professional programming and documentation package. C. The PLC shall have the ability to accommodate additional 1/0 modules. The addition or removal of 1/0 modules shall not require the use of special tools nor programming effort beyond configuration entries in the PLC CPU. D. The PLC shall be programmable and configurable from a Windows 2000 or Windows XP Professional based laptop computer. The PLC configuration shall be stored in non - volatile memory so that the configuration is retained in the PLC upon complete loss of power and reloaded automatically upon return of power. Storage of the configuration into the non- volatile memory shall not require use of special tools nor the removal or insertion of memory chips. E. Central Processing Units (CPU) 1. The CPU shall be as specified on the contract drawings. The memory, functionality, digital and analog 1/0 capacity, scan time, rack capacity, chassis capacity and port functions and quantities of the specified CPU shall be minimum requirements. F. 1/0 Modules 1. The 1/0 modules shall be as specified on the contract drawings and shall be equal in all aspects of capacity, resolution, functionality, voltage, current and speed. G. Power Supplies 1. AC input power supplies shall supply the required voltages for operation of PLC MCP2 in the MCP2 PLC 1/0 panel. Each PLC rack power supply shall be surge and transient protected, and shall accept input voltages of 90 to 130 VAC. The power supplies shall be fused. 2. All PLC systems power supplies shall be modular, allowing the power supply to be removed for replacement without affecting 1/0 modules or wiring. H. All cables furnished by the manufacturer shall be constructed so as to withstand, without damage, all normal use and handling. I. In order to minimize spare parts stocking requirements, the specified PLC family shall have a high degree of interchangeability of components such as power supplies, wiring arms on the modules, etc. 1. The system shall incorporate a modular design using plug -in assemblies and modules. 2. Wherever possible, all assemblies and sub - assemblies performing similar functions shall be interchangeable. 16920 -10 WF109000 3. The system design shall accommodate the replacement of assemblies without having to disconnect field wiring. Universal removable terminal strips shall be available to connect field wiring to the individual circuit board assemblies. 4. Universal module faceplates with color- coded, slip -in labels shall be available. The outside label features both color- coding for module specification and labeling space for 1/0 point identification. The inside label shall feature a detailed wiring diagram complete with the module catalog number and description. 5. All major assemblies and sub - assemblies, circuit boards, and devices shall be identified using permanent labels or markings, each of which indicates the manufacturer's catalog number and a product manufacturing date code. J. PROGRAMMING ENVIRONMENT 1. The CPU shall be capable of being programmed by an external IBM compatible host device via either a serial communication port on the CPU, or a parallel communication port on an 1/0 bus interface. Serial programming shall be possible without the use of a workstation interface board. 2. The standard programmer interface shall be via a local or remote serial interface. 3. The programming device shall have access to the application program, the system configuration, all registers, 1 /0, system fault status, 1/0 override, and system diagnostic relays. 4. Application programs may be loaded or stored while the CPU is running with minimal impact on the scan time. K. CPU MEMORY 1. All application memory shall be available for the user program. Executive level operations performed by the CPU shall not consume application memory, except for redundancy applications. 2. The entire user memory shall be stored on an internal, removable nonvolatile Flash memory card and a fixed RAM where the RAM contents are written to the internal Flash during power down. a. The nonvolatile Flash memory lets you permanently store a user program and tag data on a PLC. b. Provisions for configuring the controller to load from the nonvolatile Flash memory on power up shall be provided. c. Provisions for a manual trigger to the controller to save to or load from the nonvolatile Flash memory shall be provided. d. The removable Flash card stores the user program, tag data and controller firmware. This lets you upgrade firmware on the controller without using special controller software or Flash card software. 16920 -11 WF109000 3. The CPU shall perform a periodic memory checksum calculation on the logic program at the end of every sweep. If the calculated checksum does not equal the reference checksum, a fault shall be recorded, and the CPU mode shall change to STOP/FAULT--and indicate the fault with a system diagnostic bit and an LED._ 4. The CPU shall have a battery- backed real -time clock/calendar that is accessible by the application program and fault processor. 2.03 POWER SUPPLIES PLC MCP2 panel and the internal breakers shall be powered from an existing external 120/208 VAC, 60 HZ, three (3) phase UPS powered system MCP UPS. The Contractor shall include within the PLC enclosures, any and all power supplies required to provide power to equipment items requiring other AC voltage levels or DC voltage sources. DC power supplies shall be capable of driving all analog input and output loops. 2.04 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. All major equipment items or systems, specified are identified by system and tag numbers. This same number appears in the tag number designation on the Drawings and on the schedules of these Specifications. All equipment shall be identified by nameplates or tags. Nameplates for panels and panel mounted equipment shall be as specified in Section 16900 and 16950. Field equipment shall be tagged with assigned instrumentation tag number. B. Tags shall be stainless steel with stamped characters of 3/16 inch minimum height. Tags shall be attached to equipment with stainless steel screws. In some cases where this would be impractical, 20 gage stainless steel wire with swedging may be used. Where the equipment is housed in a case with all flat surfaces where neither of the above is practical the tag shall be attached by stainless steel screws. However, such permanent attachment shall not be on an ordinarily replaceable part. In all cases the tag shall be plainly visible to a standing observer. C. In addition to tags, each field- mounted monitoring and control station shall have a nameplate indicating its function and the variable controlled. The nameplate shall be attached by one of the above methods. 2.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS: All components of the PLC system, except CRT terminals and programming workstations, shall meet the following: A. STORAGE CONDITIONS: TEMPERATURE: -40 TO 85 degrees C B. OPERATING CONDITIONS: TEMPERATURE: 0 to 60 degrees C HUMIDITY: 5 to 95% relative humidity, non - condensing POWER INTERRUPTION: Operate through a total loss of power for 1 ms. 16920 -12 WF109000 2.06 GROUNDING A. The grounding system of the PLC system shall be tied into the main ground system shown on the drawings. The tie -in shall be made with 2/0 stranded copper from the panel frame of PLC MCP2 PLC 1/0 panel to the main roundsystem. 9 _. B. Grounding installation shall be in accordance with requirements of the national electric code and such local codes which have precedence. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, START -UP A. The Contractor shall provide installation and start-up assistance as outlined in Section 16900 and 16910. B. All shields shall be grounded at the MCP, MCP2, PLC2800 and Well Field No. 1 HSP Station PLC 1/0 panels to the earth ground provided hereunder. All cabling and power shall be in PVC wire duct with snap on covers. All wiring shall be labeled and tagged as to use and as shown on the contract drawings, at both ends. Spare wiring shall be tagged and extra wire neatly coiled and tied at each end. 3.02 TESTING A. The Contractor shall submit test procedures to the Engineer to verify preliminary functional tests have been made. Contractor shall request the Engineer's presence to witness final functional tests. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with at least three (3) days advance notice of the final test date. B. Repetitive visits required for the Engineer for testing the same loop due to improper test preparation by the Contractor shall be charged to the Contractor. 3.03 TRAINING: The Contractor shall incorporate PLC training into the training outlined in Section 16920 and 16950. 3.04 SPARE PARTS A. The Contractor shall supply a detailed list of recommended spare parts from the manufacturer including catalog numbers and current pricing. Lists developed by the supplier or the Contractor are not acceptable. One (1) set of spare parts as detailed on the list, with the following list of spare parts to be a minimum requirement, shall be provided by the Contractor on or before completion of system start-up and check -out. 16920 -13 WF109000 I MINIMUM SPARE PARTS LIST PART DESCRIPTION QUANTITY 1. Power Supply 1 of each type 2. CPU and Memory Module 1 of each type 3. Communications Modules to and from Remote 1/0 Racks 1 of each type 4. Analog Input Module 1 of each type 6. Analog Output Module 1 of each type 7. Digital Input Module 1 of each type 8. Digital Output Module 1 of each type 16920 -14 WF109000 SECTION 16950 CUSTOM POWER AND CONTROL PANELS PART 1 —GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This section describes the materials, testing and installation of new and modified existing custom PLC panels, control panels and power and control panels. These panels shall include all the new and existing PLC 1/0 panels, power and control panels, motor operated valve panels and operator control panels. The tag numbers in this specification shall include but not be limited to the modification and additions to the existing main PLC panel MCP, motor operated valve panel MOVCP, Hypochlorite Feed Pumps Power and Control Panel PCP2801 and Chemical Feed Pumps VFD Power and Control Panel CFPCP and complete new panels MCP2 for the addition the main PLC Panel MCP, No. 2 Scrubber Panel CP2605 and R.O. Well No. 4 Power and Control Panel PCP2040. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the Construction Contract, Section 01300 and the following: B. Submit a complete list of equipment, materials, and any details required to demonstrate that the panel(s) and equipment shall function properly as a unit. These lists, details and drawings shall include: 1. System configuration with single line diagrams. 2. Detailed descriptions of the panels, material and equipment including weights, dimensions, installation requirements, and heat dissipations. 3. Internal panel layouts indicating spacing and dimensions. 4. Panel front layouts. 5. Catalog cuts of all devices used. 6. Control schematics, ladder diagrams, and inter - connection drawings. 7. Nameplates. 1.03 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES In addition to all of the requirements specified in Section 01650 for start up and training, the Contractor shall provide equipment manufacturer's services at the job site for the minimum man -days listed below for each control panel, power and control panel for process equipment and each PLC 1/0 and operator workstation (OWS) panel, travel time excluded. The times listed are for each panel if one (1) manufacturer has more than one panel in a system. A. Two (2) man -days to check the installation, calibrate the equipment, supervise start- up, and supervise testing of each new panel in the system. B. One (1) man -day per panel to instruct the Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of the equipment in each new panel. 16950 -1 WF109000 PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.01 DIAGRAMS A. Schematic diagrams shall show the equipment serial number, the purchaser's drawing number, purchase order number, or similar identification which shall indicate the particular equipment system including internal wiring of subassemblies. Diagrams of subassemblies may be furnished on separate sheets. B. Identify each device by a unique number or number - letter combination. Numbers for devices shown on the drawings shall be maintained on the system panel drawings. C. Conductor Identification: Identify each conductor by a unique number, letter, or number - letter combination as detailed on the Contract drawings. All conductors connected to the same terminal or tie point shall have the same identification. For PLC systems, the panel side conductors shall be marked with the PLC 1/0 address and the field side shall be marked with the device number. See the Instrumentation PLC 1/0 drawings for typical conductor marking systems for PLC digital and analog 1/0 and all power and control panels. Where color coded multi- conductor cable is used for wiring identical components, such as limit switches, the color code used shall be consistent and charted on related diagrams, in addition to the wire marker with the conductors' unique number, letter or number - letter combination. D. Provide a schematic diagram for each electrical system. The schematic diagram shall be drawn between vertical lines, which represent the source of control power. Show control devices between these lines. Show actuating coils of control devices on the right - hand side. Show contacts between the coils and the left vertical line. 1. Where the internal wiring diagrams of subassemblies are furnished on separate sheets, they shall be shown as a rectangle in the schematic diagram with all external points identified and cross - referenced to the separate sheets of the control circuit. Show coils and contacts internal to the subassemblies in the rectangle connected to their terminal points. a) Exception No.1: Where relay and electronic circuits are mixed, diagrams may be drawn between horizontal lines, which represent the source of control power. b) Exception No.2: Overload relay contacts, motor temperature switches and starter temperature switches may be connected to the right of the coil (common) if the conductors between such contacts and the coils of the magnetic devices do not extend beyond the control enclosure. 2. For clarity, show control device symbols in the order in which the controls are positioned on the diagram. 3. Use a rung or line numbers cross - referencing system in conjunction with each relay coil so that associated contacts may be readily located on the diagram(s): Rungs or lines shall be numbered on the left rail and numbers for contact locations shall be to the right of the coils. Underlined numbers shall be normally closed contacts. Numbers under the contacts shall be the coil locations. 16950 -2 WF109000 4. Show spare contacts. 5. Show limit, pressure, float, flow, temperature sensitive, and similar switch symbols on the schematic diagram with all utilities turned off (electric power, air, gas, oil, water, lubrication, etc.) and with the equipment at its normal starting position. 6. Show contacts of multiple contact devices, e.g., selector switches, on the line of the schematic diagram where they are connected in a circuit. Indicate a mechanical connection between the multiple contacts by a dotted line or arrow. This does not apply to control relays, starters, or connectors. 7. Additional charts or diagrams may be used to indicate the position of multiple contact devices such as drum, cam, and selector switches. 8. Show the purpose or function of all switches adjacent to the symbols. 9. Show the purpose or function of controls such as relays, starters, contactors, solenoids, subassemblies, and timers on the diagram adjacent to their respective symbols. Show the number of positions of the solenoid valve solenoid symbol. 10. Show values of capacitors and resistors on the diagram. 11. Descriptive terms for command and status functions shall be in the present or past tense. For example, Raise Transfer - Transfer Raised; Advance Transfer - Transfer Advance. Do not use terms such as Transfer Up. E. The panel front and internal layouts shall show the general physical arrangements of all components on the control panel. Devices shall be identified with the same marking as used on the schematic diagram. Spare panel space shall be dimensioned. The drawings shall include a layout of the operator's console or push- button station, but terminal numbers need not be shown. 2.02 CONTROL ENCLOSURES A. Design and test control enclosures in conformance with UL 508. The enclosure shall be UL508 listed and labeled as a completed assembly. All inspections, approvals and modifications required to have the completed panel labeled and listed by UL shall be furnished by, and the responsibility of the contractor. Enclosure types shall be as follows unless noted otherwise in the drawings: Indoors non - Corrosive use: NEMA Type 12, Finish Painted Steel Outdoors use: NEMA Type 4X, or 12/3R 316S.S. with sunshields Indoors in a corrosive area: NEMA Type 4X, or 12/3R, 316S.S. B. The depth of the control enclosure or compartment shall be as a minimum consistent with the maximum depth of the control devices plus the required electrical clearance. In no case shall the depth of the enclosure be less than 8 inches. 16950 -3 WF109000 C. Provide 12 gauge minimum steel sub - panels for mounting of all interior components utilizing tapped holes. There shall not be anything mounted with screws or bolts that require the sub -panel to be removed for replacing or mounting components. Sub - panels shall be finish painted with white enamel. D. Where heating from control devices results in a temperature rise which is detrimental to the contained equipment or its operation, provide louvers or forced air ventilation for the indoor panels. Any ventilating opening shall be designed to prevent the entrance of any deleterious substance. When forced air ventilation is required, the cabinets shall be pressurized. Air filters shall be commercially available types and sizes. Outdoor NEMA 4X enclosures shall have 316 stainless steel sun shields on the top, sides, front and back that are mounted on stand -offs to provide a 1 -1/2 inch through 2 inch air gap around the enclosure for air circulation and cooling. See the sun shield detail on the drawings. E. Provide a permanent metal data pocket attached to the inside of the enclosure. If space permits, the pocket shall be at least 10 -1/2 inches wide and of depth and thickness to accommodate all electrical diagrams. F. Enclosure construction shall be minimum 14 -guage steel. Provide 316 stainless steel continuous hinges for enclosure doors with external 316 stainless steel screw clamps. Provide a hasp for padlocking. G. The exterior of all indoor enclosures shall be painted with a rust - inhibiting primer and two coats of epoxy gray paint, as a finish coat over the enclosure manufacturers standard finish. The texture shall be eggshell or orange peel equal to Hoffman's light gray textured No. RAL 7035 finish. H. The interiors shall be provided with formed 12 -guage subpanels for attaching surface mounted components. All components shall be attached with screws and the subpanel shall be threaded. Rivets or back of panel nuts shall not be allowed. The interiors shall be painted with two coats of white paint. Refer to instrument drawings for installation details. I. All outdoor, NEMA 4X 316SS panels shall be unpainted. 2.03 CONTROL WIRING A. 120 -Volt control wiring shall be Type MTW, (UL)/TEW. Conductors shall not be smaller than No.14 AWG. Ampacity shall be in accordance with the NEC. Nylon jacketed wire such as THHN/THWN is not acceptable. Wires shall be color -coded in accordance with the following table: Black L1(hot) White L2 (neutral) Red AC control circuits Blue DC circuits Yellow Interlock control circuits wired from an external power source i 16950 -4 WF109000 Green Equipment ground B. 24 volt DC wiring within the panel for digital PLC 1/0 and interposing relays shall be No.16 AWG type MTW (UL)/TEW. Nylon jacketed wire such as THHN /THWN is not acceptable. C. Instrumentation signal cables shall be of the type used for process control with shielded pairs or triads with polyvinyl chloride jackets and an overall shield over the multiple pairs or triads. The instrumentation cable shall be rated 300 volts at 901DC or better. The size of the instrumentation cable shall be No.18 AWG with seven strands minimum, unless otherwise specified elsewhere. All instrumentation cables shall meet all the requirements of IPCEA A -61 -402 and shall be UL listed for a wet location. 2C /No.18 shielded cable shall be equal to Houston Wire and Cable Catalog No. HW10101801 and 3C /No.18 shielded cable shall be equal to Houston Wire and Cable Catalog No. HW 1011801 T. 2.04 MARKING A. Identify wire terminations with a number to correspond with the schematic diagrams. Each signal and circuit conductor connected to a given electrical point shall be designated by a single unique number which shall be shown on all shop drawings. Numbers shown on the PLC 1/0 drawings and layout drawings shall be maintained in the panels. See the drawings for conductor marking systems for the PLC digital and analog 1/0 wiring. All wire shall be marked on both ends with white heat shrink markers printed in black with a machine. No hand written or expanded dot matrix markers with hand wrapped clear lamination shall be acceptable. The numbers and letters must be letter quality where all lines and shapes appear as solid. The markers shall be equal to the Tyton Hellermann type THS, or Panduit Cat. No. H200X044FIT white heat shrink markers. The printer shall be equal to Panduit Model TOP43M with Easy Mark Software. B. Plainly and permanently identify control and power devices using the same identification as shown on the schematic diagrams. Show identification for devices inside the enclosure on an identification plate adjacent to, not on, the device. 1. Exception No.1: Where the size or location of the devices makes individual identification impractical, such as on electronic assemblies, use group identification. 2. Exception No.2: Where panel layouts do not permit mounting identification plates adjacent to components, such as relays, place the permanent relay identification on the relay where it is plainly visible, and provide a second identification on the top of the panel wireway cover directly below the relay. Identify the wireway covers to show their proper location. C. Identification plates for devices mounted inside and outside the control enclosure shall be one of the following: 1. Laminated phenolic for engraving stock; a minimum of 0.062 inch thick. Hold plates in place with S.S. drive screws or the equivalent. Use permanent adhesives for attaching nameplate to wireway covers. 2. Non - corrosive metal: a minimum of 0.031 inch thick for engraving stock or 0.012 16950 -5 WF109000 inch thick for embossing stock. Hold plates in place with S.S. drive screws. 2.05 SUPPLY CIRCUIT DISCONNECTING MEANS The power supply for all power panels with contactors and /or starters for three (3) phase equipment shall be a 480 VAC three (3) phase three(3) wire feeder from a 480/277 WYE system. There shall not be any 277 VAC equipment or systems as the 480/277 VAC WYE neutral connection shall not be run to any panels. Provide a 600 VAC rated supply circuit disconnect for each 480 VAC input power and control panel. The disconnect shall be a 600 VAC thermal- magnetic circuit breaker, unless noted otherwise on the drawings, mounted within the control enclosure operated by a variable depth, flange- mounted or through the door mounted circuit breaker operating mechanism with provisions for looking in the open or closed position. 2.06 CONTROL DEVICES A. Provide 120 -volt control circuit transformer if incoming power supply is not 120 volts. Provide 100 -volt- ampere spare capacity that is in addition to the loads specified. Fuse one side of the secondary winding and ground the other side. Provide primary winding fuses on both lines. B. Provide indicator lights, selector switches, push buttons, meters, etc., as shown in the schematic diagrams, single line diagrams, and as required for correct operation. Mount on the front panel of the indoor control enclosures or on a dead front panel inside the outer sun shielded door of the NEMA 4X 316 S.S. outdoor panels. C. Pushbuttons and selector switches shall be 30.5 MM heavy duty NEMA Type 4X corrosion resistant. Provide with quantity of contact blocks required for correct operation. Units shall be UL listed with NEMA A600 rated contacts. I D. Push buttons shall be 30.5 MM, heavy duty NEMA 4X corrosion resistant, round, flush head with momentary contacts. I E. Selector switches shall be 30.5 MM, heavy duty NEMA 4X corrosion resistant, round with lever operators. HAND - OFF -AUTO AND LOCAL - OFF - REMOTE selector switches shall have an additional isolated contact that closes in each position other than OFF wired to the field terminal blocks to provide an input to a remote PLC. F. Indicating lights shall be 30.5 MM round, transformer type, heavy duty NEMA Type 4X corrosion resistant, complete with color of glass lens indicated on the drawings, or as required, and legend plates. Lamps shall be high- density light emitting diodes. Indicating lights shall be push -to -test type with glass lens. G. Elapsed time meters shall be synchronous motor driven, 0- to 99,999.9 -hour range, non -reset type, suitable for semi -flush NEMA 4X panel mounting. Provide ENM Company NEMA 4X Type T50132. H. PLC output interposing relays and control relays shall be magnetically held, plug in, tubular terminal with a pilot light across the coil. Control relays shall be UL listed with NEMA A300 rated contacts and coil voltage, number of poles, and pole arrangement as indicated in the drawings. Relays shall be Square D Class 8501, Type KP12P14V20 for 120 VAC coils and KPD12P14V53 for 24 VDC coils, DPDT contacts. Sockets shall be 16950 -6 WF109000 Omron No.PF083A, DIN rail mount. Individual interposing relays shall be provided for each PLC output point. Individual control circuits and external control power shall not be wired directly to any PLC output module. I. Time delay relays shall be UL listed with contacts rated 10- ampere non - inductive load, 120 volts, with coil voltage, number of poles, pole arrangement, and maximum timing adjustment as indicated in the drawings. Relays shall be solid -state type with timing dial adjustment. Provide Allen Bradley Type HR for multi- function plug in timers or SSAC Type TDM, TDB or TDI for on delays, off delays and interval timers. Sockets shall be Omron Type PF DIN rail mount. 2.07 TERMINAL BLOCKS A. Provide terminal blocks for all incoming and outgoing control wires. Wire and mount terminal blocks so that internal and external wiring do not cross over the terminals. No more than two conductors shall be terminated at each terminal connection. B. Field wiring shall terminate on the "field side" of the terminal blocks. Do not connect internal panel wiring to the "field side" of the terminal blocks. Do not connect field wiring to the "panel side" of the terminal blocks. C. Terminal blocks shall be modular, rail mounted, 6mm minimum width, rated at 20 amperes, 600 volts capable of terminating wire sizes 10 through 24 AWG and constructed of polyamide thermoplastic. Terminal blocks shall be UL listed in accordance with UL 486A and 1059. All current carrying parts shall be made of copper or brass electroplated with tin /lead. Terminal connection shall be a screw clamp pressure plate connection, designed such that the clamping screw does not clamp the screw directly to the wire. Terminal block system shall be equal to Phoenix Contact UK or UT Series. Spring clamp type terminal blocks are not acceptable. D. Provide symmetrical aluminum assembly rails, end brackets, jumper bars, and other accessories as required for a complete terminal block assembly. All DIN Rail shall be 2 -1/4 inch elevated aluminum top hat style equal to Allen - Bradley, Catalog No.1492 -DR6 to bring all sockets and terminals up to an accessible level when mounted adjacent to wiring channels. E. Terminal blocks shall be consecutively numbered on the field and panel side to match the wire numbers from top to bottom with preprinted marking tags. Tags shall be white polyamide and hot printed with black symbols so that the print is permanent. The markers to be equal to Phoenix Contact Type ZBM6 -CUS computer printer markers, horizontally marked with up to three (3) rows of numbers and letters to match the drawings for complete tag numbers and 1/0 addresses. F. All 4 -20 MADC signals shall terminate on a surge protection terminal block in the PLC 1/0 panel(s). The surge protection terminal blocks shall be a Phoenix Contact plug -in terminal block assembly for two (2) 24 VDC, 4 -20 MADC signal cables. The assembly shall be a PLUGTRAB PT series made up of a Cat. No. 2839208 type PT2X2 -BE base and a Cat. No. 2838228 Type PT2X2- 24VDC -ST plug. 16950 -7 WF109000 1 2.08 WIRING METHODS A. Panel wiring shall be neatly contained in panel wiring channels or ducts, including incoming and outgoing field control wiring. Panel wiring channels or ducts shall be white, restricted slot design, with matching snap on covers. Provide panel wiring channels with mounting holes and nylon "push" rivets for mounting. Panel wiring channel material shall be PVC. B. Provide a minimum of 2 inches of clearance between panel wire channel and wire terminations to allow for clear viewing of wire identification marking. C. Wiring run to control devices on the front door shall be tied together at short intervals and secured to the inside front door with adhesive mounts. Mounts shall be adjustable releasable clamp type for wire bundles 0.69 inch in diameter or smaller, or mounts with releasable nylon cable ties for bundles larger than 0.69 inch in diameter. Mounts shall be attached to front panel with adhesive. 2.09 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS (PLC) A. The PLC system in the additional Main PLC Panel MCP2 shall be the A -B Rockwell Automation PLC -5/30 Cat. No. 1785 -1-306 minimum CPU with Series 1771 1/0 Modules to match the existing PLC system in PLC Panel MCP. MCP2 shall be networked with MCP on a DH+ network. B. The PLC system in all additional remote PLC panels shall be the A -B Rockwell Automation SLC/1746 series with DH+ networking communication ports or interfacing modules, without exception. All remote control panels shall be capable of being networked together back to a main PLC and Operator Workstation (OWS) on a fiber optic DH+ data highway. The DH+ communications port is necessary to complete the data highway and provide remote monitoring and alarm functions through a fiber optic DH+ network. C. The minimum size CPU in any remote PLC panel shall be an A -B Rockwell Automation SLC5 /04 Cat. No. 1746-1-542 with 16K words of total memory. D. All optical communications modules (OCM'S) shall be either a stand alone DH+ network module or plug -in chassis mount DH+ manufactured by Phoenix Digital. The i OCM'S shall provide fault tolerant, self healing communications through diagnostic monitoring of the signals at each node on the network and detection and isolation of points of communications failure anywhere on the network. The fiber optic cable and OCM'S shall both be furnished by Phoenix Digital with a factory warranty as a system consisting of the OCM'S and the fiber optic cable. The stand alone OCM'S shall be Phoenix Digital Model No. OCM- DPR- 85- PD- ST- ACV(120 VAC) and the plug -in chassis mount shall be Phoenix Digital Model No. OLC- DPR- 85 -D -ST with ST connectors. RJ type cable connectors are not acceptable. E. All fiber optic splitters or patch panels such as Corning Cat. No. WIC- LAN -GUARD 12 fiber patch panel with ceramic inserts for the ST connectors shall be provided in each panel connected to the fiber optic network. 16950 -8 W F109000 2.10 CURRENT TRANSMITTERS (IT'S) A. All power and control panels with motor starters for motors 5 HP and above shall have an individual two (2) wire current transducer and transmitter unit for each motor with an AC primary current in the range to have the motor FLA at about 75% and a 4 -20 MADC output with a 24 VDC +/ -10% power supply. The transducer and transmitter unit shall be equal to Riley Model 420 or 420L, depending on the range required, or instrument Transformers, Inc. in Clearwater, Florida Model Series PCM242. 2.11 MOTOR STARTERS AND CONTACTORS A. All single phase and three (3) phase motor starters and power contactors shall be NEMA rated for the horsepower or current rating of the equipment they are operating. IEC ratings are not acceptable. B. Each motor starter shall have an integral or separately mounted, NEMA rated overload relay. There shall be an isolated auxiliary contact on each motor starter and overload relay that closes when the starter is energized and when the overload relay is tripped. The contacts shall be rated at 10 amperes at 120/240 VAC and 24 VDC and shall be wired to the field interface terminal blocks to provide a RUN and a TRIPPED input to a remote PLC. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FACTORY TESTS Control panels shall be inspected and tested for correct operation. Each circuit shall be tested for continuity, short circuits, and fault grounds. 3.02 SITE TESTS Control panels shall be tested with all field wiring connected. Set all adjustable set points and time delays as required for proper operation of equipment. Check operation of control panel and field devices to verify correct operation. Perform all required adjustments as required for correct operation. The above scope of work detailed in Sections 3.01 and 3.02 shall be provided by the Contractor in addition to all of the requirements specified in Section 01650 for start up and training. 16950 -9 WF109000 APPENDIX A PBCHD PERMIT Charlie Crist Ana M. Viamonte Ros. M.D., M.P.H. Governor State Surgeon General PERMITTEE: ID No.: 450 -1438 Permit/Certification: 138296- 036-WC Michael R. Couzzo, Jr. Date of Issue: 08/14/2009 Village Manager Expiration Date: 08/13/2014 Village of Tequesta g County: ty :Palm Beach P. O. Box 3474 Utility: Village of Tequesta Tequesta, FL 33469 Project: RO Treatment Addition This rmi i pe t s Issued under the provisions of Chapter(s) 403, Florida Statutes, and Florida Administrative Code Rule(s) 62 -550, 62 -555 & 62 -560. The above named permittee is hereby authorized to perform the work or operate the facility shown on the application and approved drawing(s), plans and other documents attached hereto or on file with the department and made a i part hereof and specifically described as follows: Construct. A modification to an existing community water system to increase capacity of the existing reverse osmosis treatment train. The modification includes the following: One Floridan Aquifer wellhead, R.O. Well #4, equipped with a horizontal pump rated for 1111 gpm at 96 feet TDH and all required appurtenances, one 1.2 MGD membrane train with 40 pressure vessels equipped with membrane elements operating at a 75% recovery rate, one membrane feed pump rated for 1110 gpm at 675 feet TDH, one 3 micron cartridge filter rated for 1290 gpm, one 9' diameter degassifier rated for 2.4 MGD, one two stage scrubber, pretreatment acid feed piping modification, one sodium hypochlorite feed pump rated for 450 gpd and associated electrical, instrumentation, and controls. The proposed modification will increase the system maximum daily flow capacity to 6.3 MGD with the reverse osmosis plant increased to 3.6 MGD and the existing greensand softening plant rated at 2.7 MGD. In Accordance With: Application Form DEP 62- 555.900(1), preliminary design report and plan sheets 1 -23, E01 -E04 and 101 -104 received June 18"' 2009, engineer's letter dated July 28, 2009, and additional information received August 14, 2009. Located at: Old Dixie Highway in Tequesta, Florida. To Serve: Existing and future connections. Subject To: General Conditions 1 - 15 and Specific Conditions 1 — 8. PALM BEACH COUNTY HEALTH DEPARTMENT I Post Office Box 29 / 800 Clematis Street, West Palm Beach, Fl- 33402 H■...+•+ownRxwarr Alina M. Alonso, M.D., Acting Director www.obchd.com TELEPHONE (561) 837 -5900 FAX (561) 837 -5294 PERMITTEE: ID No.: 450 -1438 Michael R. Couzzo, Jr. Permit/Certification No.: 138296- 036-WC Village Manager Date of Issue: 08/14/2009 Expiration Date: 08/13/2014 GENERAL CONDITIONS: 1. The terms, conditions, requirements, limitations and restrictions set forth herein are "Permit Conditions" and as such are binding upon the permittee and enforceable pursuant to the authority of Section 403.161, 403.727, or 403.859 through 403.061, Florida Statutes. The permittee is hereby placed on notice that the Department will review this permit periodically and may initiate enforcement action for any violation of the "Permit Conditions" by the permittee, its agent, employees, servants or representatives. 2. This permit is valid only for the specific processes and operations applied for and indicated in the approved drawings or exhibits. Any unauthorized deviation from the approved drawings, exhibits, specifications, or conditions of this permit may constitute grounds for revocation and enforcement action by the department. 3. As provided in Subsections 403.087(6) and 403.722(5), Florida Statutes, the issuance of this permit does not convey any vested rights or any exclusive privileges. Nor does it authorize any injury to public or private property or anyinvasion of personal rights, nor any infringement of federal, state or local laws or regulations. This permit does not constitute a waiver of any other Department permit that may be required for other aspects of the total project which are not addressed in the permit. 4. This permit conveys no title to land or water, does not constitute state recognition or acknowledgment of title and does not constitute authority for the use of submerged lands unless herein provided and the necessary title or leasehold interests have been obtained from the State. Only the Trustees of the Internal Improvement Trust Fund may express state opinion as to title. 5. This permit does not relieve the permittee from liability from harm or injury to human health or welfare, animal, plant or aquatic life or property and penalties therefore caused by the construction or operation of this permitted source, nor does it allow the permittee to cause pollution in contravention of Florida Statutes and Department rules, unless specifically authorized by an order from the Department. 6. The permittee shall at all times properly operate and maintain the facility and systems of treatment and control (and related appurtenances) that are installed or used by the permittee to achieve compliance with the conditions of this permit, as required by Department rules. This provision includes the operation of backup or auxiliary facilities or similar systems when necessary to achieve compliance with the conditions of the permit and when required by Department Rules. 7. The permittee, by accepting this permit, specifically agrees to allow authorized Department personnel, upon presentation of credentials or other documents as may be required by law, access to the premises, at reasonable times, where the permitted activity is located or conducted for the purpose of: a. having access to and copying any records that must be kept under the conditions of the permit; b. inspecting the facility, equipment, practices, or operations regulated or required under this permit; and 2 PERMITTEE: ID No.: 450 -1438 Michael R. Couzzo, Jr. Permit/Certification No.: 138296 - 036 -WC Village Manager Date of Issue: 08/14/2009 Expiration Date: 08/13/2014 GENERAL CONDITIONS: 7 (cont'd) c. sampling or monitoring any substances or parameters at any location reasonably necessary to assure compliance with this permit or Department rules. Reasonable time may depend on the nature of the concern being investigated. 8. If for any reason, the permittee does not comply with or will be unable to comply with any condition or limitation specified in this permit, the permittee shall immediately notify and provide the Department with the following information: a. a description of and cause of noncompliance; and b. the period on noncompliance , including exact dates and times; or, if not corrected, the anticipated time the noncompliance is expected to continue, and steps being taken to reduce, eliminate, and prevent recurrence of the recurrence of the noncompliance. The permittee shall be responsible for any and all damages which may result and may be subject to enforcement action by the Department for penalties or revocation of this permit. 9. The permittee agrees to comply with changes in Department rules and Florida Statutes after a reasonable time for compliance, provided however, the permittee does not waive any other rights granted by Florida Statutes or Department rules. 10. The permittee agrees to comply with changes in Department rules and Florida Statutes after a reasonable time for compliance, provided however, the permittee does not waive any other rights granted by Florida Statutes or Department rules. 11. This permit is transferable only upon department approval in accordance with Florida Administrative Code Rules 62 -4.12 and 62- 30.30, as applicable. The permitter shall be liable for any noncompliance of the permitted activity until the transfer is approved by the department. 12. This permit is required to be kept at the work site of the permitted activity during the entire period of construction or operation. 13. This permit also constitutes: (} Determination of Best Available Control Technology (BACT) () Determination of Prevention of Significant Deterioration (PSD) O Certification of Compliance with State Water Quality Standards (Section 401, PL 92 -500) () Compliance with New Source Performance Standards 3 PERMITTEE: ID No.: 450 -1438 Michael R. Couao, Jr. PermittCertification No.: 138296 - 036 -WC Village Manager Date of Issue: 08/1412009 Expiration Date: 08/13/2014 GENERAL CONDITIONS: 14. The permittee shall comply with the following monitoring and record keeping requirements: a. Upon request, the permittee shall furnish all records and plans required under department rules. The retention period for all records will be extended automatically, unless otherwise stipulated by the department, during the course of any unresolved enforcement action. b. The permittee shall retain at the facility, or other location designated by this permit records of all monitoring information (including all calibration and maintenance records and all original strip chart recordings for continuous monitoring instrumentation), copies of all reports required by this permit and records of all data used to complete the application for this permit. The time period of retention shall be at least three (3) years from the date on the sample, measurement, report or application unless otherwise specified by department rule. c. Records of monitoring information shall include: -the date, exact place, the time of sampling or measurements; -the person responsible for performing the sampling or measurements; -the date(s) analyses were performed; -the person responsible for performing the analyses; -the analytical techniques or methods used; and -the results of such analyses. 15. When requested by the department, the permittee shall, within a reasonable time furnish any Information required by law which is needed to determine compliance with the permit. If the permittee becomes aware that relevant facts were not submitted or were incorrect in the permit application or in any report to the department, such facts or information shall be submitted or corrected promptly. SPECIFIC CONDITIONS: 1. The permittee is responsible for retaining a Florida registered professional engineer as the engineer of record for this project and upon completion, the engineer shall inspect for complete conformity to the engineering report as approved. 2. Upon completion of construction, but prior to placing the system into service, a letter of release must be obtained from the Palm Beach County Health Department; the documentation listed below must be submitted for the letter of release: a. A certification by the engineer that the project has been completed in substantial conformance with approved engineering report. Certification to such inspection on DEP Form 62- 555.910(9) shall be provided to the Palm Beach County Health Department. 4 PERMITTEE: ID No.: 450 -1438 Michael R. Couzzo, Jr. Permit/Certification No.: 138296 - 036 -WC Village Manager Date of Issue: 08/14/2009 Expiration Date: 08/13/2014 SPECIFIC CONDITIONS: (2 conrd) b. One (1) set of record drawings of the completed project. Deviations from the original approved design report are to be noted for the department's review. c. Bacteriological results — Satisfactory bacteriological results for clearance of the wellhead, associated piping, and raw water mains shall be two (2) consecutive daily samples with results indicating an absence of coliform. The detailed procedure for bacteriological clearance and release of systems for use is outlined in Technical Memorandum 07 -1 PR, a copy of which can be furnished upon request. d. The well shall be cleaned, disinfected and bacteriologically cleared in accordance with Chapter 62- 555.315(6), F.A.C. Prior to sampling for bacteriological clearance, the well shall be thoroughly pumped until no trace of the disinfecting agent can be found. Daily samples for twenty (20) or more consecutive work -days shall be collected after pumping the well on each consecutive day for fifteen (15) minutes at the rated capacity of the permanent pump. Samples shall be analyzed for the presence of total residual chlorine, total coliform, and E. Coll. Testing for total residual chlorine shall be performed following appropriate procedures in the DEP Standard Operating Procedures for Field Activities, DEP- SOP - 001/01. The samples shall be handled in accordance with acceptable methods as stated in "Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, 20th Edition, 1998 The detailed procedure for bacteriological clearance and release of system for use is outlined in Technical Memorandum 03 -1 PR, a copy of which can be furnished upon request. e. As a community water system chemical analysis of raw water for nitrate, nitrite, primary and secondary Inorganics, volatile organics, pesticides and PCBs, turbidity, and radionuclides as required b Chapter 62 -550 F.A.C. q Y p shall be submitted to the Department prior to release for use. Only those parameters for which maximum contaminant levels were exceeded in the raw water need to be analyzed for in the finished water. 3. This construction permit is issued with the understanding that pipe material and appurtenances used in this installation will be in accordance with the latest applicable AWWA & NSF Standards for public water supply. 4. All concrete coatings /admixtures, liners, grouts, protective paints and coatings shall be in conformance with AN - ANSI/NSF Standard 61 20.2 0 and deemed acceptable for contact with potable water. 5. All chemicals added to the system shall be in conformance with ANSI /NSF Standard 60 -2002. The maximum dosage shall not exceed the rate recommended by NSF In their report. 6. Prior to construction, all required permits or approvals must be obtained for all aspects of the project from the appropriate agencies. 7. This permit only covers the specific items addressed in the applicant's permit application package. Other existing system components were not reviewed for compliance with current standards and issuance of this permit does not certify that those components meet current standards. 5 I PERMITTEE: ID No.: 450 -1438 Michael R. Couzzo, Jr. Perm it/Certification No.: 138296- 036 -WC Village Manager Date of Issue: 48f l -1l 2d'o9 Expiration Date:56/ /3/Za/'/ SPECIFIC CONDITIONS: 8. One replacement motor for the membrane feed pumps shall be maintained for backup. ISSUED THIS (-I DAY OF AUGUST, 2009. PALM BEACH COUNTY HEALTH DEPARTMENT STATE OF FLORIDA i A ina M. Alonso, M.D., Director Palm Beach County Heal Department 6 ADDENDUM NO. 1 i VILLAGE OF TEQUESTA JUNE 8, 2010 WATER TREATMENT PLANT EXPANSION ADDENDUM NO. 1 This document forms a part of the contract documents and modifies the original plans and specifications dated April 2010 as noted below. Acknowledge receipt of this addendum in the space provided on the bid form. Failure to do so may subject the bidder to disqualification. This Addendum consists of 7 numbered items (1 page). 1. Invitation To Bid, First Paragraph, First Sentence — Change the location where the bids are to be submitted and opened to: Village Hall, Village of Tequesta, 345 Tequesta Drive, Tequesta, Florida 33469. 2. Instruction To Bidders 1.02 — Change the address for the delivery of proposals to: Village Hall, Village of Tequesta, 345 Tequesta Drive, Tequesta, Florida 33469. 3. Bid, Page B -1 — Change the address to: Village Hall, Village of Tequesta, 345 Tequesta Drive, Tequesta, Florida 33469. 4. Plan Sheet 4 of 89, Plan Sheet 18 of 89 and Plan Sheet 22 of 89 — These sheets all show drain piping from the new H2SO4 containment pad to the existing neutralization manhole. The piping and fittings shall be welded or threaded 316SS. 5. Section 01400 1.06 — Add the following: The Contractor shall disinfect and secure bacteriological clearance samples for Well R4. Well R4 shall be disinfected and flushed in accordance with AWWA A -100 requirements. In general, sampling shall continue at a rate of one per day until 20 consecutive days of safe samples are secured. Upon completion of construction, bacteriological samples were secured to confirm the well was bacteriologically safe at that time. Water for flushing and testing needs shall be pumped from the well through existing piping to the plant and out the RO reject line for disposal. This shall be coordinated to occur when the plant is not operating. The discharge and entire disinfection and testing procedure shall comply with the Health Department applicable criteria. 6. Plan Sheet 38 of 89 (E -15) Free Standing Fixture 'R' Detail — Add the following that replaces applicable parts: Fixture 'R' Lithonia Catalog Number KAD 100S R2 120 RPD04 SF LPI DDB (Dark Bronze). The pole for fixture 'R' shall be a Lithonia Catalog Number RSA84- 5GDM19ADB or Hapco Catalog Number RSA08DG -4R1- Anodized Dark Bronze with stainless steel 18" long %" minimum anchors bolts and bolt covers, 8' tall, 4" round straight, 0.188" thick wall aluminum pole that must show certification for supporting fixture 'R' and the arm in 140 MPH winds or Southern Building Code Wind Loading Requirements. All hardware shall be 316 stainless steel. 7. Plan Sheets 29 of 89 (E -06) and 54 of 89 (E -31) - Modify as follows: The following conduit shown on E -06 to the new Scrubber Panel CP2605 from the new PLC panel MCP2 needs to have the size and fill details added to drawing E -31: (CP2605 /MCP2) is an existing empty 1.5" RGS in concrete below grade and 1.5" aluminum above grade from the location of the new Scrubber Control Panel CP2605 back through the existing duct bank to the existing PLC 1/0 Panel MCP. Conduit (CP2605 /MCP2) will be extended from the existing PLC 1/0 Panel MCP to the new PLC 1/0 Panel MCP2 in an above grade 1.5" aluminum and from the Scrubber Slab to the new Scrubber panel CP2605 in an above grade 1.5" aluminum conduit. The cable fill conduit (CP2605 /MCP2) will be a 37 conductor No. 14 AWG THHN/THWN 600 Volt UL listed for wet locations Type TC shielded control cable, Houston Wire & Cable No. HW15301437. i i